City Hall HVAC Replacement SpecificationsCONTRACT DOCUMENTS
• i
ROSEMEAD
PROJECT
FISCAL YEAR 2011 -2012
• c • - • INA : BOULEVARD
.• .D , 1
TELEPHONE: .• •
SCHEDULED BID OPENING: WEDNESDAY, OCTOBER 19, 2011 AT 11:00 AM.
ROSEMEAD CITY HALL HVAC REPLACEMENT
PRO
PROJECT 002
TABLE OF CONTENTS
BIDDING DOCUMENTS
1. Notice Inviting Bids . ............ ............................................... NIB -1 - NIB- 2
2. Instructions to Bidders ................................ ..........................ITB -1 — ITB -10
3. Contract Bid Forms .......................... ............................... CBF -1 — CBF -10
CONTRACT AGREEMENT
1. Contract Agreement and Insurance Requirements
2. Performance Bond
3. Payment Bond
CONTRACT PROVISIONS
1. Federal Labor Standard Provisions ...................... ..............................1
to 4
2. Current Federal DOL Wage Decision ..................................
............... 1 to 23
3. Compliance with Clean Air and Water Acts ........ ... .... .........,:....:..............1
CONTRACT APPENDIX
Part "A" - General Provisions ......................... . ...........................
1 -37
Part "B" - Technical Provisions ... ............... ............................
.... 1 -281
PROJECT
PROJECT • 31002
CITY OF ROSEMEAD
NOTICE INVITING BIDS
PROJECT No. 2011 -06
NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN that the CITY OF ROSEMEAD, California, will receive sealed
bids up to 10:30 o'clock a.m. on Wednesday, the 19`" day of October, 2011, and they will be
publicly opened at 11:00 a.m. for
ALSO, NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN That City will conduct a pre -bid meeting at the City Hall of the
City of Rosemead on Thursday, October 13th, 2011 at 10:00 a.m.
The purpose of the Pre -Bid meeting is to familiarize any and all interested prospective bidders of the
requirements and submittals which are part of this project. Also any questions regarding the physical
aspects of these improvements and all forms necessary to be submitted with the sealed bid on the bid
opening day.
The work consists of removing the original City Hall HVAC and replacing with energy HVAC and
other miscellaneous work needed as shown or noted on the plans and specifications. Perform
quality workmanship by skilled craftsmen, including furnishing of all labor, material and equipment,
and all incidental and appurtenant work necessary for the proper construction of the contemplated
improvement as shown or indicated on the accompanying plans and specified hereinafter.
This project is subject to the `Buy American" provisions of the surface transportation assistance act
of 1982 as amended by the intermodal surface transportation efficiency act of 1991. Contractor is
required to sign a pre -award compliance certification and purchaser certifications with the submittal
of this proposal.
The engineer's estimate for this project is $180,000.00. The successful bidder shall have thirty
(30) working days to complete the work. Liquidated damages shall be $500.00 per working day.
Plans, Specifications, and Contract Documents may be obtained at the office of the City Clerk of
the CITY OF ROSEMEAD, 8838 E. Valley Boulevard, Rosemead, California 91770, (626) 569-
2177, for a non - refundable charge of $25.00 and $40.00 if mailing is requested. Specifications are
going to be posted on line at the City Website.
Each bid must be accompanied by a bidder's security in an amount not less than 10% of the
amount of the bid, as a guarantee that the bidder will, if awarded the Contract, enter into a
satisfactory agreement and provide a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond, each not less than
100% of the total amount of the bid price.
No bidder may withdraw his bid for a period of sixty -one (61) days after the above bid opening
date.
The CITY OF ROSEMEAD will affirmatively insure the disadvantaged business enterprises will be
afforded full opportunity to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated
against on the grounds of race, color, disability, sex or national origin in the consideration for an
award.
Pursuant to Section 1773 of the Labor Code, the general prevailing wage rates in the county, or
counties, in which the work is to be done have been determined by the Director of the California
NIB- 1
Department of Industrial Relations. These wages are set forth in the General Prevailing Wage
Rates for this project available from the California Department of Industrial Relations' Internet web
site at http://www.dir.ca.gov. The Federal minimum wage rates for this project as predetermined
by the United States Secretary of Labor are set forth in the books issued for bidding purposes
entitled "Proposal and Contract," and in copies of this book that may be examined at the offices
described above where project plans, special provisions, and proposal forms may be seen.
Addenda to modify the Federal minimum wage rates, if necessary, will be issued to holders of
"Proposal and Contract" books. Future effective general prevailing wage rates, which have been
predetermined and are on file with the California Department of Industrial Relations are referenced
but not printed in the general prevailing wage rates.
Attention is directed to the Federal minimum wage rate requirements in the books entitled
"Proposal and Contract." If there is a difference between the minimum wage rates predetermined
by the Secretary of Labor and the general prevailing wage rates determined by the Director of the
California Department of Industrial Relations for similar classifications of labor, the Contractor and
subcontractors shall pay not less than the higher wage rate. The Department will not accept lower
State wage rates not specifically included in the Federal minimum wage determinations. This
includes "helper" (or other classifications based on hours of experience) or any other classification
not appearing in the Federal wage determinations. Where Federal wage determinations do not
contain the State wage rate determination otherwise available for use by the Contractor and
subcontractors, the Contractor and subcontractors shall pay not less than the Federal minimum
wage rate, which most closely approximates the duties of the employees in question.
The U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) provides a toll -free "hotline" service to report bid
rigging activities Bid rigging activities can be reported Mondays through Fridays, between 8:00
a.m. and 5:00 p.m., eastern time, Telephone No. 1- 800 - 424 -9071. Anyone with knowledge of
possible bid rigging, bidder collusion, or other fraudulent activities should use the "hotline" to report
these activities. The "hotline" is part of the DOT's continuing effort to identify and investigate
highway construction contract fraud and abuse and is operated under the direction of the DOT
Inspector General. All information will be treated confidentially and caller anonymity will be
respected.
Bidders shall be licensed in accordance with the provision of Chapter 9, Division 111 of the
Business and Professions Code of the State of California. Bidder shall have a Class "C 20"
license in good standing at the time Bids are received.
The Council reserves the right to reject any and all bids and to waive any informality, technical
defect, or minor irregularity in any bid submitted.
An award of service shall not be final until the bids have been reviewed and a Contract Agreement
with the City has been signed by the lowest responsible bidder and by the City.
Award of Service Agreement is proposed for October 25 2011.
Dated this
2011.
GLORIA MOLLEDA
CITY CLERK
Publish: September 29 October 6 th and 13 2011.
NIB- 2
ROSEMEAD CITY HALL HVAC REPLACEMENT
PROJECT
PROJECT • 31002
TABL OF CONTENTS
ym.
Page
1.
AVAILABILITY OF BID DOCUMENTS ................................................. ..............................1
2.
EXAMINATION OF BID DOCUMENTS.
1
3.
INTERPRETATION OF BID DOCUMENTS ......................................... ..............................1
4.
INSPECTION OF SITE; PRE -BID CONFERENCE AND SITE WALK ..............................2
5 .
ADDENDA ............................................................................................. ..............................2
6 .
PREPARATION OF BIDS ..................................................................... ..............................2
7 .
ALTERNATE BIDS ................................................................................ ..............................3
8.
MODIFICATIONS OF BIDS .................................................................. ..............................3
9 .
SIGNING OF BIDS ................................................................................ ..............................3
10 .
BID GUARANTEE ( BOND) ................................................................... ..............................4
11.
SUBMISSION OF SEALED BIDS ......................................................... ..............................4
12.
DELIVERY AND OPENING OF BIDS ................................................... ..............................5
13 .
WITHDRAWAL OF BID ............................. ........................................ ..............................5
14 .
AWARD PROCESS .............................................................................. ..............................5
15.
DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTORS ........................................... ..............................5
16.
LICENSING REQUIREMENTS ............................................................. ..............................6
17.
DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS; INTEREST IN MORE THAN ONE BID ....................6
18.
INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS ........................................................... ..............................6
19.
REQUIRED BIDDER CERTIFICATIONS ............................................. ..............................6
20.
BASIS OF AWARD; BALANCED BIDS ............................................... ...............................
6
21.
FILING OF BID PROTESTS ................................................................. ..............................7
22.
PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND REQUIREMENTS .. ..............................7
23.
EXPERIENCE AND TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
........................... ..........................'...7
24.
SALES AND OTHER APPLICABLE TAXES, PERMITS, LICENSES AND FEES
.............8
25.
EXECUTION OF CONTRACT., ......................
8
26 .
OWNER RIGHTS .................................................................................. ..............................8
27.
BIDDER'S RESPONSIVENESS ........................................................... ..............................8
28.
BIDDER'S RESPONSIVENESS CHECKLIST.
8
29.
CONTRACT BID FORMS; LISTS OF SUBCONTRACTORS .............. ..............................9
30.
RESPONSIBILITY CRITERIA .............................................................. .............................10
ym.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
All Bids must be made in accordance with these Instructions to Bidders (" ITB "). Unless specifically
noted, capitalized terms are used as defined in the General Conditions, found in Part "B" of the
Contract Appendix. All terms defined in the General Conditions which occur in the Bid Documents
and Contract shall have meanings as defined therein.
AVAILABILITY OF BID DOCUMENTS
Bids must be submitted to the Owner on the Contract Bid Forms which are a part of the Bid Package
for the Project. Prospective bidders may obtain one (1) complete set of Bid Documents. Bid
Documents may be obtained from the Owner at the location(s) and at the time(s) indicated in the
Notice Inviting Bids. Prospective bidders are encouraged to telephone in advance to determine the
availability of Bid Documents. Any applicable charges for the Bid Documents are outlined in the
Notice Inviting Bids.
The Owner may also make the Bid Documents available for review at one or more plan rooms, as
indicated in the Notice Inviting Bids. Please Note: Prospective bidders who choose to review the Bid
Documents at a plan room must contact the Owner to purchase the required Bid Documents if they
decide to submit a bid for the Project.
2. EXAMINATION OF BID DOCUMENTS
The Owner has made copies of the Bid Documents available, as indicated above. Bidders shall be
solely responsible for examining the Project Site and the Bid Documents, including any Addenda
issued during the bidding period, and for informing itself with respect to local labor availability,
means of transportation, necessity for security, laws and codes, local permit requirements, wage
scales, local tax structure, contractors' licensing requirements, availability of required insurance, and
other factors that could affect the Work. Bidders are responsible for consulting the standards
referenced in the Contract titled Specifications. Failure of Bidder to so examine and inform itself
shall be at its sole risk, and no relief for error or omission will be given except as required under
State law.
3. INTERPRETATION OF BID DOCUMENTS
Any request for an interpretation or clarification of the Bid Documents rn;ast be submitted in writing
by Bidder via telex, telegram or facsimile to the Owner's Project Engineer. Any response that the
Owner may choose to make for purposes of interpretation or clarification, will be in writing and made
available to all the listed holders of the Bid Documents. The Owner will respond to all written /faxed
Bidder's inquiries received at least seventy two (72) hours before the scheduled bid opening date for
which, in its sole judgment, a response is in the best interest of the Owner. Where such
interpretation or clarification requires a change in the Bid Documents, the Owner will prepare and
issue an Addendum to the Bid Documents. The Owner shall not be bound by, and Bidder shall not
rely upon, any oral interpretation or clarification of the Bid Documents.
The bidding process and terms and conditions will be in strict accordance with the following Bid
Documents:
a. Notice Inviting Bids
b. Instructions to Bidders
C. Contract Bid Forms
d. Contract
Elm
e. Contract Appendix
Part "A"
- General Conditions
Part "B"
- Supplementary General Conditions
Part "C"
- Technical Provisions
Part "D"
- Appendix
Any Addenda Issued by the Owner
4. INSPECTION OF SITE; PRE -BID CONFERENCE AND SITE WALK
Each prospective bidder is responsible for fully acquainting himself with the conditions of the Project
Site (which may include more than one site), as well as those relating to the construction and labor
of the Project, to fully understand the facilities, difficulties and restrictions which may impact the total
and adequate completion of the Project.
5. ADDENDA
The Owner reserves the right to revise the Bid Documents prior to the bid opening date. Revisions,
if any, shall be made by written Addenda. Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 4104.5, if the
Owner issues an Addendum later than 72 hours prior to the deadline for submission of bids, and the
Addendum requires material changes, additions or deletions to the description of the work to be
performed or the content, form or manner of submission of bids, the Owner will extend the deadline
for submission of bids by at least 72 hours. Otherwise, the Owner may determine, in its sole
discretion, whether an Addendum requires that the date set for opening bids be postponed. The
announcement of the new date, if any, shall be made by Addenda. Each prospective bidder shall
provide Owner a name, address and facsimile number to which Bid Document Addenda may be
sent, as well as a telephone number by which the Owner can contact the Bidder. Copies of
Addenda will be furnished by telex, telegram, facsimile, first class mail, express mail or other proper
means of delivery without charge to all parties who have obtained a copy of the Bid Documents and
provided such current information. Please Note: Bidders are primarily and ultimately responsible for
ensuring that they have received any and all Addenda. To this end, each Bidder should contact the
Development Services Department to verify that he has received all Addenda issued, if any.
Bidders must acknowledge receipt of all Addenda, if any, in its Bid Letter. Failure to acknowledge
receipt of all Acift.- a may cause its Bid to be deemed incomplete and nonresponsive.
6. PREPARATION OF BIDS
Bids shall be prepared only using copies of the Contract Bid Forms provided with the Bid
Documents. The use of substitute bid forms other than clear and correct photocopies of those
provided by the Owner will not be permitted and may result in the Bid being declared nonresponsive.
Bid Letters shall be executed by an authorized signatory as described in these Instructions to
Bidders. In addition, Bidders shall fill in all blank spaces (including inserting "N /A" where applicable)
and initial all interlineations, alterations, or erasures to the Contract Bid Forms. Bidders shall neither
delete, modify, nor supplement the printed matter on the Contract Bid Forms nor make substitutions
thereon. USE OF INK, INDELIBLE PENCIL OR A TYPEWRITER IS REQUIRED.
7. ALTERNATE BIDS
If alternate bid items are called for in the Bid Documents, the lowest bid will be determined
ITB - 2
on the basis of the base bid only, but the Owner may choose to award the contract on the
basis of the base bid alone or the base bid and any alternate or combination of alternates.
Since the time for the alternate bid items has already been factored into the Contract Time, no
additional Contract Time will be awarded for any of the alternate bid items. Because the Owner may
elect to include one or more of the alternate bid items, or to otherwise remove certain bid items from
the Project scope of work, each Bidder must ensure that each bid item contains a proportionate
share of profit, overhead and other costs or expenses which will be incurred by the Bidder. Bidders
shall not unevenly weight or allocate their overhead and profit to one or more particular bid items.
8. MODIFICATIONS OF BIDS
Each Bidder shall submit its Bid in strict conformity with the requirements of the Bid Documents.
Each Bid prepared by Bidder shall be complete in itself and shall be submitted within a sealed
envelope in accordance with the instructions herein.
Unauthorized conditions, limitations, exclusions or provisions attached to a Bid will render it
nonresponsive and may cause its rejection. Bidders shall neither delete, modify, nor supplement the
printed matter on the Contract Bid Forms, nor make substitutions thereon. ORAL, TELEPHONIC
AND FACSIMILE BIDS OR MODIFICATIONS WILL NOT BE CONSIDERED.
9. SIGNING OF BIDS
All Bids submitted shall be executed by the Bidder or its authorized representative. Bidders will be
asked to provide evidence in the form of an authenticated resolution of its Board of Directors or a
Power of Attorney evidencing the capacity of the person signing the Bid to bind the Bidder to each
Bid and to any Contract arising therefrom.
If a Bidder is a joint venture or partnership, it will be asked to submit an authenticated Power of
Attorney executed by each joint venturer or partner appointing and designating one of the joint
venturers or partners as a management sponsor to execute the Bid on behalf of Bidder. Only that
joint venturer or partner shall execute the Bid. The Power of Attorney shall also: (1) authorize that
particular joint venturer or partner to act for and bind Bidder in all matters relating to the Bid; and (2)
provide that each venturer or partner shall be jointly and severally liable for any and all of the duties
and obligations of Bidder assumed underthe Bid and under any Contract arising therefrom. The Bid
shall be executed by the designated joint venturer or partner on behalf of the joint venture or
partnership in its legal name.
10. BID GUARANTEE (BOND)
Each bid proposal shall be accompanied by a certified or cashier's check, bid bond (the bid bond
must be submitted on the form included in these Bid Documents) or equivalent substitution in lieu of
a bond, as authorized by Code of Civil Procedure Section 995.710, in an amount not less than 10%
of the Total Bid Price. Any check, bond, or other substitute must be made payable to the Owner,
and shall be given as a guarantee that the Bidder will enter into the Contract described in the Bid
Documents if awarded the work and will provide a satisfactory Performance Bond, Payment Bond,
the required insurance certificates and endorsements, and any other certifications as may be
required by the Contract. By submitting a proposal, each bidder agrees that its failure to enter the
Contract if awarded the work or to provide the Bonds and other information or documentation
described above would result in damage to the Owner, and that it would be impracticable or
extremely difficult to ascertain the actual amount of that damage. For this reason, each bidder
agrees that the Owner may retain the bid proposal guarantee as liquidated damages if the bidder is
awarded the work but fails or refuses to timely enter into the Contract or to provide the Bonds and
ITB - 3
other information or documentation described above, except as may otherwise be required by
California law.
If electing to provide a Bid Bond, as set forth above, each Bidder must obtain such a bond from an
admitted surety insurer, as defined in Code of Civil Procedure Section 995.120, authorized to do
business as such in the State of California and satisfactory to the Owner. In addition, the Bid Bond
must be submitted on the form furnished by the Owner, or one substantially in conformance with the
Owner's form if previously approved in writing by the Owner.
Certified or cashier's checks must be drawn on a solvent state bank or a California branch of a
solvent national bank.
After the Owner has made an award to the successful Bidder, and the Bidder has signed a Contract,
submitted the necessary bonds, original insurance certificates and endorsements, and any other
certifications as may be required by the Contract, the remaining Bid guarantees shall be returned to
each particular bidder if requested by that bidder. If the Owner rejects all Bids, it will promptly return
to all Bidders their Bid guarantees
11. SUBMISSION OF SEALED BIDS
Once the Bid and supporting documents herein have been completed and signed as set forth
above, they shall be placed, along with the Bid Guarantee and any proposed sketches and
brochures or other materials required by these instructions, in an envelope, sealed, addressed and
delivered or mailed, postage prepaid to the Owner at the place and to the attention of the person
indicated in the Notice Inviting Bids. NO ORAL, TELEPHONIC OR FACSIMILE FORMS WILL BE
CONSIDERED. The envelope shall also contain the following in the lower left -hand corner thereof:
Bid of
for ROSEMEAD CITY HALL HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT
No consideration shall be given by the Owner to bid proposals received after the date and time set
for the opening of bids as provided in the Notice Inviting Bids.
12. DELIVERY AND OPENING OF BIDS
Bids will be received by the Owner at the address shown in the Notice Inviting Bids up to the date
and time shown therein. The Owner will leave unopened any Bid received after the specified date
and time, and any such unopened Bid will be returned to the Bidder. It is the Bidder's sole
responsibility to ensure that its Bid is received as stipulated. Bids maybe submitted earlier than the
dates(s) and time(s) indicated.
Bids will be opened at the date and time stated in the Notice Inviting Bids and the amount of each
Bid will be read aloud and recorded. All Bidders may, if they desire, attend the opening of Bids.
Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids, to waive any informality or irregularity in any Bid
received where such waiver is in the best interests of the Owner, and to be the sole judge of the
merits of the respective Bids received. In the event of a discrepancy between the written amount of
the Bid Price and the numerical amount of the Bid Price, the written amount shall govern.
13. WITHDRAWAL OF BID
Prior to the bid opening date, a Bid may be withdrawn by the Bidder by means of a written request
�1
signed by the Bidder or its properly authorized representative. If a Bidder to whom the award is
made fails or refuses to sign a Contract, or to furnish the bonds, certificates and endorsements
required below within the time specified in these Instructions to Bidders below, the funds
represented by the Bid Guarantee (cash, cashiers check or Bid bond described above) shall be
forfeited and become and remain the property of the Owner; the amount thereof being previously
agreed to by the Bidder and the surety to be due the Owner because of the damage resulting from
the delay in the execution of the Contract and in the performance of Work thereunder.
14. AWARD PROCESS
Once all Bids are opened and reviewed to determine the lowest responsive and responsible bidder,
the City Council will make all necessary decisions and awards. The apparent successful bidder
should at this point begin to prepare the following documents: (1) the Performance Bond; (2) the
Payment Bond; and (3) the required insurance certificates and endorsements. Once the Owner
issues a Notice of Award, the successful bidder will have seven (7) Working Days from the date of
this letter to supply the Owner with all of the required documents and certifications. Regardless
whether the successful bidder supplies the required documents and certifications in a timely
manner, the Contract Time will begin to run ten (10) Working Days from the date of the Notice of
Proceed. Once the Owner receives all of the properly drafted and executed documents and
certifications from the successful bidder, the Owner shall issue a Notice to Proceed to that
successful bidder.
15. DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTORS
Pursuant to state law, the Bidders must designate the name and location of each subcontractor who
will perform work or render services for the prime Bidder in an amount that exceeds one -half of one
percent (0.5 %) of the Bidder's Total Bid Price, as well as the portion of work each such
subcontractor will perform. Bidders must make these designations, as well as any others requested
by the Owner, on the document titled "List of Proposed Subcontractors" which has been included
with the Contract Bid Forms. Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 4104, the Owner has
determined that it will allow Bidders twenty -four (24) additional hours after the deadline for
submission of bids to submit the information requested by the Owner about each subcontractor,
other than the name and location of each subcontractor.
16. LICENSING REQUIREMENTS
Pursuant to Section 7028.15 of the Business and Professions Code and Section 3300 of the Public
Contract Code, all bidders must possess proper licenses for performance of this Contract.
Subcontractors must possess the appropriate licenses for each specialty subcontracted. Pursuant to
Section 7028.5 of the Business and Professions Code, the Owner shall consider any bid submitted
by a contractor not currently licensed in accordance with state law and pursuant to the requirements
found in the Bid Documents to be nonresponsive, and the Owner shall reject the Bid. The Owner
shall have the right to request, and the Bidders shall provide within five (5) Calendar Days, evidence
satisfactory to the Owner of all valid license(s) currently held by that Bidder and each of the Bidder's
subcontractors, before awarding the Contract.
17. DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS; INTEREST IN MORE THAN ONE BID
No bidder shall be allowed to make, submit or be interested in more than one bid. However, a
person, firm, corporation or other entity that has submitted a subproposal to a bidder, or that has
quoted prices of materials to a bidder, is not thereby disqualified from submitting a subproposal or
quoting prices to other bidders submitting a bid to the Owner.
ITB -5
18. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
Within the time specified in these Instructions to Bidders above, Bidder shall provide the Owner with
four identical counterparts of all required insurance certificates and endorsements as specified in
the Bid Documents. Failure to do so may, in the sole discretion of Owner, result in the forfeiture of
the Bid Guarantee. All insurance is to be placed with insurers with a current A.M. Best's rating of no
less than A:VIII, licensed to do business in California, and satisfactory to the Owner.
19. REQUIRED BIDDER CERTIFICATIONS
Bidders must comply with the following:
A. CONTRACT BID FORMS: Within the Contract Bid Documents the bidder must certify
to various information, including but not limited to, the accuracy of the representations made in the
Contract Bid Forms .
B. NON - COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT: Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 7106,
each Bidder must execute and submit with its bid the statutorily mandated non - collusion affidavit
included in the Bid Documents.
20. BASIS OF AWARD; BALANCED BIDS
The Owner shall award Contracts to onlythe lowest responsible Bidders submitting responsive Bids,
as required by law. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids. The Owner may reject
any Bid which, in its opinion when compared to other bids received or to the Owner's internal
estimates, does not accurately reflect the cost to perform the Work. In addition, because the Owner
may elect to include or exclude any of the bid items and alternate bid items at its sole and absolute
discretion, each Bidder must ensure that each bid item contains a proportionate share of profit,
overhead and other costs or expenses which will be incurred by the Bidder. The Owner may reject
as non - responsive any bid which unevenly weights or allocates overhead and profit to one or more
particular bid items.
21. FILING OF BID PROTESTS
Bidders may file a "pr = < "!.ofa contract award with the Owner's Project Manager. In order for a
Bidder's protest to be considered valid, the protest must:
A. Be filed in writing within five (5) Working Days after the bid opening date.
B. Clearly identify the specific accusation involved.
C. Clearly identify the specific Owner Staff /Board recommendation being protested.
D. Specify, in detail, the grounds of the protest and the facts supporting the protest.
E. Include all relevant, supporting documentation with the protest at time of filing.
If the protest does not comply with each and every one of these requirements, it will be rejected as
invalid.
If the protest is valid, the Owner's Project Engineer, or other designated Owner staff member, shall
review the basis of the protest and all relevant information. The Project Engineer will deny or concur
with the protest and provide a written decision to the protestor. The protestor may then appeal the
decision of the Project engineer to the City Engineer.
22. PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND REQUIREMENTS
Within the time specified in these Instructions to Bidders above, the Bidder to whom a Contract is
awarded shall deliver to the Owner four identical counterparts of the Performance Bond and
Payment Bond in the form supplied by the Owner and included in the Bid Documents. Failure to do
so may, in the sole discretion of Owner, result in the forfeiture of the Bid Guarantee. The surety
supplying the bond must be an admitted surety insurer, as defined in Code of Civil Procedure
Section 995.120, authorized to do business as such in the State of California and satisfactory to the
Owner.
The Performance Bond shall be for one hundred percent (100 %) of the Total Bid Price, and the
Payment Bond shall also be for one hundred percent (100 %) of the Total Bid Price.
Contractor shall require, pursuant to Public Contract Code article 4108, all subcontractors providing
labor and materials in excess of the dollar amount indicated in the Notice Inviting Bids to supply
Payment and Performance Bonds in the amounts and manner required of the Contractor. The
Contractor shall specify this requirement for subcontractor bonds in his written or published request
for subcontractor bids
23. EXPERIENCE AND TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
Bidders are required to provide the experience and qualification information required as part of the
Contract Bid Forms. The purpose of this data is to provide the information necessary for the Owner
to determine whether Bidders have the necessary experience in order to responsibly carry out the
Work. Each Bidder shall answer all questions and provide information requested by the Contract
Bid Forms.
24. SALES AND OTHER APPLICABLE TAXES, PERMITS, LICENSES AND FEES
Contractor and its subcontractors performing work under this Contract will be required to pay
California sales and other applicable taxes, and to pay for permits, licenses and fees required bythe
agencies with authority in the jurisdiction in which the work will be located, unless otherwise
expressly provided by the Bid Documents.
25. EXECUTION OF CONTRACT
The Bidder to whom an award is made shall execute the Contract in the amount of its Total Bid
Price and furnish the required insurance certificates and endorsements, as well as Performance and
Payment Bonds, in a timely manner. The Owner may require appropriate evidence that the persons
executing the Contract and the bonds for both the Bidder and its surety or sureties are duly
empowered to do so.
26. OWNER RIGHTS
The Owner may investigate the qualifications of any Bidder under consideration, require
confirmation of information furnished by a Bidder, and require additional evidence of qualifications to
perform the work described in these Bid Documents. The Owner reserves the right to:
A. Reject any or all of the Bids if such action is in the best interest of the Owner.
B. Issue subsequent Notices Inviting Bids.
C. Cancel this entire Notice Inviting Bids.
D. Appoint evaluation committees to review any or all Bids.
ITB - 7
E. Seek the assistance of outside technical experts to validate the Bid(s).
F. Approve or disapprove the use of particular subcontractors.
G. Waive informalities and irregularities in Bids.
The Notice Inviting Bids does not commit the Owner to enter into a contract, nor does it obligate the
Owner to pay any costs incurred in preparation and submission of Bids or in anticipation of a
contract.
27. BIDDER'S RESPONSIVENESS
The Owner will evaluate Bids for responsiveness at the time of Bid opening and before award is
made. A Bid must be in strict compliance with the commercial and technical specifications, without
exception. Only Bids which conform in all material respects to the Bid Documents can be eligible for
award. A Bid not meeting the requirements of the responsiveness checklist may be rejected
immediately upon opening, and returned to the Bidder's representative.
28. BIDDER'S RESPONSIVENESS CHECKLIST
The Owner's initial responsiveness evaluation will consider the following:
A. Completed and properly executed Bid Letter (Including a completed Total Bid Price,
completed Bid Bond amount, acknowledged addenda, completed state of incorporation or
partner /joint venturer information (if applicable), completed license number, and signature by
authorized company officer);
B. Completed Bid Data Forms (including valid and properly executed Bid Bond for 10%
of the Total Bid Price and a completed List of Proposed Subcontractors);
C. Properly executed Non - Collusion Affidavit; and
D. Completed and properly executed Bidder Information Forms.
If the Bidder is a joint venture, each joint venturer shall prepare and submit a separate form. Extra
forms, if needed, can be obtained from the Owner, or photocopied by the Bidder, if necessary.
29. CONTRACT BID FORMS; LISTS OF SUBCONTRACTORS
A. Contract Bid Forms
The Bid Letter and Forms must be completed as set forth below.
(1) The Contract Bid Forms and Letter must be prepared using ink, indelible
pencil or a typewriter.
(2) The Bid Letter must be signed bythe Bidder or on its behalf bythe person or
persons having the authority to do so. Proof of the authority to act on behalf
of the firm must be submitted when requested. The proof shall be in the form
of a certified copy of an appropriate corporate resolution, certificate of
partnership or joint venture, or other appropriate document. If Bidder is an
entity made up of multiple parties and no person or persons are designated
to act on its behalf, all parties shall execute the Bid.
119
(3) Addenda - Receipt of addenda must be acknowledged in the space provided
in the Bid Letter.
(4) The Bidder shall not delete, modify, supplement or make substitutions
thereof, on the printed matter of the Contract Bid Forms or Bid Letter.
(5) Corrections shall be initialed by the person who signs the Bid Letter.
(6) Exceptions or qualifications to the Bid Documents are strictly forbidden. Any
comment by the Bidder which the Owner determines can be construed as
altering the requirements of the specifications or the terms and conditions of
the Contract will render the Bid nonresponsive and disqualify the Bidder from
consideration for award.
B. List of Proposed Subcontractors (Forms)
State law prohibits substitution of subcontractors listed in the original Bid except as
otherwise provided in Sections 4107 and 4107.5 of the California Public Contract Code.
Bidders are required to list all Subcontractors whose participation in the Contract will exceed
one -half of one percent (0.5 %) of the Total Bid Price. The List of Proposed Subcontractors
Forms must be completed as set forth below.
(1) Name List the name of Subcontractors who will perform work in excess of
one half of one percent (0.5 %)of the Total Bid Price.
(2) Location For listed Subcontractors, identify the location of its place of
business (City and State).
(3) Work. For listed Subcontractors, identify the type /portion of work to be
performed in the Contract.
Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 4104, the Owner has determined that it will not allow
Bidders twenty -four (24) additional hours after the deadline for submission of bids to submit the
information requested by the Owner about each subcontractor, other than the name and location of
each subcontractor.
30. RESPONSIBILITY CRITERIA
Responsibility is the apparent ability of the Bidder to meet and complete successfully the
requirements of the Contract. The Owner reserves the right to consider the financial responsibility
and general competency of each bidder, as well as its reputation within the industry. Owner may
request, and apparent low bidder shall provide, a financial statement, audited if necessary, including
the Bidder's latest balance sheet and income statement. Owner expects that each Bidder will fully
and truthfully disclose all information required of the Bidder by the Bid Documents. The prospective
contractor, in order to be evaluated by the Owner as being a responsible contractor, must complete
Section 4 of the Contract Bid Forms to determine that it:
A. Has or can secure adequate financial resources to perform the contract;
B. Is able to meet the performance or delivery schedule of the contract, taking
into consideration other business commitments; and
C. Has a satisfactory record of performance. A contractor seriously deficient in
current contract performance, considering the number of contracts and
extent of the deficiencies, is presumed not to meet this requirement unless
the deficiencies are beyond its control or there is evidence to establish its
responsibility notwithstanding the deficiencies. Evidence of such satisfactory
performance record should show that the contractor:
(1) Has a satisfactory record of integrity in its dealings with government agencies
and with subcontractors, and is otherwise qualified to receive an award
under applicable laws and regulations;
(2) Has the necessary organization, experience, satisfactory safety record,
accounting and operational controls and technical skills or the ability to
obtain them; and
(3) Has the necessary production, construction, and technical equipment and
facilities or the ability to obtain them.
END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
ITB - 10
• .
ELM M
. -'
PROJECT
PROJECT s 31002
ffl..f
CONTRACT BID FORMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION1 BID SCHEDULE ........................................................................ .......................:......1
SECTION2 BID DATA FORMS .................................................................... ..............................5
2.A BID BOND .................................................................................. ..............................6
2.6 LIST OF PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS ........................... ..............................7
SECTION 3 NON - COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT... ............... ........................... .............................. 10
:.
..
BID SCHEDULE
SCHEDULE OF PRICES FOR
ROSEMEAD CITY HALL HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT
PROJECT No. 31002
BASE BID SCHEDULE
TOTAL BASE BID PRICE (SCHEDULE BID PRICE)
Dollar amount in written form
Note: The City of Rosemead reserves the right to reduce or increase the quantities of any items in
the schedule of bid items above, within the limits define in Section 3 -2.2.1 of the Standard
Specifications, to stay within the budgeted amount of this project.
If the Bid Documents specify alternate bid items, the following Alternate Bid amounts shall
be added to or deducted from the Total Bid Price entered above. The owner can choose to
include one or more of the alternates in the Total Bid Price of the Project. If any of the
Alternate Bids are utilized by the Owner, the resulting amount shall be considered the Total
Bid Price for the Project.
The undersigned agrees that these Contract Bid Forms constitute a firm offer to the Owner which
cannot be withdrawn for the number of Working Days indicated in the Notice Inviting Bids from and
after the bid opening date, or until a Contract for the Work is fully executed by the Owner and a third
party, whichever is earlier. The undersigned also agrees that if there is a discrepancy between the
written amount of the Bid Price and the numerical amount of the Bid Price, the written amount shall
govern.
Attached hereto is a certified check, a cashier's check or a bid bond in the amount of
Dollars ($ ) said amount being not less than ten percent (10 %) of the Total
Bid Price. The undersigned agrees that said amount shall be retained by the Owner if, upon award,
CBF -1
UNIT OF
EST.
UNIT
ITEM
NO.
ITEM DESCRIPTION
MEASURE
CITY.
PRICE
COST
1
Clearing & Grubbing
LS
1
2
Disposal of Waste Materials,
LS
1
3'
Remove and Dispose Existing AC
LS
1
Unit Complete. Install new HVAC
Unit as indicated on the Plans and
Specifications Com fete.
TOTAL BASE BID PRICE (SCHEDULE BID PRICE)
Dollar amount in written form
Note: The City of Rosemead reserves the right to reduce or increase the quantities of any items in
the schedule of bid items above, within the limits define in Section 3 -2.2.1 of the Standard
Specifications, to stay within the budgeted amount of this project.
If the Bid Documents specify alternate bid items, the following Alternate Bid amounts shall
be added to or deducted from the Total Bid Price entered above. The owner can choose to
include one or more of the alternates in the Total Bid Price of the Project. If any of the
Alternate Bids are utilized by the Owner, the resulting amount shall be considered the Total
Bid Price for the Project.
The undersigned agrees that these Contract Bid Forms constitute a firm offer to the Owner which
cannot be withdrawn for the number of Working Days indicated in the Notice Inviting Bids from and
after the bid opening date, or until a Contract for the Work is fully executed by the Owner and a third
party, whichever is earlier. The undersigned also agrees that if there is a discrepancy between the
written amount of the Bid Price and the numerical amount of the Bid Price, the written amount shall
govern.
Attached hereto is a certified check, a cashier's check or a bid bond in the amount of
Dollars ($ ) said amount being not less than ten percent (10 %) of the Total
Bid Price. The undersigned agrees that said amount shall be retained by the Owner if, upon award,
CBF -1
.. e
we fail or refuse to execute the Contract and furnish the required bonds, certificates and
endorsements of insurance and other certifications within the time provided.
If awarded a Contract, the undersigned agrees to execute the formal Contract, which will be
prepared bythe Owner for execution, within five (5) Calendar Days following the Letter of Award for
the Contract, and will deliver to the Owner within that same period the necessary original Certificates
of Insurance, Endorsements of Insurance, Performance Bond, Payment Bond and all other
documentation and certification required by the Contract.
The undersigned offers and agrees that if this bid is accepted, it will assign to the purchasing body
all rights, title, and interest in and to all causes of action it may have under Section 4 of the Clayton
Act (15 U.S.C. Section 15) or under the Cartwright Act (Chapter 2 of Part 2 of Division 7 of the
Business and Professional Code), arising from purchases of goods, materials or services by the
Bidder for sale to the purchasing body pursuant to the bid. Such assignment shall be made and
become effective at the time the purchasing body tenders final payment to he Contractor.
Bidder understands and agrees that, when requested by Owner, he shall provide: (1) evidence
satisfactory to the Owner of Bidder's California contractor's license(s) in good standing; (2) evidence
that the person signing this Bid is authorized to bind Bidder to this Bid and to a contract resulting
therefrom; and (3) any other information and documentation, financial or otherwise, needed by
Owner to award a Contract to the lowest responsible and responsive bidder.
Bidder understands and agrees that liquidated damages shall applyto this Contract in the amounts
and subject to the terms and conditions described in the Contract Form and the Contract
Documents.
Bidder acknowledges that data submitted with its Contract Bid Forms which it requires to be
incorporated into a Contract arising out of this Submittal has been so identified by Bidder. Bidder
further acknowledges that the Owner may, at its discretion, incorporate any of the remaining data
submitted herewith into a contract arising out of this Bid.
The undersigned acknowledges receipt, understanding and full consideration of the following
addenda to the Contract Documents.
Addenda Nos.
The Bidder understands and agrees that the Total Bid Price is inclusive of all labor, materials, and
equipment or supplies necessary to complete the Work as described in the Bid Documents. If this
bid is accepted, the undersigned Bidder agrees to enter into and execute the Contract with the
necessary bonds and accept the Total Bid Price as compensation in full for all Work under the
contract.
MUMI
..
A
Signature
Type or Print Name
Title
Bidder's /Contractor's State of Incorporation:
Partners or Joint Venturers:
Business Street Address
City, State and Zip Code
Telephone Number
Bidder's License Number(s):
NOTES:
1) By its signature on this Bid, the Bidder certifies under penalty of perjury the accuracy of the
representations made on the Contract Bid Forms.
2) If Bidder is a corporation, enter State of Incorporation in addition to Business Address
3) If Bidder is a partnership or joint venture, give full names of all partners or joint
venturers.
As further discussed in the Instructions to Bidders, Bidder will be required
to provide evidence that the person signing on behalf of the corporation,
pa rtnership or joint venture has the authority to do so.
CBF -3
SECTI
BID DATA F
CBF -4
Bidder shall submit its Bid data in accordance with the format shown on each of the following Bid
Data Forms. Bidders shall prepare and use as many sheets as are necessary to adequately provide
the information required. Bidder shall ensure that every page of its Bid Data Forms is properly
identified with the Bidder's name and page number.
2.A BID BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
THAT
Principal, and
as
, as Surety, are held firmly bound unto the
CITY OF ROSEMEAD (hereinafter called the OWNER) in the sum of
($ ), being not less than ten percent (10 %) of the Total
Bid Price; for the payment of which sum will and truly to be made, we bind ourselves,
our heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally,
firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, said Principal has submitted a bid to the OWNER to perform all Work
required for the ROSEMEAD CITY HALL HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT as set
forth in the Notice Inviting Bids and accompanying Bid Documents, dated
NOW, THEREFORE, if said Principal is awarded a Contract for the Work by the
OWNER and, within the time and in the manner required by the above- referenced
Bid Documents, enters into the written form of Contract bound with said Bid
Documents, furnishes the required bonds (one to guarantee faithful performance
and the other to guarantee payment for labor and materials) furnishes the required
insurance certificates and endorsements, and furnishes any other certifications as
may be required by the Contract, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise
it shall remain in full force and effect. In the event suit is brought upon this bond by
the OWNER and judgment is recovered, said Surety shall pay all costs incurred by
the OWNER in such suit, inch' :r %g reasonable attorneys' fees to be fixed by the
court.
SIGNED AND SEALED, this day of , 20_,
Principal
go
Signature
in
(SEAL)
Surety
Signature
:.. ;
2.13 LIST OF PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS
In compliance with the "Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act," Sections 4100
through 4114 of the California Public Contract Code, and any amendments thereto, each
Bidder shall provide the information requested below for each subcontractor who will
perform work, labor or render service to Bidder in or about the construction of the Work in an
amount in excess of one -half of one percent (greater than 0.5 %) of the Bidder's Total Bid
Price, or, in the case of bids or offers for the construction of streets or highways, including
bridges, in excess of one -half of 1 percent of the Contractor's total bid or ten thousand
dollars ($10,000), whichever is greater, and shall further set forth the portion of the Work
which will be done by each subcontractor. Bidder shall list only one subcontractor for any
one portion of the Work.
Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 4104, the Owner has determined that it will allow
Bidders twenty -four (24) additional hours after the deadline for submission of bids to submit
the information requested by the Owner about each subcontractor, otherthan the name and
location of each subcontractor.
If the Bidder fails to specify a subcontractor for any portion of the Work to be performed
under the Contract, it shall be deemed to have agreed to perform such portion itself, and
shall not be permitted to subcontract that Portion of the Work except under the conditions
hereinafter set forth below.
Subletting or subcontracting of any portion of the Work in excess of one half of one percent
(greater than 0.5 %) of the Total Bid Price or, in the case of bids or offers for the construction
of streets or highways, including bridges, in excess of one -half of 1 percent of the
Contractor's total bid or ten thousand dollars ($10,000), whichever is greater, for which no
subcontractor was designated in the original bid shall only be permitted in cases of public
emergency or necessity, and then only after Owner approval.
IMM—.
2.6 LIST OF PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS (continued)
[ "Duplicate Next 2 Pages if needed for listing additional subcontractors. - ]
Name and Location Description of Work
of Subcontractor to be Subcontracted
Name:
Address:
Name and Location
of Subcontractor
Name:
Address:
Description of Work
to be Subcontracted
Name and Location
of Subcontractor
Name:
Address:
Description of Work
to be Subcontracted
Name and Location
of Subcontractor
Name:
Address:
Name and Location
of Subcontractor
Name:
Address:
Description of Work
to be Subcontracted
Description of Work
to be Subcontracted
CBF -7
..
2.0 REFERENCES
The following are the names, addresses and telephone numbers for three public agencies for which BIDDER
has performed similar work within the past two (2) years:
1.
Name and Address of Owner
Name and telephone number of person familiar with project
Contract amount Type of Work Date Completed
2.
Name and Address of Owner
Name and telephone number of person familiar with project
Contract amount Type of Work Date Completed
3.
Name and Address of Owner
Name and telephone number of person familiar with project
Contract amount Type of Work Date Completed
4.
Name and Address of Owner
Name and telephone number of person familiar with project
Contract amount
Type of Work Date Completed
SECTI
N ON-COLLUSION AFF•
KUM
El.. ;
NON - COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
In accordance with Public Contract Code Section 7106, the undersigned, being first duly
sworn, deposes and says that he or she holds the position listed below with the bidder, the
party making the foregoing bid, that the bid is not made in the interest of, or on behalf of, any
undisclosed person, partnership, company, association, organization, or corporation; that the
bid is genuine and not collusive or sham; that the bidder has not directly or indirectly induced
or solicited any other bidder to put in a false or sham bid, and has not directly or indirectly
colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed with any bidder or anyone else to put in a sham
bid, or that anyone shall refrain from bidding; that the bidder has not in any manner, directly
or indirectly, sought by agreement, communication, or conference with anyone to fix the bid
price of the bidder or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit, or cost element of the
bid price, or of that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the public body
awarding the contract of anyone interested in the proposed contract; that all statements
contained in the bid are true; and, further, that the bidder has not, directly or indirectly,
submitted his or her bid price or any breakdown thereof, or the contents thereof, or divulged
information or data relative thereto, or paid, and will not pay, any fee to any corporation,
partnership, company association, organization, bid depository, or to any member or agent
thereof to effectuate a collusive or sham bid.
Signature
Subscribed and sworn before me
This _ day of
Notary Public in and for
the State of California
My Commission Expires:
Typed or Printed Name
Title
:..-
20
(Seal)
CBF -10
• A• CITY HALL HVAC REPLACEMENT
PR
P . 3100
CONT13aCT ACR�EMENT`
CONTRACT AGREEMENT
PARTIES AND DATE.
This Agreement is made and entered into this day of
, 20_ by and between the City of Rosemead, a municipal
corporation of the State of California, located at 8838 E. Valley Blvd., Rosemead, California
91770, ( "City ") and [insert Name of Company], a [insert type of entity - corporation,
partnership, sole proprietorship or other legal entity] with its principal place of business at
[insert address] (hereinafter referred to as "Contractor"). City and Contractor are
sometimes individually referred to as "Parry" and collectively as "Parties" in this Agreement.
2. RECITALS.
2.1 Contractor.
Contractor desires to perform and assume responsibility for the provision of certain
services required by the City on the terms and conditions set forth in this Agreement.
Contractor represents that it is experienced in providing [insert type of services] services to
public clients, that it and its employees or subcontractors have all necessary licenses and
permits to perform the Services in the State of California, and that is familiar with the plans
of City.
2.2 Project.
City desires to engage Contractor to render such services for the [insert Name of
Project] ( "Project') as set forth in this Agreement.
3. TERMS.
3.1 Scope of Services and Term.
3.1.1 General Scope of Services. Contractor promises and agrees to
furnish to the Owner all labor, materials, tools, equipment, services, and incidental and
customary work necessary to fully and adequately supply the professional [insert type of
services] maintenance services necessary for the Project ( "Services "). All Services shall
be subject to, and performed in accordance with, this Agreement, the exhibits attached
hereto and incorporated herein by reference, and all applicable local, state and federal
laws, rules and regulations.
3.1.2 Term. The term of this Agreement shall be from [insert start date] to
[insert ending date], unless earlier terminated as provided herein. Contractor shall
complete the Services within the term of this Agreement, and shall meet any other
established schedules and deadlines. The Parties may, by mutual, written consent, extend
the term of this Agreement if necessary to complete the Services.
[insert Name of Company]
Page 2 of [insert last page number of agreement]
3.2 Responsibilities of Contractor.
3.2.1 Control and Payment of Subordinates; Independent Contractor. The
Services shall be performed by Contractor or under its supervision. Contractor will
determine the means, methods and details of performing the Services subject to the
requirements of this Agreement. City retains Contractor on an independent contractor
basis and not as an employee. Contractor retains the right to perform similar or different
services for others during the term of this Agreement. Any additional personnel performing
the Services under this Agreement on behalf of Contractor shall also not be employees of
City and shall at all times be under Contractor's exclusive direction and control. Contractor
shall pay all wages, salaries, and other amounts due such personnel in connection with
their performance of Services under this Agreement and as required by law. Contractor
shall be responsible for all reports and obligations respecting such additional personnel,
including, but not limited to: social security taxes, income tax withholding, unemployment
insurance, disability insurance, and workers' compensation insurance.
3.2.2 Schedule of Services. Contractor shall perform the Services
expeditiously, within the term of this Agreement, and in accordance with the Schedule of
Services set forth in Exhibit "B" attached hereto and incorporated herein by reference.
Contractor represents that it has the professional and technical personnel required to
perform the Services in conformance with such conditions. In order to facilitate
Contractor's conformance with the Schedule, City shall respond to Contractor's submittals
in a timely manner. Upon request of City, Contractor shall provide a more detailed
schedule of anticipated performance to meet the Schedule of Services.
3.2.3 Conformance to Applicable Requirements. All work prepared by
Contractor shall be subject to the approval of City.
3.2.4 City's Representative. The City hereby designates [insert Name or
Title], or his or her designee, to act as its representative for the performance of this
Agreement ( "City's Representative "). City':- Representative shall have the power to act on
behalf of the City for all purposes under this Contract. Contractor shall not accept direction
or orders from any person other than the City's Representative or his or her designee.
3.2.5 Contractor's Representative. Contractor hereby designates [insert
Name or Title], or his or her designee, to act as its representative for the performance of
this Agreement ( "Contractor's Representative "). Contractor's Representative shall have full
authority to represent and act on behalf of the Contractor for all purposes under this
Agreement. The Contractor's Representative shall supervise and direct the Services, using
his /her best skill and attention, and shall be responsible for all means, methods,
techniques, sequences and procedures and for the satisfactory coordination of all portions
of the Services under this Agreement.
3.2.6 Coordination of Services. Contractor agrees to work closely with City
staff in the performance of Services and shall be available to City's staff, consultants and
[insert Name of Company]
Page 3 of [insert last page number of agreement]
other staff at all reasonable times.
3.2.7 Standard of Care; Performance of Employees. Contractor shall
perform all Services under this Agreement in a skillful and competent manner, consistent
with the standards generally recognized as being employed by professionals in the same
discipline in the State of California. Contractor represents and maintains that it is skilled in
the professional calling necessary to perform the Services. Contractor warrants that all
employees and subcontractors shall have sufficient skill and experience to perform the
Services assigned to them. Finally, Contractor represents that it, its employees and
subcontractors have all licenses, permits, qualifications and approvals of whatever nature
that are legally required to perform the Services, including a City Business License, and
that such licenses and approvals shall be maintained throughout the term of this
Agreement. As provided for in the indemnification provisions of this Agreement, Contractor
shall perform, at its own cost and expense and without reimbursement from the City, any
services necessary to correct errors or omissions which are caused by the Contractor's
failure to comply with the standard of care provided for herein. Any employee of the
Contractor or its sub - contractors who is determined by the City to be uncooperative,
incompetent, a threat to the adequate or timely completion of the Project, a threat to the
safety of persons or property, or any employee who fails or refuses to perform the Services
in a manner acceptable to the City, shall be promptly removed from the Project by the
Contractor and shall not be re- employed to perform any of the Services or to work on the
Project.
3.2.8 Laws and Regulations. Contractor shall keep itself fully informed of
and in compliance with all local, state and federal laws, rules and regulations in any
manner affecting the performance of the Project or the Services, including all Cal /OSHA
requirements, and shall give all notices required by law. Contractor shall be liable for all
violations of such laws and regulations in connection with Services. If the Contractor
performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, rules and regulations and without
giving written notice to the City, Contractor shall be solely responsible for all costs arising
therefrom. Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold City, its officials, directors, officers,
employees and agents free and harmless, pursuant to the indemnification provisions of this
Agreement, from any claim or liability arising out of any failure or alleged failure to comply
with such laws, rules or regulations.
3.2.9 Insurance.
3.2.9.1 Time for Compliance. Contractor shall maintain prior to
the beginning of and for the direction of this Agreement insurance coverage as specified in
Exhibit D attached to and part of this agreement.
3.2.10 Safety. Contractor shall execute and maintain its work so as to avoid
injury or'damage to any person or property. In carrying out its Services, the Contractor
shall at all times be in compliance with all applicable local, state and federal laws, rules and
regulations, and shall exercise all necessary precautions for the safety of employees
[insert Name of Company]
Page 4 of [insert last page number of agreement]
appropriate to the nature of the work and the conditions under which the work is to be
performed. Safety precautions as applicable shall include, but shall not be limited to: (A)
adequate life protection and life saving equipment and procedures; (B) instructions in
accident prevention for all employees and subcontractors, such as safe walkways,
scaffolds, fall protection ladders, bridges, gang planks, confined space procedures,
trenching and shoring, equipment and other safety devices, equipment and wearing
apparel as are necessary or lawfully required to prevent accidents or injuries; and (C)
adequate facilities for the proper inspection and maintenance of all safety measures.
3.2.11 Prevailing Wages. Contractor is aware of the requirements of
California Labor Code Section 1720, et seq., and 1770, et seq., as well as California Code
of Regulations, Title 8, Section 1600, et seq., ( "Prevailing Wage Laws "), which require the
payment of prevailing wage rates and the performance of other requirements on "public
works" and "maintenance" projects. If the Services are being performed as part of an
applicable "public works" or "maintenance" project, as defined by the Prevailing Wage
Laws, and if the total compensation is $1,000 or more, Contractor agrees to fully comply
with such Prevailing Wage Laws. City shall provide Contractor with a copy of the prevailing
rates of per diem wages in effect at the commencement of this Agreement. Contractor
shall make copies of the prevailing rates of per diem wages for each craft, classification or
type of worker needed to execute the Services available to interested parties upon request,
and shall post copies at the Contractor's principal place of business and at the project site.
Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold the City, its elected officials, officers,
employees and agents free and harmless from any claim or liability arising out of any
failure or alleged failure to comply with the Prevailing Wage Laws.
3.2.12 Bonds.
3.2.12.1 Performance Bond. Contractor shall execute and
provide to City concurrently with this Agreement a Performance Bond in the amount of the
total, not -to- exceed compensation indicated in this Agreement, and in a form provided or
approved by the City. If such bond is required, no payment will be made to Contractor until
it has been received and approved by the City.
3.2.12.2 Payment Bond. Contractor shall execute and provide to
City concurrently with this Agreement a Payment Bond in the amount of the total, not -to-
exceed compensation indicated in this Agreement, and in a form provided or approved by
the City. If such bond is required, no payment will be made to Contractor until it has been
received and approved by the City.
3.2.12.3 Bond Provisions. Should, in City's sole opinion, any
bond become insufficient or any surety be found to be unsatisfactory, Contractor shall
renew or replace the affected bond within 10 days of receiving notice from City. In the
event the surety or Contractor intends to reduce or cancel any required bond, at least thirty
(30) days prior written notice shall be given to the City, and Contractor shall post
acceptable replacement bonds at least ten (10) days prior to expiration of the original
[insert Name of Company]
Page 5 of [insert last page number of agreement]
bonds. No further payments shall be deemed due or will be made under this Agreement
until any replacement bonds required by this Section are accepted by the City. To the
extent, if any, that the total compensation is increased in accordance with the Agreement,
the Contractor shall, upon request of the City, cause the amount of the bonds to be
increased accordingly and shall promptly deliver satisfactory evidence of such increase to
the City. To the extent available, the bonds shall further provide that no change or
alteration of the Agreement (including, without limitation, an increase in the total
compensation, as referred to above), extensions of time, or modifications of the time,
terms, or conditions of payment to the Contractor, will release the surety. If the Contractor
fails to furnish any required bond, the City may terminate this Agreement for cause.
3.2.12.4 Surety Qualifications. Only bonds executed by an
admitted surety insurer, as defined in Code of Civil Procedure Section 995.120, shall be
accepted. The surety must be a California- admitted surety with a current A.M. Best's rating
no less than A:VIII and satisfactory to the City. If a California- admitted surety insurer
issuing bonds does not meet these requirements, the insurer will be considered qualified if
it is in conformance with Section 995.660 of the California Code of Civil Procedure, and
proof of such is provided to the City.
3.3 Fees and Payments.
3.3.1 Compensation. Contractor shall receive compensation, including
authorized reimbursements, for all Services rendered under this Agreement at the rates set
forth in Exhibit C attached hereto and incorporated herein by reference. The total
compensation shall not exceed [insert written dollar amount] ($[insert numerical dollar
amount]) without advance written approval of City's project manager. Extra Work may be
authorized, as described below, and if authorized, will be compensated at the rates and
manner set forth in this Agreement.
3.3.2 Payment of Compensation. Contractor shall submit to City a monthly
itemized statement which indicates work completed and hours of Services rendered by
Contractor. The statement shall describe the amount of Services and supplies provided
since the initial commencement date, or since the start of the subsequent billing periods,
as appropriate, through the date of the statement. City shall, within 45 days of receiving
such statement, review the statement and pay all approved charges thereon.
3.3.3 Reimbursement for Expenses. Contractor shall not be reimbursed for
any expenses unless authorized in writing by City.
3.3.4 Extra Work. At any time during the term of this Agreement, City may
request that Contractor perform Extra Work. As used herein, "Extra Work" means any
work which is determined by City to be necessary for the proper completion of the Project,
but which the parties did not reasonably anticipate would be necessary at the execution of
this Agreement. Contractor shall not perform, nor be compensated for, Extra Work without
written authorization from City's Representative.
[insert Name of Company]
Page 6 of [insert last page number of agreement]
3.3.5 Prevailing Wages. Contractor is aware of the requirements of
California Labor Code Section 1720, et seq., and 1770, et seq., as well as California Code
of Regulations, Title 8, Section 16000, et seq., ( "Prevailing Wage Laws "), which require the
payment of prevailing wage rates and the performance of other requirements on "public
works" and "maintenance" projects. If the Services are being performed as part of an
applicable "public works" or "maintenance" project, as defined by the Prevailing Wage
Laws, and if the total compensation is $1,000 or more, Contractor agrees to fully comply
with such Prevailing Wage Laws. City shall provide Contractor with a copy of the prevailing
rates of per diem wages in effect at the commencement of this Agreement. Contractor
shall make copies of the prevailing rates of per diem wages for each craft, classification or
type of worker needed to execute the Services available to interested parties upon request,
and shall post copies at the Contractor's principal place of business and at the project site.
Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold the City, its elected officials, officers,
employees and agents free and harmless from any claim or liability arising out of any
failure or alleged failure to comply with the Prevailing Wage Laws.
3.4 Accounting Records.
3.4.1 Maintenance and Inspection. Contractor shall maintain complete and
accurate records with respect to all costs and expenses incurred under this Agreement. All
such records shall be clearly identifiable. Contractor shall allow a representative of City
during normal business hours to examine, audit, and make transcripts or copies of such
records and any other documents created pursuant to this Agreement. Contractor shall
allow inspection of all work, data, documents, proceedings, and activities related to the
Agreement for a period of three (3) years from the date of final payment under this
Agreement.
3.5 General Provisions.
3.5.1 Termination of Agreement.
3.5.1.1 Grounds for Termination. City may, by written notice to
Contractor, terminate the whole or any part of this Agreement at any time and without
cause by giving written notice to Contractor of such termination, and specifying the
effective date thereof, at least seven (7) days before the effective date of such termination.
Upon termination, Contractor shall be compensated only for those services which have
been adequately rendered to City, and Contractor shall be entitled to no further
compensation. Contractor may not terminate this Agreement except for cause.
3.5.1.2 Effect of Termination. If this Agreement is terminated as
provided herein, City may require Contractor to provide all finished or unfinished
Documents and Data and other information of any kind prepared by Contractor in
connection with the performance of Services under this Agreement. Contractor shall be
[insert Name of Company]
Page 7 of [insert last page number of agreement]
required to provide such document and other information within fifteen (15) days of the
request.
3.5.1.3 Additional Services. In the event this Agreement is
terminated in whole or in part as provided herein, City may procure, upon such terms and
in such manner as it may determine appropriate, services similar to those terminated.
3.5.2 Delivery of Notices. All notices permitted or required under this
Agreement shall be given to the respective parties at the following address, or at such
other address as the respective parties may provide in writing for this purpose:
CONTRACTOR:
[Insert Name]
[Insert Address]
[Insert City, State zip]
Attn: [Contact Person]
CITY:
City of Rosemead
P.O. Box 399
Rosemead, CA 91770
Attn:
Such notice shall be deemed made when personally delivered or when mailed, forty -
eight (48) hours after deposit in the U.S. Mail, first class postage prepaid and addressed to
the parry at its applicable address. Actual notice shall be deemed adequate notice on the
date actual notice occurred, regardless of the method of service.
3.5.3 Cooperation; Further Acts. The Parties shall fully cooperate with one
another, and shall take any additional acts or sign any additional documents as may be
necessary, appropriate or convenient to attain the purposes of this Agreement.
3.5.4 Attorney's Fees. If either party commences an action against the other
party, either legal, administrative or otherwise, arising out of or in connection with this
Agreement, the prevailing party in such litigation shall be entitled to have and recover from
the losing parry reasonable attorney's fees and all other costs of such action.
3.5.5 Indemnification. Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold the City,
its officials, officers, employees, volunteers and agents free and harmless from any and all
claims, demands, causes of action, costs, expenses, liability, loss, damage or injury, in law
or equity, to property or persons, including wrongful death, in any manner arising out of or
incident to any alleged acts, omissions or willful misconduct of Contractor, its officials,
officers, employees, agents, consultants and contractors arising out of or in connection with
the performance of the Services, the Project or this Agreement, including without limitation
[insert Name of Company]
Page 8 of [insert last page number of agreement]
the payment of all consequential damages and attorneys fees and other related costs and
expenses. Contractor shall defend, at Contractor's own cost, expense and risk, any and all
such aforesaid suits, actions or other legal proceedings of every kind that may be brought
or instituted against City, its directors, officials, officers, employees, agents or volunteers.
Contractor shall pay and satisfy any judgment, award or decree that may be rendered
against City or its directors, officials, officers, employees, agents or volunteers, in any such
suit, action or other legal proceeding. Contractor shall reimburse City and its directors,
officials, officers, employees, agents and /or volunteers, for any and all legal expenses and
costs incurred by each of them in connection therewith or in enforcing the indemnity herein
provided. Contractor's obligation to indemnify shall not be restricted to insurance
proceeds, if any, received by the City, its directors, officials officers, employees, agents or
volunteers.
3.5.6 Entire Agreement. This Agreement contains the entire Agreement of
the parties with respect to the subject matter hereof, and supersedes all prior negotiations,
understandings or agreements. This Agreement may only be modified by a writing signed
by both parties.
3.5.7 Governing Law. This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the
State of California. Venue shall be in Los Angeles County.
3.5.8 Time of Essence. Time is of the essence for each and every provision
of this Agreement.
3.5.9 City's Right to Employ Other Contractors. City reserves right to
employ other contractors in connection with this Project.
3.5.10 Successors and Assigns. This Agreement shall be binding on the
successors and assigns of the parties.
3.5.11 Assignment or Transfer. Contractor shall not assign hypothecate, or
transfer, either directly or by operation of law, this Agreement or any interest herein without
the prior written consent of the City. Any attempt to do so shall be null and void, and any
assignees, hypothecates or transferees shall acquire no right or interest by reason of such
attempted assignment, hypothecation or transfer.
3.5.12 Construction; References; Captions. Since the Parties or their agents
have participated fully in the preparation of this Agreement, the language of this Agreement
shall be construed simply, according to its fair meaning, and not strictly for or against any
Party. Any term referencing time, days or period for performance shall be deemed
calendar days and not work days. All references to Contractor include all personnel,
employees, agents, and subcontractors of Contractor, except as otherwise specified in this
Agreement. All references to City include its elected officials, officers, employees, agents,
and volunteers except as otherwise specified in this Agreement. The captions of the
various articles and paragraphs are for convenience and ease of reference only, and do
[insert Name of Company]
Page 9 of [insert last page number of agreement]
not define, limit, augment, or describe the scope, content, or intent of this Agreement.
3.5.13 Amendment; Modification. No supplement, modification, or
amendment of this Agreement shall be binding unless executed in writing and signed by
both Parties.
3.5.14 Waiver. No waiver of any default shall constitute a waiver of any other
default or breach, whether of the same or other covenant or condition. No waiver, benefit,
privilege, or service voluntarily given or performed by a Party shall give the other Parry any
contractual rights by custom, estoppel, or otherwise.
3.5.15 No Third Party Beneficiaries. There are no intended third party
beneficiaries of any right or obligation assumed by the Parties.
3.5.16 Invalidity; Severability. If any portion of this Agreement is declared
invalid, illegal, or otherwise unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, the
remaining provisions shall continue in full force and effect.
3.5.17 Prohibited Interests. Contractor maintains and warrants that it has not
employed nor retained any company or person, other than a bona fide employee working
solely for Contractor, to solicitor secure this Agreement. Further, Contractor warrants that
it has not paid nor has it agreed to pay any company or person, other than a bona fide
employee working solely for Contractor, any fee, commission, percentage, brokerage fee,
gift or other consideration contingent upon or resulting from the award or making of this
Agreement. For breach or violation of this warranty, City shall have the right to rescind this
Agreement without liability. For the term of this Agreement, no member, officer or
employee of City, during the term of his or her service with City, shall have any direct
interest in this Agreement, or obtain any present or anticipated material benefit arising
therefrom.
3.5.18 Equal Opportunity Employment. Contractor represents that it is an
equal opportunity employer and it shall not discriminate against any subcontractor,
employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, national origin,
handicap, ancestry, sex or age. Such non - discrimination shall include, but not be limited
to, all activities related to initial employment, upgrading, demotion, transfer, recruitment or
recruitment advertising, layoff or termination. Contractor shall also comply with all relevant
provisions of City's Minority Business Enterprise program, Affirmative Action Plan or other
related programs or guidelines currently in effect or hereinafter enacted.
3.5.19 Labor Certification. By its signature hereunder, Contractor certifies
that it is aware of the provisions of Section 3700 of the California Labor Code which require
every employer to be insured against liability for Worker's Compensation or to undertake
self- insurance in accordance with the provisions of that Code, and agrees to comply with
such provisions before commencing the performance of the Services.
[insert Name of Company]
Page 10 of [insert last page number of agreement]
3.5.20 Authority to Enter Agreement. Contractor has all requisite power and
authority to conduct its business and to execute, deliver, and perform the Agreement.
Each Party warrants that the individuals who have signed this Agreement have the legal
power, right, and authority to make this Agreement and bind each respective Party.
3.5.21 Counterparts. This Agreement may be signed in counterparts, each of
which shall constitute an original.
3.6 Subcontracting.
3.6.1 Prior Approval Required. Contractor shall not subcontract any portion
of the work required by this Agreement, except as expressly stated herein, without prior
written approval of City. Subcontracts, if any, shall contain a provision making them
subject to all provisions stipulated in this Agreement.
[signatures on next page]
[insert Name of Company)
Page 11 of [insert last page number of agreement]
CITY OF ROSEMEAD
By:
City Mayor
Attest:
Gloria Molleda
City Clerk
Approved as to Form:
Garcia Calderon Ruiz LLP
City Attorney
02/08
Documentt
[INSERT NAME OF CONTRACTOR]
Name:
[If Corporation, TWO SIGNATURES, President
OR Vice President AND Secretary, AND
CORPORATE SEAL OF CONTRACTOR
REQUIRED]
[insert Name of Company]
Page 1 of [insert last page number of agreement]
INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
Prior to the beginning of and throughout the duration of the Work, Consultant will maintain
insurance in conformance with the requirements set forth below. Consultant will use
existing coverage to comply with these requirements. If that existing coverage does not
meet the requirements set forth here, Consultant agrees to amend, supplement or endorse
the existing coverage to do so. Consultant acknowledges that the insurance coverage and
policy limits set forth in this section constitute the minimum amount of coverage required.
Any insurance proceeds available to City in excess of the limits and coverage required in
this agreement and which is applicable to a given loss, will be available to City.
Consultant shall provide the following types and amounts of insurance:
Commercial General Liability Insurance using Insurance Services Office "Commercial
General Liability" policy form CG 00 01 or the exact equivalent. Defense costs must be
paid in addition to limits. There shall be no cross liability exclusion for claims or suits by
one insured against another. Limits are subject to review but in no event less than
$1,000,000 per occurrence.
Business Auto Coverage on ISO Business Auto Coverage form CA 00 01 including symbol
1 (Any Auto) or the exact equivalent. Limits are subject to review, but in no event to be less
that $1,000,000 per accident. If Consultant owns no vehicles, this requirement may be
satisfied by a non -owned auto endorsement to the general liability policy described above.
If Consultant or Consultant's employees will use personal autos in any way on this project,
Consultant shall provide evidence of personal auto liability coverage for each such person.
Workers Compensation on a state - approved policy form providing statutory benefits as
required by law with employer's liability limits no lesss 4i $1,000,000 per accident or
disease.
Excess or Umbrella Liability Insurance (Over Primary) if used to meet limit requirements,
shall provide coverage at least as broad as specified for the underlying coverages. Any
such coverage provided under an umbrella liability policy shall include a drop down
provision providing primary coverage above a maximum $25,000 self- insured retention for
liability not covered by primary but covered by the umbrella. Coverage shall be provided on
a "pay on behalf' basis, with defense costs payable in addition to policy limits. Policy shall
contain a provision obligating insurer at the time insured's liability is determined, not
requiring actual payment by the insured first. There shall be no cross liability exclusion
precluding coverage for claims or suits by one insured against another. Coverage shall be
applicable to City for injury to employees of Consultant, subconsultants or others involved
in the Work. The scope of coverage provided is subject to approval of City following receipt
of proof of insurance as required herein. Limits are subject to review but in no event less
than $ per occurrence.
D -1
[insert Name of Company]
Page 2 of [insert last page number of agreement]
Professional Liability or Errors and Omissions Insurance as appropriate shall be written on
a policy form coverage specifically designed to protect against acts, errors or omissions of
the consultant and "Covered Professional Services" as designated in the policy must
specifically include work performed under this agreement. The policy limit shall be no less
than $1,000,000 per claim and in the aggregate. The policy must "pay on behalf of the
insured and must include a provision establishing the insurer's duty to defend. The policy
retroactive date shall be on or before the effective date of this agreement.
Insurance procured pursuant to these requirements shall be written by insurers that are
admitted carriers in the state of California and with an A.M. Bests rating of A- or better and
a minimum financial size VII.
General conditions pertaining to provision of insurance coverage by Consultant.
Consultant and City agree to the following with respect to insurance provided by
Consultant:
1. Consultant agrees to have its insurer endorse the third party general liability
coverage required herein to include as additional insureds City, its officials,
employees and agents, using standard ISO endorsement No. CG 2010 with an
edition prior to 1992. Consultant also agrees to require all contractors, and
subcontractors to do likewise.
2. No liability insurance coverage provided to comply with this Agreement shall
prohibit Consultant, or Consultant's employees, or agents, from waiving the right
of subrogation prior to a loss. Consultant agrees to waive subrogation rights
against City regardless of the applicability of any insurance proceeds, and to
require all contractors and subcontractors to do likewise.
3. All insurance coverage and limits provided by Contractor and available or
amplicable to this agreement are intended to apply to the full extent of the
policies. Nothing contained in this Agreement or any other agreement relating to
the City or its operations limits the application of such insurance coverage.
4. None of the coverages required herein will be in compliance with these
requirements if they include any limiting endorsement of any kind that has not
been first submitted to City and approved of in writing.
5. No liability policy shall contain any provision or definition that would serve to
eliminate so- called "third parry action over" claims, including any exclusion for
bodily injury to an employee of the insured or of any contractor or subcontractor.
6. All coverage types and limits required are subject to approval, modification and
additional requirements by the City, as the need arises. Consultant shall not
make any reductions in scope of coverage (e.g. elimination of contractual liability
or reduction of discovery period) that may affect City's protection without City's
prior written consent.
D -2
[insert Name of Company]
Page 3 of [insert last page number of agreement]
7. Proof of compliance with these insurance requirements, consisting of certificates
of insurance evidencing all of the coverages required and an additional insured
endorsement to Consultant's general liability policy, shall be delivered to City at
or prior to the execution of this Agreement. In the event such proof of any
insurance is not delivered as required, or in the event such insurance is cancelec
at any time and no replacement coverage is provided, City has the right, but not
the duty, to obtain any insurance it deems necessary to protect its interests
under this or any other agreement and to pay the premium. Any premium so paic
by City shall be charged to and promptly paid by Consultant or deducted from
sums due Consultant, at City option.
8. Certificate(s) are to reflect that the insurer will provide 30 days notice to City of
any cancellation of coverage. Consultant agrees to require its insurer to modify
such certificates to delete any exculpatory wording stating that failure of the
insurer to mail written notice of cancellation imposes no obligation, or that any
party will "endeavor' (as opposed to being required) to comply with the
requirements of the certificate.
9. It is acknowledged by the parties of this agreement that all insurance coverage
required to be provided by Consultant or any. subcontractor, is intended to apply
first and on a primary, noncontributing basis in relation to any other insurance or
self insurance available to City.
10. Consultant agrees to ensure that subcontractors, and any other party involved
with the project who is brought onto or involved in the project by Consultant,
provide the same minimum insurance coverage required of Consultant.
Consultant agrees to monitor and review all such coverage and assumes all
responsibility for ensuring that such coverage is provided in conformity with the
requirements of this section. Consultant agrees that upon request, all
agreements with subcontractors and others engaaed-in the project will be
submitted to City for review.
11. Consultant agrees not to self- insure or to use any self- insured retentions or
deductibles on any portion of the insurance required herein and further agrees
that it will not allow any contractor, subcontractor, Architect, Engineer or other
entity or person in any way involved in the performance of work on the project
contemplated by this agreement to self- insure its obligations to City. If
Consultant's existing coverage includes a deductible or self- insured retention,
the deductible or self- insured retention must be declared to the City. At that time
the City shall review options with the Consultant, which may include reduction or
elimination of the deductible or selfinsured retention, substitution of other
coverage, or other solutions.
12. The City reserves the right at any time during the term of the contract to change
the amounts and types of insurance required by giving the Consultant ninety (90)
days advance written notice of such change. If such change results in substantial
D -3
[insert Name of Company]
Page 4 of [insert last page number of agreement]
additional cost to the Consultant, the City will negotiate additional compensation
proportional to the increased benefit to City.
13. For purposes of applying insurance coverage only, this Agreement will be
deemed to have been executed immediately upon any party hereto taking any
steps that can be deemed to be in furtherance of or towards performance of this
Agreement.
14. Consultant acknowledges and agrees that any actual or alleged failure on the
part of City to inform Consultant of non - compliance with any insurance
requirement in no way imposes any additional obligations on City nor does it
waive any rights hereunder in this or any other regard.
15. Consultant will renew the required coverage annually as long as City, or its
employees or agents face an exposure from operations of any type pursuant to
this agreement. This obligation applies whether or not the agreement is canceled
or terminated for any reason. Termination of this obligation is not effective until
City executes a written statement to that effect.
16. Consultant shall provide proof that policies of insurance required herein expiring
during the term of this Agreement have been renewed or replaced with other
policies providing at least the same coverage. Proof that such coverage has
been ordered shall be submitted prior to expiration. A coverage binder or letter
from Consultant's insurance agent to this effect is acceptable. A certificate of
insurance and /or additional insured endorsement as required in these
specifications applicable to the renewing or new coverage must be provided to
City within five days of the expiration of the coverages.
17.The provisions of any workers' compensation or similar act will not limit the
obligations of Consultant under this agreement. Consultant expressly agrees not
to mse any statutory immunity defenses under such laws with respect to City, its
employees, officials and agents.
18. Requirements of specific coverage features or limits contained in this section are
not intended as limitations on coverage, limits or other requirements nor as a
waiver of any coverage normally provided by any given policy. Specific reference
to a given coverage feature is for purposes of clarification only as it pertains to a
given issue, and is not intended by any party or insured to be limiting or all -
inclusive.
19-These insurance requirements are intended to be separate and distinct from any
other provision in this agreement and are intended by the parties here to be
interpreted as such.
20. The requirements in this Section supersede all other sections and provisions of
this Agreement to the extent that any other section or provision conflicts with or
impairs the provisions of this Section.
M .
[insert Name of Company]
Page 5 of [insert last page number of agreement]
21. Consultant agrees to be responsible for ensuring that no contract used by any
party involved in any way with the project reserves the right to charge City or
Consultant for the cost of additional insurance coverage required by this
agreement. Any such provisions are to be deleted with reference to City. It is not
the intent of City to reimburse any third party for the cost of complying with these
requirements. There shall be no recourse against City for payment of premiums
or other amounts with respect thereto.
Consultant agrees to provide immediate notice to City of any claim or loss against
Consultant arising out of the work performed under this agreement. City assumes no
obligation or liability by such notice, but has the right (but not the duty) to monitor the
handling of any such claim or claims if they are likely to involve City.
D -5
M.
-� III Will 1111
a m ± .A
PERFORMANCE BOND
WHEREAS the CITY OF ROSEMEAD (also herein "Obligee ") has awarded to
(hereinafter
"Contractor "), a contract for work consisting of but not limited to, furnishing all labor,
materials, tools, equipment, services, and incidentals for the ROSEMEAD CITY HALL
HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT and all other required structures and facilities within the
rights -of -way, easements and permits;
WHEREAS, the Work to be performed by the Contractor is more particularly
set forth in that certain contract for the said Public Work dated
(hereinafter the "Public Work Contract "); and
WHEREAS, the Contractor is required by said Public Work Contract to
perform the terms thereof and to provide a bond both for the performance and guaranty
thereof,
NOW, THEREFORE, we
Principal, and
the undersigned Contractor, as
corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of
, and duly authorized to transact business under the laws of the
State of California, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the CITY OF ROSEMEAD in
the sum of dollars,
($ ), said sum being not less than 100% of the total
amount payable by the said Obligee under the terms of the said Public Work Contract, for
which payment well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors and
administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the Principal, his
or its heirs, executors, administrators, successors or assigns, shall in all things stand to and
abide by, and well and truly keep and perform the covenants, conditions and agreements in
the said Public Work Contract and any alteration thereof made as therein provided, on his
or their part, to be kept and performed at the time and in the manner therein specified, and
in all respects according to their intent and meaning; and shall faithfully fulfill the one -year
guarantee of all materials and workmanship; and indemnify and save harmless the
Obligee, its officers and agents, as stipulated in the said Public Work Contract, then this
obligation shall become null and void; otherwise it shall be and remain in full force and
effect. In the event legal action is required to enforce the provisions of this agreement, the
prevailing parry shall be entitled to recover reasonable attorneys' fees in addition to court
costs, necessary disbursements, and other damages.
In case legal action is required to enforce the provisions of this bond, the
prevailing parry shall be entitled to recover reasonable attorneys' fees in addition to court
costs, necessary disbursements and other consequential damages.
PERFORMANCE BOND - 1
The said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no
change, extensions of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Public Work Contract
or to the Work to be performed thereunder, or the specifications accompanying the same
shall in any way affect its obligations on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any
such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract, or to the
Work or to Specifications.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, we have hereto set our hands and seals this
day on 20.
Principal /Contractor
By:
President
Surety
By:
Attorney -in -Fact
The rate of premium on this bond is per thousand.
The total amount of premium charged,
(The above must be filled in by corporate surety.)
PERFORMANCE BOND - 2
STATE OF CALIFORNIA )
ss.
COUNTY OF )
On this day of , in the year , before me,
Personally appeared a Notary Public in and for said state,
, known to me
(or proved to be on the basis of satisfactory evidence) to be the person whose name is
subscribed to the within instrument as the Attorney -in -Fact of the
(surety) and acknowledged to me that he
subscribed the name of the (surety)
thereto and his own name as Attorney -in -Fact.
(SEAL)
My Commission expires
Notary Public in and for said State
PERFORMANCE BOND - 3
CERTIFICATE AS TO CORPORATE PRINCIPAL
named as principal to the
certify that I am the
_ Secretary of the corporation
within bond; that
who signed the said bond on behalf
of the principal was then of said
corporation; that I know his signature, and his signature thereto is genuine; and that said
bond was duly signed, sealed and attested for and in behalf of said corporation by authority
of its governing Board.
(Corporate Seal)
Signature
Date
NOTE: A copy of the power of attorney to local representatives of the bonding company
may be attached hereto.
PERFORMANCE BOND - 4
•• �I
R OSEMEAD CITY HALL HVAC REPLACEMENT
PR
P • 31
PAYMENT (MATERIAL & LABOR) BOND
WHEREAS the CITY OF ROSEMEAD (hereinafter "Obligee ") has awarded to
(hereinafter
"Contractor "), a contract for work consisting of but not limited to, furnishing all labor,
materials, tools, equipment, services, and incidentals for the ROSEMEAD CITY HALL
HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT and all other required structures and facilities within the
rights -of -way, easements and permits;
WHEREAS, the Work to be performed by the Contractor is more particularly
set forth in that certain contract for the said Public Work dated
, (hereinafter the "Public Work Contract "); and
WHEREAS, said Contractor is required to furnish a bond in connection with
said Public Work Contract providing that if said Contractor or any of his or its
subcontractors shall fail to pay for any materials, provisions, or other supplies, or terms
used in, upon, for or about the performance of the Work contracted to be done, or for any
work or labor done thereon of any kind, or for amounts due under the provisions of 3248 of
the California Civil Code, with respect to such work or labor, that the Surety on this bond
will pay the same together with a reasonable attorney's fee in case suit is brought on the
bond.
NOW, THEREFORE, we
the undersigned Contractor, as Principal
and , a corporation
organized and existing under the laws of the State of
and duly authorized to transact business under the laws of the State of California, as
Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the CITY OF ROSEMEAD and to any and all
material men, persons, companies or corporations furnishing materials, provisions, and
other supplies used in, upon, for or about the performance of the said Public Work, and all
persons, companies or corporations renting or hiring teams, or implements or machinery,
for or contributing to said Public Work to be done, and all persons performing work or labor
upon the same and all persons supplying both work and materials as aforesaid excepting
the said Contractor, the sum of dollars,
($ ), said sum being not less than 100% of the total amount payable by
said Obligee under the terms of the said Public Work Contract, for which payment well and
truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors and administrators, successors
and assigns jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH that if the Principal, his or
its subcontractors, heirs, executors, administrators, successors, or assigns, shall fail to pay
for any materials, provisions, or other supplies or machinery used in, upon, for or about the
performance of the Work contracted to be done, or for work or labor thereon of any kind, or
fail to pay any of the persons named in California Civil Code Section 3181, or amounts due
under the Unemployment Insurance Code with respect to work or labor performed by any
such claimant, or for any amounts required to be deducted, withheld, and paid over to the
PAYMENT BOND - 1
Employment Development Department from the wages of employees of the contractor and
his subcontractors pursuant to Section 13020 of the Unemployment Insurance Code with
respect to such work and labor, and all other applicable laws of the State of California and
rules and regulations of its agencies, then said Surety will pay the same in or to an amount
not exceeding the sum specified herein.
In case legal action is required to enforce the provisions of this bond, the
prevailing parry shall be entitled to recover reasonable attorneys' fees in addition to court
costs, necessary disbursements and other consequential damages. In addition to the
provisions hereinabove, it is agreed that this bond will inure to the benefit of any and all
persons, companies and corporations entitled to make claims under Sections 3110, 3111,
3112 and 3181 of the California Civil Code, so as to give a right of action to them or their
assigns in any suit brought upon this bond.
The said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no
change, extension of time, alteration or additions to the terms of the said Public Work
Contract or to the Work to be performed thereunder or the specification accompanying the
same shall in anyway affect its obligations on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of
any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract or to
the Work or to the Specifications.
day on
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, we have hereto set our hands and seals this
20
Principal /Contractor
By:
President
Surety
By:
Attorney -in -Fact
PAYMENT BOND - 2
STATE OF CALIFORNIA )
COUNTY OF ) ss.
On this day of in the year ,
before me, , a Notary Public in and
for said state, personally appeared
known to me (or proved to be on the basis of satisfactory evidence) to be the person
whose name is subscribed to the within instrument as the Attorney -in -Fact of the
(surety) and acknowledged to me that he
subscribed the name of the (surety) thereto and his
own name as Attorney -in -Fact.
(SEAL)
My Commission Expires
Notary Public in and for said State
PAYMENT BOND - 3
CERTIFICATE AS TO CORPORATE PRINCIPAL
, certify that I am the
Secretary of the corporation named as principal in the attached bond,
that who signed the said bond on behalf of
the principal was then of said corporation;
that I know his signature, and his signature thereto is genuine; and that said bond was duly
signed, sealed and attested for and in behalf of said corporation by authority of its
governing Board.
(Corporate Seal)
Signature
Date
NOTE: A copy of the power of attorney to local representatives of the bonding company
may be attached hereto.
PAYMENT BOND - 4
ROSEMEAD CITY HALL HVAC REPLACEMENT
PROJECT
PROJECT i0
Federal Labor Standards Provisions
Applicability
The Project or Program to which the construction work covered
by this contract pertains is being assisted by the United States of
America and the following Federal Labor Standards Provisions
are included in this Contract pursuant to the provisions applicable
to such Federal assistance.
A. 1. (1) Minimum Wages. All laborers and mechanics em-
ployed or working upon the site of the work will be paid uncondi-
tionally and not less often than once a week, and without subse-
quent deduction or rebate on any account (except such payroll
deductions as are permitted by regulations issued by the Secre-
tary of Labor under the Copeland Act (29 CFR Part 3), the full
amount of wages and bona fide fringe benefits (or cash equiva-
lents thereof) due at time of payment computed at rates not less
than those contained in the wage determination of the Secretary
of Labor which is attached hereto and made a part hereof, re-
gardless of any contractual relationship which may be alleged to
exist between the contractor and such laborers and mechanics.
Contributions made or costs reasonably anticipated for bona fide
fringe benefits under Section I(b)(2) of the Davis -Bacon Act on
behalf of laborers or mechanics are considered wages paid to
such laborers or mechanics, subject to the provisions of 29 CFR
5.5(a)(1)(iv); also, regular contributions made or costs incurred
for more than a weekly period (but not less often than quarterly)
under plans, funds, or programs, which cover the particular weekly
period, are deemed to be constructively made or incurred during
such weekly period.
Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid the appropriate wage
rate and fringe benefits on the wage determination for the classi-
fication of work actually performed, without regard to skill, except
as provided in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(4). Laborers or mechanics per-
forming work in more than one classification may be compensated
at the rate specified for each classification for the time actually
worked therein: Provided, That the employer's payroll records
accurately set forth the time spent in each classification in which
work is performed. The wage determination (including any addi-
tional classification and wage rates conformed under 29 CFR
5.5(a)(1)(ii) and the Davis -Bacon poster (WH-1 321) shall be posted
at all times by the contractor and its subcontractors at the site of
the work in a prominent and accessible, place where it can be
easily seen by the workers.
(ii) (a) Any class of laborers or mechanics which is not listed in
the wage determination and which is to be employed under the
contract shall be classified in conformance with the wage deter-
mination. HUD shall approve an additional classification and wage
rate and fringe benefits therefor only when the following criteria
have been met:
(1) The work to be performed by the classification requested is
not performed by a classification in the wage determination; and
(2) The classification is utilized in the area by the construction
industry; and
(3) The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe ben-
efits, bears a reasonable relationship to the wage rates contained
in the wage determination.
(b) If the contractor and the laborers and mechanics to be em-
ployed in the classification (if known), or their representatives,
and HUD or its designee agree on the classification and wage
rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits where
U.S. Department of Housing
and Urban Development
Office of Labor Relations
appropriate), a report of the action taken shall be sent by HUD or
its designee to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division,
Employment Standards Administration, U.S. Department of La-
bor, Washington, D.C. 20210. The Administrator, or an authorized
representative, will approve, modify, or disapprove every additional
classification action within 30 days of receipt and so advise HUD
or its designee or will notify HUD or its designee within the 30 -day
period that additional time is necessary. (Approved by the Office
of Management and Budget under OMB control number 1215-
0140.)
(c) In the event the contractor, the laborers or mechanics to be
employed in the classification or their representatives, and HUD
or its designee do not agree on the proposed classification and
wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits,
where appropriate), HUD or its designee shall refer the questions,
including the views of all interested parties and the recommenda-
tion of HUD or its designee, to the Administrator for determina-
tion. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will is-
sue a determination within 30 days of receipt and so advise HUD
or its designee or will notify HUD or its designee within the 30 -day
period that additional time is necessary. (Approved by the Office
of Management and Budget under OMB Control Number 1215-
0140.)
(d) The wage rate (including fringe benefits where appropriate)
determined pursuant to subparagraphs (1)(ii)(b) or (c) of this para-
graph, shall be paid to all workers performing work in the classifi-
cation under this contract from the first day on which work is per-
formed in the classification.
(iii) Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the contract
for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe benefit which
is not expressed as an hourly rate, the contractor shall either pay
the benefit as stated in the wage determination or shall pay an-
other bona fide fringe benefit or an hourly cash equivalent thereof.
(iv) If the contractor does not make payments to a trustee or
other third person, the contractor may consider as part of the
wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs rea-
sonably anticipated in providing bona fide fringe benefits under a
plan or program, Provided, That the Secretary of Labor has found,
upon the written request of the contrcv t,,r, g nat the applicable stan-
dards of the Davis -Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of
Labor may require the contractor to set aside in a separate ac-
count assets for the meeting of obligations under the plan or pro-
gram. (Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under
OMB Control Number 1215 - 0140.)
2. Withholding. HUD or its designee shall upon its own action or
upon written request of an authorized representative of the De-
partment of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld from the con-
tractor under this contract or any other Federal contract with the
same prime contractor, or any other Federally- assisted contract
subject to Davis -Bacon prevailing wage requirements, which is
held by the same prime contractor so much of the accrued pay-
ments or advances as may be considered necessary to pay la-
borers and mechanics, including apprentices, trainees and help-
ers, employed by the contractor or any subcontractor the full
amount of wages required by the contract. In the event of failure
to pay any laborer or mechanic, including any apprentice, trainee
or helper, employed or working on the site of the work, all or part
form HUD -4010 (07/2003)
Previous edition is obsolete Page 1 of 4
ref. Handbook 1344.1
of the wages required by the contract, HUD or its designee may,
after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner,
take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension
of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds until such
violations have ceased. HUD or its designee may, after written
notice to the contractor, disburse such amounts withheld for and
on account of the contractor or subcontractor to the respective
employees to whom they are due. The Comptroller General shall
make such disbursements in the case of direct Davis -Bacon Act
contracts.
3. (i) Payrolls and basic records. Payrolls and basic records
relating thereto shall be maintained by the contractor during the
course of the work preserved for a period of three years thereaf-
ter for all laborers and mechanics working at the site of the work.
Such records shall contain the name, address, and social secu-
rity number of each such worker, his or her correct classification,
hourly rates of wages paid (including rates of contributions or costs
anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits or cash equivalents thereof
of the types described in Section I(b)(2)(B) of the Davis -bacon
Act), daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made
and actual wages paid. Whenever the Secretary of Labor has
found under 29 CFR 5.5 (a)(1)(ty) that the wages of any laborer or
mechanic include the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated
in providing benefits under a plan or program described in Sec-
tion I(b)(2)(B) of the Davis -Bacon Act, the contractor shall main-
tain records which show that the commitment to provide such
benefits is enforceable, that the plan or program is financially re-
sponsible, and that the plan or program has been communicated
in writing to the laborers or mechanics affected, and records which
show the costs anticipated or the actual cost incurred in providing
such benefits. Contractors employing apprentices or trainees
under approved programs shall maintain written evidence of the
registration of apprenticeship programs and certification of trainee
programs, the registration of the apprentices and trainees, and
the ratios and wage rates prescribed in the applicable programs.
(Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under OMB
Control Numbers 1215 -0140 and 1215 - 0017.)
(if) (a) The contractor shall submit weekly for each week in which
any contract work is performed a copy of all payrolls to HUD or its
designee if the agency is a party to the contract, but if the agency
is not such a party, the contractor will submit the payrolls to the
applicant sponsor, or owner, as the case may be, for transmission
to HUD or its designee. The payrolls submitted shall set out ac-
curately and completely all of the information, required to be main-
tained under 29 CFR 5.5(aj(3)(i). This informu ion may be submit-
ted in any form desired. Optional Form WH -347 is available for
this purpose and may be purchased from the Superintendent of
Documents (Federal Stock Number 029- 005- 00014 -1), U.S. Gov-
ernment Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402. The prime con-
tractor is responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls by
all subcontractors. (Approved by the Office of Management and
Budget under OMB Control Number 1215- 0149.)
(b) Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a 'State-
ment of Compliance;' signed by the contractor or subcontractor or
his or her agent who pays or supervises the payment of the per-
sons employed under the contract and shall certify the following:
(1) That the payroll for the payroll period contains the information
required to be maintained under 29 CFR 5.5 (a)(3)(i) and that
such information is correct and complete;
(2) That each laborer or mechanic (including each helper, ap-
prentice, and trainee) employed on the contract during the payroll
period has been paid the full weekly wages earned, without re-
bate, either directly or indirectly, and that no deductions have been
made either directly or indirectly from the full wages earned, other
than permissible deductions as set forth in 29 CFR Part 3;
(3) That each laborer or mechanic has been paid not less than
the applicable wage rates and fringe benefits or cash equivalents
for the classification of work performed, as specified in the appli-
cable wage determination incorporated into the contract.
(c) The weekly submission of a properly executed certification
set forth on the reverse side of Optional Form WH -347 shall sat-
isfy the requirement for submission of the "Statement of Compli-
ance" required by subparagraph A.3.(ii)(b).
(d) The falsification of any of the above certifications may subject
the contractor or subcontractor to civil or criminal prosecution
under Section 1001 of Title 18 and Section 231 of Title 31 of the
United States Code.
(iii) The contractor or subcontractor shall make the records re-
quired under subparagraph A.3.(i) available for inspection, copy-
ing, or transcription by authorized representatives of HUD or its
designee or the Department of Labor, and shall permit such rep-
resentatives to interview employees during working hours on the
job. If the contractor or subcontractor fails to submit the required
records or to make them available, HUD or its designee may, after
written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant or owner, take
such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any
further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds. Furthermore,
failure to submit the required records upon request or to make
such records available may be grounds for debarment action pur-
suant to 29 CFR 5.12..
4. Apprentices and Trainees.
(i) Apprentices. Apprentices will be permitted to work at less
than the predetermined rate for the work they performed when
they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a
bona fide apprenticeship program registered with the U.S. De-
partment of Labor, Employment and Training Administration, Of-
fice of Apprenticeship Training, Employer and Labor Services, or
with a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Office, or if
a person is employed in his or her first 90 days of probationary
employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship program,
who is not individually registered in the program, but who has
been certified by the Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer
and Labor Services or a State Apprenticeship Agency (where
appropriate). to be eligible for probationary employment as an
apprentice: The allowable ratio of apprentices to journeymen on
the job site in any craft classification shall not be greater than the
ratio permitted to the contractor as to the entire work force under
the registered program. Any worker listed on a payroll at an ap-
prentice wage rate, who is not registered or otherwise employed
as stated above, shall be paid not less than the applicable wage
rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actu-
ally performed. In addition, any apprentice performing work on
the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered
program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on
the wage determination for the work actually performed. Where a
contractor is performing construction on a project in a locality other
than that in which its program is registered, the ratios and wage
rates (expressed in percentages of the journeyman's hourly rate)
specified in the contractor's or subcontractor's registered program
shall be observed. Every apprentice must be paid at not less
than the rate specified in the registered program for the
apprentice's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the
form HUD -4010 (07/2003)
Previous edition is obsolete Page 2 of 4
ref. Handbook 1344.1
journeymen hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determi-
nation. Apprentices shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance
with the provisions of the apprenticeship program. If the appren-
ticeship program does not specify fringe benefits, apprentices must
be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage deter-
mination for the applicable classification. if the Administrator de-
termines that a different practice prevails for the applicable ap-
prentice classification, fringes shall be paid in accordance with
that determination. In the event the Office of Apprenticeship Train-
ing, Employer and Labor Services, or a State Apprenticeship
Agency recognized by the Office, withdraws approval of an ap-
prenticeship program, the contractor will no longer be permitted
to utilize apprentices at less than the applicable predetermined
rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is ap-
proved.
(ii) Trainees. Except as provided in 29 CFR 5.16, trainees will
not be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for
the work performed unless they are employed pursuant to and
individually registered in a program which has received prior ap-
proval, evidenced by formal certification by the U.S. Department
of Labor, Employment and Training Administration. The ratio of
trainees to journeymen on the job site shall not be greater than
permitted under the plan approved by the Employment and Train-
ing Administration. Every trainee must be paid at not less than
the rate specified in the approved program for the trainee's level
of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeyman hourly
rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Trainees shall
be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the
trainee program. If the trainee program does not mention fringe
benefits, trainees shall be paid the full amount of fringe benefits
listed on the wage determination unless the Administrator of the
Wage and Hour Division determines that there is an apprentice-
ship program associated with the corresponding journeyman wage
rate on the wage determination which provides for less than full
fringe benefits for apprentices. Any employee listed on the pay-
roll at a trainee rate who is not registered and participating in a
training plan approved by the Employment and Training Adminis-
tration shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the
wage determination for the work actually performed. In addition,
any trainee performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio
permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than
the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work
actually performed. In the event the Employment and Training
Administration withdraws approval of a training program, the con-
tractor will no longer be permitted to utilize trainees at less than
the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an
acceptable program is approved..
(iii) Equal employment opportunity. The utilization of appren-
tices, trainees and journeymen under 29 CFR Part 5 shall be in
conformity with the equal employment opportunity requirements
of Executive Order 11246, as amended, and 29 CFR Part 30.
5. Compliance with Copeland Act requirements. The contrac-
tor shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR Part 3 which are
incorporated by reference in this contract
6. Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor will insert in
any subcontracts the clauses contained in subparagraphs 1
through 11 of this paragraph A and such other clauses as HUD or
its designee may by appropriate instructions require, and a copy
of the applicable prevailing wage decision, and also a clause re-
quiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower
tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for
the compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor
with all the contract clauses in this paragraph.
Previous edition is obsolete Pa
7. Contract termination; debarment. A breach of the contract
clauses in 29 CFR 5.5 may be grounds for termination of the con-
tract and for debarment as a contractor and a subcontractor as
provided in 29 CFR 5.12.
8. Compliance with Davis -Bacon and Related Act Requirements.
All rulings and interpretations of the Davis -Bacon and Related
Acts contained in 29 CFR Parts 1, 3, and 5 are herein incorpo-
rated by reference in this contract
9. Disputes concerning labor standards. Disputes arising out
of the labor standards provisions of this contract shall not be sub-
ject to the general disputes clause of this contract. Such disputes
shall be resolved in accordance with the procedures of the De-
partment of Labor set forth in 29 CFR Parts 5, 6, and 7. Disputes
within the meaning of this clause include disputes between the
contractor (or any of its subcontractors) and HUD or its designee,
the U.S. Department of Labor, or the employees or their repre-
sentatives.
10. (1) Certification of Eligibility. By entering into this contract
the contractor certifies that neither it (nor he or she) nor any per-
son or firm who has an interest in the contractor's firm is a person
or firm ineligible to be awarded Government contracts by virtue of
Section 3(a) of the Davis -Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1) or to be
awarded HUD contracts or participate in HUD programs pursuant
to 24 CFR Part 24.
(ii) No part of this contract shall be subcontracted to any person
or firm ineligible for award of a Government contract by virtue of
Section 3(a) of the Davis -Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1) or to be
awarded HUD contracts or participate in HUD programs pursuant
to 24 CFR Part 24. _
(iii) The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in the
U.S. Criminal Code, 18 U.S.C. 1001. Additionally, U.S. Criminal
Code, Section 1 01 0, Title 18, U.S.C., "Federal Housing Adminis-
tration transactions ", provides in part: "Whoever, for the purpose
of ... influencing in any way the action of such Administration.....
makes, utters or publishes any statement knowing the same to be
false..... shall be fined not more than $5,000 or imprisoned not
more than two years, or both"
11. Complaints, Proceedings, or Testimony by Employees.
No laborer or mechanic to whom the wage, salary, or other labor
standards provisions of this Contract are applicable shall be dis-
charged or in any other manner discriminated against by the Con-
tractor or any subcontractor because such employee has filed any
complaint or instituted or caused to be in.p+" fitted any proceeding
or has testified or is about to testify in any proceeding under or
relating to the labor standards applicable under this Contract to
his employer.
B. Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. The provi-
sions of this paragraph B are applicable only where the amount of
the prime contract exceeds $100,000. As used in this paragraph, the
terms "laborers" and "mechanics" include watchmen and guards.
(1) Overtime requirements. No contractor or subcontractor con-
tracting for any part of the contract work which may require or involve
the employment of laborers or mechanics shall require or permit any
such laborer or mechanic in any workweek in which he or she is
employed on such work to work in excess of 40 hours in such work-
week unless such laborer or mechanic receives compensation at a
rate not less than one and one -half times the basic rate of pay for all
hours worked in excess of 40 hours in such workweek.
(2) Violation; liability for unpaid wages; liquidated damages.
In the event of any violation of the clause set forth in subpara-
form HUD -4010 (07/2003)
1e 3 of 4 ref. Handbook 1344.1
graph (1) of this paragraph, the contractor and any subcontractor
responsible therefor shall be liable for the unpaid wages. In addi-
tion, such contractor and subcontractor shall be liable to the United
States (in the case of work done under contract for the District of
Columbia or a territory, to such District or to such territory), for
liquidated damages. Such liquidated damages shall be computed
with respect to each individual laborer or mechanic, including
watchmen and guards, employed in violation of the clause set
forth in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph, in the sum of $10 for
each calendar day on which such individual was required or permit-
ted to work in excess of the standard workweek of 40 hours without
payment of the overtime wages required by the clause set forth in
sub paragraph (1) of this paragraph.
(3) Withholding for unpaid wages and liquidated damages.
HUD or its designee shall upon its own action or upon written
request of an authorized representative of the Department of La-
bor withhold or cause to be withheld, from any moneys payable
on account of work performed by the contractor or subcontractor
under any such contract or any other Federal contract with the
same prime contract, or any other Federally- assisted contract
subject to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act
which is held by the same prime contractor such sums as may be
determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such con-
tractor or subcontractor for unpaid wages and liquidated damages
as provided in the clause set forth in subparagraph (2) of this
paragraph.
(4) Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert
in any subcontracts the clauses set forth in subparagraph (1)
through (4) of this paragraph and also a clause requiring the sub-
contractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts.
The prime contractor shall be responsible for compliance by any
subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with the clauses set forth
in subparagraphs (1) through (4) of this paragraph.
C. Health and Safety. The provisions of this paragraph C are ap-
plicable only where the amount of the prime contract exceeds
$100,000.
(1) No laborer or mechanic shall be required to work in surround-
ings or under working conditions which are unsanitary, hazard-
ous, or dangerous to his health and safety as determined under
construction safety and health standards promulgated by the Sec-
retary of Labor by regulation.
(2) The Contractor shall comply with all regulations issued by the
Secretary of Labor pursuant to Title 29 Part 1926 and failure to
comply may result in imposition of sanctions pursuant to the Con-
tract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, 40 USC 3701 et sea
(3) The Contractor shall include the provisions of this para-
graph in every subcontract so that such provisions will be
binding on each subcontractor. The Contractor shall take such
action with respect to any subcontract as the Secretary of
Housing and Urban Development or the Secretary of Labor
shall direct as a means of enforcing such provisions.
Previous edition is obsolete
Page 4 of 4
ref. Handbook 1344.
• ! •:: � !:
• T
P
• • WE
Page 1 of 23
General Decision Number: CA100033 09/16/2011 CA33
Superseded General Decision Number: CA20080033
State: California
Construction Types: Building, Heavy (Heavy and Dredging) and
Highway
County: Los Angeles County in California.
BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS; DREDGING PROJECTS (does not
include hopper dredge work); HEAVY CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does
not include water well drilling); HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS
Modification Number
Publication Date
0
03/12/2010
1
03/26/2010
2
04/02/2010
3
04/16/2010
4
06/04/2010
5
06/25/2010
6
07/02/2010
7
07/23/2010
8
08/06/2010
9
08/13/2010
10
08/27/2010
11
09/03/2010
12
09/10/2010
13
09/24/2010
14
10/08/2010
15
12/03/2010
16
01/21/2011
17
02/18/2011
18
03/04/2011
19
04/08/2011
20
04/15/2011
21
04/29/2011
22
05/06/2011
23
05/20/2011
24
05/271.:'i111 - -
25
06/03/2011
26
06/10/2011
27
07/22/2011
28
07/29/2011
29
08/05/2011
30
08/19/2011
31
09/02/2011
32
09/16/2011
ASBE0005 -002 06/28/2010
Rates Fringes
Asbestos Workers /Insulator
(Includes the application of
all insulating materials,
protective coverings,
coatings, and finishes to all
types of mechanical systems) ..... $ 32.79 16.31
Fire Stop Technician
(Application of Firestopping
http: / /www.wdol.gov /wdol /scafiles /davisbacon/CA33.dvb 09/22/2011
Page 2 of 23
Materials for wall openings
and penetrations in walls,
floors, ceilings and curtain
walls ) ...........................$ 24.21 13.76
ASBE0005 -004 06/28/2010
Rates
Asbestos Removal
worker /hazardous material
handler (Includes
preparation, wetting,
stripping, removal,
scrapping, vacuuming, bagging
and disposing of all
insulation materials from
mechanical systems, whether
they contain asbestos or not) .... $ 18.70
BOIL0092 -003 05/01/2011
Rates
BOILERMAKER ......................$ 41.26
* BRCA0004 -007 05/01/2011
Rates
BRICKLAYER; MARBLE SETTER ........ $ 36.41
Fringes
�c
Fringes
25.27
Fringes
12.40
*The wage scale for prevailing wage projects performed in
Blythe, China lake, Death Valley, Fort Irwin, Twenty -Nine
Palms, Needles and 1 -15 corridor (Barstow to the Nevada
State Line) will be Three Dollars ($3.00) above the
standard San Bernardino /Riverside County hourly wage rate
* BRCA0018 -004 06/01/2011
Rates Fringes
MARBLE FINISHER ..................$ 27.04 9.77
TILE FINISHER ....................$ 22.37 8.30
TILE LAYER .......................$ 33.55 12.66
BRCA0018 -010 09/01/2009
Rates Fringes
TERRAZZO FINISHER ................$ 26.59 9.62
TERRAZZO WORKER/SETTER ........... $ 33.63 10.46
----------------- ----------------------------------------
CARPO409 -001 07/01/2010
Rates Fringes
CARPENTER
(1) Carpenter, Cabinet
Installer, Insulation
Installer, Hardwood Floor
Worker and acoustical
installer, and solar panels.$ 37.35 11.08
(2) Millwright ..............$ 37.85 11.08
http:// www. wdol. gov/ wdol /scafiles /davisbacon/CA33.dvb
09/22/2011
Page 3 of 23
(3) Piledriver /Derrick
Bargeman, Bridge or Dock
Wet .....................$
663.68
Carpenter, Heavy Framer,
Standby .................$
331.84
Rock Bargeman or Scowman,
Tender ..................$
323.84
Rockslinger, Shingler
Assistant Tender ........
$
299.84
(Commercial) ................$
37.48
11.08
(4) Pneumatic Nailer,
Power Stapler ...............$
37.60
11.08
(5) Sawfiler ...............$
37.44
11.08
(6) Scaffold Builder .......
$
28.55
11.08
(7) Table Power Saw
Operator ....................$
37.45
11.08
FOOTNOTE: Work of forming in the construction of open cut
sewers or storm drains, on operations in which horizontal
lagging is used in conjunction with steel H -Beams driven or
placed in pre- drilled holes, for that portion of a lagged
trench against which concrete is poured, namely, as a
substitute for back forms (which work is performed by
piledrivers): $0.13 per hour additional. Certified Welder
- $1.00 per hour premium.
CARPO409 -002 07/01/2008
Rates
Diver
(1)
Wet .....................$
663.68
(2)
Standby .................$
331.84
(3)
Tender ..................$
323.84
(4)
Assistant Tender ........
$
299.84
Amounts in "Rates' column are per day
CARPO409 -005 07/01/2010
Rates
Drywall
DRYWALL INSTALLER/LATHER .... $ 37.35
STOCKER/SCRAPPER ............ $ 10.00
------------------
CARPO409 -008 08/01/2010
Rates
Modular Furniture Installer ...... $ 17.00
__.'--------------------------------------
ELECO011 -004 07/25/2011
Rates
ELECTRICIAN (INSIDE
ELECTRICAL WORK)
Journeyman Electrician ...... $ 36.45
ELECTRICIAN (INTELLIGENT
TRANSPORTATION SYSTEMS Street
Lighting, Traffic Signals,
CCTV,and Underground Systems)
Journeyman Transportation
Electrician .................$ 36.25
Technician ..................$ 27.19
FOOT NOTE:
Fringes
9.82
9.82
9.82
9.82
Fringes
11.08
6.67
Fringes
7.41
---------------
Fringes
23.26
23.46
23.19
http: / /www.wdol.gov /wdol /scafiles /davisbacon/CA33.dvb 09/22/2011
Page 4 of 23
CABLE SPLICER & INSTRUMENT PERSON: Recieve 5°% additional per
hour above Journeyman Electrician basic hourly rate.
TUNNEL WORK: 10% additional per hour.
SCOPE OF WORK - TRANSPORTATION SYSTEMS
ELECTRICIAN:
Installation of street lights and traffic signals,including
electrical circuitry, programmable controllers,
pedestal- mounted electrical meter enclosures and laying of
pre - assembled multi- conductor cable in ducts, layout of
electrical systems and communication installation,
including proper position of trench depths and radius at
duct banks, location for man
holes, pull boxes, street lights and traffic signals.
Installation of underground ducts for electrical,telephone,
cable television and communication systems.
Pulling,termination and
splicing of traffic signal and street lighting conductors and
electrical systems including interconnect,detector loop,
fiber optic cable and video /cable.
TECHNICIAN:
Distribution of material at job site, manual excavation and
backfill, installation of system conduits and raceways for
electrical, telephone, cable television and communication
systems. Pulling, terminating and splicing of traffic signal
and street lighting conductors and electrical systems
including interconnect, detector loop, fiber optic cable
and video /data.
---------------------------------------------------------------
* ELEC0011 -005 07/25/2011
COMMUNICATIONS & SYSTEMS WORK (excludes any work on Intelligent
Transportation Systems or CCTV highway systems)
Rates Fringes
Communications System
Installer ...................$ 27.25 11.35
Technician ..................$ 30.23 8.85 +3%
SCOPE OF WORK The work covered shall include the
installation, testing, service and maintenance, of the
following systems that utilize the transmission and /or
transference of voice, sound, vision and digital for
commercial, education, security and entertainment purposes
for TV monitoring and surveillance, background foreground
music, intercom and telephone interconnect, inventory
control systems, microwave transmission, multi - media,
multiplex, nurse call system, radio page, school intercom
and sound, burglar alarms and low voltage master clock
systems.
A. Communication systems that transmit or receive information
and /or control systems that are intrinsic to the above
listed systems SCADA (Supervisory control /data acquisition
PCM (Pulse code modulation) Inventory control systems
Digital data systems Broadband & baseband and carriers
Point of sale systems VSAT data systems Data communication
systems RF and remote control systems Fiber optic data
systems
http:// www. wdol. gov/ wdol /scafiles /davisbacon/CA33.dvb 09/22/2011
Page 5 of 23
B. Sound and Voice Transmission /Transference Systems
Background- Foreground Music Intercom and Telephone
Interconnect Systems Sound and Musical Entertainment
Systems Nurse Call Systems Radio Page Systems School
Intercom and Sound Systems Burglar Alarm Systems
Low - Voltage Master Clock Systems Multi- Media /Multiplex
Systems Telephone Systems RF Systems and Antennas and Wave
Guide
C. *Fire Alarm Systems - installation, wire pulling and
testing.
D. Television and Video Systems Television Monitoring and
Surveillance Systems Video Security Systems Video
Entertainment Systems Video Educational Systems CATV and
CCTV
E. Security Systems, Perimeter Security Systems, Vibration
Sensor Systems
Sonar /Infrared Monitoring Equipment, Access Control Systems,
Card Access Systems
*Fire Alarm Systems
1. Fire Alarms -In Raceways: Wire and cable pulling in
raceways performed at the current electrician wage rate and
fringe benefits. Installation and termination of devices,
panels, startup, testing and programmming performed by the
Technician.
2. Fire Alarms -Open Wire Systems: installed by the Technician.
----------------------------------------------------------------
ELEC1245 -001 06/01/2010
Rates Fringes
LINE CONSTRUCTION
12.36
(1) Lineman; Cable splicer..$
12.10
(2) Equipment specialist
12.53
(operates crawler
tractors, commercial motor
vehicles, backhoes,
trenchers, cranes (50 tons
and below), overhead &
underground distribution
line equipment) ...........
$
(3) Groundman ...............$
(4) Powderman ...............$
46.14 13.41
36.85
12.36
28.19
12.10
41.20
12.53
HOLIDAYS: New Year's Day, M.L. King Day, Memorial Day,
Independence Day, Labor Day, Veterans Day, Thanksgiving Day
and day after Thanksgiving, Christmas Day
ELEV0018 -001 01/01/2011
Rates Fringes
ELEVATOR MECHANIC ................$ 46.58 21.785
FOOTNOTE:
PAID VACATION: Employer contributes 80 of regular hourly
rate as vacation pay credit for employees with more than 5
years of service, and 6% for 6 months to 5 years of service.
PAID HOLIDAYS: New Years Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day,
Labor Day, Veterans Day, Thanksgiving Day, Friday after
Thanksgiving, and Christmas Day.
http:// www. wdol. gov/ wdo l /scafiles /davisbacon/CA33.dvb 09/22/2011
Page 6 of 23
- --
ENGI0012 -003 07/01/2011
--
------
- - - - -- - --
Rates
Fringes
OPERATOR:
Power Equipment
(All Other
Work)
GROUP
1 ....................$
36.13
20.77
GROUP
2 ....................$
36.91
20.77
GROUP
3 ....................$
37.20
20.77
GROUP
4 ....................$
38.69
20.77
GROUP
5 ....................$
40.49
20.77
GROUP
6 ....................$
38.91
20.77
GROUP
8 ....................$
39.02
20.77
GROUP
9 ....................$
40.82
20.77
GROUP
10 ....................$
39.14
20.77
GROUP
11 ....................$
40.94
20.77
GROUP
12 ....................$
39.31
20.77
GROUP
13 ....................$
39.41
20.77
GROUP
14 ....................$
39.44
20.77
GROUP
15 ....................$
39.52
20.77
GROUP
16 ....................$
39.64
20.77
GROUP
17 ....................$
39.81
20.77
GROUP
18 ....................$
39.91
20.77
GROUP
19 ....................$
40.02
20.77
GROUP
20 ....................$
40.14
20.77
GROUP
21 ....................$
40.31
20.77
GROUP
22 ....................$
40.41
20.77
GROUP
23 ....................$
40.52
20.77
GROUP
24 ....................$
40.64
20.77
GROUP
25 ....................$
40.81
20.77
OPERATOR:
Power Equipment
(Cranes, Piledriving &
Hoisting)
GROUP
1 ....................$
37.48
20.77
GROUP
2 ....................$
38.26
20.77
GROUP
3 ....................$
38.55
20.77
GROUP
4 ....................$
38.69
20.77
GROUP
5 ....................$
38.91
20.77
GROUP
6 ....................$
39.02
20.77
GROUP
7 ....................$
39.14
20.77
GROUP
8 ....................$
39.31
20.77
GROUP
9 ....................$
39.48
20.77
GROUP
10 ....................$
40.48
20.77
GROUP
11 ....................$
41.48
20.77
GROUP
12 ....................$
42.48
20.77
GROUP
13 ....................$
43.48
20.77
OPERATOR:
Power Equipment
(Tunnel Work)
GROUP
1 ....................$
37.98
20.77
GROUP
2 ....................$
38.76
20.77
GROUP
3 ....................$
39.05
20.77
GROUP
4 ....................$
39.19
20.77
GROUP
5 ....................$
39.41
20.77
GROUP
6 ....................$
39.52
20.77
GROUP
7 ....................$
39.64
20.77
PREMIUM PAY:
$3.75 per hour shall be paid on all Power Equipment Operator
work on the followng Military Bases: China Lake Naval
Reserve, Vandenberg AFB, Point Arguello, Seely Naval Base,
Fort Irwin, Nebo Annex Marine Base, Marine Corp Logistics
Base Yermo, Edwards AFB, 29 Palms Marine Base and Camp
Pendleton
http:// www. wdol. gov/ wdol /scafiles /davisbacon/CA33.dvb 09/22/2011
Page 7 of 23
Workers required to suit up and work in a hazardous material
environment: $2.00 per hour additional. Combination mixer
and compressor operator on gunite work shall be classified
as a concrete mobile mixer operator.
SEE ZONE DEFINITIONS AFTER CLASSIFICATIONS
POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS CLASSIFICATIONS
GROUP 1: Bargeman; Brakeman; Compressor operator; Ditch
Witch, with seat or similar type equipment; Elevator
operator- inside; Engineer Oiler; Forklift operator
(includes loed, lull or similar types under 5 tons;
Generator operator; Generator, pump or compressor plant
operator; Pump operator; Signalman; Switchman
GROUP 2: Asphalt- rubber plant operator (nurse tank operator);
Concrete mixer operator -skip type; Conveyor operator;
Fireman; Forklift operator (includes loed, lull or similar
types over 5 tons; Hydrostatic pump operator; oiler crusher
(asphalt or concrete plant); Petromat laydown machine; PJU
side dum jack; Screening and conveyor machine operator (or
similar types); Skiploader (wheel type up to 3/4 yd.
without attachment); Tar pot fireman; Temporary heating
plant operator; Trenching machine oiler
GROUP 3: Asphalt- rubber blend operator; Bobcat or similar
type (Skid steer); Equipment greaser (rack); Ford Ferguson
(with dragtype attachments); Helicopter radioman (ground);
Stationary pipe wrapping and cleaning machine operator
GROUP 4: Asphalt plant fireman; Backhoe operator (mini -max or
similar type); Boring machine operator; Boxman or mixerman
(asphalt or concrete); Chip spreading machine operator;
Concrete cleaning decontamination machine operator;
Concrete Pump Operator (small portable); Drilling machine
operator, small auger types (Texoma super economatic or
similar types - Hughes 100 or 200 or similar types -
drilling depth of 30' maximum); Equipment greaser (grease
truck); Guard rail post driver operator; Highline cableway
signalman; Horizontal Directional Drilling Machine;
Hydra- hammer -aero stomper; Micro T�:, ground
tunnel); Power concrete curing machine operator; Power
concrete saw operator; Power - driven jumbo form setter
operator; Power sweeper operator; Rock Wheel Saw /Trencher;
Roller operator (compacting); Screed operator (asphalt or
concrete); Trenching machine operator (up to 6 ft.); Vacuum
or much truck
GROUP 5: Equipment Greaser (Grease Truck /Multi Shift).
GROUP 6: Articulating material hauler; Asphalt plant
engineer; Batch plant operator; Bit sharpener; Concrete
joint machine operator (canal and similar type); Concrete
planer operator; Dandy digger; Deck engine operator;
Derrickman (oilfield type); Drilling machine operator,
bucket or auger types (Calweld 100 bucket or similar types
- Watson 1000 auger or similar types - Texoma 330, 500 or
600 auger or similar types - drilling depth of 45'
maximum); Drilling machine operator; Hydrographic seeder
machine operator (straw, pulp or seed), Jackson track
maintainer, or similar type; Kalamazoo Switch tamper, or
similar type; Machine tool operator; Maginnis internal full
http: / /www.wdol.gov /wdol /scafiles /davisbacon/CA33.dvb 09/22/2011
Page 8 of 23
slab vibrator, Mechanical berm, curb or gutter(concrete or
asphalt); Mechanical finisher operator (concrete,
Clary- Johnson - Bidwell or similar); Micro tunnel system
(below ground); Pavement breaker operator (truck mounted);
Road oil mixing machine operator; Roller operator (asphalt
or finish), rubber -tired earth moving equipment (single
engine, up to and including 25 yds. struck); Self - propelled
tar pipelining machine operator; Skiploader operator
(crawler and wheel type, over 3/4 yd, and up to and
including 1 -1/2 yds.); Slip form pump operator (power
driven hydraulic lifting device for concrete forms);
Tractor operator - bulldozer, tamper- scraper (single engine,
up to 100 h.p. flywheel and similar types, up to and
including D -5 and similar types); Tugger hoist operator (1
drum); Ultra high pressure waterjet cutting tool system
operator; Vacuum blasting machine operator
GROUP 8: Asphalt or concrete spreading operator (tamping or
finishing); Asphalt paving machine operator (Barber Greene
or similar type); Asphalt- rubber distribution operator;
Backhoe operator (up to and including 3/4 yd.), small ford,
Case or similar; Cast -in -place pipe laying machine
operator; Combination mixer and compressor operator (gunite
work); Compactor operator (self - propelled); Concrete mixer
operator (paving); Crushing plant operator; Drill Doctor;
Drilling machine operator, Bucket or auger types (Calweld
150 bucket or similar types - Watson 1500, 2000 2500 auger
or similar types - Texoma 700, 800 auger or similar types -
drilling depth of 60' maximum); Elevating grader operator;
Grade checker; Gradall operator; Grouting machine operator;
Heavy -duty repairman; Heavy equipment robotics operator;
Kalamazoo balliste regulator or similar type; Kolman belt
loader and similar type; Le Tourneau blob compactor or
similar type; Loader operator ( Athey, Euclid, Sierra and
similar types); Mobark Chipper or similar; Ozzie padder or
similar types; P.C. slot saw; Pneumatic concrete placing
machine operator (Hackley- Presswell or similar type);
Pumperete gun operator; Rock Drill or similar types; Rotary
drill operator (excluding caisson type); Rubber -tired
earth - moving equipment operator (single engine,
caterpillar, Euclid, Athey Wagon and similar types with any
and all attachments over 25 yds. up to and including 50 cu..
yds. struck); Rubber -tired earth - moving equipment operator
(multiple engine up to and including 25 yds. struck);
Rubber -tired scraper operator (self - loading paddle wheel
type -John Deere, 1040 and similar single unit); Self -
propelled curb and gutter machine operator; Shuttle buggy;
Skiploader operator (crawler and wheel type over 1 -1/2 yds.
up to and including 6 -1/2 yds.); Soil remediation plant
operator; Surface heaters and planer operator; Tractor
compressor drill combination operator; Tractor operator
(any type larger than D -5 - 100 flywheel h.p. and over, or
similar - bulldozer, tamper, scraper and push tractor single
engine); Tractor operator (boom attachments), Traveling
pipe wrapping, cleaning and bendng machine operator;
Trenching machine operator (over 6 ft. depth capacity,
manufacturer's rating); trenching Machine with Road Miner
attachment (over 6 ft depth capacity): Ultra high pressure
waterjet cutting tool system mechanic; Water pull
(compaction) operator
GROUP 9: Heavy Duty Repairman
GROUP 10: Drilling machine operator, Bucket or auger types
http:// www. wdol. gov/ wdol /scafiles /davisbacon/CA33.dvb 09/22/2011
Page 9 of 23
(Calweld 200 B bucket or similar types - Watson 3000 or 5000
auger or similar types - Texoma 900 auger or similar
types - drilling depth of 105' maximum); Dual drum mixer,
dynamic compactor LDC350 (or similar types); Monorail
locomotive operator (diesel, gas or electric); Motor
patrol -blade operator (single engine); Multiple engine
tractor operator (Euclid and similar type- except Quad 9
cat.); Rubber -tired earth - moving equipment operator (single
engine, over 50 yds. struck); Pneumatic pipe ramming tool
and similar types; Prestressed wrapping machine operator;
Rubber -tired earth - moving equipment operator (single
engine, over 50 yds. struck); Rubber tired earth moving
equipment operator (multiple engine, Euclid, caterpillar
and similar over 25 yds. and up to 50 yds. struck), Tower
crane repairman; Tractor loader operator (crawler and wheel
type over 6 -1/2 yds.); Woods mixer operator (and similar
Pugmill equipment)
GROUP 11: Heavy Duty Repairman - Welder Combination, Welder -
Certified.
GROUP 12: Auto grader operator; Automatic slip form operator;
Drilling machine operator, bucket or auger types (Calweld,
auger 200 CA or similar types - Watson, auger 6000 or
similar types - Hughes Super Duty, auger 200 or similar
types - drilling depth of 175' maximum); Hoe ram or similar
with compressor; Mass excavator operator less tha 750 cu.
yards; Mechanical finishing machine operator; Mobile form
traveler operator; Motor patrol operator (multi- engine);
Pipe mobile machine operator; Rubber -tired earth- moving
equipment operator (multiple engine, Euclid, Caterpillar
and similar type, over 50 cu. yds. struck); Rubber -tired
self- loading scraper operator (paddle -wheel -auger type
self - loading - two (2) or more units)
GROUP 13: Rubber -tired earth - moving equipment operator
operating equipment with push -pull system (single engine,
up to and including 25 yds. struck)
GROUP 14: Canal liner operator; Canal trimmer operator;
Remote- control earth - moving equipment operator (operating
a second piece of equipment: $1.00 per hour additional);
Wheel excavator operator (over 750 c, ,-As.)
GROUP 15: Rubber -tired earth - moving equipment operator,
operating equipment with push -pull system (single engine,
Caterpillar, Euclid, Athey Wagon and similar types with any
and all attachments over 25 yds, and up to and including 50
yds. struck); Rubber -tired earth - moving equipment operator,
operating equipment with push -pull system (multiple
engine -up to and including 25 yds. struck)
GROUP 16: Rubber -tired earth - moving equipment operator,
operating equipment with push -pull system (single engine,
over 50 yds. struck); Rubber -tired earth - moving equipment
operator, operating equipment with push -pull system
(multiple engine, Euclid, Caterpillar and similar, over 25
yds. and up to 50 yds. struck)
GROUP 17: Rubber -tired earth - moving equipment operator,
operating equipment with push -pull system (multiple engine,
Euclid, Caterpillar and similar, over 50 cu. yds. struck);
Tandem tractor operator (operating crawler type tractors in
tandem - Quad 9 and similar type)
http: / /www.wdol.gov /wdol /scafiles /davisbacon/CA33.dvb 09/22/2011
Page 10 of 23
GROUP 18: Rubber -tired earth - moving equipment operator,
operating in tandem (scrapers, belly dumps and similar
types in any combination, excluding compaction units -
single engine, up to and including 25 yds. struck)
GROUP 19: Rotex concrete belt operator (or similar types);
Rubber -tired earth - moving equipment operator, operating in
tandem (scrapers, belly dumps and similar types in any
combination, excluding compaction units - single engine,
Caterpillar, Euclid, Athey Wagon and similar types with any
and all attachments over 25 yds.and up to and including 50
cu. yds. struck); Rubber -tired earth - moving equipment
operator, operating in tandem (scrapers, belly dumps and
similar types in any combination, excluding compaction
units - multiple engine, up to and including 25 yds. struck)
GROUP 20: Rubber -tired earth - moving equipment operator,
operating in tandem (scrapers, belly dumps and similar
types in any combination, excluding compaction units -
single engine, over 50 yds. struck); Rubber -tired
earth - moving equipment operator, operating in tandem
(scrapers, belly dumps, and similar types in any
combination, excluding compaction units - multiple engine,
Euclid, Caterpillar and similar, over 25 yds. and up to 50
yds. struck)
GROUP 21: Rubber -tired earth - moving equipment operator,
operating in tandem (scrapers, belly dumps and similar
types in any combination, excluding compaction units -
multiple engine, Euclid, Caterpillar and similar type, over
50 cu. yds. struck)
GROUP 22: Rubber -tired earth - moving equipment operator,
operating equipment with the tandem push -pull system
(single engine, up to and including 25 yds. struck)
GROUP 23: Rubber -tired earth - moving equipment operator,
operating equipment with the tandem push -pull system
(single engine, Caterpillar, Euclid, Athey Wagon and
similar types with any and all attachments over 25 yds. and
up to and including 50 yds. struck); Rubber -tired
-- earth - moving equipment operator, operating with the tandem
push -pull system (multiple engine, up to and including 25
yds. struck)
GROUP 24: Rubber -tired earth - moving equipment operator,
operating equipment with the tandem push -pull system
(single engine, over 50 yds. struck); Rubber -tired
earth - moving equipment operator, operating equipment with
the tandem push -pull system (multiple engine, Euclid,
Caterpillar and similar, over 25 yds. and up to 50 yds.
struck)
GROUP 25: Concrete pump operator -truck mounted; Rubber -tired
earth - moving equipment operator, operating equipment with
the tandem push -pull system (multiple engine, Euclid,
Caterpillar and similar type, over 50 cu. yds. struck)
CRANES, PILEDRIVING AND HOISTING EQUIPMENT CLASSIFICATIONS
GROUP 1: Engineer oiler; Fork lift operator (includes loed,
lull or similar types)
http: / /www.wdol.gov /wdol /scafiles /davisbacon/CA33.dvb 09/22/2011
Page 11 of 23
GROUP 2: Truck crane oiler
GROUP 3: A -frame or winch truck operator; Ross carrier
operator (jobsite)
GROUP 4: Bridge -type unloader and turntable operator;
Helicopter hoist operator
GROUP 5: Hydraulic boom truck; Stinger crane (Austin- Western
or, similar type); Tugger hoist operator (1 drum)
GROUP 6: Bridge crane operator; Cretor crane operator; Hoist
operator (Chicago boom and similar type); Lift mobile
operator; Lift slab machine operator (Vagtborg and similar
types); Material hoist and /or manlift operator; Polar
gantry crane operator; Self Climbing scaffold (or similar
type); Shovel, backhoe, dragline, clamshell operator (over
3/4 yd. and up to 5 cu. yds. mrc); Tugger hoist operator
GROUP 7: Pedestal crane operator; Shovel, backhoe, dragline,
clamshell operator (over 5 cu. yds. mrc); Tower crane
repair; Tugger hoist operator (3 drum)
GROUP 8: Crane operator (up to and including 25 ton
capacity); Crawler transporter operator; Derrick barge
operator (up to and including 25 ton capacity); Hoist
operator, stiff legs, Guy derrick or similar type (up to
and including 25 ton capacity); Shovel, backhoe, dragline,
clamshell operator (over 7 cu. yds., M.R.C.)
GROUP 9: Crane operator (over 25 tons and up to and including
50 tons mrc); Derrick barge operator (over 25 tons up to
and including 50 tons mrc); Highline cableway operator;
Hoist operator, stiff legs, Guy derrick or similar type
(over 25 tons up to and including 50 tons mrc); K -crane
operator; Polar crane operator; Self erecting tower crane
operator maximum lifting capacity ten tons
GROUP 10: Crane operator (over 50 tons and up to and
including 100 tons mrc); Derrick barge operator (over 50
tons up to and including 100 tons mrc); Hoist operator,
stiff legs, Guy derrick or similar type (over 50 tons up to
and including 100 tons mrc), Mobile tow:.;: ..:cane_ operator
(over 50 tons, up to and including 100 tons M.R.C.); Tower
crane operator and tower gantry
GROUP 11: Crane operator (over 100 tons and up to and
including 200 tons mrc); Derrick barge operator (over 100
tons up to and including 200 tons mrc); Hoist operator,
stiff legs, Guy derrick or similar type (over 100 tons up
to and including 200 tons mrc); Mobile tower crane operator
(over 100 tons up to and including 200 tons mrc)
GROUP 12: Crane operator (over 200 tons up to and including
300 tons mrc); Derrick barge operator (over 200 tons up to
and including 300 tons mrc); Hoist operator, stiff legs,
Guy derrick or similar type (over 200 tons, up to and
including 300 tons mrc); Mobile tower crane operator (over
200 tons, up to and including 300 tons mrc)
GROUP 13: Crane operator (over 300 tons); Derrick barge
operator (over 300 tons); Helicopter pilot; Hoist operator,
stiff legs, Guy derrick or similar type (over 300 tons);
Mobile tower crane operator (over 300 tons)
http:// www. wdol. gov/ wdoUscafiles /davisbacon/CA33.dvb 09/22/2011
Page 12 of 23
TUNNEL CLASSIFICATIONS
GROUP 1: Skiploader (wheel type up to 3/4 yd. without
attachment)
GROUP 2: Power - driven jumbo form setter operator
GROUP 3: Dinkey locomotive or motorperson (up to and
including 10 tons)
GROUP 4: Bit sharpener; Equipment greaser (grease truck);
Slip form pump operator (power- driven hydraulic lifting
device for concrete forms); Tugger hoist operator (1 drum);
Tunnel locomotive operator (over 10 and up to and including
30 tons)
GROUP 5: Backhoe operator (up to and including 3/4 yd.);
Small Ford, Case or similar; Drill doctor; Grouting machine
operator; Heading shield operator; Heavy -duty repairperson;
Loader operator (Athey, Euclid, Sierra and similar types);
Mucking machine operator (1/4 yd., rubber - tired, rail or
track type); Pneumatic concrete placing machine operator
(Hackley- Presswell or similar type); Pneumatic heading
shield (tunnel); Pumperete gun operator; Tractor compressor
drill combination operator; Tugger hoist operator (2 drum);
Tunnel locomotive operator (over 30 tons)
GROUP 6: Heavy Duty Repairman
GROUP 7: Tunnel mole boring machine operator
ENGINEERS ZONES
$1.00 additional per hour for all of IMPERIAL County and the
portions of KERN, RIVERSIDE & SAN BERNARDINO Counties as
defined below:
That area within the following Boundary: Begin in San
Bernardino County, approximately 3 miles HE of the intersection
of I -15 and the California State line at that point which is
the NW corner of Section 1, T17N,m R14E, San Bernardino
"ricridian. Continue W in a straight line to that point which is
the SW corner of the northwest quarter of Section 6, T27S,
R42E, Mt. Diablo Meridian. Continue North to the intersection
with the Inyo County Boundary at that point which is the NE
corner of the western half of the northern quarter of Section
6, T25S, R42E, MDM. Continue W along the Inyo and San
Bernardino County boundary until the intersection with Kern
County, as that point which is the SE corner of Section 34,
T24S, R40E, MDM. Continue W along the Inyo and Kern County
boundary until the intersection with Tulare County, at that
point which is the SW corner of the SE quarter of Section 32,
T24S, R37E, MDM. Continue W along the Kern and Tulare County
boundary, until that point which is the NW corner of T25S,
R32E, MDM. Continue S following R32E lines to the NW corner of
T31S, R32E, MDM. Continue W to the NW corner of T31S, R31E,
MDM. Continue S to the SW corner of T32S, R31E, MDM. Continue
W to SW corner of SE quarter of Section 34, T32S, R30E, MDM.
Continue S to SW corner of T11N, R17W, SBM. Continue E along
south boundary of T11N, SBM to SW corner of T11N, R7W, SBM.
Continue S to SW corner of T9N, R7W, SBM. Continue E along
south boundary of T9N, SBM to SW corner of T9N, R1E, SBM.
Continue S along west boundary of R1E, SMB to Riverside County
http:// www. wdol. gov/ wdol /scafiles /davisbacon/CA33.dvb 09/22/2011
Page 13 of 23
line at the SW corner of T1S, R1E, SBM. Continue E along south
boundary of Tls, SBM (Riverside County Line) to SW corner of
T1S, R10E, SBM. Continue S along west boundary of R10E, SBM to
Imperial County line at the SW corner of T8S, R10E, SBM.
Continue W along Imperial and Riverside county line to NW
corner of T9S, R9E, SBM. Continue S along the boundary between
Imperial and San Diego Counties, along the west edge of R9E,
SBM to the south boundary of Imperial County /California state
line. Follow the California state line west to Arizona state
line, then north to Nevada state line, then continuing NW back
to start at the point which is the NW corner of Section 1,
T17N, R14E, SBM
$1.00 additional per hour for portions of SAN LUIS OBISPO,
KERN, SANTA BARBARA & VENTURA as defined below:
That area within the following Boundary: Begin approximately 5
miles north of the community of Cholame, on the Monterey County
and San Luis Obispo County boundary at the NW corner of T25S,
R16E, Mt. Diablo Meridian. Continue south along the west side
of R16E to the SW corner of T30S, R16E, MDM. Continue E to SW
corner of T30S, R17E, MDM. Continue S to SW corner of T31S,
R17E, MDM. Continue E to SW corner of T31S, R18E, MDM.
Continue S along West side of R18E, MDM as it crosses into San
Bernardino Meridian numbering area and becomes R30W. Follow
the west side of R30W, SBM to the SW corner of T9N, R30W, SBM.
Continue E along the south edge of T9N, SBM to the Santa
Barbara County and Ventura County boundary at that point whch
i.s the SW corner of Section 34.T9N, R24W, SBM, continue S along
the Ventura County line to that point which is the SW corner of
the SE quarter of Section 32, T7N, R24W, SBM. Continue E
along the south edge of T7N, SBM to the SE corner to T7N, R21W,
SBM. Continue N along East side of R21W, SBM to Ventura County
and Kern County boundary at the NE corner of T8N, R21W.
Continue W along the Ventura County and Kern County boundary to
the SE corner of T9N, R21W. Continue North along the East edge
of R21W, SBM to the NE corner of T12N, R21W, SBM. Continue
WeLA along the north edge of T12N, SBM to the SE corner of
T32S, R21E, MDM. [T12N SBM is a think strip between T11N SBM
and T32S MDM). Continue North along the East side of R21E, MDM
to the Kings County and Kern County border at the NE corner of
T25S, R21E, MDM, continue West along the Kings County and Kern
County Boundary until the intersection of Sa. , Obispo
Oounty. Continue west along the Kings County and San Luis
Obispo County boundary until the intersection with Monterey
County. Continue West along the Monterey County and San Luis
Obispo County boundary to the beginning point at the NW corner
of T25S, R16E, MDM.
$2.00 additional per hour for INYO and MONO Counties and the
Northern portion of SAN BERNARDINO County as defined below:
That area within the following Boundary: Begin at the
intersection of the northern boundary of Mono County and the
California state line at the point which is the center of
Section 17, T10N, R22E, Mt. Diablo Meridian. Continue S then
SE along the entire western boundary of Mono County, until it
reaches Inyo County at the point which is the NE corner of the
Western half of the NW quarter of Section 2, T8S, R29E, MDM.
Continue SSE along the entire western boundary of Inyo County,
until the intersection with Kern County at the point which is
the SW corner of the SE A, of Section 32, T24S, R37E, MDM.
Continue E along the Inyo and Kern County boundary until the
http:// www. wdol. gov/ wdol /scafiles /davisbacon/CA33.dvb 09/22/2011
Page 14 of 23
intersection with San Bernardino County at that point which is
the SE corner of section 34, T24S, R40E, MDM. Continue E along
the Inyo and San Bernardino County boundary until the point
which is the NE corner of the Western half of the NW quarter of
Section 6, T25S, R42E, MDM. Continue S to that point which is
the SW corner of the NW quarter of Section 6, T27S, R42E, MDM.
Continue E in a straight line to the California and Nevada
state border at the point which is the NW corner of Section 1,
T17N, R14E, San Bernardino Meridian. Then continue NW along
the state line to the starting point, which is the center of
Section 18, T10N, R22E, MDM.
REMAINING AREA NOT DEFINED ABOVE RECIEVES BASE RATE
-- -----------------
ENGI0012 -004 08/01/2009
Rates Fringes
OPERATOR: Power Equipment
(DREDGING)
(1) Leverman ................$
44.83
(2) Dredge dozer ............
$
40.36
(3) Deckmate ................$
40.25
(4) Winch operator
(stern
winch on dredge) ............
$
39.70
(5) Fireman - Oiler,
Deckhand, Bargeman,
Leveehand ...................$
39.16
(6) Barge Mate ..............$
39.77
IRON0002 -004 07/01/2010
Rates
Ironworkers:
Fence Erector ...............$ 26.58
Ornamental, Reinforcing
and Structural ..............$ 33.00
PREMIUM PAY:
17.22
17.22
17.22
17.22
17.22
17.22
Fringes
15.26
23.73
36 "9 additional per hour at the following locations:
China Lake Naval Test Station, Chocolate Mountains Naval
Reserve - Niland,
Edwards AFB, Fort Irwin Military Station, Fort Irwin Training
Center - Goldstone, San Clemente Island, San Nicholas Island,
Susanville Federal Prison, 29 Palms - Marine Corps, U.S. Marine
Base - Barstow, U.S. Naval Air Facility - Sealey, Vandenberg AFB
$4.00 additional per hour at the following locations:
Army Defense Language Institute - Monterey, Fallon Air Base,
Naval Post Graduate School - Monterey, Yermo Marine Corps
Logistics Center
$2.00 additional per hour at the following locations:
Port Hueneme, Port Mugu, U.S. Coast Guard Station - Two Rock
--------------------------
LAB00300 -001 07/01/2011
http: / /www.wdol.gov /wdol /scafiles /davisbacon/CA33.dvb 09/22/2011
Page 15 of 23
Rates
Brick Tender .....................$ 27.17
-- ---- - - -- --
LAB00300 -003 07/01/2011
Rates
LABORER (GUNITE)
GROUP 1 .....................$
14.20
30
GROUP 2 .....................$
55
29
GROUP 3 .....................$
15.98
25
LABORER (TUNNEL)
98
15.98
GROUP 1 .....................$
15.98
32
GROUP 2 .....................$
32
GROUP 3 .....................$
32
GROUP 4 .....................$
33
LABORER
GROUP 1 .....................$
26
GROUP 2 .....................$
26
GROUP 3 .....................$
27
GROUP 4 .....................$
28
GROUP 5 .....................$
29
Fringes
16.71
Fringes
04
14.20
09
14.20
55
14.20
20
15.98
52
15.98
98
15.98
67
15.98
33
16.00
88
16.00
43
16.00
98
16.00
33
16.00
FOOTNOTE: GUNITE PREMIUM PAY: Workers working from a
Bosn'n's Chair or suspended from a rope or cable shall
receive 40 cents per hour above the foregoing applicable
classification rates. Workers doing gunite and /or
shotcrete work in a tunnel shall receive 35 cents per hour
.above the foregoing applicable classification rates, paid
on a portal -to- portal basis. Any work performed on, in or
above any smoke stack, silo, storage elevator or similar
type of structure, when such structure is in excess of
75' -0" above base level and which work must be performed in
whole or in part more than 75' -0" above base level, that
work performed above the 75' -0" level shall be compensated
for at 35 cents per hour above the applicable
classification wage rate.
LABORER CLASSIFICATIONS
GROUP 1: Cleaning and handling of panel forms; Concrete
screeding for rough strike-off; Concrete, w, "r .:curing;
Demolition laborer, the cleaning of brick if performed by a
worker performing any other phase of demolition work, and
the cleaning of lumber; Fire watcher, limber, brush loader,
piler and debris handler; Flag person; Gas, oil and /or
water pipeline laborer; Laborer, asphalt- rubber material
loader; Laborer, general or construction; Laborer, general
clean -up; Laborer, landscaping; Laborer, jetting; Laborer,
temporary water and air lines; Material hose operator
(walls, slabs, floors and decks); Plugging, filling of shee
bolt holes; Dry packing of concrete; Railroad maintenance,
repair track person and road beds; Streetcar and railroad
construction track laborers; Rigging and signaling; Scaler;
Slip form raiser; Tar and mortar; Tool crib or tool house
laborer; Traffic control by any method; Window cleaner;
Wire mesh pulling - all concrete pouring operations
GROUP 2: Asphalt shoveler; Cement dumper (on 1 yd. or larger
mixer and handling bulk cement); Cesspool digger and
installer; Chucktender; Chute handler, pouring concrete,
the handling of the chute from readymix trucks, such as
walls, slabs, decks, floors, foundation, footings, curbs,
http:// www. wdol. gov/ wdol /scafiles /davisbacon/CA33.dvb 09/22/2011
Page 16 of 23
gutters and sidewalks; Concrete curer, impervious membrane
and form oiler; Cutting torch operator (demolition); Fine
grader, highways and street paving, airport, runways and
similar type heavy construction; Gas, oil and /or water
pipeline wrapper - pot tender and form person; Guinea
chaser; Headerboard person - asphalt; Laborer, packing rod
steel and pans; Membrane vapor barrier installer; Power
broom sweeper (small); Riprap stonepaver, placing stone or
wet sacked concrete; Roto scraper and tiller; Sandblaster
(pot tender); Septic tank digger and installer(lead); Tank
scaler and cleaner; Tree climber, faller, chain saw
operator, Pittsburgh chipper and similar type brush
shredder; Underground laborer, including caisson bellower
GROUP 3: Buggymobile person; Concrete cutting torch; Concrete
pile cutter; Driller, jackhammer, 2 -1/2 £t. drill steel or
longer; Dri- pak -it machine; Gas, oil and /or water pipeline
wrapper, 6 -in. pipe and over, by any method, inside and
out; High scaler (including drilling of same); Hydro seeder
and similar type; Impact wrench multi - plate; Kettle person,
pot person and workers applying asphalt, lay -kold,
creosote, lime caustic and similar type materials
( "applying" means applying, dipping, brushing or handling
of such materials for pipe wrapping and waterproofing);
Operator of pneumatic, gas, electric tools, vibrating
machine, pavement breaker, air blasting, come- alongs, and
similar mechanical tools not separately classified herein;
Pipelayer's backup person, coating, grouting, making of
joints, sealing, caulking, diapering and including rubber
gasket joints, pointing and,any and all other services;
Rock Slinger; Rotary scarifier or multiple head concrete
chipping scarifier; Steel headerboard and guideline setter;
Tamper, Barko, Wacker and similar type; Trenching machine,
hand - propelled
GROUP 4: Asphalt raker, lute person, ironer, asphalt dump
person, and asphalt spreader boxes (all types); Concrete
core cutter (walls, floors or ceilings); grinder or sander;
Concrete saw person, cutting walls or flat work, scoring
old or new concrete; Cribber, shorer, lagging, sheeting and
trench bracing, hand - guided lagging hammer; Head rock
slinger; Laborer, asphalt- rubber distributor boot person;
Tb s; t' -r: beam in connection, with laborers' work; Oversize
concrete vibrator operator, 70 lbs. and over; Pipelayer
performing all services in the laying and installation of
pipe from the point of receiving pipe in the ditch until
completion of operation, including any and all forms of
tubular material, whether pipe, metallic or non - metallic,
conduit and any other stationary type of tubular device
used for the conveying of any substance or element, whether
water, sewage, solid gas, air, or other product whatsoever
and without regard to the nature of material from which the
tubular material is fabricated; No -joint pipe and stripping
of same; Prefabricated manhole installer; Sandblaster
(nozzle person), water blasting, Ports Shot -Blast
GROUP 5: Blaster powder, all work of loading holes, placing
and blasting of all powder and explosives of whatever type,
regardless of method used for such loading and placing;
Driller: All power drills, excluding jackhammer, whether
core, diamond, wagon, track, multiple unit, and any and all
other types of mechanical drills without regard to the form
of motive power; Toxic waste removal
http:// www. wdol. gov/ wdol /scafiles /davisbacon/CA33.dvb 09/22/2011
Page 17 of 23
TUNNEL LABORER CLASSIFICATIONS
GROUP l: Batch plant laborer; Bull gang mucker, track person;
Changehouse person; Concrete crew, including rodder and
spreader; Dump person; Dump person (outside); Swamper
(brake person and switch person on tunnel work); Tunnel
materials handling person
GROUP 2: Chucktender, cabletender; Loading and unloading
agitator cars; Nipper; Pot tender, using mastic or other
materials (for example, but not by way of limitation,
shotcrete, etc.); Vibrator person, jack hammer, pneumatic
tools (except driller)
GROUP 3: Blaster, driller, powder person; Chemical grout jet
person; Cherry picker person; Grout gun person; Grout mixer
person; Grout pump person; Jackleg miner; Jumbo person;
Kemper and other pneumatic concrete placer operator; Miner,
tunnel (hand or machine); Nozzle person; Operating of
troweling and /or grouting machines; Powder person (primer
house); Primer person; Sandblaster; Shotcrete person; Steel
form raiser and setter; Timber person, retimber person,
wood or steel; Tunnel Concrete finisher
GROUP 4: Diamond driller; Sandblaster; Shaft and raise work
GUNITE LABORER CLASSIFICATIONS
GROUP 1: Rodmen, Nozzlemen
GROUP 2: Gunmen
GROUP 3: Reboundmen
----------------------------------------
LAB00300 -005 08/05/2009
Rates
LABORER
PLASTER CLEAN -UP LABORER .... $ 26.65
PLASTER TENDER ..............$ 29.20
LAB00882 -002 01/01/2010
Rates
Asbestos Removal Laborer ......... $ 26.15
Fringes
15.95
15.95
Fringes
11.65
SCOPE OF WORK: Includes site mobilization, initial site
cleanup, site preparation, removal of asbestos - containing
material and toxic waste, encapsulation, enclosure and
disposal of asbestos- containing materials and toxic waste
by hand or with equipment or machinery; scaffolding,
fabrication of temporary wooden barriers and assembly of
decontamination stations.
LABO1184 -001 07/01/2011
Rates Fringes
Laborers: (HORIZONTAL
DIRECTIONAL DRILLING)
(1) Drilling Crew Laborer ... $ 28.01 11.48
http: / /www.wdol.gov /wdol /scafiles /davisbacon/CA33.dvb
09/22/2011
Page 18 of 23
(2) Vehicle Operator /Hauler.$ 28
(3) Horizontal Directional
Drill Operator ..............$ 30
(4) Electronic Tracking
Locator .....................$ 32
Laborers: (STRIPING /SLURRY
SEAL)
GROUP 1 .....................$ 28
GROUP 2 .....................$ 29
GROUP 3 .....................$ 31
GROUP 4 .....................$ 33
LABORERS - STRIPING CLASSIFICATIONS
18 11.48
03 11.48
03
11.48
50
14.56
80
14.56
81
14.56
55
14.56
GROUP l: Protective coating, pavement sealing, including
repair and filling of cracks by any method on any surface
in parking lots, game courts and playgrounds; carstops;
operation of all related machinery and equipment; equipment
repair technician
GROUP 2: Traffic surface abrasive blaster; pot tender -
removal of all traffic lines and markings by any method
(sandblasting, waterblasting, grinding, etc.) and
preparation of surface for coatings. Traffic control
person: controlling and directing traffic through both
conventional and moving lane closures; operation of all
related machinery and equipment
GROUP 3: Traffic delineating device applicator: Layout and
application of pavement markers, delineating signs, rumble
and traffic bars, adhesives, guide markers, other traffic
delineating devices including traffic control. This
category includes all traffic related surface preparation
(sandblasting, waterblasting, grinding) as part of the
application process. Traffic protective delineating system
installer: removes, relocates, installs, permanently
affixed roadside and parking delineation barricades,
fencing, cable anchor, guard rail, reference signs,
monument markers; operation of all related machinery and
equipment; power broom sweeper
GROUP 4: Striper: layout and application of traffic stripes..
arz'ri °kings;. -hot thermo plastic; tape traffic stripes and
markings, including traffic control; operation of all
related machinery and equipment
-- ----- - - ---
PAIN0036 -001 07/01/2011
Rates Fringes
Painters: (Including Lead
Abatement)
(1) Repaint (excludes San
Diego County) ...............$ 26.05 10.35
(2) All Other Work .......... $ 29.32 10.35
REPAINT of any previously painted structure. Exceptions:
work involving the aerospace industry, breweries,
commercial recreational facilities, hotels which operate
commercial establishments as part of hotel service, and
sports facilities.
PAIN0036 -006 01/05/2011
http:// www. wdol. gov/ wdol /scafiles /davisbacon/CA33.dvb 09/22/2011
Page 19 of 23
Rates Fringes
DRYWALL FINISHER /TAPER
Antelope Valley North of
the following Boundary:
Kern County Line to Hwy.
#5, South of Hwy. #5 to
Hwy. N2, East on N2 to
Palmdale Blvd., to Hsy.
414, South to Hwy. #18,
East to Hwy. #395...........$ 29.19
Remainder of Los Angeles
County ......................$ 33.22
PAIN0036 -015 01/01/2011
Rates
GLAZIER... ....................... $ 36.90
FOOTNOTE: Additional $1.25 per hour for work
from the third (3rd) floor and up Additional
hour for work on the outside of the building
stage or any suspended contrivance, from the
PAIN1247 -002 01/01/2010
Rates
SOFT FLOOR LAYER .................$ 30.85
PLAS0200 -009 08/01/2011
Rates
PLASTERER ........................$ 35.29
PLAS0500 -002 07/16/2011
Rates
CEMENT MASON /CONCRETE FINISHER ... $ 30.75
---------------------
PLUM0016 -001 07/01/2011
Rates
PLUMBER /PIPEFITTER
(1) Work on strip malls,
light commercial, tenant
improvement and remodel
work ........................$
30.79
(2) Work on new additions
and remodeling of bars,
restaurant, stores and
commercial buildings not
to exceed 5,000 sq. ft. of
floor space .................$
38.30
(3) All other work ..........
$ 39.50
PLUM0345 -001 07/01/2011
Rates
12.94
12.94
Fringes
21.78
in a condor,
$1.25 per
from a swing
ground up
Fringes
10.54
Fringes
12.05
Fringes
11.45
Fringes
16.70
18.37
19.35
Fringes
http: / /www.wdol.gov /wdol /scafiles /davisbacon/CA33.dvb 09/22/2011
Page 20 of 23
PLUMBER
Landscape /Irrigation Fitter.$ 27.35 16.34
Sewer & Storm Drain Work .... $ 26.82 18.18
ROOF0036 -002 08/01/2011
Rates Fringes
ROOFER ............................$ 34.65 10.71
FOOTNOTE: Pitch premium: Work on which employees are exposed
to pitch fumes or required to handle pitch, pitch base or
pitch impregnated products, or any material containing coal
tar pitch, the entire roofing crew shall receive $1.75 per
hour "pitch premium" pay.
---------------------------------------------------------------
SFCA0669 -013 04/01/2011
DOES NOT INCLUDE THE CITY OF POMONA, CATALINA ISLAND, AND THAT
PART OF LOS ANGELES COUNTY WITHIN 25 MILES OF THE CITY LIMITS
OF LOS ANGELES:
Rates Fringes
SPRINKLER FITTER .................$ 33.35 17.75
-------- ------
SFCA0709 -005 01/01/2011
THE CITY OF POMOMA, CATALINA ISLAND, AND THAT PART OF LOS
ANGELES COUNTY WITHIN 25 MILES OF THE CITY LIMITS OF LOS
ANGELES:
Rates Fringes
SPRINKLER FITTER (Fire) .......... $ 40.98 23.15
------------------------------------------------------
SHEE0105 -002 07/01/2011
LOS ANGELES (South of a straight line between gorman and Big
Pines includingg Catalina Island)
Rates Fringes
SHEET METAL WORKER
(1) Light Commercial: Work
on general sheet metal and
heating and AC up to 4000
sq ft .......................$ 25.23 8.19
(2) Modernization :
Excluding New Construction
- Under 5000 sq. ft. Does
not include modification,
upgrades, energy
management, or
conservation improvements
of central heating and AC
equpment ....................$ 25.23 8.19
SHEE0105 -003 07/01/2011
LOS ANGELES (South of a straight line drawn between Gorman and
http:// www. wdol. gov/ wdol /scafiles /davisbacon/CA33.dvb 09220011
Page 21 of 23
Big Pines)and Catalina Island, INYO, KERN (Northeast part, East
of Hwy 395), MONO ORANGE, RIVERSIDE, AND SAN BERNARDINO COUNTIES
Rates Fringes
SHEET METAL WORKER
(1) Commercial - New
Construction and Remodel
work ........................$ 42.05
(2) Industrial work
including air pollution
control systems, noise
abatement, hand rails,
guard rails, excluding
aritechtural sheet metal
work, excluding A -C,
heating, ventilating
systems for human comfort ... $ 36.16
SHEE0105 -004 07/01/2011
19.01
25.20
KERN (Excluding portion East of Hwy 395) & LOS ANGELES (North
of a straight line drawn between Gorman and Big Pines including
Cities of Lancaster and Palmdale) COUNTIES
Rates Fringes
SHEET METAL
WORKER ...............$
36.16
25.20
TEAM0011 -002
--------------------------
07/01/2008
Rates
Fringes
TRUCK DRIVER
GROUP
1 ....................$
26.44
18.24
GROUP
2 ....................$
26.59
18.24
GROUP
3 ....................$
26.72
18.24
GROUP
4 ....................$
26.91
18.24
GROUP
5 ....................$
26.94
18.24
GROUP
6 ....................$
26.97
18.24
GROUP
7 ....................$
27.22
'..;.!.:24
GROUP
8 ....................$
27.47
18.24
GROUP
9 ....................$
27.67
18.24
GROUP
10 ....................$
27.97
18.24
GROUP
11 ....................$
28.47
18.24
GROUP
12 ....................$
28.90
18.24
WORK ON ALL MILITARY BASES:
PREMIUM PAY: $3.00 per hour additional.
[29 palms Marine Base, Camp Roberts, China Lake, Edwards AFB,
E1 Centro Naval Facility, Fort Irwin, Marine Corps
Logistics Base at Nebo & Yermo, Mountain Warfare Training
Center, Bridgeport, Point Arguello, Point Conception,
Vandenberg AFB]
TRUCK DRIVERS CLASSIFICATIONS
GROUP 1: Truck driver
GROUP 2: Driver of vehicle or combination of vehicles - 2
http: / /www.wdol.gov /wdol /scafiles /davisbacon/CA33.dvb 09/22/2011
Page 22 of 23
axles; Traffic control pilot car excluding moving heavy
equipment permit load; Truck mounted broom
GROUP 3: Driver of vehicle or combination of vehicles - 3
axles; Boot person; Cement mason distribution truck; Fuel
truck driver; Water truck - 2 axle; Dump truck, less than
16 yds. water level; Erosion control driver
GROUP 4: Driver of transit mix truck, under 3 yds.; Dumperete
truck, less than 6 -1/2 yds. water level
GROUP 5: Water truck, 3 or more axles; Truck greaser and tire
person ($0.50 additional for tire person); Pipeline and
utility working truck driver, including winch truck and
plastic fusion, limited to pipeline and utility work;
Slurry truck driver
GROUP 6: Transit mix truck, 3 yds. or more; Dumperete truck,
6 -1/2 yds. water level and over; Vehicle or combination of
vehicles - 4 or more axles; Oil spreader truck; Dump truck,
16 yds. to 25 yds. water level
GROUP 7: A Frame, Swedish crane or similar; Forklift driver;
Ross carrier driver
GROUP 8: Dump truck, 25 yds. to 49 yds. water level; Truck
repair person; Water pull - single engine; Welder
GROUP 9: Truck repair person /welder; Low bed driver, 9 axles
or over
GROUP 10: Dump truck - 50 yds. or more water level; Water
pull - single engine with attachment
GROUP 11: Water pull - twin engine; Water pull - twin engine
with attachments; Winch truck driver - $1.25 additional
when operating winch or similar special attachments
GROUP 12: Boom Truck 17K and above
WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing
operation.n_which welding is incidental.
----------------------------------------- - - - - -- —
------------------------------------------ - - - - -- - --
Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within
the scope of the classifications listed may be added after
award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses
(29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)).
In the listing above, the "SU" designation means that rates
listed under the identifier do not reflect collectively
bargained wage and fringe benefit rates. Other designations
indicate unions whose rates have been determined to be
prevailing.
WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS
1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can
be:
htlp: / /www.wdol.gov /wdol /scafiles /davisbacon/CA33.dvb 09/22/2011
Page 23 of 23
* an existing published wage determination
* a survey underlying a wage determination
* a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on
a wage determination matter
* a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling
On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests
for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour
Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted
because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the
Davis -Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial
contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.)
and 3.) should be followed.
With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal
process described here, initial contact should be with the
Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to:
Branch of Construction Wage Determinations
Wage and Hour Division
U.S. Department of Labor
200 Constitution Avenue, N.W.
Washington, DC 20210
2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an
interested party (those affected by the action) can request
review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator
(See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to:
Wage and Hour Administrator
U.S. Department of Labor
200 Constitution Avenue, N.W.
Washington, DC 20210
The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the
interested party's position and by any information (wage
payment data, project description, area practice material,
etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue.
3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an
interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative
Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write c -,!,
Administrative Review Board
U.S. Department of Labor
200 Constitution Avenue, N.W.
Washington, DC 20210
4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final.
END OF GENERAL DECISION
htt4):// www. wdol. gov/ wdol /scafiles /davisbacon/CA33.dvb 09/22/2011
•
PROJECT
PROJECT • 31002
COMPLIANCE WITH CLEAN AIR AND WATER ACTS
(Applicable to federally assisted construction contracts and related subcontracts
exceeding $100,000)
During the performance of this contract, the contractor and all subcontractors shall
comply with the requirements of the Clean Air Act, as amended, 42 USC 1857 et seq.,
the Federal. Water Pollution Control Act, as amended, 33 USC 1251 et seq., and the
regulations of the Environmental Protection Agency with respect thereto, at 40 CFR Part
15, as amended.
In addition to the foregoing requirements, all nonexempt contractors and subcontractors
shall furnish to the owner, the following:
1. A stipulation by the contractor or subcontractors, that any facility to be utilizes) in
the performance of any non exempt contract or subcontract,. is not listed on the
List of Violating Facilities issued by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
pursuant to 40 CFR 15.20.
2. Agreement by the contractor to comply with all the requirements of Section 114
of the Clean Air Act, as amended, (42 USC 1857c -8) and Section 308 of the
Federal Water Pollution Control Act, as amended, (33 USC 1318) relating to
inspection, monitoring, entry, reports and information, as well as all other
requirements specified in said Section 114 and Section 308, and all regulations
and guidelines issued there under.
3. A stipulation that as a condition for the award of the contract, prompt notice will
be given of any notification received from the Director, Office of Federal
Activities, EPA, indicating that .a facility utilized, or to be utilized for the contract,
is under consideration to be listed on the EPA List of Violating Facilities.
4. Agreement by the contractor that he will include, or cause to be included, the
criteria and requirements in paragraph (1) through (4) of this section in every
nonexempt subcontract and requiring that the contractor will take such action as
the government may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions.
CITY OF ROSEMEAD
•
PROJECT
PROJECT • 31002
Standard Specifications. The Work hereunder shall be done in accordance with the
California Building Code 2010 Edition, 2010 California Mechanical Code, 2010 California
Plumbing Code including all current supplements, addenda, and revisions and Standard
Specifications.
GENERAL PROVISIONS - 1
PART 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS
SECTION 1 TERMS, DEFINITIONS, ABBREVIATIONS, UNITS OF MEASURE, AND
SYMBOLS
1 -2 DEFINITIONS
Wherever in the Standard Specifications or other Contract Documents the following
terms are used, they shall mean the following:
Agency - The CITY OF ROSEMEAD
Bid Guaranty - As defined in the Standard Specifications. Also referred to as the
"Bid Security" in the Contract Documents.
Bid Security - The Bid Guaranty, as defined herein.
Board - The City Council of the CITY OF ROSEMEAD.
City - The CITY OF ROSEMEAD
City's Representative - The Engineer, as defined herein.
Contract - The written agreement (Contract form) between the City and the
Contractor for the complete and adequate completion of the Work for the Project.
The Contract consists of the Contract Documents. The documents comprising the
Contract are complementary, and each obligation of the Contractor, Subcontractors
and material or equipment suppliers in any one document shall be binding as if
specified in all. The Contract is intended to include all items required for the proper
execution and completion of the Work.
Contract Documents - In addition to the documents noted in the definition of
Contract Documents in the Standard Specifications, all documents incorporated by
reference into the Contract form.
Contract Price - The amount stated in the Contract form, including authorized
adjustments pursuant to Change Orders, which is the total amount payable by the
City to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract. It is also
sometimes referred to as the "Total Bid Price" in the Contract Documents.
Contractor's Representative — Contractor's executive representative who shall be
present on the Project Site at all times that any Work is in progress and who shall
have the authority to act on behalf of the Contractor for all purposes under the
GENERAL PROVISIONS - 2
Contract. The Contractor shall designate such representative in writing to the City.
The Contractor's Representative shall be available to the City and its agent's at all
reasonable times.
Engineer - The Director of Public Works of the CITY OF ROSEMEAD, acting either
directly or through properly authorized agents, such as agents acting within the
scope of the particular duties entrusted to them. Also sometimes referred to as the
"City's Representative" in the Contract Documents.
Liquidated Damages - the amount prescribed in the Contract form, pursuant to the
authority of Government Code Section 53069.85, to be paid to the City or to be
deducted from any payments due, or to become due, the Contractor for each day's
delay in completing the whole or any specified portion of the Work beyond the time
allowed in the Contract Documents.
Notice to Contractors - Notice Inviting Bids.
Project - The total and satisfactory completion of the project noted in the Contract
Documents, as well as all related work performed in accordance with the Contract,
including but not limited to, any alternates selected by the City.
Project Site - All of the property and /or facilities of the City where the Work will be
performed pursuant to the Contract, as well as such adjacent lands as may be
directly affected by the performance of the Work.
Recyclable Waste Materials - Materials removed from the Project site which is
required to be diverted to a recycling center rather than an area landfill. Recyclable
Waste Materials include asphalt, concrete, brick, concrete block, and rock.
Special Provisions - Any provisions which supplement or modify the Standard
Specifications, including these General Conditions (Part "A "), and the Technical
Provisions (Part `B ").
Total Bid Price - The amount stated in the Contract form, including authorized
adjustments pursuant to Change Orders, which is the total amount payable by the
City to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract. Also
sometimes referred to as the "Contract Price" in the Standard Specifications and
other Contract Documents.
- END OF SECTION -
GENERAL PROVISIONS - 3
SECTION 2 SCOPE AND CONTROL OF WORK
The work consists of removing the original City Hall HVAC and replacing as indicated on
plans and specifications or noted on the plans and specifications. Perform quality
workmanship by skilled craftsmen, including furnishing of all labor, material and equipment,
and all incidental and appurtenant work necessary for the proper construction of the
contemplated improvement as shown or indicated on the accompanying plans and
specified hereinafter.
2 -3 SUBCONTRACTS
2 -3.3 Subcontractor Obligations. Section 2 -3.3 of the Standard Specifications
shall be amended to include the following provisions:
"By appropriate written agreement, Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to
be bound by all obligations of this Contract. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve
and protect the rights of the City. Should any subcontractor fail to perform the Work
undertaken by him to the satisfaction of the City, said subcontractor shall be removed
immediately from the Project upon request by the City's Representative and shall not again
be employed on the Work. The Contractor shall be held liable for the all deficient
Subcontractor Work."
9
The following shall be added at the end of Section 2 -4 of the Standard
Specifications:
"The Contractor shall ensure that its Bonding Company is familiar with all of the
terms and conditions of the contract Documents, and shall obtain a written
acknowledgment by the Bonding Company that said Bonding Company thereby waives the
right of special notification of any changes or modifications of the Contract, or of extensions
of time, or of decreased or increased Work, or of cancellation of the Contract, or of any
other act or acts by the Owner or any Of' its authorized representatives. If the Contract
Price is increased in accordance with the Contract,. the Contractor shall, upon request of
the City, cause the amount of the bonds to be increased accordingly and promptly deliver
satisfactory evidence of such increase to the City."
"Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 4108, Contractor shall require all
Subcontractors providing labor and materials in excess of the amount indicated in the
Notice Inviting Bids to supply Payment and Performance Bonds in accordance with the
same bond requirements applicable to the Contractor, except that the bond amounts shall
equal the total amount of their subcontract. The Contractor shall specify this requirement
for Subcontractor bonds in his written or published request for Subcontractor bids. Failure
to comply with this requirement shall not preclude Contractor from complying with the
Subcontractor bonding requirements. The practice of issuing separate purchase orders
and /or subcontracts for the purpose of circumventing the Subcontractor bonding
requirements shall not serve to exempt the Contractor from these requirements. No
GENERAL PROVISIONS - 4
payments, except for a reimbursement payment to the Contractor for the cost of the
Contractor's own Faithful Performance and Payment bonds, shall be made to the
Contractor until the Contractor provides the aforementioned Subcontractor bonds to the
Contractor."
2 -5 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
2 -5.1 General. The second full paragraph of Section 2 -5.1 of the Standard
Specifications shall be amended to include the following at the end of that paragraph:
"All Contract Documents are essential parts of the Contract for a given project. Any
requirement included in one Contract Document shall be as binding as though included in
all, as they are intended to be cooperative and to provide a description of the Work to be
done."
2 -5.2 Precedence of Contract Documents. The provisions of Section 2 -5.2 of the
Standard Specifications shall be revised to read as follows:
"In resolving disputes resulting from conflicts, errors, or discrepancies in any of the
Contract Documents, the document highest in precedence shall control. The order of
precedence shall be as listed below:
Change Orders or Work Change Directives
2.
Agreement
3.
Addenda
4.
Contractor's Bid (Bid Forms)
5.
Special Provisions
6.
General Conditions
7.
Standard Specifications
8.
Notice Inviting Bids
9.
Instructions to Bidders
10.
Specifications
11.
Plans (Contract Drawings)
12.
Standard Plans
13.
Reference Documents"
"With reference to the Drawings, the order of precedence shall be as follows:
1. Figures govern over scaled dimensions
2. Detail drawings govern over general drawings
3. Addenda or Change Order drawings govern over Contract Drawings
4. Contract Drawings govern over Standard Drawings
5. Contract Drawings govern over Shop Drawings"
2 -5.4 Interpretation of the Plans and Specifications. Section 2 -5.4 shall be
GENERAL PROVISIONS - 5
added to the Standard Specifications to read as follows:
"Should it appear that the Work to be done, or any matter relative thereto, is not
sufficiently detailed or explained on the Plans or in the Specifications, the Contractor shall
request the City's Representative for such further explanation as may be necessary, and
shall conform to such explanation or interpretation as part of the Contract, so far as may be
consistent with the intent of the original Specifications. In the event of doubt or questions
relative to the true meaning of the Specifications, reference shall be made to the Engineer,
whose decision thereon shall be final."
2 -7 SUBSURFACE DATA
2 -7.1 Limited Reliance by Contractor. Section 2 -7.1 shall be added to the
Standard Specifications to read as follows:
"Soils reports and other reports of subsurface conditions may be made available for
inspection by the Contractor. HOWEVER, SUCH REPORTS AND DRAWINGS ARE NOT
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The contractor may rely upon the general accuracy of the
"technical data" contained in such reports and drawings only where such "technical data"
are specifically identified in the Special Provisions. Except for such reliance on such
"technical data ", the Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against the Owner,
the Engineer, nor any of the Engineer's Consultants with respect to any of the following:"
"2- 7.1.1. Completeness. The completeness of such reports and drawings for
contractor's purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods,
techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor and
safety precautions and programs incident thereto."
"2- 7.1.2. Other Information. Any other data, interpretations, opinions, and
information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings."
"2- 7.1.3. Interpretation. Any interpretation by the Contractor of such "technical
data" or any conclusion drawn from any "technical data" or any such data, interpretations,
opinions or information."
2 -8 RIGHT -OF -WAY.
Section 2 -8 of the Standard Specifications shall be revised in its entirety to read as
follows:
"All temporary access or construction rights -of -way, other than those shown on the
Plans, which the Contractor may find it requires during progress of the Work, shall be
arranged by, paid for and disposed of solely by the Contractor at its own expense. The
Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold the City, its officials, officers, employees and
agents free and harmless from all claims for damages of any kind arising from or incident
to such rights -of -way. Those rights -of -way shown on the Plans will be provided by the City
GENERAL PROVISIONS - 6
at its expense."
2 -10 AUTHORITY OF BOARD AND ENGINEER.
"Whenever the Contract Documents refer to the Engineer or City's Representative,
or provide the Engineer or City's Representative with power to act on behalf of the City,
such reference shall necessarily include the City's Representative, or his or her authorized
designee."
"The City Council shall have the power to award the Contract, and shall generally
have the final authority to act in all matters affecting the Project. The City's Representative
shall have the authority to enforce compliance with the Contract Documents. The
Contractor shall promptly comply with the instructions of the City's Representative. The
decisions of the City's Representative shall be final and binding on all questions as to: (1)
the quantity, quality and acceptability of materials and equipment furnished and Work
performed; (2) the manner of performance and rate of progress of the Work; (3) any and all
questions which may arise as to the interpretation of the Plans, Specifications, General
Conditions, and Special Provisions; (4) the acceptable fulfillment of the Contract on the
part of the Contractor; (5) any claims and compensation issues; and (6) his authority to
enforce and make effective such decisions and actions as the Contractor fails to carry out
promptly."
2 -11 INSPECTION.
"The Engineer shall have complete and safe access to the Work at all times during
construction, and shall be furnished with every reasonable facility for ascertaining that the
materials and the workmanship are in accordance with the Specifications, the Special
Provisions, and the Plans. All labor, materials, and equipment furnished shall be subject to
the Engineer's inspection."
"When the Work is substantially completed, the Engineer or a representative of the
Engineer will make the final inspection."
"Whenever the Contractor varies the period during which Work is carried on any
day, he shall give adequate notice to the City's Representative so that proper inspection
may be provided. Defective Work shall be made good, and unsuitable materials may be
rejected, notwithstanding the fact that such defective work and unsuitable materials have
previously been inspected, accepted or estimated for payment."
"The Contractor shall prosecute work on any State highway or within any railroad
right -of -way only in the presence of an inspector representing the State Division of
Highways or the railroad company, and any Work done in the absence of such inspectors
will be subject to rejection. The Contractor shall make the appropriate notification
according to the instructions given on the State Encroachment Permit or railroad permit for
all inspections, and shall post all bonds and certificates required by the permit. The permit
GENERAL PROVISIONS - 7
shall be acquired by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense. The Contractor shall pay
for all testing and inspections required by a State Encroachment Permit or railroad permit."
2 -12 SITE EXAMINATION
GENERAL PROVISIONS - 8
"The Contractor shall have the sole responsibility of satisfying itself concerning the
nature and location of the Work, and the general and location conditions, such as, but not
limited to, all other matters which could in any way affect the Work or the costs thereof.
The failure of the Contractor to acquaint itself with all available information regarding any
applicable existing or future conditions shall not relieve it from the responsibility for properly
estimating either the difficulties, responsibilities, or costs of successfully performing the
Work according to the Contract Documents."
2 -14 PROHIBITION AGAINST SUBCONTRACTING OR ASSIGNMENT.
"The Contractor shall give his personal attention to the fulfillment of the Contract and
shall keep the Work under his control. The Contractor shall not contract with any other
entity to perform in whole or in part the services required hereunder except in strict
compliance with Section 2 -3 of the Standard Specifications and state law. In addition,
neither this Contract nor any interest herein may be transferred, assigned, conveyed,
hypothecated, or encumbered, either voluntarily or by force of law, except as otherwise
provided in Section 7103.5 of the State of California Public Contract Code, without the prior
written approval of the City. Transfers restricted hereunder shall include the transfer to any
person or group of persons acting in concert of more than twenty five percent (25 %) of the
present ownership and /or control of the Contractor, taking all transfers into account on a
cumulative basis. In the event of any such unapproved transfer, this Contract shall be void.
No approved transfer shall release the Contractor or any surety of the Contractor of any
liability hereunder without the expressed written consent of the City."
- END OF SECTION -
GENERAL PROVISIONS - 9
SECTION 3 CHANGES IN WORK
3 -2 CHANGES INITIATED BY THE AGENCY.
"Contractor shall not be entitled to claim or bring suit for damages, whether for loss
of profits or otherwise, on account of any decrease or omission of any item or portion of
Work to be done. Whenever any change is made as provided for herein, such change
shall be considered and treated as though originally included in the Contract, and shall be
subject to all terms, conditions and provisions of the original Contract."
"3- 2.2.1(a) Allowable Quantity Variations on Unit Price Contracts. In the
event of an increase or decrease in a bid item quantity of a unit price contract, the total
amount of work actually done or materials or equipment furnished shall be paid for
according to the unit price established for such work under the Contract Documents,
wherever such unit price has been established; provided, that an adjustment in the
Contract Unit Price may be made for changes which result in an increase or decrease in
the quantity of any unit price bid item of the Work in excess of 25 percent, or for eliminated
items of work."
"3- 2.2.1(b) Increases of More Than 25 Percent on Unit Price Contracts. On a
unit price contract, should the total quantity of any item of work required under the Contract
exceed the Engineer's Estimate therefor by more than 25 percent, the work in excess of
125 percent of such estimate and not covered by an executed contract Change Order
specifying the compensation to be paid therefor will be paid for by adjusting the Contract
Unit Price, as hereinafter provided, or at the option of the Owner, payment for the work
involved in such excess will be made as provided in Paragraph 3 -3.2, as amended in these
Special Provisions."
"Such adjustment of the Contract Unit Price will be the difference between the
Contract Unit Price and the actual unit cost, which will be determined as hereinafter
provided, of the total pay quantity of the item. If the costs applicable to such item of work
include fixed costs, such fixed costs shall be deemed to have been recovered by the
Contractor by the payments made for 125 percent of the Engineer's Estimate of the
quantity for such item, and in computing the actual unit costs, such fixed costs will be
excluded. Subject to the above provisions, such actual unit cost will be determined by the
engineer in the same manner as if the work were to be paid for as extra work as provided
in Paragraph 3 -3.2, as amended in these Special Provisions, or such adjustment as will be
as agreed to by the Contractor and the Owner."
"When the compensation payable for the number of units of an item of work
performed in excess of 125 percent of the Engineer's Estimate is less than $5,000 at the
applicable Contract Unit Price, the Engineer reserves the right to make no adjustment in
said price if he so elects, except that an adjustment will be made if requested in writing by
the Contractor."
GENERAL PROVISIONS - 10
"3- 2.2.1(c) Decreases of More Than 25 Percent on Unit Price Contracts. On
unit price contracts, should the total pay quantity of any item of work required under the
contract be less than 75 percent of the Engineer's Estimate therefor, an adjustment in
compensation pursuant to this Section will not be made unless the Contractor so requests
in writing. If the Contractor so requests, the quantity of said item performed, unless
covered by an executed contract change order specifying the compensation payable
therefor, will be paid for by adjusting the Contract Unit Price as hereinafter provided, or at
the option of the engineer, payment for the quantity of the work of such item performed will
be made as if the work were to paid for as extra work as provided in Paragraph 3 -3.2, as
amended in these Special Provisions, or such adjustment as will be as agreed to by the
Contractor and the Owner; provided, however, that in no case shall the payment for such
work be less than that which would be made at the Contract Unit Price."
"Such adjustment of the contract unit price will be the difference between the
contract unit price and the actual unit cost, which will be determined as hereinafter
provided, of the total pay quantity of the item, including fixed costs. Such actual unit cost
will be determined by the Engineer in the same manner as if the work were to be paid for
as extra work as provided in Paragraph 3 -3.2, as amended in these Special Provisions, or
such adjustment as will be as agreed to by the Contractor and the Owner."
"The payment for the total pay quantity of such item of work will in no case exceed
the payment which would be made for the performance of 75 percent of the Engineer's
Estimate of the quantity for such item at the original Contract Unit Price."
"3- 2.2.1(d) Eliminated Items on Unit Price Contracts. On unit price contracts,
should any contract item of the work be eliminated in its entirety, in the absence of an
executed contract Change Order covering such elimination, payment will be made to the
Contractor for actual costs incurred in connection with such eliminated contract item if
incurred prior to the date of notification in writing by the Engineer of such elimination."
"If acceptable material is ordered by the Contractor for the eliminated item prior to
the date of notification of such elimination by the Engineer, and if orders for such material
cannot be canceled, it will be paid for at the actual cost to the Contractor. In such case,
the material paid for shall become the property of the Owner and the actual cost of any
further handling will be paid for by the Owner. If the material is returnable to the vendor
and if the Engineer so directs the Contractor, the material shall be returned and the
Contractor will be paid for the actual cost of charges made by the vendor for returning the
material. The actual cost of handling returned material will be paid for."
"The actual costs or charges to be paid by the Owner to the Contractor as provided
in this Section 3 -2 will be computed in the same manner as if the work were to be paid for
as extra work as provided in Paragraph 3 -3.2, as amended in these General Conditions, or
such adjustment as will be as agreed to by the Contractor and the Owner."
GENERAL PROVISIONS - 11
3 -3 EXTRA WORK
3 -3.1 General.
"All extra work shall be adjusted daily upon report sheets furnished by the
Contractor, prepared by the City's Representative and signed by both parties. The daily
report shall be considered thereafter as the true record of extra work done. New and
unforeseen work will be classed as extra work only when said work is not covered and
cannot be paid for under any of the various items or combination of items for which a bid
price appears in the Bid Forms. The Contractor shall not do any extra work, except upon
written order from the City's Representative."
"Extra work shall be paid for under written work order in accordance with the terms
therein provided. Generally, payment for extra work will be made at the unit price or lump
sum previously agreed upon between the Contractor and the City."
3 -3.2.3 Markup. Paragraph (a) of Section 3 -3.2.3 (Work by Contractor)
shall be amended in its entirety to read as follows:
"(a) Work by Contractor. The following percentages shall be added to the
Contractor's costs and shall constitute the markup for all overhead and profit.
1) Labor 24 percent (includes bonding)
2) Materials 15 percent
3) Equipment rental 15 percent
4) Other items and expenditures 15 percent
5) Subcontracts (1st tier only) 5 percent
6) Lower tier subcontractors none
To the sum of the costs and markups provided for in this subsection, except
for labor, one percent shall be added as compensation for bonding."
3 -6 EXISTING CONDITIONS.
"Contractor shall have the sole responsibility for satisfying itself concerning the
conditions, nature and location of the Project and the Work to be performed, as well as the
general and local conditions. Such conditions shall include, but shall not be limited to, local
labor availability, means of transportation, necessity for security, laws and codes, local
permit requirements, wage scales, local tax structure, contractors' licensing requirements,
availability of required insurance, and other factors that could in any way affect the Work or
the costs thereof. The Contractor is solely responsible for understanding the facilities,
difficulties and restrictions which may impact the total and adequate completion of the
Project. The failure of the Contractor to acquaint himself with all available information
regarding any applicable existing or future conditions shall not relieve him from the
GENERAL PROVISIONS - 12
responsibility for properly estimating either the difficulties, responsibilities, or costs of fully
and adequately performing the Work according to the Contract Documents."
- END OF SECTION -
GENERAL PROVISIONS - 13
SECTION 4 - CONTROL OF MATERIALS
4 -1 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
4 -1.1 General. Section 4 -1.1 of the Standard Specifications shall be amended in
its entirety to read as follows:
"It is the intent of the City in drafting the Contract Documents to accept only
first -class work, materials, parts, equipment and workmanship. All materials, parts and
equipment furnished by Contractor for the Work shall be new, high grade, free from
defects, of specified kind and fully equal to samples when such samples are required.
Used or secondhand materials, parts and equipment may be used only if permitted by the
Specifications. When the quality or kind of material or articles required under the Contract
are not particularly specified, the Contractor shall provide those representing the best of
their class or kind. Quality of Work shall be in strict accordance with generally accepted
standards. Material, parts, equipment and Work quality shall be subject to the approval of
the City's Representative. All materials, parts and equipment used and installed, and all
details of the Work done, shall at all times be subject to the supervision, test and approval
of the City's Representative. The City's Representative shall have access to the Work at
all times during construction, and shall be furnished with every reasonable facility for
securing full knowledge with regard to the progress, workmanship and character of the
materials, parts and equipment used or employed in the Work. Materials, parts and
equipment shall be furnished in such quantities, kinds and at such times as to ensure
uninterrupted progress of the Work."
"All materials, parts, equipment or Work which are defective in their construction or
deficient in any of the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether in place or not,
shall be remedied or removed and replaced by the Contractor in an acceptable manner,
and no compensation will be allowed for such correction work. Any Work done beyond the
lines shown on the Plans or established by the City's Representative, or any extra work
done without written authority, will be considered unauthorized and will not be paid for by
the City. Upon Contractor's failure to comply promptly with any order of the City's
Representative made unaei the provisions of this Section, the City's Representative shall
have authority to cause such defective or unauthorized Work to be remedied or removed
and replaced, and to deduct the costs thereof from any moneys due or to become due the
Contractor. If the Work is found to be in compliance with these specifications, the City's
Representative will furnish the Contractor with a certificate to that effect."
4 -1.2 Protection of Work and Materials. The provisions of Section 4 -1.2 of the
Standard Specifications shall be amended to add the following at the end of that Section:
"Contractor shall fully and adequately store and protect all materials, parts and
equipment, as required herein. Contractor shall be solely responsible for any and all
damages or loss by weather or any other cause to such materials, parts and equipment.
The Contractor shall make good any and all damages or loss to materials, parts and
equipment."
GENERAL PROVISIONS - 14
"Until the final written acceptance of the Work by the City, the Contractor shall have
the charge and care thereof and shall bear the risk of injury or damage to any part of the
Work by the action of the elements or any other cause. The Contractor shall rebuild,
repair, restore and make good all injuries or damages to any portion of the Work
occasioned by any cause before its completion and acceptance, and shall bear the
expense thereof, except for such injuries or damages arising from the sole negligence or
willful misconduct of the City, its officers, agents or employees. In the case of suspension
of Work from any cause whatsoever, the Contractor shall be responsible for all materials
and the protection of Work already completed, and shall properly store and protect them, if
necessary. Contractor shall provide suitable drainage and erect temporary structures
where necessary. Nothing in this Contract shall be considered as vesting in the Contractor
any right of property in materials used after they have been attached or affixed to the Work
or the soil upon City real property. All such materials shall, upon being so attached or so
affixed, become the property of the City."
"Notwithstanding the foregoing, Contractor shall not be responsible for restoring
damage valued in excess of five percent (5 %) of the Contract Price if such damage was
caused by an earthquake measuring over 3.5 on the Richter scale or by a tidal wave, as
provided for in Public Contract Code Section 7105. If provided for in the Contract Bid
Forms, however, Contractor shall provide insurance to protect against such damages."
4 -1.4 Test of Materials. The provisions of Section 4 -1.4 of the Standard
Specifications shall be amended to add the following at the end of that Section:
"Contractor shall immediately remove all rejected material from the Work or Site,
and shall not again return such material to the Site."
4 -1.6 Trade Names or Equals. The second and third paragraphs of Section 4 -1.6
of the Standard Specifications shall be amended in their entirety to read as follows:
"Whenever any particular material, process, or equipment is indicated by a patent,
proprietary, or brand name, or by the name of the manufacturer, such product shall be
followed by the words "or equal". A Contractor may offer any material, process, or
equipment considered as equivalent to that indicated, unless a sole source is specified.
Failure of the Contractor to submit requests for substitution promptly after award shall be
deemed to signify that the Contractor intends to furnish one of the brands named in the
Special Provisions, and the Contractor does hereby waive all rights to offer or use
substitute materials, products, or equipment for that which was originally specified. Unless
otherwise authorized by the Engineer, the time for submission of data substantiating a
request for substitution of an "or equal' item shall be not less than 35 nor more than 40
calendar days after award of Contract."
"The burden of proof as to the comparative quality and suitability of alternative
equipment or materials shall be on the Contractor. The Contractor shall, at its expense,
furnish data concerning items offered by it as equivalent to those specified. Such data
shall include complete calculations, technical specifications, samples, or published
documents relating to the performance and physical characteristics of the proposed
GENERAL PROVISIONS - 15
substitute. The Contractor shall have the material tested as required by the City's
Representative to determine that the quality, strength, physical, chemical or other
characteristics, including durability, finish, efficiency, dimensions, service and suitability are
such that the item will completely and adequately fulfill its intended function."
4 -1.9 Placing Orders. Section 4 -1.9 shall be added to the Standard Specifications
as follows:
"The Contractor shall place the order(s) for all long -lead supplies, materials, and
equipment, for any traffic signing, striping, legends and traffic control facilities within 3
working days after the award of Contract by the Owner. The Contractor shall furnish the
Engineer with a statement from the vendor(s) that the order(s) for said supplies, materials,
and equipment has been received and accepted by said vendor(s) within 15 working days
from the date of said award of Contract."
4 -1.10 Removal of Interfering Obstructions. Section 4 -1.10 shall be added to the
Standard Specifications to read as follows:
"The Contractor shall remove and dispose of all debris, abandoned structures, tree
roots and obstructions of any character met during the process of excavation, it being
understood that the cost of said removals are made a part of the unit price bid by the
Contractor under the item for excavation or removal of existing Work."
4 -1.11 Procedure in Case of Damage to Public Property. Section 4 -1.11 shall be
added to the Standard Specifications to read as follows:
"Any portions of curb, gutter, sidewalk or any other City improvement damaged by
the Contractor during the course of construction shall be replaced by the Contractor at his
own cost, free of all charges to the City. The cost of additional replacement of curb, gutter
or sidewalk in excess of the estimated quantities shown in the Bid Forms and
Specifications and found necessary during the process of construction (but not due to
damage resulting from carelessness on the part of the Contractor during his operations),
shall be paid to the Contractor at the unit prices submitted in his Bid."
4 -1.12 Diversion of Recyclable Waste Materials. Section 4 -1.12 shall be added to
the Standard Specifications to read as follows:
"In support of the Owner's waste reduction and recycling efforts, Contractor shall
divert all Recyclable Waste Materials, as defined in the Contract Documents, to
appropriate recycling centers rather than area landfills. Contractor will be required to
submit weight tickets and written proof of diversion with its monthly progress payment
requests. Contractor shall complete and execute any certification forms required by Owner
to document Contractor's compliance with these diversion requirements. All costs incurred
for these waste diversion efforts shall be the responsibility of the Contractor."
r • OU
GENERAL PROVISIONS - 16
SECTION 5 UTILITIES
5 -1 LOCATION
The provisions of Section 5 -1 of the Standard Specifications shall be amended to
add the following at the end of that Section:
"Locations of existing utilities shown on the Plans are approximate and may not be
complete. Therefore, the Contractor shall notify Underground Service Alert at 1- 800 -227-
2600 a minimum of 2 working days prior to any excavation in the vicinity of any potentially
existing underground facilities in order to verify the location of all utilities prior to the
commencement of the Work."
"The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating its work with all utility
companies during the construction of the Work."
"The Plans identify the approximate locations of existing utilities that parallel or cross
the Work. These locations are based on the best information available to the Owner. The
Contractor shall verify these locations."
5 -2 PROTECTION
The provisions of Section 5 -2 of the Standard Specifications shall be amended to
add the following at the end of that Section:
"All water meters, water valves, fire hydrants, electrical utility vaults, telephone
vaults, gas utility valves, and other subsurface structures shall be relocated or adjusted to
grade by the Contractor. The Contractor shall notify each utility owner a minimum of 2
working days before commencing the Work."
"If the Contractor, while performing the Contract, discovers utility facilities not
identified by the public agency in the Contract Plans or Specifications, he or she shall
immediately notify the public agency and utility in writing."
"The public utility, where they are the owner, shall have the sole discretion to
perform repairs or relocation work, or permit the Contractor to do such repairs or relocation
work at a reasonable price."
"During construction of the Work, some of the existing utilities may fall within the
prism of trenches. if the existing utility does fall within the contractor =s trenches, the utility
involved shall be supported properly by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the utility
owner. The method of support of the utility, precautions to be taken during trench backfill
and compaction, etc., shall be per the utility owner's requirements. The Contractor shall
contact the utility owner should it anticipate such exposure of any of the existing utilities."
GENERAL PROVISIONS - 17
5 -5 DELAYS
The provisions of Section 5 -5 of the Standard Specifications shall be amended to
add the following at the end of that Section:
"Notwithstanding anything to the contrary, the provisions of Articles 1 and 2 of the
California Government Code (Sections 4215 and 4216) are incorporated by reference as if
fully set forth herein. In the event of any conflict between the Standard Specifications and
Government Code Sections 4215 and 4216, the provisions of Government Code Section
4215 and 4216 shall prevail. Contractor should pay particular attention to the provisions of
Section 4215 with regards to the relocation of utilities, the costs thereof, delays caused
thereby and the indication of service laterals and appurtenances."
"The right is reserved to the owners of public utilities or franchises to enter upon the
streets for the purpose of making repairs or changes in their property which may be
necessary as a result of the Work. Employees of the City shall likewise have the privilege
of entering upon the street for the purpose of making any necessary repairs or
replacements."
"Contractor shall employ and use only qualified persons, as hereinafter defined, to
work in proximity to Southern California Edison's secondary, primary and transition
facilities. The term "qualified person" shall mean one who, by reason of experience or
instruction, is familiar with the operation to be performed and the hazards involved, as
more specifically defined in Section 2700 of Title 8 of the California Administrative Code.
The Contractor shall take such steps as are necessary to assure compliance by all
Subcontractors."
S4ig 10X;&IXO iiF]ka
GENERAL PROVISIONS - 18
SECTION 6 PROSECUTION, PROGRESS, AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK
6 -1 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND COMMENCEMENT OF WORK
The second paragraph of Section 6 -1 of the Standard Specifications shall be
amended in its entirety to read as follows:
"After the Contract has been approved by the Owner, and a written Notice to
Proceed has been issued to the Contractor, the Contractor shall start the Work within 10
working days after the date specified in said Notice to Proceed. The Work shall be
diligently prosecuted to completion before the expiration of the time indicated in the Bid
Documents and Contract Form, plus any duly authorized extensions thereof."
The provisions of Section 6 -1 of the Standard Specifications shall be amended to
add the following at the end of that Section:
"Notwithstanding anything to the contrary herein, the Contractor's proposed
construction schedule shall include the expected start and completion dates for all portions
of the contract Work. During a scheduling conference between the Contractor and the
City's Representative, the work schedule will be discussed and modified, if necessary, by
mutual agreement. Should it become necessary for the City to delay temporarily the
construction schedule agreed upon during the_scheduling conference, every effort will be
made to permit a new construction schedule at the time most convenient to the Contractor,
thus permitting the Project to proceed with the shortest intramural movement of the
equipment. The Contractor shall notify the City's Representative in all such cases in order
to arrive at a mutually satisfactory schedule."
"Contractor's construction schedule shall be in a form provided for in the
Specifications. Contractor shall continuously update its construction schedule.
Contractor shall submit an updated and accurate construction schedule to the
Owner whenever specifically requested to do so by Owner and with each periodic
payment request. Failure to submit an updated and accurate construction scher'rale,
shall render Contractor in breach of the Contract and shall entitle Owner to withhold
money therefor."
6 -3 SUSPENSION OF WORK.
6 -3.1 General. The provisions of Section 6 -3.1 of the Standard Specifications shall
be amended to add the following at the end of that Section:
"The situations which will be deemed to be in the City's interest to suspend the Work
shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following: (1) unsuitable weather or such other
conditions that render the proper prosecution of the Work impracticable or inefficient; or (2)
when the Contractor or his workmen fail or refuse to carry out orders or to perform any or
all of the requirements of the Contract; (3) when the Contractor fails or refuses to supply an
adequate working force for any reason whatsoever (including, but not limited to, strikes,
GENERAL PROVISIONS - 19
labor unrest or labor shortages of any kind); (4) when the Contractor fails or refuses to
begin delivery of any materials, manufactured articles, supplies or equipment for any
reason whatsoever (including, but not limited to, transportation problems, strikes, labor
unrest or labor shortages of any kind); (5) when the Contractor fails or refuses to
commence Work within the time specified for any reason whatsoever (including, but not
limited to, transportation problems, labor strikes, labor unrest or labor shortages of any
kind); (6) when the Contractor fails or refuses to maintain an adequate rate of delivery of
materials, manufactured articles, supplies or equipment for any reason whatsoever
(including, but not limited to transportation problems, strikes, labor unrest or labor
shortages of any kind); (7) when the Contractor fails or refuses to execute the Work in a
manner and at such locations as specified in the Contract Documents; (8) when the
Contractor fails or refuses to maintain a Work program which will insure the Agency's
interest; (9) when the Contractor fails or refuses to carry out the intent of the Contract; or
(10) when the Contractor fails or refuses in any other respect to prosecute the Work with
the diligence, speed or force specified or intended by the terms of the Contract. The
Contractor shall immediately comply with any written order from the City's Representative
and shall not resume operations until so ordered in writing."
6 -4 DEFAULT BY CONTRACTOR.
The first, second and third full paragraphs of Section 6 -4 of the Standard
Specifications shall be amended to read as follows:
"If the Contractor should be in violation of the Contract, then the City may, without
prejudice to any other right or remedy and after giving notice as specified herein, terminate
the Contract and take all actions provided for herein and elsewhere in the Contract
Documents. By way of example and not as a limitation upon its right to terminate the
Contract as provided herein, the City may terminate the Contract if, in its sole opinion, the
Contractor fails or refuses to: (1) begin delivery of any materials, manufactured articles,
supplies or equipment for any reason whatsoever (including, but not limited to
transportation problems, strikes, labor unrest or labor shortages of any kind); (2)
commence Work within the time specified for any reason whatsoever (including, but not
limited to, transportation problems,' "labor strikes; labor unrest or labor shortages of any
kind); (3) maintain an adequate rate of delivery of materials, manufactured articles,
supplies or equipment for any reason whatsoever (including, but not limited to,
transportation problems, strikes, labor unrest or labor shortages of any kind); (4) execute
the Work in a manner and at such locations as specified in the Contract Documents; (5)
maintain a Work program which will insure the Agency's interest; (6) carry out the intent of
the Contract; (7) supply an adequate working force for any reason whatsoever (including,
but not limited to, strikes, labor unrest, labor shortages of any kind), or (8) in any other
respect prosecute the Work with the diligence, speed or force specified or intended by the
terms of the Contact."
"If the City determines that sufficient grounds exist to terminate the Contract as
provided herein, the City's Representative shall provide written notice to the Contractor and
its surety on its performance bond. If the Contractor or its surety does not fully comply with
such notice within five (5) days after receiving it, or fails to continue after starting to comply
GENERAL PROVISIONS - 20
in good faith, the City may exclude the Contractor and its employees and Subcontractors
from the Work, or any portion thereof, and take possession of and use, or cause to be
used, all materials, tools and equipment of every description as may be found at the place
of such Work. Thereupon, the Contractor and its employees and Subcontractors shall
discontinue such Work or such part thereof as the City may designate, and the City may
thereupon, by Contract or otherwise, as it may determine, complete the Work or any part
thereof. All expenses charged under this paragraph shall be deducted and paid for by the
City out of any moneys then due or to become due the Contractor under the Contract. In
such accounting, the City shall not be held to obtain the lowest figure for the Work for
completing the Contract, or any part thereof, or for insuring its proper completion, but all
sums paid therefore shall be charged to the Contractor. In case the expenses so charged
are less than a sum which would have been payable under the Contract if the same had
been completed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall be entitled to receive the
difference. In case such expense shall exceed the amount payable under the Contract,
then the Contractor shall pay the amount of the excess to the City upon completion of the
Work without further demand being made therefore. In the determination of the question
as to whether or not there has been any such noncompliance with the Contract as to
warrant the suspension or annulment thereof, the decision of the City Council shall be
binding on all parties to the Contract."
6 -8 COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE.
Section 6 -8 of the Standard Specifications shall be amended in its entirety as
follows:
"The Work will be inspected for acceptance by the City's Representative upon
receipt of the Contractor's written assertion that the Work has been completed. If, in the
sole discretion of the City's Representative, the Work has been completed and is ready for
acceptance, the City's Representative will notify the City Clerk that the Contract has been
completed in its entirety. The City's Representative shall request that the City accept the
Work and that the City Clerk be authorized to file on behalf of the City in the office of the
Los Angeles County Recorder, a Notice of Completion of the Work. The date of
completion shall be the date the Contractor is relieved from responsibility to protect the
Work."
"The Contractor hereby guarantees that the entire Work constructed by him under
the Contract will meet fully all requirements as to quality of workmanship and materials.
The Contractor hereby agrees to make, at his own expense, any repairs or replacements
made necessary by defects in materials or workmanship that become evident within one
(1) year after the date of the final payment, and to restore to full compliance with the
requirements of these Contract Documents, including any test requirements set forth
herein for any part of the Work constructed hereunder, which during said one (1) year
period is found to be deficient with respect to any provisions of the Contract Documents.
The Contractor shall make all repairs and replacements promptly upon receipt of written
orders for the same from the City's Representative. If the Contractor fails to make the
repairs and replacements promptly, the City may do the work and the Contractor and his
sureties shall be liable to the City for the cost thereof."
GENERAL PROVISIONS - 21
"The guarantees and agreements set forth herein shall be secured by a surety bond
which shall be delivered by the Contractor to the City before the Notice of Completion and
acceptance of the Work by the City. Said bond shall be in the form approved by the City
Attorney and executed by a surety company or companies satisfactory to the City in the
amount of One Hundred Percent (100 %) of the Contract. Said bond shall remain in force
for a period of one (1) year after the date of Notice of Completion and acceptance.
Alternatively, the Contractor may provide for the Faithful Performance Bond furnished
under the Contract to remain in force and effect for said amount until the expiration of said
one (1) year period."
"The parties agree that no certificate given, with the exception of the certificate of
final payment, shall be conclusive evidence of the faithful performance of the Contract,
either in whole or in part, and that no payment shall be construed to be in acceptance of
any defective work or improper materials. Further, the certificate of final payment shall not
terminate the Contractor's obligations under his warranty herein above. The Contractor
agrees that payment of the amount due under the Contract and the adjustments and
payments due for any Work done in accordance with any alterations of the same, shall
release the City, the City Council and its officials, officers and employees from any and all
claims or liability on account of work performed under the Contract or any alteration
thereof."
GENERAL PROVISIONS - 22
6 -9 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES.
Section 6 -9 of the Standard Specifications shall be amended in its entirety to read
as follows:
"Contractor agrees that if the Work is not completed within the Contract Time and /or
pursuant to any completion schedule, construction schedule or project milestones
developed pursuant to provisions of the Contract, it is understood, acknowledged and
agreed that the District will suffer damage. Pursuant to Government Code Section
53069.85, Contractor shall pay to the District as fixed and liquidated damages the sum
specified in the Contract form for each and every calendar day of delay beyond the
Contract Time or beyond any completion schedule, construction schedule or Project
milestones established pursuant to the Contract. Liquidated damages may be deducted
from any payments or other funds owing to Contractor, including progress payments, the
final payment and retentions."
• •• •►
Due to the nature of this project involving some inconveniences, the
contractor shall minimize the noise. Contractor shall avoid to do work at peak hours.
Contractor shall be able to work Friday or Saturday if requested. Working hours for
this project shall be from 7:00 am to 5:00 pm.
-END OF SECTION -
GENERAL PROVISIONS - 23
SECTION 7 RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR
7 -2 LABOR.
7 -2.2 Laws. The provisions of Section 7 -2.2 of the Standard Specifications shall
be amended in their entirety as follows:
"The Contractor, its agents and employees shall be bound by and comply with
applicable provisions of the Labor Code and Federal, State and local laws related to labor.
Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in the Contract Documents, Contractor
shall comply with the following:"
"7 -2.2.1 Social Security Requirements. Contractor shall furnish to the City
satisfactory evidence that he and all of his Subcontractors are complying with all laws, rules
and regulations with respect to Social Security. The Contractor, at any time upon request,
shall satisfy the City that all necessary Social Security and other taxes are being properly
reported and paid."
"7 -2.2.3 Eight Hour Work Day. Contractor and all Subcontractors shall be
required to comply with the provisions of California Labor Code Section 1810 et seq.
According to those sections, eight (8) hours of labor shall constitute a legal day's work.
Contractor shall pay to the City a penalty of Twenty -five Dollars ($25.00) for each worker
employed in the execution of this Contract by the Contractor, or by any Subcontractor, for
each calendar day during which such worker is required or permitted to work more than
eight (8) hours in any calendar day or forty (40) hours in any one (1) calendar week, except
when payment for overtime is made at not less than one and one -half (1 -1/2) times the
basic rate for that worker."
"7 -2.2.4 Licensing Requirements. Pursuant to Section 7028.15 of the
Business and Professions Code and Section 3300 of the Public Contract Code, all bidders
must possess proper licenses for performance of this Contract. Contractors shall meet the
California Contractor's license requirements set forth in the Notice Inviting Bids.
Subcontractors must possess the appropriate licenses for each specialty subcontracted.
Pursuant to Section 7028.5 of the Business and Professions Code, the City shall consider
any bid submitted by a contractor not currently licensed in accordance with state law and
pursuant to the requirements found in the Contract Documents to be nonresponsive, and
the City shall reject the Bid. The City shall have the right to request, and the Bidders shall
provide within five (5) Calendar Days, evidence satisfactory to the City of all valid license(s)
currently held by that Bidder and each of the Bidder's subcontractors, before awarding the
Contract."
GENERAL PROVISIONS - 24
"7 -2.2.5 Non - Discrimination. Contractor shall not discriminate in the
employment of persons upon the Contract because of the race, creed, color, national
origin, ancestry, non - disqualifying disability, age, medical condition, marital status, sex or
other classifications of such persons protected by federal, state and local laws, rules and
regulations. Such non - discrimination shall include, but not be limited to, all activities
related to initial employment, upgrading, demotion, transfer, recruitment or recruitment
advertising, layoff or termination. Contractor shall cause an identical clause to be included
in every subcontract for the contract work."
7-2.2.6 Travel and Subsistence Payments. As required by Section 1773.8
of the California Labor Code, the Contractor shall pay travel and subsistence payments to
each worker needed to execute the Work, as such travel and subsistence payments are
defined in the applicable collective bargaining agreements filed in accordance with law. To
establish such travel and subsistence payments, the representative of any craft,
classification, or type of worker needed to execute the Contract shall file with the
Department of Industrial Relations fully executed copies of collective bargaining
agreements for the particular craft, classification or type of work involved. Such
agreements shall be filed within 10 days after their execution and thereafter shall establish
such travel and subsistence payments whenever filed 30 days prior to the call for Bids."
7 -3 PERMITS.
Section 7 -5 of the Standard Specifications shall be amended in its entirety to read as
follows:
"Unless indicated to the contrary in the Contract Documents, including the Special
Provisions, Contractor shall procure all permits and licenses (including a City business
license), pay all charges and fees, and give all notices necessary and incidental to the due
and lawful prosecution of the Work."
7 -8 PROJECT SITE MAINTENANCE.
7 -8.2 Air Pollution Control. The provisions of Section 7 -8.2 of the Standard
Specifications shall be amended to add the following at the end of that Section:
"In addition, Contractor shall comply with all air pollution control rules, regulations,
ordinances and statutes. All containers of paint, thinner, curing compound, solvent or liquid
asphalt shall be labeled to indicate that the contents fully comply with the applicable
material requirements."
7 -8.6 Water Pollution Control. The provisions of Section 7 -8.6 of the Standard
Specifications shall be amended to add the following at the end of that Section:
"In addition, Contractor shall comply with the provisions of the Federal Clean Water
Act as regulated by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency in 40 Code of Federal
Regulations Parts 122 -124, the Porter - Cologne Act (California Water Code) and the Waste
GENERAL PROVISIONS - 25
Discharge Requirements for Municipal Storm Water Discharges within the County of Los
Angeles. Suitable Best Management Practices (BMPs) are listed in the California Storm
Water Best Management Practices Handbook for Construction Activities
WATER POLLUTION CONTROL
A. Water Quality Protection Requirements For Construction Projects With Less
than 1 -Acre Of Disturbed Soil
All construction projects, regardless of size, will be required to implement best
management practices (BMPs) necessary to reduce pollutants to the Maximum
Extent Practicable (MEP) to meet the minimum water quality protection
requirements as defined in Table 2 -1.
Table 2 -1
Minimum Water Quality Protection Requirements for Construction Projects
Category
Minimum Requirements
BMPs
1. Sediment
Sediments generated on the project site shall be
Sediment
Control
retained using adequate Treatment Control or
Control
Structural BMPs.
2.
Construction - related materials, wastes, spills or
Site
Constructi
residues shall be retained at the project site to avoid
Management;
on
discharge to streets, drainage facilities, receiving
Material and
Materials
waters, or adjacent properties by wind or runoff.
Waste
Control
Non -storm water runoff from equipment and vehicle
Management
washing and any other activity shall be contained at
the project sites.
3. Erosion
Erosion from slopes and channels shall be controlled
Erosion
Control
by implementing an effective combination of BMPs,
Control
such as the limiting of grading scheduled during the
wet season; inspecting graded areas during rain
events; planting and maintenance of vegetation on
slopes; and covering erosion susceptible slopes.
Please refer to the California Stormwater Quality Association's Construction
Handbook available for free on their website ( www.cabmphandbooks.com —
GENERAL PROVISIONS - 26
Construction Handbook) for further information regarding the BMPs listed in Table
2 -1.
B. Water Quality Protection Requirements For Construction Projects With 1 -Acre
(or greater) Of Disturbed Soil
In addition to the minimum BMPs required in Section A, a Storm Water Pollution
Prevention Plan ( SWPPP) must be submitted to the City for all construction projects
where at least 1 -Acre of soil will be disturbed. The SWPPP will include strategies
for reducing runoff of pollutants and minimize environmental impacts to receiving
waters. A SWPPP may also be required for projects smaller than 1 -Acre if the City
designates the project a threat to water quality objectives.
In addition, the contractor must contact the Los Angeles Regional Water Quality
Control Board (LARWQCB) if the project will disturb 1 -Acre or more of soil.
Construction activities can not begin until a Waste discharger Identification (WDID)
Number is issued by the State Water Board. The 1 -Acre threshold includes the total
amount of land disturbance. For example, if four streets, each 1/4 -acre in size in
different parts of the City are to be reconstructed then a WDID Number must be
obtained. To request a Notice of Intent (NOI) you must contact the Regional Board
at:
Los Angeles Regional Water Quality Control Board
320 W. 0. Street, Suite 200
Los Angeles, California 90013
Phone: (213) 576 -6600; Fax: (213) 576 -6640
Internet Address: http: / /www.swrcb.ca.gov /- rwgcb4
The SWPPP shall include:
• The name, location, period of construction, and a brief description of the project;
• Contact information for the owner and contractor;
• The building permit number for the project;
• The grading permit number for the project (where applicable)
• A list of major construction materials, wastes, and activities at the project site;
• A list of best management practices to be used to control pollutant discharges
GENERAL PROVISIONS - 27
from major construction
materials, wastes, and activities;
• A site plan (construction plans may be used) indicating the selection of BMPs and
their location where
appropriate;
• Non -storm water discharges, their locations, and the BMPs necessary to prevent
the discharge;
• A maintenance and self- inspection schedule of the BMPs to determine the
effectiveness and necessary
repairs of the BMPs; and
• A certification statement that all required and selected BMPs will be effectively
implemented.
Within 7 days after the City has certified the contract, the Contractor shall submit
two 2 copies of the proposed SWPPP to the City. The City shall review the
SWPPP within 14 days of receipt of the plan. If revisions are required, the
Contractor shall revise and re- submit the document within 7 days of their receipt of
the City's comments. The City shall then have 7 days to consider the revisions
made by the Contractor and approve the SWPPP.
The Contractor shall maintain a minimum of two readily accessible copies of the
SWPPP at the project site. The SWPPP shall be made available upon request of a
representative of the Regional Water Quality Control Board (RWQCB), or the U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency (U.S. EPA). Requests by environmental groups
and the public shall be directed to the City.
C. Best Management Practices
The objective of the SWPPP is to identify potential sources of pollution that may
reasonably affect the quality of storm water discharge associated with construction
activities. The plan will describe and ensure the implementation of Best
Management Practices (BMPs) which will be used to reduce pollutants in the storm
water discharges from the construction site. A Best Management Practice is
defined as any program, technology, process, operating method, measure, or
device that controls, prevents, removes, or reduces pollution. The Contractor shall
select appropriate BMPs from the California Stormwater BMP Handbook, Municipal,
Industrial, New Development, and Construction Volumes
( www.cabmphandbooks.com ) in conjunction with all activities and construction
operations:
GENERAL PROVISIONS - 28
1. Construction Practices (NS2, NS3, NS4, and NS6)
2. Material and Waste Management (WM01, WMO2, and WM04)
3. Vehicle and Equipment Management (NS8, NS9, and NS10)
4. Physical Stabilization (EC7, EC12, NS4, TC1, and TC2)
5. Sediment Control Practices (SE1, SE9, SE8, SE10, SE3, and SE2)
Copies of the California Stormwater BMP Handbooks may be obtained from:
California Stormwater Quality Association Los Angeles County DPW
P.O. Box 2313 Cashier's Office
Livermore, CA 94551 900 South Fremont Avenue
www.cabmphandbooks.com Alhambra, CA 91803
Tel. No. (626) 458 -6959
D. Implementation
The Contractor will be responsible throughout the duration of the project for the
installation, monitoring, inspection and maintenance of the BMPs included in the
SWPPP and for removing and disposing of temporary BMPs. The Contractor may
be required to implement additional BMPs as a result of changes in actual field
conditions, contractor's activities, or construction operations.
The Contractor shall demonstrate the ability and preparedness to fully deploy these
SWPPP control measures to protect soil- disturbed areas of the project site before
the onset of precipitation and shall maintain a detailed plan for the mobilization of
sufficient labor and equipment to fully deploy these control measures.
Throughout the winter season, active soil- disturbed areas of the project site shall be
fully protected at the end of each day with these control measures unless fair
weather is predicted through the following day. The Contractor shall monitor daily
weather forecasts. If precipitation is predicted prior to the end of the following
workday, construction scheduling shall be modified, as required, and the Contractor
shall deploy functioning control measures prior to the onset of the precipitation.
The City may order the suspension of construction operations which are creating
water pollution if the Contractor fails to conform to the requirements of this section,
"Water Pollution Control ". Unless otherwise directed by the City, the Contractor's
GENERAL PROVISIONS - 29
responsibility for SWPPP implementation shall continue throughout any temporary
suspension of work.
E. Sewage Spill Prevention
The Contractor's attention is directed to the sewer bypass operation required during
any sewer construction (Standard Specification for Public Works Construction
Section 500.1.2.4),
The Contractor shall exercise extraordinary care to prevent the cause of events that
may lead to a sewage spill. In the event of a sewage spill, the Contractor shall make
arrangements for an emergency response unit comprised of emergency response
equipment and trained personnel to be immediately dispatched to the project site.
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for preventing and containing sewage spills
as well as recovering and properly disposing of raw sewage. In addition, the
Contractor is responsible for any fines, penalties and liabilities arising from
negligently causing a sewage spill. Any utility that is damaged by the contractor
shall be immediately repaired at the Contractor's expense. The Contractor shall
take all measures necessary to prevent further damage or service interruption and
to contain and clean up the sewage spills.
F. Sewage Spill Telephone Notification
Should a sewage spill occur, the Contractor shall immediately report the incident to
the following two (2) City Departments:
Public Works/ Engineering (626) 569 -2150
Public Safety Department (626) 569 -2292
The Contractor is encouraged to obtain telephone numbers, pager numbers and cellular
telephone numbers of City representatives such as Project Managers and Inspectors, to be
reached during emergency and off - hours.
The City will notify the following:
Los Angeles County Department of Health Services (213) 974 -1234
Los Angeles County Department of Public Works (800) 303 -0003
Regional Water Quality Control Board (213) 576 -6665 or 6600
State Office of Emergency Services (800) 852 -7550
GENERAL PROVISIONS - 30
(For any significant volume of material that entered the storm drain or
receiving water)
G. Sewage Spill Written Notification
The Contractor shall prepare and submit a written report within three (3) working
days from the occurrence of a spill to the City, (Attention: Project Manager). This
report shall describe the following information related to the spill:
1. The exact location on the Thomas Guide map
2. The nature and volume
3. The date, time and duration
4. The cause
5. The type of remedial and /or cleanup measures taken and date and time
implemented
6. The corrective and preventive action taken, and
7. The water body impacted and results of necessary monitoring
H. Enforcement
The City, as a permittee, is subject to enforcement actions by the LARWQCB, U.S.
EPA, environmental groups and private citizens. The Contractor shall be
responsible for all costs and liabilities imposed by law as result of the Contractor's
failure to comply and /or fulfill the requirements set forth in Section 7.09 - "Water
Pollution Control ". The costs and liabilities include, but are not limited to fines,
penalties and damages whether assessed against the City or the Contractor.
In addition to any remedy authorized by law, any money due to the Contractor under
this contract shall be retained by the City until all costs and liabilities imposed by law
against the City or Contractor have been satisfied.
I. Maintenance
The Contractor shall ensure the proper implementation and functioning of BMP
control measures and shall regularly inspect and maintain the construction site for
the BMPs identified in the SWPPP. The Contractor shall identify corrective actions
and time frames in order to properly address any damaged measure, or reinitiate
any BMPs that have been discontinued.
If the City identifies a deficiency in the deployment or functioning of identified control
measures, the deficiency shall be corrected by the Contractor immediately or by a
later date and time if requested in writing, but not later than the onset of the
subsequent precipitation events. The correction of deficiencies shall be at no
additional cost to the City.
J. Payment
GENERAL PROVISIONS - 31
All costs involved in the implementation of the SWPPP, including furnishing all labor,
materials, tools, equipment and all incidentals; and for doing all the work involved in
installing, constructing, maintaining, removing, and disposing of control measures,
except those that were installed as a part of another structure, shall be included in
the unit prices bid for the various related items of work and no additional
compensation will be made therefore.
7 -8.8 Sound and Vibration Control Requirements. Section 7 -8.8 shall be added
to the Standard Specifications to read as follows:
"The Contractor shall comply with all local sound control and noise level rules,
regulations and ordinances, including hours of operation requirements. No internal
combustion engine shall be operated on the Project without a muffler of the type
recommended by the manufacturer. Should any muffler or other control device sustain
damage, the Contractor shall promptly remove the equipment and shall not return said
equipment to the job until the device is repaired or replaced. Said noise and vibration level
requirements shall apply to all equipment on the job or related to the job, including but not
limited to, trucks, transit mixers or transit equipment that may or may not be owned by the
Contractor."
7 -10 PUBLIC CONVENIENCE AND SAFETY.
7 -10.4 Safety.
7- 10.4.1 Safety Orders. Section 7- 10.4.1 shall be amended to add the following to
the beginning of the first full paragraph:
"In accordance with generally accepted construction practices, the Contractor shall
be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the job site, including the safety of all
persons and property in performance of the Work. This requirement shall apply
continuously and shall not be limited to normal working hours. The Contractor's duty to
preserve safety shall include, but shall not be limited to, the erection and maintenance of
temporary fences, bridges, railings and barriers; the placement of guards; maintenance
and operation of sufficient lights and signals; and all other precautions necessary to
maintain safety in the vicinity of the Work. Any duty on the part of the City's
Representative or other City employee or agent to give general engineering supervision of
the Contractor's performance is not intended to include the review of the adequacy of the
Contractor's safety measures. Nothing herein shall relieve Contractor of his sole and
complete responsibility for safety conditions on the Site."
Section 7- 10.4.1 shall be amended also to add the following to the beginning of the
second full paragraph:
"Pursuant to Labor Code Section 6705, if the Contract Price exceeds $25,000 and if
the Work governed by this Contract entails excavation of any trench or trenches five (5)
feet or more in depth, Contractor shall comply with all applicable provisions of the Labor
Code, including Section 6705, regarding sheeting, shoring and bracing."
GENERAL PROVISIONS - 32
7- 10.4.3 Special Hazardous Substances and Processes. Section 7- 10.4.3 shall
be amended to add the following to the end of that Section:.
"As required by Public Contract Code Section 7104, if this Contract involves digging
trenches or other excavations that extend deeper than four (4) feet below the surface,
Contractor shall promptly, and prior to disturbance of any conditions, notify City of: (1) any
material discovered in excavation that Contractor believes to be a hazardous waste that is
required to be removed to a Class I, Class II or Class III disposal site; (2) subsurface or
latent physical conditions at the site differing from those indicated by City; and (3) unknown
physical conditions of an unusual nature at the site, significantly different from those
ordinarily encountered in such contract work. Upon notification, City shall promptly
investigate the conditions to determine whether a change order is appropriate. In the event
of a dispute, Contractor shall not be excused from any scheduled completion date and
shall proceed with all Work to be performed under the Contract, but shall retain all rights
provided by the Contract or by law for making protests and resolving the dispute."
7 -11 PATENT FEES OR ROYALTIES.
Section 7 -11 of the Standard Specifications shall be amended in its entirety to read
as follows:
"The Contractor shall include in its bid amount the patent fees or royalties on any
patented article or process furnished or used in the Work. Contractor shall assume all
liability and responsibility arising from the use of any patented, or allegedly patented,
materials, equipment, devices or processes used in or incorporated with the work, and
shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the City, its officials, officers, agents and
employees from and against any and all liabilities, demands, claims, damages, losses,
costs and expenses, of whatsoever kind or nature, arising from such use."
7 -13 LAWS TO BE OBSERVED.
Section 7 -13 of the Standard Specifications shall be revised in its entirety to read as
follows:
"The Contractor shall keep itself fully informed of all existing and future State,
Federal and local laws, rules and regulations, which in any manner affect those engaged or
employed in the Work, or the materials used in the Work, or which in any affect the
conduct of the Work, and of all such orders and decrees of bodies or tribunals having any
jurisdiction or authority over the same. The Contractor shall at all times observe and
comply with all such existing and future laws, rules, ordinances, regulations, orders, and
decrees of bodies or tribunals having any or all authority over the Work, and shall defend,
indemnify and hold harmless, at least to the extent of the indemnification provisions of this
Agreement, the Owner and its officials, officers, employees, volunteers and agents,
including, but not limited to, the Director of Public Works and the Owner Engineer, against
any claim or liability arising from, or based on, the violation or alleged violation of any such
GENERAL PROVISIONS - 33
law, rule, ordinance, regulation, order, or decree, whether by itself or its employees. The
Contractor shall particularly observe all laws, rules and regulations relating to the
obstruction of streets or the conduct of the Work, keeping open passageways and
protecting the same where they are exposed or dangerous to traffic. The Contractor shall
at all times comply with such laws, rules and regulations. If any discrepancy or
inconsistency is discovered in the Plans, Drawings, Special Provisions, or Contract for the
Work in relation to any such law, rule, ordinance, regulation, order, or decree, the
Contractor shall forthwith report the same to the Engineer in writing."
7 -15 INDEMNIFICATION.
Section 7 -15 shall be added to the Standard Specifications as follows:
"Contractor shall defend (with counsel of City's choosing), indemnify and hold the
City, its officials, officers, employees, volunteers and agents free and harmless from any
and all claims, demands, causes of action, costs, expenses, liabilities, losses, damages or
injuries, in law or equity, to property or persons, including wrongful death, to the extent
arising out of or incident to any acts, omissions or willful misconduct of Contractor, its
officials, officers, employees, agents, consultants and contractors arising out of or in
connection with the performance of the Work or this Contract, including without limitation
the payment of all consequential damages and attorneys fees and other related costs and
expenses. Contractor shall defend, at Contractor's own cost, expense and risk, with
Counsel of City's choosing, any and all such aforesaid suits, actions or other legal
proceedings of every kind that may be brought or instituted against City, its officials,
officers, employees, volunteers or agents. To the extent of its liability, Contractor shall pay
and satisfy any judgment, award or decree that may be rendered against City, its officials,
officers, employees, volunteers or agents, in any such suit, action or other legal
proceeding. Contractor shall reimburse City, its officials, officers, employees, volunteers or
agents for any and all legal expenses and costs incurred by each of them in connection
therewith or in enforcing the indemnity herein provided. The only limitations on this
provision shall be those imposed by Civil Code Section 2782."
7 -16 CONCRETE FORMS, FALSEWORK AND SfiOHING.
Section 7 -16 shall be added to the Standard Specifications as follows:
"Contractor shall comply fully with the requirements of Section 1717 of the
Construction Safety Orders, State of California, Department of Industrial Relations,
regarding the design of concrete forms, falsework, and shoring, and the inspection of same
prior to the placement of concrete. Where Section 1717 requires the services of a civil
engineer registered in the State of California to approve design calculations and working
drawings of the falsework or shoring system, or to inspect such system prior to the
placement of concrete, Contractor shall employ a registered civil engineer for these
purposes, and all costs therefor shall be included in the Bid item price named in the
Contract for completion of the Work as set forth in the Contract Documents."
GENERAL PROVISIONS - 34
- END OF SECTION -
GENERAL PROVISIONS - 35
SECTION 9 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
9 -2 LUMP SUM WORK.
Section 9 -2 of the Standard Specifications shall be amended to add the following at
the end of that Section:
"On lump sum contracts, the Contractor shall submit, for approval by the Engineer, a
Schedule of Values, or lump sum price breakdown, which will serve as the basis for
progress payments and which shall be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment
acceptable to the Engineer. Such Schedule of Values shall be submitted for approval at
the Pre - construction Conference and must meet the approval of the Engineer before any
payments can be made to the Contractor."
9 -3 PAYMENT.
9 -3.1 Payment. The last paragraph of Section 9 -3.1 of the Standard Specifications
shall be deleted and replaced with the following two paragraphs:
"Contractor shall submit, with each of its billing invoices, a corrected list of
quantities, verified by the Engineer, for unit price items listed in the Bid Schedule.
Following the City's acceptance of the Work as fully complete, the Contractor shall submit
to the City for approval a written statement of the final quantities of Contract items for
inclusion in the final invoice. Upon receipt of such statement, the City's Representative
shall check the quantities included therein and shall authorize the Contractor to submit an
invoice which, in the City Representative's opinion, shall be just and fair, covering the
amount and value of the total amount of Work done by the Contractor, less previous
payments, applicable withholdings and retentions."
"All retention proceeds shall be released and paid in strict accordance with Public
Contract Section 7107."
Section 9 -3.1 of the Standard Specifications snail be amended to also add the
following at the end of that Section:
"Payment for the various items on the Contract Bid Forms, as further specified in the
Contract, shall include all compensation to be received by the Contractor for furnishing all
tools, equipment, supplies, and manufactured articles, and for all labor, operations, and
incidentals appurtenant to the items of Work being described, as necessary to complete
the various items of Work, all in accordance with the provisions for Measurement and
Payment in the Standard Specifications and these General Conditions, and as shown on
the Drawings, including all appurtenances thereto. Compensation shall include all costs of
compliance with the regulations of public agencies having jurisdiction over the Work,
including the Safety and Health Requirements of the California Division of Industrial Safety
and the Occupational Safety and Health Administration of the U.S. Department of Labor
(OSHA)."
GENERAL PROVISIONS - 36
"No separate payment will be made for any item that is not specifically set forth in
the Contract Bid Forms, and all costs therefor shall be included in the prices named in the
Contract Bid Forms for the various appurtenant items of work."
9 -3.2 Partial and Final Payments. Section 9 -3.2 of the Standard Specifications
shall be amended to add the following at the end of that Section:
"For purposes of this Section, the monthly payment date shall be the last calendar
day of each month. In order for the City to consider and prepare for each monthly
payment, the Contractor shall submit a detailed measurement of Work performed and a
progress estimate of the value thereof before the tenth (10th) day of the following month.
The City shall review and make payment on all approved charges within the time required
by Public Contract Code Sections 20104.5 et seg."
"Acceptance of any progress payment accompanying any estimate without written
protest shall be an acknowledgment by the Contractor that the number of accumulated
contract days shown on the associated statement of working days is correct. Progress
payments made by the Owner to the Contractor or its sureties after the completion date of
the Contract shall not constitute a waiver of liquidated damages."
"Subject to the provisions of Section 22300 of the California Public Contract Code, a
10 percent retention will be withheld from each payment. All invoices and detailed pay
requests shall be approved by the Engineer before submittal to the Owner for payment. All
billings shall be directed to the Engineer."
"Pursuant to Section 22300 of the California Public Contract Code, In accordance
with California Public Contract Code Section 22300, the City will permit the substitution of
securities for any monies withheld by the City to ensure performance under the Contract.
At the request and expense of the Contractor, securities equivalent to the amount withheld
shall be deposited with the City, or with a state or federally chartered bank in California as
the escrow agent, and thereafter the City shall then pay such monies to the Contractor as
they ;r,�; due. Upon satisfactory completion of the Contract, the securities shall be
returned to the Contractor. The Contractor shall be the beneficial owner of any securities
substituted for monies withheld and shall receive any interest thereon. The escrow
agreement used for the purposes of this Section shall be in the form provided by the City."
"The Contractor shall submit with each invoice the Contractor's conditional waiver of
lien for the entire amount covered by such invoice, as well as a valid unconditional waiver
of lien from the Contractor and all subcontractors and materialmen for all work and
materials included in any prior invoices. Waivers of lien shall be in the forms prescribed by
California Civil Code Section 3262. Prior to final payment by the Owner, the Contractor
shall submit a final waiver of lien for the Contractor's work, together with releases of lien
from any subcontractor or materialmen."
- END OF SECTION
GENERAL PROVISIONS - 37
• c ,
P R O JECT
PRO ��
TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
22 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
2205 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 11 16 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
DIVISION 23 - MECHANICAL
23 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
2305 19
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
23 05 23
GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
23 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 07 00
HVAC INSULATION
23 09 00
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
23 1123
FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING
2321 13
HYDRONIC PIPING
23 21 23
HYDRONIC PUMPS
23 25 00
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
23 33 00
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 34 15
MIXED FLOW FAN
23 5233
FINNED WATER -TUBE BOILERS
23 64 23
SCROLL CHILLER
23 73 13
INDOOR CENTRAL- STATION AIR - HANDLING UNITS
DIVISON 26- ELECTRICAL
26 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
2605 19
LOW- VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 20
CONDUITS
26 05 26
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 28 16
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
SECTION 22 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2. Transition fittings.
3. Dielectric fittings.
4. Mechanical sleeve seals.
5. Sleeves.
6. Escutcheons.
7. Grout.
8. Plumbing demolition.
9. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
10. Painting and finishing.
11. Concrete bases.
12. Supports and anchorages.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,
pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated
spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
220500-1
1. ABS: Acrylonitrile- butadiene - styrene plastic.
2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
3. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:
1. EPDM: Ethylene- propylene -diene terpolymer rubber.
2. NBR: Acrylonitrile- butadiene rubber.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Transition fittings.
2. Dielectric fittings.
3. Mechanical sleeve seals.
4. Escutcheons.
B. Welding certificates.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS DLL, "Structural
Welding Code -- Steel."
B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section D{, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
C. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical
characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and
connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If
minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with
requirements.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory- applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
220500-2
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction, to allow for plumbing installations.
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured -in -place
concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for plumbing items requiring access that
are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08
Section "Access Doors and Frames."
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B 1.20.1 for factory- threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B. Pipe - Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos -free, 1/8 -inch maximum thickness unless
thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full -Face Type: For flat -face, Class 125, cast -iron and cast - bronze flanges.
b. Narrow -Face Type: For raised -face, Class 250, cast -iron and steel flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full -face
or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
220500 -3
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B 18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Plastic, Pipe -Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead -free alloys. Include water- flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper - phosphorus alloys for general -duty
brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAgl, silver alloy for refrigerant piping,
unless otherwise indicated.
G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS 1310.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:
1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.
2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.
Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.
2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS
A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with
ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
Available Manufacturers:
a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.
b. Dresser Industries, Inc.; DMD Div.
C. Ford Meter Box Company, Incorporated (The); Pipe Products Div.
d. _ _ JCM Industries.
C. Smith - Blair, Inc.
f. Viking Johnson.
2. Underground Piping NPS 1 -1/2 and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling.
3. Underground Piping NPS 2 and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve -type coupling.
4. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting.
B. Plastic -to -Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC one -piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80
equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.
Available Manufacturers:
a. Eslon Thermoplastics.
C. Plastic -to -Metal Transition Adaptors: One -piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11 equivalent
dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
220500-4
Available Manufacturers:
a. Thompson Plastics, Inc.
D. Plastic -to -Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP -107, CPVC and PVC four -part union. Include
brass end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O -ring, and union nut.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. NIBCOINC.
b. NIBCO, Inc.; Chemtrol Div.
E. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping: ASTM C 1173
with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and corrosion - resistant metal
band on each end.
Available Manufacturers:
a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.
b. Femco, Inc.
C. Mission Rubber Company.
d. Plastic Oddities, Inc.
2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder -
joint, plain, or weld -neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C. Dielectric Unions: Factory- fabricated, union assembly, for 250 -prig minimum working
pressure at 180 deg F.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.
b. Central Plastics Company.
C. Eclipse, Inc.
d. Epco Sales, Inc.
C. Hart Industries, International, Inc.
f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
g. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.
D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory- fabricated, companion -flange assembly, for 150- or 300 -psig
minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.
b. Central Plastics Company.
C. Epco Sales, Inc.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
220500 -5
d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
E. Dielectric - Flange Kits: Companion -flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full -
face- or ring -type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic
washers, and steel backing washers.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Advance Products & Systems, hie.
b. Calpico, Inc.
C. Central Plastics Company.
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
2. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300 -psig
minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.
F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized -steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic
lining; threaded ends; and 300 -prig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Calpico, Inc.
b. Lochinvar Corp.
G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300 -prig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
Available Manufacturers
a. Perfection Corp.
b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
C. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d. Victaulic Co. of America.
2.6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve.
I. Available Manufacturers:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Calpico, hie.
C. Metraflex Co.
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type
and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
3. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
220500 -6
4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion- resistant coating of length
required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing
element.
2.7 SLEEVES
A. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: 0.0239 -inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
longitudinal joint.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe, with plain
ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast -iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
G. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered -cup shaped, and smooth -outer surface with nailing flange
for attaching to wooden forms.
2.8 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely
fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers
opening.
B. One - Piece, Deep -Pattern Type: Deep - drawn, box - shaped brass with polished chrome- plated
finish.
C. One - Piece, Cast -Brass Type: With set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome- plated.
D. Split- Casting, Cast -Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome- plated.
E. One - Piece, Stamped -Steel Type: With set screw and chrome - plated finish.
F. Split - Plate, Stamped -Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw, and chrome- plated finish.
G. One - Piece, Floor -Plate Type: Cast -iron floor plate.
H. Split- Casting, Floor -Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
220500 -7
2.9 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic - cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post - hardening, volume- adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000 -psi, 28 -day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 PLUMBING DEMOLITION
A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" and Division 02 Section "Selective
Structure Demnli_ki�n." for general demolition requirements and procedures.
B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove plumbing systems, equipment, and components indicated to
be removed.
1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or
plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or
compatible piping material.
3. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
4. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,
clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment
operational.
5. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove
equipment and deliver to Owner.
C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable,
remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and
quality.
3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying
piping systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
220500 -8
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G. Install piping at indicated slopes.
H. Install piping free of sags and bends.
I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater bTgp- system operating
pressure.
L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:
1. New Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One - piece, deep -pattern type.
b. Chrome - Plated Piping: One - piece, cast -brass type with polished chrome - plated
finish.
C. Insulated Piping: One - piece, stamped -steel type with spring clips.
d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One - piece, cast -
brass type with polished chrome- plated finish.
e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One - piece,
stamped -steel type.
f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One - piece, cast -brass type
with polished chrome - plated finish.
g. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One - piece, stamped -steel
type and set screw.
h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One - piece, cast -brass type with
polished chrome - plated finish.
i. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One - piece, stamped -steel type with
concealed hinge and set screw.
j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One - piece, cast -brass type.
k. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One - piece, stamped -steel type with set screw.
1. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One - piece, floor -plate
type.
M. Sleeves are not required for core - drilled holes.
N. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof
slabs.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
220500 -9
P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum -board partitions,
and concrete floor and roof slabs.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or
other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast -iron sleeve fittings
below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4 -inch annular clear space between
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.
b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum -board
partitions.
C. Sock Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.
Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast -iron soil pipe to
extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section
"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.
1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.
4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or
pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.
Q. Aboveground, Exterior -Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1 -inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve
for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
2. Install cast -iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.
3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight
seal.
R. Underground, Exterior -Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast -iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal
pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1 -inch annular
clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight
seal.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
220500-10
S. Fire - Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07
Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials.
T. Verify final equipment locations for roughing -in.
U. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing -in
requirements.
3.3
PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water - flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using
lead -free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter, using copper - phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe. threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and
welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
I. Plastic Piping Solvent- Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe - handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes.
3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/1) 2846M Appendix.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
220500-11
4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket
fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other - than- schedule- number PVC pipe and
socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138
Appendix.
J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
L. PE Piping Heat - Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or
paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1. Plain -End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.
2. Plain -End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to
pipe manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection
to each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2 -1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are
not indicated.
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other
installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
22 05 00 -12
3.6 PAINTING
A. Painting of plumbing systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections
"Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."
B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory- painted finishes with materials and
procedures to match original factory finish.
3.7 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's
written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.
1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both
directions than supported unit.
2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor,, ja*ess otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18 -inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.
3. Install epoxy- coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete
base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor -bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
7. Use 3000 -psi, 28 -day compressive - strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in
Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete."
3.8 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS DI.I.
3.9 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor
plumbing materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or
will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without
splitting wood members.
C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
220500-13
3.10 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment
base plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.
END OF SECTION -
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
220500-14
SECTION 22 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART1- GENERAL
L 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Equipment labels.
2. Warning signs and labels.
3. Pipe labels.
4. Stencils.
5. Valve tags.
6. Warning tags.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification
material and device.
C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed
content for each label.
D. Valve numbering scheme.
E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of
surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
2205 53- 1
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Metal Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: steel, 0.025 -inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or
stamped holes for attachment hardware.
2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than
2 -1/2 by 3/4 inch.
3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24
inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering
for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two- thirds to three - fourths the
size of principal lettering.
4. Fasteners: Stainless -steel rivets or self - tapping screws.
5, .'adhesive: Contact -type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,
1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
2. Letter Color: Black.
3. Background Color: Yellow.
4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than
2 -1/2 by 3/4 inch.
6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24
inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering
for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two- thirds to three - fourths the
size of principal lettering.
7. Fasteners: Stainless -steel rivets or self - tapping screws.
8. Adhesive: Contact -type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number,
Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the
Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.
D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8- 1 /2 -by -1l -inch
bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where
equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number
and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and
maintenance data.
2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8
inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
B. Letter Color: Black.
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
2205 53 -2
C. Background Color: Yellow.
D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2 -1/2
by 3/4 inch.
F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2
inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater
viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two- thirds to three- fourths the size of principal
lettering.
G. Fasteners: Stainless -steel rivets or self - tapping screws.
H. Adhesive: Contact -type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
I. Label Content: Include caution and warning plus emergency notification
instructions.
2.3 PIPE LABELS
A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color- coded, with lettering
indicating service, and showing flow direction.
B. Pre - tensioned Pipe Labels: Pre - coiled, semi -rigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of
pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
C. Self- Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact -type, permanent- adhesive backing.
D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow- Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate
both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1 -1/2 inches high.
2.4 STENCILS
A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; and minimum letter
height of 3/4 inch for access panel and door labels, equipment labels, and similar operational
instructions.
1. Stencil Material: Aluminum.
2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, alkyd enamel black unless otherwise indicated. Paint may
be in pressurized spray -can form.
3. Identification Paint: Exterior, alkyd enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1 unless
otherwise indicated.
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220553-3
2.5 VALVE TAGS
A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4 -inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-
inch numbers.
1. Tag Material: Stainless steel, 0.025 -inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or
stamped holes for attachment hardware.
2. Fasteners: Brass wire -link or beaded chain; or S -hook.
B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8- 1 /2 -by -1l -inch bond paper. Tabulate valve
number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or
space), normal- operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for
identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
1. Valve -tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
2.6 WARNING TAGS
A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident - prevention tags, of plasticized card
stock with matte finish suitable for writing.
1. Size: Approximately 4 by 7 inches
2. Fasteners: Reinforced grommet and wire or string.
3. Nomenclature: Large -size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or 'DO
NOT OPERATE."
4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification
devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and
encapsulants.
3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Piping Color- Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting,
High - Performance Coatings."
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220553-4
B. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe
labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels, complying with ASME A13.1, on each
piping system.
I. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background.
2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.
C. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces;
machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and
exterior exposed locations as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping -
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in
areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.
D. Pipe Label Color Schedule:
1. Low - Pressure, Compressed -Air Piping and natural Gas Piping:
a. Background Color: Green.
b. Letter Color: Black.
2. Medium- Pressure, Compressed -Air Piping and Natural gas Piping:
a. Background Color: Yellow.
b. Letter Color: Black.
3. Domestic Water Piping:
a. Background Color: Blue.
b. Letter Color: Black.
4. Industrial Cold Water Piping:
a. Background Color: Green.
b. Letter Color: Black.
5. Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage Piping:
a. Background Color: Green.
b. Letter Color: White.
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220553 -5
3.4 VALVE -TAG INSTALLATION
A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within
factory- fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn- watering
hose connections; and similar roughing -in connections of end -use fixtures and units. List
tagged valves in a valve schedule.
B. Valve -Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and
with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:
1. Valve -Tag Size and Shape:
a. Cold Water: 1 -1/2 inches round.
b. Hot Water: 1 -1/2 inches round.
C. Low - Pressure Compressed Air: 1 -1/2 inches, round.
d. High- Pressure Compressed Air: 1 -1/2 inches, round.
2. Valve -Tag Color:
a. Cold Water: Green.
b. Hot Water: Red.
C. Low- Pressure Compressed Air: Green.
d. High- Pressure Compressed Air: Yellow.
3. Letter Color:
a. Cold Water: Black.
b. Hot Water: Black.
C. Low - Pressure Compressed Air: Black.
d. High- Pressure Compressed Air: Black.
3.5 WARNING -TAG INSTALLATION
A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where
required.
END OF SECTION
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220553 -6
SECTION 22 1116-DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Under - building slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and
specialties inside the building.
2. Encasement for piping.
3. Specialty valves.
4. Flexible connectors.
5. Escutcheons.
6. Sleeves and sleeve seals.
7. Wall penetration systems.
B. Related Section:
1. Division 22 Section "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for water - service piping and
water meters outside the building from source to the point where water - service piping
enters the building.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Domestic water piping and support and installation shall withstand
effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEUASCE 7.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following products:
1. Specialty valves.
2. Transition fittings.
3. Dielectric fittings.
4. Flexible connectors.
5. Water meters.
6. Backflow preventers, Vacuum breakers, Backflow preventers and vacuum breakers.
7. Escutcheons.
8. Sleeves and sleeve seals.
9. Water penetration systems.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221116 -1
B. Water Samples: Specified in "Cleaning" Article.
C. Coordination Drawings: For piping in equipment rooms and other congested areas, drawn to
scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input
from Installers of the items involved:
1. Fire- suppression -water piping.
2. Domestic water piping.
3. HVAC hydronic piping.
D. Field quality - control reports.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic, potable domestic water piping and components.
C. Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by
Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging
to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner no fewer than five days in advance of proposed interruption of water
service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of water service without Owner's written permission.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting
materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.
2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L ASTM B 88, Type K water tube, drawn temper.
1. Cast - Copper Solder -Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
2211 16-2
2. Wrought- Copper Solder -Joint Fittings: ASME B 16.22, wrought- copper pressure fittings.
3. Bronze Flanges: ASME B 16.24, Class 150, with solder joint ends.
4. Copper Unions: MSS SP -123, cast - copper - alloy, hexagonal -stock body, with ball -and-
socket, metal -to -metal seating surfaces, and solder joint or threaded ends.
5. Copper Pressure -Seal -Joint Fittings:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
I ) Elkhart Products Corporation; Industrial Division.
2) NIBCO INC.
3) Viega; Plumbing and Heating Systems.
b. NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought- copper fitting with EPDM - rubber O -ring seal in
each end.
C. NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4: Cast - bronze or = ; hVcopper fitting with EPDM- rubber
O -ring seal in each end.
6. Copper Push -on -Joint Fittings:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1) NVentLLC.
b. Description: Cast - copper fitting complying with ASMEB16.18 or wrought -
copper fitting complying with ASME B 16.22; with stainless -steel teeth and
EPDM- rubber O -ring seal in each end instead of solder joint ends.
7. Copper -Tube Extruded -Tee Connections:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1) T -DRILL Industries Inc.
b. Description: Tee formed in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014.
8. Grooved -Joint Copper -Tube Appurtenances:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1) Anvil International.
2) Shurjoint Piping Products.
3) Victaulic Company.
b. Copper Grooved -End Fittings: ASTM B 75 copper tube or ASTM B 584 bronze
castings.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221116 -3
C. Grooved - End -Tube Couplings: Copper -tube dimensions and design similar to
AWWA C606. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM - rubber gaskets suitable
for hot and cold water, and bolts and nuts.
B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type M and ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, annealed temper.
1. Copper Solder -Joint Fittings: ASME B 16.22, wrought- copper pressure fittings.
2. Copper Pressure - Seal -Joint Fittings:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
I) Elkhart Products Corporation; Industrial Division.
2) NIBCOINC.
3) Viega; Plumbing and Heating Systems.
b. NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought- copper fitting with EPDM - rubber O -ring seal in
each end.
C. NPS 3 and NPS 4: Cast - bronze or wrought- copper fitting with EPDM - rubber O-
ring seal in each end.
2.3 DUCTILE -IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Mechanical- Joint, Ductile -Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical joint bell and plain spigot
end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.
1. Standard- Pattern, Mechanical -Joint Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray iron.
2. Compact- Pattern, Mechanical -Joint Fittings: AWWA C153, ductile iron.
a. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray -iron glands, rubber
gaskets, and steel bolts.
B. Push -on- Joint, Ductile -Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end
unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.
1. Standard - Pattern, Push -on -Joint Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray iron.
a. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.
2. Compact- Pattern, Push -on -Joint Fittings: AWWA C153, ductile iron.
a. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.
C. Plain -End, Ductile -Iron Pipe: AWWA C151.
Grooved - Joint, Ductile -Iron -Pipe Appurtenances:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221116 -4
1)
Anvil International.
2)
Shurjoint Piping Products.
3)
Star Pipe Products.
4)
Victaulic Company.
b. Grooved -End, Ductile -Iron Fittings: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable -iron castings
or ASTM A 536, ductile -iron castings with dimensions matching pipe.
C. Grooved -End, Ductile -Iron -Pipe Couplings: AWWAC606 for ductile -iron -pipe
dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM - rubber gaskets suitable for
hot and cold water, and bolts and nuts.
2.4 CPVC PIPING
A. CPVC Pipe: ASTM F 441/F 441M, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80.
1. CPVC Socket Fittings: ASTM F 438 for QatK = ..& 40 and ASTM F 439 for Schedule 80.
2. CPVC Threaded Fittings: ASTM F 437, Schedule 80.
B. CPVC Piping System: ASTM D 2846/1) 2846M, SDR 11, pipe and socket fittings.
C. CPVC Tubing System: ASTM D 2846/1) 2846M, SDR 11, tube and socket fittings.
2.5 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80.
1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2466 for Schedule 40 and ASTM D 2467 for
Schedule 80.
2. PVC Schedule 80 Threaded Fittings: ASTM D 2464.
2.6 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A. Pipe - Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free, unless otherwise indicated; full -face or ring type
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal, Pipe - Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.
C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead -free alloys. Include water - flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper - phosphorus alloys for general-
duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.
E. Solvent Cements for Joining CPVC Piping and Tubing: ASTM F 493.
F. Solvent Cements for Joining PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to
ASTM F 656.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221116 -5
G. Plastic, Pipe -Flange Gaskets, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
2.7 ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING
A. Standard: ASTM A 674 or AW WA C 105.
B. Form: Sheet or Tube.
C. Material: LLDPE film of 0.008 -inch LLDPE film of 0.008 -inch minimum thickness or high -
density, cross - laminated PE film of 0.004 -inch High - density, cross - laminated PE film of 0.004 -
inch minimum thickness.
D. Color: Black or Natural.
2.8 SPECIALTY VALVES
A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General -Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping"
for general -duty metal valves.
B. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for
balancing valves, drain valves, backflow preventers, and vacuum breakers.
C. CPVC Union Ball Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. American Valve, Inc.
b. Asahi/America, Inc.
C. Colonial Engineering, Inc.
d. Fischer, George Inc.
e. Hayward Flow Control Systems; Hayward Industrial Products, Inc.
f IPEX Inc.
g. NIBCOINC.
h. Sloane, George Fischer, Inc.
i. Spears Manufacturing Company.
j. Thermoplastic Valves hic.
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP -122.
b. Pressure Rating: 125 prig at 73 deg F.
C. Body Material: CPVC.
d. Body Design: Union type.
C. End Connections for Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Detachable, socket.
f End Connections for Valves NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4: Detachable, socket.
g. Ball: CPVC; full port.
h. Seals: PTFE or EPDM- rubber O- rings.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221116 -6
i. Handle: Tee shaped.
D. PVC Union Ball Valves:
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. American Valve, Inc.
b. Asahi/America, Inc.
C. Colonial Engineering, Inc.
d. Fischer, George Inc.
e. Hayward Flow Control Systems; Hayward Industrial Products, Inc.
f. IPEX Inc.
g. Jomar International, LTD.
h. King Bros. Industries.
i. Legend Valve.
j. McDonald, A.Y. Mfg. Co.
k. NIBCO INC.
1. Sloane, George Fischer, Inc.
M. Spears Manufacturing Company.
n. Thermoplastic Valves Inc.
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP -122.
b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig 150 psig at 73 deg F.
C. Body Material: PVC.
d. Body Design: Union type.
e. End Connections for Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Detachable, socket or threaded.
f. End Connections for Valves NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4: Detachable, socket or threaded.
g. Ball: PVC; full port.
h. Seals: PTFE or EPDM- rubber 0-rings.
i. Handle: Tee shaped.
E. CPVC Non -Union Ball Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. American Valve, Inc.
b. Asahi/America, Inc.
C. King Bros. Industries.
d. Legend Valve.
e. NIBCO INC.
f. Spears Manufacturing Company.
g. Thermoplastic Valves Inc.
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP -122.
b. Pressure Rating: 125 prig.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221116 -7
C. Body Material: CPVC.
d. Body Design: Non -union type.
e. End Connections: Socket or threaded.
f. Ball: CPVC; full or reduced port.
g. Seals: PTFE or EPDM - rubber O- rings.
h. Handle: Tee shaped.
F
G.
PVC Non -Union Ball Valves:
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. American Valve, Inc.
b. Asahi/America, Inc.
C. Colonial Engineering, Inc.
d. Hayward Flow Control Systems; Hayward Industrial Products, Inc.
e. IPEX Inc.
f. Jomar International, LTD.
g. King Bros. Industries.
h. Legend Valve.
i. McDonald, A.Y. Mfg. Co.
j. NIBCO INC.
k. Sloane, George Fischer, Inc.
1. Spears Manufacturing Company.
M. Thermoplastic Valves Inc.
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP -122.
b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig at 73 deg F.
C. Body Material: PVC.
d. Body Design: Non -union type.
e. End Connections: Socket or threaded.
f. Ball: PVC; full or reduced port.
g. Seals: PTFE or EPDM - rubber O- rings.
h. Handle: Tee shaped.
CPVC Butterfly Valves:
2.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Fischer, George Inc.
b. Hayward Flow Control Systems; Hayward Industrial Products, Inc
C. NIBCO INC.
d. Sloane, George Fischer, Inc.
e. Spears Manufacturing Company.
f. Thermoplastic Valves Inc.
Description:
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221116 -8
a. Pressure Rating: 125 psig 150 psig at 73 deg F.
b. Body Material: CPVC.
C. Body Design: Lug or wafer type.
d. Seat: EPDM rubber.
e. Seals: PTFE or EPDM- rubber O- rings.
f. Disc: CPVC.
g. Stem: Stainless steel.
h. Handle: Lever.
H. PVC Butterfly Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. American Valve, Inc.
b. Asahi/America, Inc.
C. Colonial Engineering, Inc.
d. Fischer, George Inc.
e. Hayward Flow Control Systems; Hayward Industrial Products, Inc.
f. IPEX Inc.
g. Legend Valve.
It. NIBCOINC.
i. Sloane, George Fischer, hie.
j. Spears Manufacturing Company.
k. Thermoplastic Valves hie.
2. Description:
a. Pressure Rating: 125 psig at 73 deg F.
b. Body Material: PVC.
C. Body Design: Lug or wafer type.
d. Seat: EPDM rubber.
e. Seals: PTFE or EPDM- rubber O- rings.
f. Disc: PVC.
g. Stem: Stainless steel.
h. Handle: Lever.
I. CPVC Ball Check Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. American Valve, Inc.
b. Asahi/America, Inc.
C. Colonial Engineering, Inc.
d. Fischer, George Inc.
C. Hayward Flow Control Systems; Hayward Industrial Products, hie.
f. IPEX Inc.
g. NIBCO INC.
h. Sloane, George Fischer, Inc.
i. Spears Manufacturing Company.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
22 11 16-9
j. Thermoplastic Valves Inc.
2. Description:
a. Pressure Rating: 125 psig at 73 deg F.
b. Body Material: CPVC.
C. Body Design: Union -type ball check.
d. End Connections for Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Detachable, socket or threaded.
C. End Connections for Valves NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4: Detachable, socket or threaded.
f. Ball: CPVC.
g. Seals: EPDM- or FKM- rubber O- rings.
J. PVC Ball Check Valves:
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. American Valve, Inc.
b. Asahi/America, hie.
C. Colonial Engineering, Inc.
d. Fischer, George Inc.
e. Hayward Flow Control Systems; Hayward Industrial Products, Inc.
f. IPEX Inc.
g. Legend Valve.
h. NIBCO INC.
i. Sloane, George Fischer, Inc.
j. Spears Manufacturing Company.
k. Thermoplastic Valves Inc.
2. Description:
a. Pressure Rating: 125 psig at 73 deg F.
b. Body Material: PVC.
C. Body Design: Union -type ball check.
d. End Connections for Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Detachable, socket or threaded.
e. End Connections for Valves NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4: Detachable, socket or threaded.
f. Ball: PVC.
g. Seals: EPDM- or FKM- rubber O- rings.
K. CPVC Gate Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Sloane, George Fischer, hie.
b. Spears Manufacturing Company.
2. Description:
a. Pressure Rating: 125 psig at 73 deg F.
b. Body Material: CPVC.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
22 11 16-10
C. Body Design: Nonrising stem.
d. End Connections for Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Socket or Threaded.
e. End Connections for Valves NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4: Socket or threaded.
E Gate and Stem: Plastic.
g. Seals: EPDM rubber.
h. Handle: Wheel.
L. PVC Gate Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Asahi/America, hie.
b. King Bros. Industries.
C. Sloane, George Fischer, Inc.
d. Spears Manufacturing Company.
2. Description:
a. Pressure Rating: 125 prig at 73 deg F.
b. Body Material: PVC.
C. Body Design: Nonrising stem.
d. End Connections for Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Socket or Threaded.
C. End Connections for Valves NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4: Socket or threaded.
f. Gate and Stem: Plastic.
g. Seals: EPDM rubber.
h. Handle: Wheel.
2.9 TRANSITION FITTINGS
A. General Requirements:
1. Same size as pipes to be joined.
2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined.
3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.
B. Fitting -Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system
fitting.
C. Sleeve -Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing.
b. Dresser, Inc.; Dresser Piping Specialties.
C. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The).
d. JCM Industries.
e. Romac Industries, hie.
f. Smith - Blair, Inc; a Sensus company.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
2211 16 -11
g. Viking Johnson; c/o Mueller Co.
D. Plastic -to -Metal Transition Fittings:
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company.
b. Harvel Plastics, Inc.
C. Spears Manufacturing Company.
2. Description: CPVC or PVC one -piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent
dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert and one solvent - cement - socket or
threaded end.
E. Plastic -to -Metal Transition Unions:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Colonial Engineering, Inc.
b. NIBCO INC.
C. Spears Manufacturing Company.
2. Description: CPVC or PVC four -part union. Include brass or stainless -steel threaded end,
solvent-cement-joint or threaded plastic end, rubber O -ring, and union nut.
2.10 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material
body with separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and
temperature.
B. Dielectric Unions:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Company.
b. Central Plastics Company.
C. EPCO Sales, Inc.
d. Hart Industries International, Inc.
C. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products,
2. Description:
a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig at 180 deg F.
b. End Connections: Solder joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
C. Dielectric Flanges:
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
22 11 16 -12
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Company.
b. Central Plastics Company.
C. EPCO Sales, Inc.
d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2. Description:
a. Factory- fabricated, bolted, companion -flange assembly.
b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig.
C. End Connections: Solder joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder -
joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
D. Dielectric- Flange Kits:
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Calpico, Inc.
C. Central Plastics Company.
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
2. Description:
a. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.
b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig.
C. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.
d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.
C. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.
E. Dielectric Couplings:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Calpico, Inc.
b. Lochinvar Corporation.
2. Description:
a. Galvanized -steel coupling.
b. Pressure Rating: 300 prig at 225 deg F.
C. End Connections: Female threaded.
d. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic.
F. Dielectric Nipples:
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
2211 16-13
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.
b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
C. Victaulic Company.
2. Description:
a. Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545.
b. Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F.
C. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.
d. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.
2.11 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Flex -Hose Co., Inc.
2. Flexicraft Industries.
3. Flex Pression, Ltd.
4. Flex -Weld, Inc.
5. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
6. Mercer Rubber Co.
7. Metraflex, Inc.
8. Proco Products, Inc.
9. Tozen Corporation.
10. Unaflex, Inc.
11. Universal Metal Hose; a Hyspan company
B. Bronze -Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated - bronze tubing with bronze wire -braid covering
and ends brazed to inner tubing.
1. Working- Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig.
2. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded copper pipe or plain -end copper tube.
3. End Connections NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Flanged copper alloy.
C. Stainless -Steel -Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated- stainless -steel tubing with stainless -steel
wire -braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing.
1. Working- Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 prig.
2. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded steel -pipe nipple.
3. End Connections NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Flanged steel nipple.
2.12 ESCUTCHEONS
A. General: Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and floor plates.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
2211 16-14
B.
C,
D
E.
F.
G
H
2.13
A
=:3
C
D.
E.
One Piece, Cast Brass: Polished, chrome- plated finish with setscrews.
One Piece, Deep Pattern: Deep- drawn, box - shaped brass with chrome- plated finish.
One Piece, Stamped Steel: Chrome - plated finish with setscrew.
Split Casting, Cast Brass: Polished, chrome - plated finish with concealed hinge and setscrew.
Split Plate, Stamped Steel: Chrome - plated finish with concealed hinge, setscrew.
One -Piece Floor Plates: Cast -iron flange with holes for fasteners.
Split- Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.
SLEEVES
Cast -Iron Wall Pipes: Fabricated of cast iron, and equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe, with
plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
Galvanized- Steel -Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239 -inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with
welded longitudinal joint.
Molded -PE Sleeves: Reusable, PE, tapered -cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing
flange for attaching to wooden forms.
Molded -PVC Sleeves: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
PVC -Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785 Schedule 40.
F. Galvanized- Steel -Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zino-
coated, with plain ends.
G.
2.14
is
Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast -iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.
SLEEVE SEALS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
2. Calpico, Inc.
3. Metraflex, Inc.
4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, used to fill annular
space between pipe and sleeve.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
2211 16 -15
1. Sealing Elements: EPDM- rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include
type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.
3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion- resistant coating, of length
required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
2.15 WALL PENETRATION SYSTEMS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
I. SIGMA.
B. Description: Wall- sleeve assembly, consisting of housing and gland, gaskets, and pipe sleeve.
1. Carrier -Pipe Deflection: Up to 5 percent without leakage.
2. Housing: Ductile -iron casting with hub, waterstop, anchor ring, and locking devices.
Include gland, bolts, and nuts.
3. Housing -to- Sleeve Gasket: EPDM rubber.
4. Housing -to- Carrier -Pipe Gasket: AWWA C111, EPDM rubber.
5. Pipe Sleeve: AWWA C151, ductile -iron pipe or ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, zinc -
coated steel pipe.
2.16 GROUT
A. Standard: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, post- hardening and volume - adjusting, dry, hydraulic -
cement grout.
B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.
C. Design Mix: 5000 -psi, 28 -day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching,
and backfilling.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic
water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to
layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
22 11 16-16
B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
C. Install ductile -iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according to AWWA C600
and AWWA M41.
D. Install underground copper tube and ductile -iron pipe in PE encasement according to
ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
E. Install shutoff valve, hose -end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve,
inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Comply with requirements in
Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages and
Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for drain valves and strainers.
F. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.
G. Install water - pressure- reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with
requirements in Division 22 Section "Domest!eLWater Piping Specialties" for pressure- reducing
valves.
H. Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb.
I. Rough -in domestic water piping for water -meter installation according to utility company's
requirements.
J. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for seismic - restraint
devices.
K. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants
unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
L. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
M. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and
coordinate with other services occupying that space.
N. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.
O. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
P. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher
than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
Q. Install piping free of sags and bends.
R. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
S. Install PEX piping with loop at each change of direction of more than 90 degrees.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
22 11 16-17
T. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and
specialty.
U. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping from each plumbing pump and packaged
booster pump. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for
Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages.
V. Install thermostats in hot -water circulation piping. Comply with requirements in Division 22
Section "Domestic Water Pumps" for thermostats.
W. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with
requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers.
3.3
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before
assembly.
C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
I . Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged.
D. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook,"
"Brazed Joints" Chapter.
E. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water - flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and
fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
F. Pressure- Sealed Joints: Join copper tube and pressure -seal fittings with tools recommended by
fitting manufacturer.
G. Copper- Tubing, Push -on Joints: Clean end of tube. Measure insertion depth with
manufacturer's depth gage. Join copper tube and push-on-joint fittings by inserting tube to
measured depth.
H. Extruded -Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. Use tool
designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating
stop, and braze branch tube into collar.
I. Copper- Tubing Grooved Joints: Roll groove end of tube. Assemble coupling with housing,
gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join copper tube and grooved -end fittings according to
AWWA C606 for roll - grooved joints.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
2211 16-18
J. Ductile -Iron- Piping Grooved Joints: Cut groove end of pipe. Assemble coupling with housing,
gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join ductile -iron pipe and grooved -end fittings according to
AW WA C606 for ductile- iron -pipe, cut - grooved joints.
K. Steel- Piping Grooved Joints: Cut or roll groove end of pipe. Assemble coupling with housing,
gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved -end fittings according to AWWA C606
for steel -pipe grooved joints.
L. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos -free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and
thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to
ASME B31.9.
M. Plastic Piping Solvent- Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe - handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements. Apply primer.
2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/1) 2846M Appendix.
3. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
N. PEX Piping Joints: Join according to ASTM F 1807.
O. Dissimilar - Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both
piping systems.
3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. General -Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General -Duty Valves
for Plumbing Piping" for valve installations.
B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or
equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures
that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use
butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2 -1/2 and larger.
C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping,
and where required to drain water piping. Drain valves are specified in Division 22 Section
"Domestic Water Piping Specialties."
1. Hose -End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and branches.
2. Stop- and -Waste Drain Valves: Instead of hose -end drain valves where indicated.
D. Install balancing valve in each hot -water circulation return branch and discharge side of each
pump and circulator. Set balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. Use ball
valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller and butterfly valves for piping NPS 2 -1/2 and larger.
Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for
balancing valves.
E. Install calibrated balancing valves in each hot -water circulation return branch and discharge side
of each pump and circulator. Set calibrated balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
22 11 16-19
flow. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section 'Domestic Water Piping Specialties"
for calibrated balancing valves.
3.5 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.
B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:
I. NPS 1 -1/2 and Smaller: Fitting -type coupling.
2. NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve -type coupling.
C. Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2 and Smaller: Plastic -to-
metal transition fittings or unions.
3.6 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.
B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.
C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges.
3.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR INSTALLATION
A. Install flexible connectors in suction and discharge piping connections to each domestic water
pump and in suction and discharge manifold connections to each domestic water booster pump.
B. Install bronze -hose flexible connectors in copper domestic water tubing.
C. Install stainless - steel -hose flexible connectors in steel domestic water piping.
3.8 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for seismic - restraint devices.
B. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping
and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support products and installation.
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.
2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:
a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
C. Longer Than 100 Feet If Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
2211 16-20
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.
Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double -rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.
E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8 -inch rod.
2. NPS 1 and NPS 1 -1/4: 72 inches with 3/8 -inch rod.
3. NPS 1 -1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8 -inch rod.
4. NPS 2 -1/2: 108 inches with 1/2 -inch rod.
5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2 -inch rod.
F. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.
G. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1. NPS 1 -1/4 and Smaller: 84 inches with 3/8 -inch rod.
2. NPS 1 -1/2: 108 inches with 3/8 -inch rod.
3. NPS 2: 10 feet with 3/8 -inch rod.
4. NPS 2 -1/2: 11 feet with 1/2 -inch rod.
5. NPS 3 and NPS 3 -1/2: 12 feet with 1/2 -inch rod.
6. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 12 feet with 5/8 -inch rod.
7. NPS 8 to NPS 12: 12 feet with 7/8 -inch rod.
H. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet.
I. Install vinyl- coated hangers for CPVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing
and minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 1 and Smaller: 36 inches with 3/8 -inch rod.
2. NPS 1 -1/4 to NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8 -inch rod.
3. NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 3 -1/2: 48 inches with 1/2 -inch rod.
4. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8 -inch rod.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
2211 16-21
J. Install supports for vertical CPVC piping every 60 inches for NPS 1 and smaller, and every 72
inches for NPS 1 -1/4 and larger.
1. NPS 1 and Smaller: 32 inches with 3/8 -inch rod.
K. Install hangers for vertical PEX piping every 48 inches.
L. Install vinyl- coated hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing
and minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 2 and Smaller: 48 inches with 3/8 -inch rod.
2. NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 3 -1/2: 48 inches with 1/2 -inch rod.
3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8 -inch rod.
M. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches.
N. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP -69 and manufacturer's
written instructions.
3.9 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water - service piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
D. Connect domestic water piping to water - service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect
to the following:
I. Domestic Water Booster Pumps: Cold -water suction and discharge piping.
2. Water Heaters: Cold -water inlet and hot -water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
3. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot -water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller
than required by plumbing code. Comply with requirements in Division 22 plumbing
fixture Sections for connection sizes.
4. Equipment: Cold- and hot -water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than
equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use
flanges instead of unions for NPS 2 -1/2 and larger.
3.10 ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION
A. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
B. Escutcheons for New Piping:
1. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep pattern.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
2211 16-22
2. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass
with polished chrome- plated finish.
3. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass with
polished chrome - plated finish.
4. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One piece, stamped steel with set screw.
5. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One piece, cast brass.
6. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One -piece floor plate.
C.
3.11
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Escutcheons for Existing Piping:
1. Chrome- Plated Piping: Split casting, cast brass with chrome - plated finish.
2. Insulated Piping: Split plate, stamped steel with concealed hinge and spring clips.
3. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split casting, cast brass
with chrome- plated finish.
4. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split casting, cast brass with
chrome- plated finish.
5. Bara Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split casting, cast brass with polished
chrome - plated finish.
6. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split casting, cast brass.
7. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split- casting floor plate.
SLEEVE INSTALLATION
General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through penetrations in
floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
Sleeves are not required for core - drilled holes.
Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
Install sleeves in new partitions, slabs, and walls as they are built.
F. For interior wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation
using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements
in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" forjoint sealants.
G. For exterior wall penetrations above grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using
joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in
Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants.
H. For exterior wall penetrations below grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using
sleeve seals specified in this Section.
I. Seal space outside of sleeves in concrete slabs and walls with grout.
J. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4 -inch annular clear space between sleeve and
pipe or pipe insulation unless otherwise indicated.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
2211 16-23
3.13 WALL PENETRATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install wall penetration systems in new, exterior concrete walls.
B. Assemble wall penetration system components with sleeve pipe. Install so that end of sleeve
pipe and face of housing are flush with wall. Adjust locking devices to secure sleeve pipe in
housing.
3.14 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Identification
for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification materials and installation.
B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.
3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Piping Inspections:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and
approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before
inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having
jurisdiction:
a. Roughing -in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or
closing -in after roughing -in and before setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or
inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Piping Tests:
1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound
and that piping is full of water.
2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate
report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and
unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or
concealed before it was tested.
4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,
without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
2211 16-25
allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must
be repaired.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.
D. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.16 ADJUSTING
A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:
1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.
2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.
4. Adjust balancing valves in hot - water - circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.
a. Manually adjust ball -type balancing valves in hot - water - circulation return piping
to provide flow of hot water in each branch.
b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.
5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during
installation.
6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for
application where used and are clean and ready for use.
8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.
3.17 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect potable and non - potable domestic water piping as follows:
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or
repaired before using.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if
methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or
AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at
outlets.
b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1) Fill system or part thereof with water /chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm
of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.
2) Fill system or part thereof with water /chlorine solution with at least 200
ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
22 11 16-26
5. CPVC, Schedule 40 pipe; CPVC, Schedule 40 Schedule 80 pipe; CPVC, Schedule 80
socket fittings; and solvent - cemented joints.
6. CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe; CPVC, Schedule 80 threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
7. CPVC Tubing System: CPVC tube; CPVC socket fittings; and solvent- cemented joints.
NPS 1 -1/2 and NPS 2 CPVC pipe with CPVC socket fittings may be used instead of
tubing.
8. PEX Tube, NPS 1 and smaller; fittings for PEX tube; and crimped joints.
9. PVC, Schedule 40 pipe, PVC, Schedule 40 Schedule 80 pipe; PVC, Schedule 80 socket
fittings; and solvent - cemented joints.
G. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4, shall be one of the following:
1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; cast- or wrought- copper solder joint fittings;
and soldered joints.
2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L or ASTM B 88, Type K; copper pressure -seal-
joint fittings; and pressure- sealed joints.
3. Hard copper tube, [ASTM B 88, Type L or ASTM B 88, Type K; grooved joint
tube appurtenances; and grooved joints.
4. Galvanized -steel pipe and nipples; galvanized, gray -iron threaded fittings; and threaded
joints.
5. Galvanized -steel pipe; grooved joint, galvanized - steel -pipe appurtenances; and grooved
joints.
6. CPVC, Schedule 40 pipe; CPVC, Schedule 40, Schedule 80 pipe; CPVC, Schedule 80
socket fittings; and solvent- cemented joints.
7. CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe; CPVC, Schedule 80 threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
8. PVC, Schedule 40 pipe; PVC, Schedule 40, Schedule 80 pipe; PVC, Schedule 80 socket
fittings; and solvent - cemented joints.
3.19 VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly, ball,
or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2 -1/2 and larger.
2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or
ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2 -1/2 and larger.
3. Hot -Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Calibrated balancing valves.
4. Drain Duty: Hose -end drain valves.
B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.
C. Iron grooved -end valves may be used with grooved -end piping.
D. CPVC and PVC valves matching piping materials may be used.
- END OF SECTION -
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
2211 16-28
SECTION 23 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PARTI- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Mechanical sleeve seals.
2. Sleeves.
3. Escutcheons.
4. Grout.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,
pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural
Welding Code -- Steel."
B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
23 05 00 - 1
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder -
joint, plain, or weld -neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C. Dielectric Unions: Factory- fabricated, union assembly, for 250 -psig minimum working
pressure at 180 deg F.
D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory- fabricated, companion -flange assembly, for 150- or 300 -psig
minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized -steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic
lining; threaded ends; and 300 -psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300 -psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
2.2 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve.
B. Sealing Elements: NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and
number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
C. Pressure Plates: Plastic Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.
D. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion - resistant coating of length required to
secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
2.3 SLEEVES
A. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: 0.0239 -inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
longitudinal joint.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe, with plain
ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
230500-2
2.4 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely
fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers
opening.
B. One - Piece, Deep - Pattern Type: Deep- drawn, box - shaped brass with polished chrome- plated
finish.
C. One - Piece, Cast -Brass Type: With set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome - plated.
D. Split- Casting, Cast -Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.
Finish: Polished chrome- plated.
2.5 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic- cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post - hardening, volume- adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000 -psi, 28 -day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying
piping systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
230500-3
G. Install piping at indicated slopes.
H. Install piping free of sags and bends.
I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum -board partitions,
and concrete floor and roof slabs.
N. Aboveground, Exterior -Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seolmenetrations using sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1 -inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve
for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
2. Install cast -iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.
3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight
seal.
O. Underground, Exterior -Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast -iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal
pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1 -inch annular
clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight
seal.
P. Fire - Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07
Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials.
Q. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
230500 -4
R. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and
welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
END OF SECTION
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR RVAC
230500 -5
SECTION 23 05 19 - METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
PARTI - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
I. Thermometers.
2. Gages.
3. Test plugs.
4. Flow meters
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.
B. EPDM: Ethylene - propylene -diene terpolymer rubber.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated; include performance curves.
B. Shop Drawings: Schedule for thermometers gages indicating manufacturer's number, scale
range, and location for each.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of thermometer gage, signed by product manufacturer.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL -CASE, LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Palmer - Wahl Instruments Inc.
2. Trerice, H. O. Co.
3. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
4. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
23 05 19-1
B. Case: Die -cast aluminum or brass? inches 9 inches long.
C. Tube: Red or blue reading, mercury or organic - liquid filled, with magnifying lens.
D. Tube Background: Satin - faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale
markings.
E. Window: Glass.
F. Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane, with
locking device.
G. Stem: Copper - plated steel, aluminum, or brass for thermowell installation and of length to suit
installation.
H. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus I scale division to maximum of
1.5 percent of range.
2.2 DUCT -TYPE, LIQUID -IN -GLASS THERMOMETERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Miljoco Corp.
2. Palmer - Wahl Instruments Inc.
3. Trerice, H. O. Co.
4. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
B. Case: Die -cast aluminum 7 inches long.
C. Tube: Red or blue reading, mercury or organic filled, with magnifying lens.
D. Tube Background: Satin- faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale
markings.
E. Window: Glass or plastic.
F. Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane, with
locking device.
G. Stem: Metal, for installation in mounting bracket and of length to suit installation.
H. Mounting Bracket: Flanged fitting for attachment to duct and made to hold thermometer stem.
I. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus I scale division to maximum of
1.5 percent of range.
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
2305 19-2
2.3
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Ashcroft Commercial Instrument Operations; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.
2. Ernst Gage Co.
3. Eugene Ernst Products Co.
4. Marsh Bellofram.
5. Miljoco Corp.
6. NANMAC Corporation.
7. Noshok, Inc.
8. Palmer - Wahl Instruments Inc.
9. REO TEMP Instrument Corporation.
10. Tel -Tru Manufacturing Company.
11. Trerice, H. O. Co.
12. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
13. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.
14. WMA Instrument Corporation.
15. Winters Instruments.
Description: Direct - mounting, bimetallic- actuated dial thermometers complying with
ASME B40.3.
C. Case: Liquid -filled type, stainless steel with 5 -inch diameter.
D. Element: Bimetal coil.
E. Dial: Satin- faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.
F. Pointer: Red or other dark -color metal.
G. Window: Glass or plastic.
H. Ring: Stainless steel.
I. Connector: Adjustable angle type.
J. Stem: Metal, for thermowell installation and of length to suit installation.
K. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of
1.5 percent of range.
2.4 THERMOWELLS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge Div.
2. Ashcroft Commercial Instrument Operations; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.
3. Ernst Gage Co.
BIMETALLIC- ACTUATED DIAL THERMOMETERS
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
230519 -3
4. Marsh Bellofram.
5. Miljoco Corp.
6. NANMAC Corporation.
7. Noshok, hie.
8. Palmer - Wahl Instruments Inc.
9. REO TEMP Instrument Corporation.
10. Tel -Tru Manufacturing Company.
11. Trerice, H. O. Co.
12. Weiss Instruments, hie.
13. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.
14. Wl" Instrument Corporation.
15. Winters Instruments.
0
C.
2.5
a
Q
Manufacturers: Same as manufacturer of thermometer being used.
Description: Pressure - tight, socket -type metal fitting made for insertion into piping and of type,
diameter, and length required to hold thermometer.
PRESSURE GAGES
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge Div.
2. Ashcroft Commercial Instrument Operations; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.
3. Ernst Gage Co.
4. Eugene Ernst Products Co.
5. KOBOLD Instruments, Inc.
6. Marsh Bellofram.
7. Miljoco Corp.
8. Noshok, hie.
9. Palmer - Wahl Instruments Inc.
10. REO TEMP Instrument Corporation.
11. Trerice, H. O. Co.
12. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
13. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit, Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.
14. WIKA Instrument Corporation.
15. Winters Instruments.
Direct - Mounting, Dial -Type Pressure Gages: Indicating -dial type complying with
ASME B40.100.
1. Case: Liquid -filled type, drawn steel or cast aluminum 6 -inch diameter.
2. Pressure - Element Assembly: Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Pressure Connection: Brass, NPS 1/4, bottom - outlet type unless back - outlet type is
indicated.
4. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.
5. Dial: Satin - faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.
6. Pointer: Red or other dark -color metal.
7. Window: Glass.
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
2305 19-4
8. Ring: Metal.
9. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half scale.
10. Vacuum - Pressure Range: 30 -in. Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure.
11. Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure.
C. Pressure -Gage Fittings:
1. Valves: NPS 1/4 brass or stainless -steel needle type.
2. Syphons: NPS 1/4 coil of brass tubing with threaded ends.
3. Snubbers: ASME B40.5, NPS 1/4 brass bushing with corrosion- resistant, porous -metal
disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.
2.6 TEST PLUGS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Flow Design, Inc.
2. MG Piping Products Co.
3. National Meter, Inc.
4. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc.
5. Sisco Manufacturing Co.
6. Trerice, H. O. Co.
7. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
B. Description: Corrosion - resistant brass or stainless -steel body with core inserts and gasketed and
threaded cap, with extended stem for units to be installed in insulated piping.
C. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F.
D. Core Inserts: One or two self - sealing rubber valves.
1. Insert material for air, water, oil, or gas service at 20 to 200 deg F shall be CR.
2. Insert material for air or water service at minus 30 to plus 275 deg F shall be EPDM.
E. Test Kit: Furnish one test kit(s) containing one pressure gage and adaptor, two thermometer(s),
and carrying case. Pressure gage, adapter probes, and thermometer sensing elements shall be of
diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping.
1. Pressure Gage: Small bourdon -tube insertion type with 2- to 3 -inch- diameter dial and
probe. Dial range shall be 0 to 200 prig.
2. Low -Range Thermometer: Small bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2 -inch- diameter
dial and tapered -end sensing element. Dial ranges shall be 25 to 125 deg F.
3. Carrying case shall have formed instrument padding.
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
230519 -5
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 THERMOMETER APPLICATIONS
A. Install liquid -in -glass thermometers in the following locations:
1. Where Indicated on plans.
B. Provide the following temperature ranges for thermometers:
1. Heating Hot Water: 30 to 240 deg F, with 2- degree scale divisions.
2. Chilled Water:
3. Air Ducts: Minus 40 to plus 110 deg F, with 2- degree scale divisions.
3.2 INSTALLATIONS
A. Install direct- mounting thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions
B. Install thermowells with socket extending to center of pipe and in vertical position in piping tees
where thermometers are indicated.
C. Duct Thermometer Support Flanges: Install in wall of duct where duct thermometers are
indicated. Attach to duct with screws.
D. Install direct- mounting pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at most
readable position.
E. Install needle -valve and snubber fitting in piping for each pressure gage for fluids (except
steam).
F. Install test plugs in tees in piping
- END OF SECTION -
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
2305 19-6
SECTION 23 05 23- GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Bronze angle valves.
2. Bronze ball valves.
3. Iron, single -flange butterfly valves
4. Bronze lift check valves.
5. Iron, center - guided check valves.
6. Bronze globe valves.
7. Iron globe valves.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 23 HVAC piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.
2. Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and
schedules.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CWP: Cold working pressure.
B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.
C. NBR: Acrylonitrile- butadiene, Buna -N, or nitrile rubber.
D. NRS: Nonrising stem.
E. OS &Y: Outside screw and yoke.
F. RS: Rising stem.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.
GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
23 0523- 1
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single
manufacturer.
B. ASME Compliance:
1. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves..
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.
2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling.
4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.
6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.
B. Use the following precautions during storage:
1. Maintain valve end protection.
2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If
outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.
C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use
handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES
A. Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of valves.
B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system
pressures and temperatures.
C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
D. Valve Actuator Types:
1. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter -turn types.
2. Handlever: For quarter -turn valves NPS 6 and smaller.
3. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 5
plug valves, for each size square plug -valve head.
E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2 -inch stem extensions and the following features:
GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
230523 -2
1. Gate Valves: With rising stem.
2. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non - thermal- conductive material, and
protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or
disturbing insulation.
3. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.
F. Valve -End Connections:
1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves.
2. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B 1.20.1.
G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP -45.
2.2 BRONZE ANGLE VALVES
A. Class 150, Bronze Angle Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
b. NIBCO INC.
C. Powell Valves.
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP -80, Type 2.
b. CWP Rating: 300 psig.
C. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and union -ring bonnet.
d. Ends: Threaded.
e. Stem: Bronze.
f. Disc: PTFE or TFE.
g. Packing: Asbestos free.
h. Handwheel: Malleable iron.
2.3 BRONZE BALL VALVES
A. Two - Piece, Full -Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless -Steel Trim:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.
b. Jamesbury, Inc.
C. NIBCOINC.
d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2. Description:
GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
230523 -3
a. Standard: MSS SP -110.
b. SWP Rating: 150 prig.
C. CWP Rating: 600 psig.
d. Body Design: Two piece.
C. Body Material: Bronze.
f. Ends: Threaded.
g. Seats: PTFE or TFE.
h. Stem: Stainless steel.
i. Ball: Stainless steel, vented.
j. Port: Full.
2.4 IRON, SINGLE- FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. 200 CWP, Iron, Single -Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and aluminum- bronze Disc:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with >;-�guirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Cooper Cameron Valves; a division of Cooper Cameron Corp.
b. NIBCO INC.
C. Tyco International, Ltd.
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP -67, Type I.
b. CWP Rating: 200 prig.
C. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead -end service at rated
pressure without use of downstream flange.
d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron.
C. Seat: EPDM.
f. Stem: One- or two -piece stainless steel.
g. Disc: Stainless steel.
2.5 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES
A. Class 150, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
b. Powell Valves.
C. NIBCO INC.
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP -80, Type 4.
GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
230523-4
b. CWT Rating: 300 psig.
C. Body Design: Horizontal flow.
d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze.
e. Ends: Threaded.
f. Disc: PTFE or TFE.
2.6 IRON, CENTER - GUIDED CHECK VALVES
A. Class 125, Iron, Globe, Center - Guided Check Valves with Resilient Seat:
2.7 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES
A. Class 150, Bronze Globe Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance.-
aith requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
b. NIBCO INC.
C. Powell Valves.
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP -80, Type 2.
b. CWP Rating: 300 psig.
C. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and union -ring bonnet.
d. Ends: Threaded.
C. Stem: Bronze.
f. Disc: PTFE or TFE.
g. Packing: Asbestos free.
h. Handwheel: Malleable iron.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove
special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and
handling.
B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operations.
C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR IIVAC PIPING
230523 -5
D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper
size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is
suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
D. Install valves in position to allow UXArrrmovement.
E. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:
Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but
before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.
3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:
1. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly valves.
2. Butterfly Valve Dead -End Service: Single -flange (lug) type.
3. Throttling Service except Steam: Globe or angle or butterfly valves.
B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves
with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.
C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:
1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder joint valve -
end option is indicated in valve schedules below.
2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve -end
option is indicated in valve schedules below.
3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.
4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.
5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve -end
option is indicated in valve schedules below.
6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.
GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR ITVAC PIPING
230523 -6
3.5 HEATING -WATER VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:
1. Bronze Angle Valves
2. Ball Valves
3. Bronze Swing Check Valves
4. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 150, stainless steel disc.
B. Pipe NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger:
1. Iron, Single - Flange Butterfly Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 12
2. Iron, Center - Guided Check Valves
3.6 CHILLED WATER VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:
1. Bronze Angle Valves
2. Ball Valves
3. Bronze Swing Check Valves
4. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 150, stainless steel disc.
B. Pipe NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger:
1. Iron, Single - Flange Butterfly Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 12
2. Iron, Center - Guided Check Valves
- END OF SECTION -
GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
230523-7
SECTION 23 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.
2. Trapeze pipe hangers.
3. Metal framing systems.
4. Fastener systems.
5. Equipment supports.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 23 Section(s) "Metal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings hidustry Inc.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand
the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according
to ASCE /SEI 7.
B. For those elements that do not require details on the approved drawings, the installation shall be
subject to the approval of the Mechanical/Electrical Engineer and the field representative of the
City of Rosemead.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and
installation details and include calculations for the following; include Product Data for
components:
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230529 -1
1. Trapeze pipe hangers.
2. Pipe stands.
3. Equipment supports.
C. Welding certificates.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code -Steel."
B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
PART?- PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Carbon -Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Description: MSS SP -58, Types 1 through 58, factory- fabricated components.
2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
3. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to
support bearing surface of piping.
4. Hanger Rods: Continuous - thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.
B. Copper Pipe Hangers:
1. Description: MSS SP -58, Types 1 through 58, copper- coated - steel, factory- fabricated
components.
2. Hanger Rods: Continuous - thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper- coated steel.
2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A. Description: MSS SP -69, Type 59, shop- or field- fabricated pipe - support assembly made from
structural carbon -steel shapes with MSS SP -58 carbon -steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-
bolts.
2.3 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:
Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Allied Tube & Conduit.
b. Cooper B -Line, Inc.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230529-2
C. Flex -Strut hie.
d. GS Metals Corp.
e. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
f Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd.
g. Wesanco, Inc.
2. Description: Shop- or field- fabricated pipe- support assembly for supporting multiple
parallel pipes.
3. Standard: MFMA -4.
4. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips.
5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel
slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.
6. Hanger Rods: Continuous- thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.
7. Metallic Coating: Hot - dipped galvanized.
8. Paint Coating: Epoxy.
2.4 THERMAL - HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
2. Clement Support Services.
3. ERICO International Corporation.
4. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.
5. PHS Industries, Inc.
6. Pipe Shields, Inc.; a subsidiary of Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
7. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
8. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc.
9. Value Engineered Products, hie
B. Insulation -Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100 -psig
or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125 -psig minimum compressive
strength and vapor barrier.
C. Insulation -Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water - repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I
calcium silicate with 100 -psig ASTM C 552, Type H cellular glass with 100 -psig or
ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125 -psig minimum compressive
strength.
D. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
E. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
F. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient
air temperature.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230529 -3
2.5
A.
2.6
A.
B.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
Description: Welded, shop- or field - fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon -
steel shapes.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon -steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and
galvanized.
Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and - packaged, dry, hydraulic- cement, nonshrink and
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2. Design Mix: 5000 -psi, 28 -day compressive strength.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Metal Pipe - Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP -69 and MSS SP -89. Install hangers,
supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building
structure.
B. Metal Trapeze Pipe -Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP -69 and MSS SP -89. Arrange
for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field- fabricated
trapeze pipe hangers.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe
hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon -steel shapes selected for loads being
supported. Weld steel according to AWS Dl.1/DL IM.
C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and
support together on field - assembled metal framing systems.
D. Thermal -Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
E. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,
washers, and other accessories.
F. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded - structural -steel shapes.
G. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
H. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses
from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230529 -4
I. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed
maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
J. Insulated Piping:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal- hanger shield
insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
o. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services
piping-
2. Install MSS SP -58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a. Option: Thermal -hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight -
distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
3. Install MSS SP -58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields
shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
a. Option: Thermal- hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight -
distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3 -1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
C. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.
e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.
5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium- silicate - insulation inserts
of length at least as long as protective shield.
6. Thermal -Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
3.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural -steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support
equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230529-5
3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment
supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be
shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWSDLl/Dl.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding;
appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the
following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no r- Mess shows after finishing and so
contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous- thread hanger and support rods to 1 -1/2 inches.
3.5 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply
with SSPC -PA 1 requirements for touching up field - painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing- repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and
equipment.
B. Comply with MSS SP -69 for pipe -hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will
not have field - applied finish.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230529 -6
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Use carbon -steel pipe hangers and supports metal trapeze pipe hangers and metal framing
systems and attachments for general service applications.
Use copper - plated pipe hangers attachments for copper piping and tubing.
Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
Use thermal- hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.
Horizontal- Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-
center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
6. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid -Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of
noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.
7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated,
stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary
pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
9. Adjustable, Swivel -Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated,
stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
10. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of
noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.
11. Extension Hinged or Two -Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of
noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.
12. U -Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or
contraction.
1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or
insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
2. Yoke -Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F,pipes NPS 4
to NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.
3. Carbon- or Alloy - Steel, Double -Bolt Pig..° - ^„imps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of
pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.
4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to
NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required.
14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel -
pipe base stanchion support and cast -iron floor flange or carbon -steel plate.
15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with
steel -pipe base stanchion support and cast -iron floor flange or carbon -steel plate, and
with U -bolt to retain pipe.
16. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion -type support for pipes
NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel -pipe base stanchion
support and cast -iron floor flange.
Vertical- Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to
NPS 24.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230529 -7
2. Carbon- or Alloy -Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4
to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
J. Hanger -Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
4. Malleable -Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of
building attachments.
5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
K. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel- Pipe- Covering Protection c y ". s (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer
to prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal -Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
L. Comply with MSS SP -69 for trapeze pipe- hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
M. Comply with MFMA -103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
END OF SECTION -
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230529-8
SECTION 23 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Equipment labels.
2. Pipe labels.
3. Duct labels.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTAL
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Metal Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Aluminum, 0.032 -inch or anodized aluminum, 0.032 -inch
minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.
2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than
2 -1/2 by 3/4 inch.
3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24
inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering
for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two- thirds to three- fourths the
size of principal lettering.
4. Fasteners: Stainless -steel self - tapping screws.
5. Adhesive: Contact -type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
B. Label Content: Include equipments Drawing designation or unique equipment number,
Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the
Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.
C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8- 1 /2 -by -11-inch
bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where
equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number
and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and
maintenance data.
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230553 -1
2.2 PIPE LABELS
A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color- coded, with lettering
indicating service, and showing flow direction.
B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference
of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
C. Self- Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact -type, permanent- adhesive backing.
D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow- Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate
both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1 -1/2 inches high.
2.3 DUCT LABELS
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16
inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
B. Letter Color: Black.
C. Background Color: White.
D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2 -1/2
by 3/4 inch.
F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2
inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater
viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two- thirds to three- fourths the size of principal
lettering.
G. Fasteners: Stainless -steel self - tapping screws.
IT Adhesive: Contact -type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
I. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, duct size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
I. Flow- Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both
directions, or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1 -1/2 inches high.
IDENTIFICATION FOR IIVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230553 -2
PART 3- EXECUTION
•• •►
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification
devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and
encapsulants.
3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces;
machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and
exterior exposed locations as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in
areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.
B. Pipe Label Color Schedule:
1. Chilled -Water Piping:
a. Background Color: Black.
b. Letter Color: White.
2. Heating Water Piping:
a. Background Color: Black.
b. Letter Color: White.
3A DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install plastic - laminated duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color
codes:
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230553-3
1. Blue: For cold -air supply ducts.
2. Yellow: For hot -air supply ducts.
3. Green: For exhaust -, outside -, relief -, return-, and mixed -air ducts.
4. ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust.
B. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of
50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.
END OF SECTION -
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230553 -4
SECTION 23 05 93- TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Balancing Air Systems:
a. Constant - volume air systems.
b. Variable — Volume multizone air systems.
2. Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems:
a. Contact -flow hydronic systems.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.
E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: Within 45 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation
that the TAB contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified
in "Quality Assurance" Article,
B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed,
submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.
C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB
strategies and step -by -step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.
D. Certified TAB reports.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 -1
E. Sample report forms.
F. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:
1.
Instrument type and make.
2.
Serial number.
3.
Application.
4.
Dates of use.
5.
Dates of calibration.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC.
1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC.
2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC as a
TAB technician.
B. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB
reports.
2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures
specified and referenced in this Specification.
C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Owner representative.
D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111,
Section 5, "Instrumentation."
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and
times.
B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been
satisfactorily completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TAB SPECIALISTS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, engage one of the following:
1. Winare
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593-2
2. Penn Air Control
3. Los Angeles Air Balance
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer
wells, flow- control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify
that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.
C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.
D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions
for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and
assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
E. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to
verify that they meet the leakage class of connected ducts as specified in Division 23 Section
"Metal Ducts" and are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in
plenum walls are sealed and fire- stopped if required.
F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.
1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects
that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or
part of a system.
2. Calculate system - effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when
installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment
performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in
AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design."
Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.
G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality - control testing,
cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.
H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.
I. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned
and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
J. Examine terminal units, such as variable- air - volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible
and their controls are connected and functioning.
K. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated
perforations.
L. Examine three -way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or
mixing fluid flows.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 -3
M. Examine heat - transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
N. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.
O. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.
P. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe
and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from
indicated values.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step -by -step procedures.
B. Complete system- readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:
1. Permanent electrical -power wiring is complete.
2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
3. Automatic temperature - control systems are operational.
4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air -pattern adjustments are required and
access to balancing devices is provided.
8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be
met.
3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained
in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance" and in this Section.
1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1 -2004, Section 7.2.2, "Air Balancing."
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.
1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness
as used to construct ducts.
2. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation,
coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation."
C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper - control positions, valve position
indicators, fan- speed - control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other
suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.
D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch -pound (IP) units.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 0593-4
3.5 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with
required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as- built" duct layouts.
C. For variable -air- volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct - airflow measurements.
E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor -air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust -air
dampers through the supply -fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
Check for airflow blockages.
J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
K. Check for proper sealing of air - handling -unit components.
L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts."
3.6 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT -VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by
fan manufacturer.
1. Measure total airflow.
a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot -tube traverse
measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total
airflow.
2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure:
a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and
upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
C. Measure inlet static pressure of single -inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as
possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct
restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double -inlet fans through the wall of the plenum
that houses the fan.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 -5
3. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus
actual static pressures. Calculate actual system- effect factors. Recommend adjustments
to accommodate actual conditions.
4. Obtain approval from Owner representative for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower
than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Sections for air - handling
units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air - handling -unit
performance.
5. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan -speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor
amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full- cooling, full -
heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required
brake horsepower.
B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated
airflows within specified tolerances.
Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.
a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot -tube
traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate
the total airflow for that zone.
2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust
volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
3. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to
adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
C. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
Measure terminal outlets using a direct - reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written
instructions and calculating factors.
D. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of
indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and
the dampers at air terminals.
1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated
quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the
Contract Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
3.7 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE -AIR -VOLUME SYSTEMS
A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the
indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a minimum set -point
airflow with the remainder at maximum- airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal
units equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced - airflow terminal units so they
are distributed evenly among the branch ducts.
B. Pressure- Dependent, Variable- Air - Volume Systems without Diversity: After the fan systems
have been adjusted, adjust the variable- air - volume systems as follows"
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR RVAC
230593 -6
1. Balance variable- air - volume systems the same as described for constant- volume air
systems.
2. Set terminal units and supply fan at full airflow condition.
3. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to indicated airflow and verify operation of the
static - pressure controller. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets
downstream from terminal units the same as described for constant- volume air systems.
4. Readjust fan airflow for final maximum readings.
5. Measure operating static pressure at the sensor that controls the supply fan if one is
installed, and verify operation of the static - pressure controller.
6. Set supply fan at minimum airflow if minimum airflow is indicated. Measure static
pressure to verify that it is being maintained by the controller.
7. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the
designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow the
same as described for constant - volume air systems.
a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave
the outlets balanced for maximum airflow
8. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and
minimum outdoor airflow.
a. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same same as
described for constant air volume.
3.8 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at.pump to end
of system. Check the sum of branch - circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate. Correct
variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as- built" piping layouts.
C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the
general preparation procedures specified above:
1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow.
2. Check liquid level in expansion tank.
3. Check makeup water - station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent.
4. Check flow - control valves for specified sequence of operation, and set at indicated flow.
5. Set differential- pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at
fully closed position when pump is positive - displacement type unless several terminal
valves are kept open.
6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.
7. Check pump -motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow - balancing device so
motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.
8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR fIVAC
23 0593-7
3.9 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT -FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures except for positive- displacement
pumps:
Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read
pressure differential across the pump. Covert pressure to head and correct for differences
in gage heights. Note the point of manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify
that the pump has the intended impeller size.
a. If impeller sizes must be adjusted to achieve pump performance, obtain approval
from Owner and comply with requirements in Section232123 "Hydronic Pumps ".
2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the
pump and mark pump manufacturer's head - capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve
until indicated water flow is achieved.
a. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate in overload
conditions.
3. Verify pump -motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the
system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake
horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual
amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.
4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
B. Measure flow at all automatic flow control valves to verify that valves are functioning as
designed.
C. Measure flow at all pressure - independent characterized control valves, with valves in fully open
position, to verify that valves are functioning as designed.
D. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.
E. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.
System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow - pressure -drop
relationship may be used as a flow- indicating device.
F. Balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows:
1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow.
2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over
indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated
flow.
3. Record setting and mark balancing devices.
G. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump
heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor -air temperature.
H. Measure the differential - pressure - control -valve settings existing at the conclusion of balancing.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 -8
I. Check settings and operation of each safety valve, record settings.
3.10 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.
2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
4. Efficiency rating.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter thermal- protection - element rating.
B. Motors Driven by Variable- Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying
from minimum to maximum. Test the manua' 1, ,K , pass of the controller to prove proper
operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number,
serial number, and nameplate data.
3.11 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS
A. Balance water flow through each evaporator and condenser to within specified tolerances of
indicated flow with all pumps operating. With only one chiller operating in a multiple chiller
installation, do not exceed the flow for the maximum tube velocity recommended by the chiller
manufacturer. Measure and record the following data with each chiller operating at designed
conditions:
I. Evaporator -water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure drop, and water flow.
2. For water - cooled chillers, condenser -water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure
drop, and water flow.
3. Evaporator and condenser refrigerant temperatures and pressures, using instruments
furnished by chiller manufacturer.
4. Power factor if factory- installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatts.
5. Kilowatt input if factory- installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatts.
6. Capacity: Calculate in tons of cooling.
7. For air- cooled chillers, verify condenser -fan rotation and record fan and motor data
including number of fans and entering -and leaving -air temperatures.
3.12 PROCEDURES FOR COOLING TOWERS
A. Shut off makeup water for the duration of the test, and verify that makeup and blowndown
systems are fully operational after tests and before leaving the equipment. Perform the
following tests and record the results:
1. Measure condenser -water flow to each cell of the cooling tower.
2. Measure entering -and leaving -water temperatures.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 0593-9
3.13 PROCEDURES FOR BOILERS
A. Hydronic Boilers: Measure and record entering- and leaving -water temperatures and water
flow.
3.14 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT- TRANSFER COILS
A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil:
1. Entering- and leaving -water temperature.
2. Water flow rate.
3. Water pressure drop.
4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
5. Wet -bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils.
6. Airflow.
7. Air pressure drop.
B. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil:
1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
2. Wet -bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
3. Airflow.
4. Air pressure drop.
5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.
3.15 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent.
2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.
3. Heating -Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.
4. Cooling -Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.
3.16 REPORTING
A. Initial Construction -Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as
specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems'
balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to
facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to
14VAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and
balancing devices.
B. Status Reports: Prepare weekly progress reports to describe completed procedures, procedures
in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in
systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building
floor for systems serving multiple floors.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 10
3.17 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections
for tested systems and balanced systems.
1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the
certified testing and balancing engineer.
2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field -report data, include the following:
1. Pump curves.
2. Fan curves.
3. Manufacturers' test data.
4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and
product data.
C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of the TAB contractor.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Engineer's name and address.
6. Contractor's name and address.
7. Report date.
8. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.
9. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.
Number each page in the report.
10. Summary of contents including the following:
a. Indicated versus final performance.
b. Notable characteristics of systems.
C. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.
11. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
12. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.
13. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.
14. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
a. Settings for outdoor -, return-, and exhaust -air dampers.
b. Conditions of filters.
C. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
e. Settings for supply -air, static - pressure controller.
f. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present
each system with single -line diagram and include the following:
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR FIVAC
23 05 93 - 11
1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
2. Water flow rates.
3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
5. Terminal units.
E.
6. Balancing stations.
7. Position of balancing devices.
Air - Handling -Unit Test Reports: For air - handling units with coils, include the following:
1. Unit Data:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
C. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufactur•u:rerialnumber.
f Unit arrangement and class.
g. Discharge arrangement.
h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
i. Center -to- center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.
j. Number, make, and size of belts.
k. Number, type, and size of filters.
2. Motor Data:
a. Motor make, and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm.
C. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full -load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
f. Center -to- center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Total air flow rate in cfm.
b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.
C. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
e. Filter static - pressure differential in inches wg.
f Preheat -coil static- pressure differential in inches wg.
g. Cooling -coil static - pressure differential in inches wg.
h. Heating -coil static- pressure differential in inches wg.
i. Outdoor airflow in cfm.
j. Return airflow in cfm.
k. Outdoor -air damper position.
1. Return-air damper position.
F
Apparatus -Coil Test Reports:
Coil Data:
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 -12
a. System identification.
b. Location.
C. Coil type.
d. Number of rows.
e. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c.
f. Make and model number.
g. Face area in sq. ft..
h. Tube size in NPS.
i. Tube and fin materials.
j. Circuiting arrangement.
2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Air flow rate in cfin.
b. Average face velocity in fpm.
C. Air pressure drop in inches wg.
d. OutdounrOig -wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
f. Entering -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
g. Leaving -air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
h. Water flow rate in gpm.
i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.
j. Entering -water temperature in deg F.
k. Leaving -water temperature in deg F.
1. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.
m. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig.
n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F.
G. Gas- Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to manufacturer's factory startup equipment
reports, include the following:
1. Unit Data:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
C. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Fuel type in input data.
g. Output capacity in Btu/h.
h. Ignition type.
i. Burner - control types.
j. Motor horsepower and rpm.
k. Motor volts, phase, and hertz.
1. Motor full -load amperage and service factor.
2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Total air flow rate in cfm.
b. Entering -air temperature in deg F.
C. Leaving -air temperature in deg F.
d. Air temperature differential in deg F.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 13
e. Entering -air static pressure in inches wg.
f Leaving -air static pressure in inches wg.
g. Air static- pressure differential in inches wg.
h. Low -fire fuel input in Btu/h.
i. High -fire fuel input in Btu/h.
j. Manifold pressure in prig.
k. High- temperature -limit setting in deg F.
1. Operating set point in Btu/h.
m. Motor voltage at each connection.
n. Motor amperage for each phase.
o. Heating value of fuel in Btu/h.
H. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
1. Fan Data:
a. _Sjftemidentification.
b. Location.
C. Make and type.
d. Model number and size.
C. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Arrangement and class.
g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
h. Center -to- center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.
2. Motor Data:
a. Motor make, and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm.
C. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full -load amperage and service factor.
C. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
f. Center -to- center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.
g. Number, make, and size of belts.
3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Total airflow rate in cfm.
b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.
C. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.
I. Round, Flat -Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid
representing the duct cross - section and record the following:
Report Data
a. System and air- handling -unit number.
b. Location and zone.
C. Traverse air temperature in deg F.
d. Duct static pressure in inches wg.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 14
C.
Duct size in inches.
f.
Duct area in sq. ft..
g.
Indicated air flow rate in cfm.
h.
Indicated velocity in fpm.
i.
Actual air flow rate in cfm.
j.
Actual average velocity in fpm.
k.
Barometric pressure in psig.
J. Air - Terminal- Device Reports:
1. Unit Data:
a. System and air - handling unit identification.
b. Location and zone.
C. Apparatus used for test.
d. Area served.
cl Make.
f Number from system diagram.
g. Type and model number.
It. Size.
i. Effective area in sq. ft..
2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Air flow rate in cfm.
b. Air velocity in fpm.
C. Preliminary air flow rate as needed in cfm.
d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm.
e. Final air flow rate in cfm.
f. Final velocity in fpm.
g. Space temperature in deg F.
K. System -Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following:
Unit Data
a. System and air - handling -unit identification.
b. Location and zone.
C. Room or riser served.
d. Coil make and size.
2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Air flow rate in cfm.
b. Entering -water temperature in deg F.
C. Leaving -water temperature in deg F.
d. Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig.
e. Entering -air temperature in deg F.
f. Leaving -air temperature in deg F.
L. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and
include the following:
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 -15
1. Unit Data:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
C. Service.
d. Make and size.
e. Model number and serial number.
f Water flow rate in gpm.
g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.
h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig.
i. Pump rpm.
j. Impeller diameter in inches.
k. Motor make and frame size.
1. Motor horsepower and rpm.
m. Voltage at each connection.
n. Amperage for each phase.
o. Full -load amperage and service factor.
p. Seal type.
2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Static head in feet of head or psig.
b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig.
C. Actual impeller size in inches.
d. Full -open flow rate in gpm.
e. Full -open pressure in feet of head or psig.
I. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig.
g. . Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig.
h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig.
i. Final water flow rate in gpm.
j. Voltage at each connection.
k. Amperage for each phase.
M. Instrument Calibration Reports:
1. Report Data:
a.
Instrument type and make.
b.
Serial number.
C.
Application.
d.
Dates of use.
C.
Dates of calibration.
3.18 INSPECTIONS
A. Initial Inspection:
1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check
measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance
readings documented in the final report.
2. Check the following for each system:
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 -16
a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets.
b. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals.
C. Measure room temperature at each thermostatitemperature sensor. Compare the
reading to the set point.
d. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.
C. Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the final report.
B. Final Inspection:
1. After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks verifies that
testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request
that a final inspection be made by Engineer.
2. The TAB contractor's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the
presence of Owner representative.
3. Engineer shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be
rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements
recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8 -hour
business day.
4. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the
final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as
"FAILED."
5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total
measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be
considered incomplete and shall be rejected.
C. TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB Work fails,
proceed as follows:
1. Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing
device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final
inspection.
2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB
contractor to complete TAB Work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the
cost of the services from the original TAB contractor's final payment.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.19 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions
are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near -peak summer and
winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near -peak summer and winter conditions.
- END OF SECTION -
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 -17
SECTION 23 07 00 - HVAC INSULATION
PARTI- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section
Includes:
1.
Insulation Materials:
a. Flexible elastomeric.
b. Mineral fiber.
2.
Insulating cements.
3.
Adhesives.
4.
Mastics.
5.
Lagging adhesives.
6.
Sealants.
7.
Factory- applied jackets.
8.
Field - applied jackets.
9.
Tapes.
10.
Securements.
11.
Corner angles.
B. Related Sections:
1.
Division 22 Section "Plumbing Insulation."
2.
Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and
jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of
insulation and hanger.
2. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
3. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each
type of insulation.
HVAC INSULATION
230700-1
4. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access
panels.
5. Detail application of field- applied jackets.
6. Detail application at linkages of control devices.
7. Detail field application for each equipment type.
C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation
materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements. indicated. Include
dates of tests and test methods employed.
E. Field quality- control reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship
program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of
Apprenticeship and Training.
B. Fire- Test - Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire -test-
response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84,
by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label
insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with
appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame - spread index of 25 or less, and smoke - developed
index of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame- spread index of 75 or less, and smoke - developed
index of 150 or less.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate
ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct
Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation
application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain
clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field- applied jackets and finishes and
for space required for maintenance.
C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.
HVAC INSULATION
230700 -2
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after
installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have
satisfactory test results.
B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of
construction.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be
applied.
B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less
than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed -cell, sponge- or expanded - rubber materials. Comply with
ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel.
b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.
C. RBX Corporation; Insul -Sheet 1800 and Insul -Tube 180.
E. Mineral -Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type B and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory- applied FSK
jacket. Factory- applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory- Applied Jackets" Article.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap.
b. Johns Manville; Microlite.
C. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap.
d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.
C. Owens Corning; All- Service Duct Wrap.
F. Mineral -Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide
insulation with factory- applied FSK jacket. For equipment applications, provide insulation with
factory- applied ASJ. Factory- applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory- Applied
Jackets" Article.
HVAC INSULATION
230700 -3
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board.
b. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX.
C. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin -Glas.
d. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board.
C. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board.
f Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series.
G. Mineral - Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.
b. Johns Manville; Micro -Lok.
C. Knauf Insulation; 1000 Pipe Insulation.
d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley -K.
C. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.
2. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory- applied ASJ -SSL. Factory-
applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory- Applied Jackets" Article.
H. Mineral- Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting
resin. Semirigid board material with factory- applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393,
Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal
density is 2.5 lb /cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity (k- value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h
x sq. ft. x deg F or less. Factory- applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory- Applied
Jackets" Article.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap.
b. Johns Manville; MicroFlex.
C. Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation.
d. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Flex.
C. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation.
2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS
A. Mineral -Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; Triple I.
b. P. K. Insulation Mfg, Co., Inc.; Super -Stik.
HVAC INSULATION
230700 -4
B. Mineral- Fiber, Hydraulic - Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with
ASTM C 449/C 449M.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. hisulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; SmoothKote.
b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; PK No. 127, and Quik -Cote.
C. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta One Shot.
2.3 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with Mn ' "4179A, Type II; Class I.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal.
b. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive.
C. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85 -75.
d. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive.
2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
C. Mineral -Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL- A- 3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -82.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85 -20.
C. ITW TACO, Division of Illinois Tool Works; 5- 90/80.
d. Marathon Industries, hie.; 225.
e. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 22 -25.
2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24),
D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL- A- 3316C, Class 2,
Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -82.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85 -20.
C. ITW TACO, Division of Illinois Tool Works; 5- 90/80.
HVAC INSULATION
230700 -5
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225.
e. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 22 -25.
2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.4 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with
MIL- C- 19565C, Type II.
For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content in conformance with
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
B. Vapor - Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient
services.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -35.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30 -90.
C. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB -50.
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590.
e. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 55 -40.
f Vimasco Corporation; 749.
2. Water -Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43 -mil dry film
thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -10.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 35 -00.
C. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB- 05/15.
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 550.
C. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 55 -50.
f Vimasco Corporation; WC- 1 /WC -5.
2. Water -Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms at 0.0625 -inch dry film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 200 deg F.
4. Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
HVAC INSULATION
230700 -6
2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES
A. Description: Comply with MIL- A -3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with
insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
I. For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content of g/L or less
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -52.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81 -42.
C. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 130.
d. Mon -Eco Industries, Inc.; 11 -30.
e. Vimasco Corporation; 136.
3. Fire - resistant, water -based lagging adi:wt�-and coating for use indoors to adhere fire -
resistant lagging cloths over duct, equipment, and pipe insulation.
4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 180 deg F.
5. Color: White.
2.6 SEALANTS
A. Joint Sealants:
1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
2. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F.
4. Color: White or gray.
5. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -76 -8.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 95 -44.
C. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405.
d. Mon -Eco Industries, hie.; 44 -05.
C. Vimasco Corporation; 750.
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
3. Fire- and water - resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
5. Color: Aluminum.
6. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
HVAC INSULATION
230700 -7
C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP -76.
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
3. Fire- and water - resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
5. Color: White.
6. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.7 FACTORY - APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory- applied jackets on various applications. When
factory- applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1. ASJ: White, kraft- paper, fiberglass- reinforced scrim with aluminum -foil backing;
complying with ASTM C It 36, Type I.
2. ASJ -SSL: ASJ with self - sealing, pressure- sensitive, acrylic -based adhesive covered by a
removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum -foil, fiberglass- reinforced scrim with kraft -paper backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
2.8 FIELD - APPLIED JACKETS
A. Field- applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum- foil -face, fiberglass- reinforced scrim with kraft -paper backing.
C. Metal Jacket:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Metal Jacketing Systems.
b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Surefit.
C. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul -Mate.
2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005,
Temper H -14.
a. Factory cut and rolled to size.
b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field- applied jacket schedules.
C. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3 -mil- thick, heat - bonded
polyethylene and kraft paper.
d. Factory- Fabricated Fitting Covers:
HVAC INSULATION
230700 -8
1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.
2) Preformed 2 -piece or gore, 45- and 90- degree, short- and long- radius
elbows.
3) Tee covers.
4) Flange and union covers.
5) End caps.
6) Beveled collars.
7) Valve covers.
8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory- fabricated fitting covers are not
available.
2.9 TAPES
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor- retarder tape matching factory- applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,
complying with ASTM C 1136.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835.
b. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105.
C. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ.
d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus /SQ.
2. Width: 3 inches.
3. Thickness: 11.5 mils.
4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force /inch in width.
5. Elongation: 2 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
B. FSK Tape: Foil -face, vapor - retarder tape matching factory- applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;
complying with ASTM C 1136.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827.
b. Compac Corp.; 110 and 111.
C. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK.
d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW /SQ.
2. Width: 3 inches.
3. Thickness: 6.5 mils.
4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force /inch in width.
5. Elongation: 2 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf /inch in width.
7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
C. Aluminum -Foil Tape: Vapor- retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.
F[VAC INSULATION
230700 -9
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800.
b. Compac Corp.; 120.
C. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 488 AWF.
d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW.
2. Width: 2 inches.
3. Thickness: 3.7 mils.
4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force /inch in width.
5. Elongation: 5 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf /inch in width.
2.10 SECUREMENTS
A. Bands:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Childers Products; Bands.
b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands.
C. RPR Products, Inc.; Bands.
2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015
inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing or closed seal.
3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H -14, 0.020 inch
thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing or closed seal.
4. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept
metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.
B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:
1. Capacitor- Discharge -Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc - coated steel pin, fully annealed for
capacitor - discharge welding, 0.135 -inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of
insulation indicated.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP -1.
2) GEMCO; CD.
3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD.
4) Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS.
2. Cupped -Head, Capacitor- Discharge -Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc - coated steel pin, fully
annealed for capacitor- discharge welding, 0.135 -inch- diameter shank, length to suit
depth of insulation indicated with integral 1 -1/2 -inch galvanized carbon -steel washer.
HVAC INSULATION
23 07 00 -10
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP -1.
2) GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin.
3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head.
4) Nelson Stud Welding; CHP.
3. Insulation- Retaining Washers: Self- locking washers formed from 0.016 -inch- thick,
aluminum sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place
but not less than 1 -1/2 inches in diameter.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1)
AGM Industries, Inc.; RC -150.
2)
QY-MV, 0; R -150.
3)
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA -150.
4)
Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips.
b. Protect ends with capped self - locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to
ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.
C. Staples: Outward - clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4 -inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.
D. Wire: 0.080 -inch nickel- copper alloy.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. C & F Wire.
b. Childers Products.
C. PABCO Metals Corporation.
d. RPR Products, Inc.
2.11 CORNER ANGLES
A. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to
ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005; Temper H -14.
B. Stainless -Steel Corner Angles: 0.024 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, stainless steel according
to ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or 316.
HVAC INSULATION
230700-11
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of
defects.
2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a
corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:
1. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300
deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating
materials and application methods for operating temperature range.
C. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with
requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
D. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with
stainless -steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including
fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required
for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system
schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
I-IVAC INSULATION
230700-12
G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor- barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper
and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor- barrier mastic.
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation
material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.
L. Install insulation with factory- applied jackets as follows:
1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2. Cover circumferential joints with 3 -inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation
jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of
strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1 -1/2 inches. Install insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self - sealing lap.
Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.
a. For below ambient services, apply vapor - barrier mastic over staples.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to
maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor - barrier mastic on seams and joints and at
ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking
due to thermal movement.
O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar
to butt joints.
For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
14VAC INSULATION
230700-13
1. Vibration - control devices.
2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
3. Nameplates and data plates.
4. Manholes.
5. Handholes.
6. Cleanouts.
3.4 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof
penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface
and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation,
install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal
joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of
roof flashing.
4. Seat jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush
with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation
continuously through wall penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface
and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation,
install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal
joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at
least 2 inches.
4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):
Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
E. Insulation Installation at Fire -Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation
continuously through penetrations of fire -rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation at fire
damper sleeves for fire -rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper
sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.
Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping "irestopping
and fire - resistive joint sealers.
F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
HVAC INSULATION
230700-14
1. Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not fire rated.
For penetrations through fire -rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves
and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation.
Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches.
2. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
3. Seal penetrations through fire -rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in
Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.5 EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Mineral Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Secure insulation
with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,
for 50 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces.
2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment, including
contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints. Stagger end
joints.
3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles.
4. Install adhesively attached or self - sticking insulation hangers and speed washers on sides
of tanks and vessels as follows:
a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME - labeled pressure vessels.
b. Select insulation hangers and adhesive that are compatible with service
temperature and with substrate.
C. On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor -pin spacing is 3 inches from insulation end
joints, and 16 inches o.c. in both directions.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
C. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and domed heads of tanks
and vessels.
f. Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers.
g. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
5. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless -steel or aluminum bands. Select band
material compatible with insulation materials.
6. Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or practical and
where insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle network for securing
insulation. Stretch prestressed aircraft cable around the diameter of vessel and make taut
with clamps, tumbuckles, or breather springs. Place one circumferential girdle around
equipment approximately 6 inches from each end. Install wire or cable between two
circumferential girdles 12 inches o.c. Install a wire ring around each end and around
outer periphery of center openings, and stretch prestressed aircraft cable radially from the
wire ring to nearest circumferential girdle. Install additional circumferential girdles along
the body of equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48 inches o.c. Use this network
for securing insulation with tie wire or bands.
7. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches.
8. Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes,
handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal for service and inspection.
HVAC INSULATION
230700-15
9. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, hndholes, ASME stamps, and
nameplates.
10. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to open ends,
joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Install insulation
over entire surface of tanks and vessels.
I. Apply 100 percent coverage of adhesive to surface with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive.
2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints.
C. Insulation Installation on Pumps:
1. Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and coincide box
joints with splits in pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward bolted flanges. Bolt
flanges on 6 -inch centers, starting at corners. Install 3/8 -inch- diameter fasteners w
wing nuts. Alternatively, secure the box sections together using a latching mechanism.
2. Fabricate boxes from aluminum, at least 0.050 inch thick.
3. For below ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and penetrations.
Seal between flanges with replaceable gasket material to form a vapor barrier.
3.6 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more
specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:
1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with
continuous thermal and vapor - retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from
same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly
against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular
surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is
uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt
each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with
adhesive.
4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets,
valve stuffing -box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with
insulating cement.
5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating
HVAC INSULATION
230700-16
cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and
replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable
insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor
barrier.
6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.
Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a
mastic. Install vapor - barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for
above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric - reinforcing mesh. Trowel the
mastic to a smooth and well - shaped contour.
8. For services not specified to receive a field- applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric
and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and
unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation
facing using PVC tape.
9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION."
Match size and color of pipe labels. --
C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,
test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels,
and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the
connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing
sealant.
D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the
following:
1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same
thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe
insulation.
2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation
from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless -
steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide
the two -part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of
mitered blocks wired to stainless -steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached
insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe
insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied
in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.
5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field- applied jacket schedules, finish exposed
surfaces with a metal jacket.
3.7 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate
openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
IfVAC INSULATION
230700-17
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as
pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive
to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.
2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to
eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet
insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow
valve operation without disturbing insulation.
3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to
surface being insulated.
3.8 MINERAL -FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten
bands without deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions
with vapor - barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory- applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with
outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
4. For insulation with factory- applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple
longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer and seal with vapor - barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral -fiber blanket insulation.
14VAC INSULATION
230700-18
4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least
1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
I. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections
of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation
materials with wire or bands.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to
valve body.
3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation.
4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
E. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation
pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,
for 50 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Install either capacitor- discharge -weld pins and speed washers or cupped -head, capacitor -
discharge -weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as
follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal
centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16
inches o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each
way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold
insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
C. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
C. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.
f Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous
unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with
insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure
laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2 -inch outward- clinching staples, 1 inch o.c.
Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field- applied jacket, adhesive, vapor - barrier
mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
IlVAC INSULATION
230700-19
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor -
barrier seal.
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18 -foot
intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor - barrier mastic applied in a Z- shaped
pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.
Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the
insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.
5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints.
At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.
6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section
for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat -oval duct elbows with individually
mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with
6 -inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of
stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,
for 50 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Install either capacitor- discharge -weld pins and speed washers or cupped -head, capacitor -
discharge -weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as
follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal
centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16
inches o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. each
way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold
insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
C. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
C. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous
unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with
insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure
laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2 -inch outward- clinching staples, 1 inch o.c.
Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field - applied jacket, adhesive, vapor- barrier
mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations w_ ith tape or mastic to maintain vapor -
barrier seal.
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18 -foot
intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor- barrier mastic applied in a Z- shaped
pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.
FIVAC INSULATION
230700-20
Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the
insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.
5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section
for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and
inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat -oval duct elbows with
individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with
6 -inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of
stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
3.9 FIELD - APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A. Where glass -cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with
factory - applied jackets.
1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2 -inch overlap at seams and joints.
2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062 -inch- thick coats of lagging adhesive.
3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.
B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:
1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.
3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
4. Install jacket with 1 -1/2 -inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3 -inch- wide joint strips at
end joints.
5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor- retarder jackets and exposed insulation
with vapor - barrier mastic.
6. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the
finish bead along seam and joint edge.
C. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2 -inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end
joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof
sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless -steel bands 12
inches o.c. and at end joints.
3.10 FINISHES
A. Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass - Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket
Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09
painting Sections.
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket
material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.
a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex - emulsion size.
HVAC INSULATION
23 07 00 -21
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
inspection of the completed Work.
D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless -steel jackets.
3.11 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:
1. Indoor, concealed supply air.
2. Indoor, concealed return located in nonconditioned space.
3. Indoor, exposed return located in nonconditioned space.
B. Items Not Insulated:
1. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and
ASHRAE /IESNA 90.1.
2. Factory- insulated flexible ducts.
3. Factory- insulated plenums and casings.
4. Flexible connectors.
5. Vibration - control devices.
6. Factory- insulated access panels and doors.
3.12 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Concealed, round and flat -oval, supply -air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral -Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 0.75- lb /cu. ft. nominal density.
B. Concealed, round and flat -oval, return-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral -Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 0.75- lb /cu. ft. nominal density.
C. Concealed, round and flat -oval, outdoor -air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral -Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 0.75- lb /cu. ft. nominal density.
D. Concealed, rectangular, supply -air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral -Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 0.75- lb /cu. ft. nominal density.
E. Concealed, rectangular, return-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral -Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
F. Concealed, rectangular, outdoor -air duct insulation shall be the following:
HVAC INSULATION
230700-22
1. Mineral -Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
3.13 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for
a type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment in paragraphs below that is not factory insulated.
C. Heating- hot -water pump insulation shall be one of the following:
1. Calcium Silicate: 3 inches thick.
2. Cellular Glass: 3 inches thick.
3. Mineral -Fiber Board: 2 inches thick and 3- lb /cu. ft. nominal density.
D. Heating- hot -water expansion/conwrnssion tank insulation shall be one of the following:
1. Calcium Silicate: 2 inches thick.
2. Cellular Glass: 1 -1/2 inches thick.
3. Mineral -Fiber Board: 1 inch thick and 3- lb /cu. ft. nominal density.
4. Mineral -Fiber Pipe and Tank: 1 inch thick.
3.14 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for
each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,
selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.
2. Underground piping.
3. Chrome - plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
3.15 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: I inch thick.
b. Mineral - Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.
B. Chilled Water and Brine, above 40 Deg F:
NPS 12 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.
b. Mineral - Fiber: 1 inch thick.
HVAC INSULATION
230700-23
C. Heating- Hot -Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and below:
1. NPS 12 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Mineral- Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1 1/2 inches thick.
3.16 OUTDOOR, FIELD - APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory- applied jacket, install the
field- applied jacket over the factory- applied jacket.
B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
C. Piping, Exposed:
c .::,_ 1. Aluminum, Smooth Pith 1 - Shaped Locking Seam: 0.024 inch 0.032 inch thick.
- END OF SECTION -
HVAC INSULATION
230700-24
SECTION 23 09 00 — HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish an BACnet energy management system, including a Microsoft Windows 2000/NT or
Windows XP operator's terminal interface, based on a distributed logic control system in
accordance with this specification section. The operator's terminal, all global controllers, shall
communicate using the protocols and local area network (LAN) standards as defined by
ANSUASHRAETM Standard 135 -1995, BACnet. No gateways shall be used for
communication to controllers installed under this section.
B. Items of work included are as follows:
1. Provide all necessary BACnet - compliant hardware and software to meet the system's
functional specifications. Provide Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement
(PICS) for Windows -based control software and every controller in system, including
unitary controllers. All direct digital logic hardware is to comply with BACnet.
2. Prepare individual hardware layouts, interconnection drawings, and software
configuration from project design data.
3. Implement the detailed design for all system- standard analog and binary objects,
distributed control and system databases, graphic displays, logs, and management reports
based on control descriptions, logic drawings, configuration data, and bid documents.
4. Design, provide, and install all equipment cabinets, panels, data communication network
cables needed, and all associated hardware.
5. Provide and install all interconnecting cables between supplied cabinets, logic controllers,
and input/output devices.
6. Provide and install all interconnecting cables between all operator's terminals and
peripheral devices (such as printers, etc.) supplied under this section.
7. Provide complete manufacturer's specifications for all items that are supplied. Include
vendor name of every item supplied.
8. Provide supervisory specialists and technicians at the job site to assist in all phases of
system installation, startup, and commissioning.
C. Provide a comprehensive operator and technician training program as described herein.
1. Provide as -built documentation, operator's terminal software, diagrams, and all other
associated project operational documentation (such as technical manuals) on approved
media, the sum total of which accurately represents the final system.
2. Provide new dampers, valves, and damper actuators. No used components shall be used
as any part or piece of installed system.
1.2 SYSEM DESCRIPTION
A. General Requirements
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
23 09 00 - 1
1. A distributed logic control system complete with Direct Digital Control (DDC) and
Direct Analog Control (DAC) software shall be provided. System shall be totally based
on ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135 -1995, BACnet. This system is to control all mechanical
equipment, including all unitary equipment such as VAV boxes, heat pumps, fan- coils,
AC units, etc. and all air handlers, boilers, chillers, and any other listed equipment using
native BACnet- compliant components.
2. The entire processing system shall be in complete compliance with the BACnet standard:
ANSI/ASHRAE 135 -1995. The system shall use BACnet protocols and LAN types
throughout and exclusively. Non - BACnet- compliant or proprietary equipment or systems
(including gateways) shall not be acceptable and are specifically prohibited.
3. All logic controllers for terminal units, air handlers, central mechanical equipment, and
Microsoft Windows -based operator's terminal(s) shall communicate and share data,
utilizing only BACnet communication protocols.
4. All logic controllers shall be fully programmable. That is, programmable controllers for
every terminal unit, air handler, all central plant equipment, and any other piece of
controlled equipment shall be provided. Programming tools shall be provided as part of
opu r ltor workstation for every controller supplied for the project.
5. The controls contractor shall assume complete responsibility for the entire controls
system as a single source. He shall certify that he has factory- trained technical personnel
on staff under his direct employ on a daily basis. These employees shall be qualified to
engineer, program, debug, and service all portions of the BACnet based logic control
system. This shall include operator's terminal, global controllers, routers, terminal unit
controllers, sensors and all other sections of the system.
6. The design is based upon Siemens Talon or approved equal by Engineer. Pre - approved
contactors are as follows:
a. Air -Ex Air Conditioning Inc., Siemens Talon
b. BT Controls, Siemens Talon
C. Infinite Controls, Siemens Talon
B. Basic System Features
1. Zone -by -zone direct digital logic control of space temperature, scheduling, optimum
start, equipment alarm reporting, and override timers for after -hours usage. A zone is the
area served by one HVAC logic controller unit, such as a heat pump, VAV box, dual duct
mixing box, or a multi -zone.
2. Operator's terminal software shall be Microsoft Windows 2000/NT or Windows XP
based. The EMCS application program shall be written to communicate specifically
utilizing BACnet protocols. Software shall be multi - tasking, capable of executing and
displaying multiple instances in individual windows while running concurrently with
other Windows programs such as word processors or database programs. Software shall
support Windows Active X interface. Software shall strictly follow Microsoft Windows
API guidelines. Systems using proprietary software or operating systems other than that
described above are strictly prohibited. Operation of the terminal software shall be simple
and intuitive.
3. Operator's terminal software shall contain an easy -to- operate system allowing
configuration of system -wide BACnet controllers, including management and display of
the controller programming. This system shall provide the capability to configure
controller binary and analog inputs /outputs.
4. Operator's terminal operating system shall be capable of utilizing third -party Windows -
based programs for such things as spreadsheet analysis, graphing, charting, custom report
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
230900 -2
generation, and graphics design packages. Graphics generation shall be done using
standard Windows packages. No proprietary graphics generation software shall be
needed.
5. When specified, at least one operator's terminal shall be equipped to act as a system
server. This system server shall store copies of loadable software for all field components
and shall be capable of automatic or manual reloading of such software into the field
components as required. The system server shall also gather and archive system operating
data, such as trendlogs, energy logs, and other historical operating data.
6. Complete energy management firmware, including global control strategies and logging
routines for use with total control systems shall be supplied. All energy management
firmware shall be resident in field hardware and shall not be dependent on the operator's
terminal for operation. Operator's terminal software is to be used for access to field -based
energy management control firmware only.
7. Priority password security systems shall prevent unauthorized use. Each user shall have
an individual password. The user shall only be given access to the system functions
required for individual job performance.
5... Equipment monitoring and alarm functions, including information for diagnosing
equipment problems shall be included with the system.
9. The complete system, including, but not limited to terminal unit controllers, global
controllers and operator's terminals shall auto - restart, without operator intervention, on
resumption of power after a power failure. Database stored in global controller memory
shall be battery- backed up for a minimum of 1 year. Logic controllers for all air handlers
and all unitary equipment shall utilize EEPROM for all variable data storage. Batteries
on unitary controllers shall not be allowed.
10. System design shall be modular and of proven reliability.
11. All software and/or firmware interface equipment for connection to remote monitoring
station from field hardware or the operator's terminal shall be provided.
12. System shall be capable of equipment runtime totalization of fans, heaters, boilers, etc.
and capable of alarm generation and alarm dialout to remote sites.
13. Room sensors shall be provided with digital readout that allows the user to view room
temperature, view outside air temperature, adjust the room setpoint within preset limits
and set desired override time. In conjunction with a unitary logic controller, user shall
also be able to start and stop unit from the digital sensor.
14. Communication wiring for field controllers shall not be run in star patterns.
15. All controllers shall communicate using protocols and LAN types contained in the
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135 -1995, BACnet.
16. All DDC hardware and software shall be designed and manufactured by U.S.
corporations. All hardware shall be Listed Underwriters Laboratory for Open Energy
Management Equipment (PAZX) under the UL Standard for Safety 916 in both the US
and Canada, with integral labels showing rating.
17. All hardware shall be in compliance with FCC Part 15, Subpart J, Class A.
18. All hardware shall be in compliance with European Directive 89/336/EEC (European CE
Mark).
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Responsibility: The supplier of the ITVAC digital logic control system shall be responsible for
inspection and Quality Assurance (QA) for all materials and workmanship furnished by him.
RVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
230900 -3
B. Component Testing: Maximum reliability shall be achieved through extensive use of high -
quality, pre- tested components. Each and every controller, sensor, and all other DDC
components shall be individually tested by the manufacturer prior to shipment.
C. Tools, Testing and Calibration Equipment: The control system supplier shall provide all tools,
testing, and calibration equipment necessary to ensure reliability and accuracy of the control
system.
D. The systems control contractor shall have been in business a minimum of ten years and be the
authorized installing contractor for the manufacturer of the BACnet components.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. The latest edition of the following standards and codes in effect and amended as of supplier's
proposal date, and any applicable subsections thereof , shall govern design and selection of
equipment and material supplied:
I. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).
2. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135 -1995, BACnet.
3. Uniform Building Code (UBC), including local amendments.
4. UL 916 Underwriters Laboratories Standard for Energy Management Equipment. Canada
and the US.
5. National Electrical Code (NEC).
6. FCC Part 15, Subpart J, Class A
7. EMC Directive 89/336/EEC (European CE Mark)
B. City, county, state, and federal regulations and codes in effect as of contract date.
C. Except as otherwise indicated the system supplier shall secure and pay for all permits,
inspections, and certifications required for his work and arrange for necessary approvals by the
governing authorities.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Drawings
1. The system supplier shall submit engineered drawings, control sequence, and bill of
materials for approval.
2. Drawings shall be submitted in the following standard sizes: 11" x 17" (ANSI B).
3. Eight complete sets (copies) of submittal drawings shall be provided.
4. Drawings shall be available on floppy disk or CD -ROM, as specified.
B. System Documentation
C. System documentation by the vendor shall include the following as a minimum:
1. System configuration diagrams in simplified block format.
2. All input/output object listings and an alarm point summary listing.
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
230900 -4
3. Electrical drawings that show all system internal and external connection points, terminal
block layouts, and terminal identification.
4. Manufacturer's instructions and drawings for installation, maintenance, and operation of
all purchased items.
5. Overall system operation and maintenance instructions— including preventive
maintenance and troubleshooting instructions.
6. For all system elements— operator's terminal(s), global controller(s), logic controllers,
routers, repeaters, and converters — provide BACnet Protocol Implementation
Conformance Statements (PICS) as per the following sample.
7. Provide complete description and documentation of any proprietary services and/or
objects used in the system.
1.6 SCHEDULING AND COORDINATION
A. The vendor shall provide a detailed project design and installation schedule with time markings
and details for hardware items and software development phases.
B. The schedule shall show all the target dates for transmission of project information and
documents and shall indicate timing and dates for system installation, debugging, and
commissioning.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Warranty shall cover all costs for parts, labor, associated travel, and expenses for a period of
one year from completion of system acceptance.
B. Hardware and software personnel supporting this warranty agreement shall provide on -site or
off -site service in a timely manner after failure notification to the vendor. The maximum
acceptable response time to provide this service at the site shall be 24 hours.
C. This warranty shall apply equally to both hardware and software.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1 OPERATOR'S TERMINAL
A. BACnet Conformance
Operator's terminal shall as a minimum support Point -to -Point (PTP) and Ethernet
BACnet LAN types. It shall communicate directly via these BACnet LANs as a native
BACnet device. Operator's terminal shall comply with the requirements of a BACnet
conformance class 3 device and support all BACnet services necessary to provide the
following BACnet functional groups:
a. Clock Functional Group
b. Event Response Functional Group
C. Time Master Functional Group
d. Device Communications
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
230900 -5
2. Please refer to section 22.2, BACnet Functional Groups, in the BACnet standard for a
complete list of the services that must be directly supported to provide each of the
functional groups listed above. All proprietary services, if used in the system, shall be
thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary tools
shall be supplied for working with proprietary information.
3. Standard BACnet object types accessed by the workstation shall include as a minimum:
Analog Value, Analog Input, Analog Output, Binary Value, Binary Input, Binary Output,
Calendar, Device, Event Enrollment, File, Notification Class, Program and Schedule
object types. All proprietary object types, if used in the system, shall be thoroughly
documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary tools shall be
supplied for working with proprietary information.
B. Displays
1. Operator's terminal shall display all data associated with project as called out on
drawings and/or object type list supplied. Operator's terminal software shall accept
Windows BITMAP ( *.bmp) format graphic files for display purposes. Graphic fik� <aYl
be created using scanned, full color photographs of system installation, AutoCAD❑
drawing files of field installation drawings and wiring diagrams from as -built drawings.
Operator's terminal shall display all data using three- dimensional graphic representations
of all mechanical equipment.
2. System shall be capable of displaying graphic file, text, and dynamic object data together
on each display. Information shall be labeled with descriptors and shall be shown with
the appropriate engineering units. All information on any display shall be dynamically
updated without any action by the user. Terminal shall allow user to change all field -
resident EMCS functions associated with the project, such as setpoints, weekly schedules,
exception schedules, etc. from any screen no matter if that screen shows all text or a
complete graphic display. This shall be done without any reference to object addresses or
other numeric /mnemonic indications.
3. All displays shall be generated and customized in such a manner by the local DDCS
supplier that they fit the project as specified. Canned displays shall not be acceptable.
Displays shall use standard English for labeling and readout. Systems requiring factory
programming for graphics or DDC logic are specifically prohibited. All graphics and
DDC programming shall be supported locally by the installing contractor without factory
dependency or assistance.
4. Binary objects shall be displayed as ACTIVE/INACTIVE/NULL or with customized
text. Text shall be justified left, right or center as selected by the user. Also, allow
binary objects to be displayed as individual change -of -state bitmap objects on the display
screen such that they overlay the system graphic. Each binary object displayed in this
manner shall be assigned up to three bitmap files for display when the point is ON, OFF
or in alarm. For binary outputs, toggle the object's commanded status when the bitmap is
selected with the system digitizer (mouse). Similarly, allow the terminal operator to
toggle the object's status by selecting (with the mouse) a picture of a switch or light, for
example, which then displays a different picture (such as an "ON" switch or lighted
lamp). Additionally, allow binary objects to be displayed as an animated graphic.
5. Animated graphic objects shall be displayed as a sequence of multiple bitmaps to
simulate motion. For example: when a pump is in the OFF condition, display a stationary
picture of the pump. When the operator selects the pump picture with the mouse, the
represented object's status is toggled and the picture of the pump's impeller rotates in a
time -based animation. The operator shall be able to click on an animated graphical
object or switch it from the OFF position to ON, or ON to OFF. Allow operator to change
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
230900 -6
bitmap file assignment and also create new and original bitmaps online. System shall be
supplied with a library of standard bitmaps, which may be used unaltered or modified by
the operator. Systems that do not allow customization or creation of new bitmap objects
by the operator (or with third -party software) shall not be allowed.
6. Analog objects shall be displayed with operator modifiable units. Analog input objects
may also be displayed as individual bitmap items on the display screen as an overlay to
the system graphic. Each analog input object may be assigned to a minimum of five
bitmap files, each with high/low limits for automatic selection and display of the bitmaps.
As an example, a graphic representation of a thermometer would rise and fall in response
to either the room temperature or its deviation from the controlling setpoint. Analog
output objects, when selected with the mouse, shall be displayed as a prompted dialog
(text only) box. Selection for display type shall be individual for each object. Analog
object values may be changed by selecting either the "increase" or "decrease" arrow in
the analog object spinner box without using the keypad. Pressing the button on the right
side of the analog object spinner box allows direct entry of an analog value and accesses
various menus where the analog value may be used, such as trendlogs.
7. Analog objects may also be assigned to an area of a system graphic, wiwu_ f e`color of
the defined area would change based on the analog object's value. For example, an area
of a floor -plan graphic served by a single control zone would change color with respect to
the temperature of the zone or its deviation from setpoint. All editing and area assignment
shall be created or modified online using simple icon tools.
8. A customized menu label (push- button) shall be used for display selection. Menu items
on a display shall allow penetration to lower level displays or additional menus. Dynamic
point information and menu label push buttons may be mixed on the same display to
allow sub - displays to exist for each item. Each display may be protected from viewing
unless operator has appropriate security level. A separate security level may be assigned
to each display and system object.
9. A mouse, or other form of digitizer, shall be used to move the pointer arrow to the
desired item for selection of new display or to allow the operator to make changes to
object data.
10. Displays may be modified on site or via remote communications.
11. Display resolution shall be limited by the CRT hardware and Windows[] software driver
only. As a minimum, operator's terminal shall provide display resolution of 1024x768 @
256 colors (XVGA).
12. Entire system shall operate without dependency on the operator's terminal.
C. Password Protection
1. Provide security system that prevents unauthorized use unless operator is logged on.
Access shall be limited to operator's terminal functions unless user is logged on. This
includes displays as outlined above.
2. Each operators terminal shall provide security for 200 users minimum. Each user shall
have an individual User ID, User Name and Password. Entries are alphanumeric
characters only and are case sensitive (except for User ID). User ID shall be 0 -8
characters, User Name shall be 0 -29 characters, and Password shall be 4-8 characters
long. Each system user shall be allowed individual assignment of only those control
functions and menu items to which that user requires access. All passwords, user names,
and access assignments shall be adjustable online at the operator's terminal. Each user
shall also have a set security level, which defines access to displays and individual
objects the user may control. System shall include 10 separate and distinct security levels
for assignment to users.
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
230900 -7
D. Display of Scheduling Object Information
I. Operator's terminal display of weekly schedules shall show all information in easy -to-
read daily format for each schedule. This includes all ON /OFF times (to the minute) for
each day's events.
2. BACnet exception schedules (non - normal schedules, such as holidays or special events)
shall display all dates that are an exception to the weekly schedules. These specialty
schedules shall be displayed at the operator's terminal in a format similar to the daily
schedules, again allowing easy data entry. Exception schedule data is entered by the
following methods: date entries (one day entries), date -to -date (a range or span of days),
and by weekday (for example, a given day of a given week each month). User shall be
able to scroll easily through the months for each year as a minimum.
3. At the operator's terminal, the system user shall be able to change all information for a
given weekly or exception schedule if logged on with the appropriate security access.
4. System shall include a Schedule Wizard for set up of schedules. Wizard shall walk user
through all steps necessary for schedule generation. Wizard shall have its own icon for
startup or may be started by clicking on displayed value and- thrsm,* cting Schedule
Wizard.
E. Alarm Indication
1. Operator's terminal shall provide audible, visual, and printed means of alarm indication.
The alarm dialog box shall always become the top dialog box regardless of the
application(s), currently running (such as a word processor). Printout of alarms shall be
sent to the assigned terminal and port.
2. System shall provide log of alarm messages. Alarm log shall be archived to the hard disk
of the system operator's terminal. Each entry shall include a description of the event -
initiating object generating the alarm. Description shall be an alarm message of at least
256 characters in length. Entry shall include time and date of alarm occurrence, time and
date of object state return to normal, time and date of alarm acknowledgment and
identification of operator acknowledging alarm.
3. Alarm messages shall be in user - definable text (English or other specified language) and
shall be entered either at the operator's terminal or via remote communication.
4. System shall include an Alarm Wizard for set up of alarms. Wizard shall walk user
through all steps necessary for alarm generation. Wizard shall have its own icon for
startup or may be started by clicking on displayed value and then selecting alarm setup.
F. Trendlog Information
1. System shall periodically gather historically recorded selected samples of object data
stored in the field equipment (global controllers, field controllers) and archive the
information on the operator's terminal (server) hard disk. Archived files shall be
appended with new sample data, allowing samples to be accumulated over several years.
Systems that write over archived data shall not be allowed, unless limited file size is
specified. Samples may be viewed at the operator's terminal in a trendlog. Logged data
shall be stored in database format. Operator shall be able to scroll through all trendlog
data. System shall automatically open archive files as needed to display archived data
when operator scrolls through the data vertically. All trendlog information shall be
displayed in standard engineering units.
2. Software shall be included that is capable of graphing the trend logged object data.
Software shall be capable of creating two -axis (x,y) graphs that display up to ten object
RVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
230900 -8
types at the same time in different colors. Graphs shall show object type value relative to
time.
3. Operator shall be able to change trend log setup information as well. This includes the
information to be logged as well as the interval at which it is to be logged. All input,
output, and value object types in the system may be logged. All operations shall be
password protected. Setup and viewing may be accessed directly from any and all
graphics on which object is displayed.
G. Energy Log Information
1. System shall be capable of periodically gathering energy log data stored in the field
equipment and archive the information on the operator terminal's hard disk. Archive files
shall be appended with the new data, allowing data to be accumulated over several years.
Systems that write over archived data shall not be allowed unless limited file size is
specified. System shall automatically open archive files as needed to display archived
data when operator scrolls through the data. Display all energy log information in
standard engineering units.
2. All data shall be stored in data base file format for direct use by third -party programs.
Operation of system shall stay completely online during all graphing operations.
3. Operator shall be able to change the energy log setup information as well. This includes
the meters to be logged, meter pulse value, and the type of energy units to be logged. All
meters monitored by the system may be logged as well as any flow and temperature
sensors may be used for BTU monitoring. All operations shall be password protected.
4. System shall display archived data in tabular format form for both consumption and peak
values. Data shall be shown in hourly, daily, weekly, monthly and yearly formats. In
each format the user shall be able to select a specific period of data to view or select all
collected data. Consumption data for selected period shall be totaled over the selected
period.
H. Configuration/Setup
1. Provide means for operator to display and change system configuration. This shall
include, but not be limited to, system time, day of the week, date of daylight savings set
forward/set back, printer termination, port addresses, modem port and speed, etc. Items
shall be modified using understandable terminology with simple mouse /cursor key
movements.
2. System shall include the automatic detection of devices connected anywhere on the
BACnet network by scanning of the entire network. This function shall display device
instance, network identification, model number and description of connected devices. It
shall record and display software file loaded into each controller. A copy of each file
shall be stored on the computers hard drive for archiving purposes. If needed, this file
shall be downloaded to the appropriate controller by selection using the mouse.
I. Programming Tools
1. Operator's terminal shall include programming tools for all controllers supplied. All
controllers shall be programmed using graphical tools that allow the user to connect
function blocks on screen that provide sequencing of all control logic. Function blocks
shall be represented by graphical displays that are easily identified and distinct from other
types of blocks. Graphical programming that uses simple rectangles and squares is not
acceptable.
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
230900-9
2. User shall be able to pick graphical function block from menu and place on screen.
Programming tools shall place lines connecting appropriate function blocks together
automatically. Provide zoom in and zoom out capabilities. Function blocks shall be
downloaded to controller without any reentry of data.
3. Programming tools shall include a test mode. Function blocks shall be animated to show
status of data inputs and outputs. Animation shall show change of status on logic devices
and countdown of timer devices in graphical format.
4. Programming tools shall also include a database manager of logic files and associated
graphics. Operator shall be able to select unit type, input/output configuration and any
other items that completely define unit. Database function shall select preprogrammed
logic and graphics for downloading to device(s) and for use as display graphics.
Terminal Hardware
1. Intel Core 2 Dual Processor, 2.5 Ghz or higher
2. 2GB Memory
3. 160 GB Hard Drive
4. 128 MB Video Card
5. 22" Widescreen Analog Flat Panel Display
6. 16X (DVD + / -RW) Burner Drive
7. Windows XP Software
8. Wireless Keyboard and Mouse
9. Web Browser
K. General Description
1. BAS supplier shall provide web -based access to the system as part of standard
installation. User shall be able to access all displays of real -time data that are part of the
HAS via a standard Web browser. Web browser shall tie into the network via owner-
supplied Ethernet network connection. Web -page host shall be a separate device that
resides on the HAS BACnet network, but is not the BAS server for the control system.
BAS server must be a separate computer from the Web -page host device to ensure data
and system integrity. The web -page software shall not require a per user licensing fee or
annual fees. The web -page host must support a minimum of 15 simultaneous users with
no additional cost to the owner. There should be no additional cost in the future to
expand the system to accommodate as many as 150 users.
L. Browser Technology
Browser shall be standard version of Microsoft IE 5.5 or later and Netscape Navigator
4.76 or later. No special vendor - supplied software shall be needed on computers running
browser. All displays shall be viewable and the Web -page host shall directly access real -
time data from the BAS BACnet network. Data shall be displayed in real time and update
automatically without user interaction. User shall be able to change data on displays if
logged in with the appropriate user name and password.
M. Communications
Web -page host shall include two Ethernet network connections. One network connection
shall be dedicated to HAS BACnet network and shall be used to gather real -time data
from all the BACnet devices that form the BAS. This network shall communicate via
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
23 09 00 - 10
BACnet, allowing the Web -page host to gather data directly from units on the local LAN
or from other projects connected over a WAN. This network shall also provide the
connection to the BAS server for Web page generation.
2. The second Ethernet connection shall provide the physical connection to the Internet or
an IP -based WAN. It shall be the port that is used for the browser to receive Web pages
and data from the Web -page host. The Web -page host shall act as a physical barrier
between the BAS network and the WAN or Internet connection that allows the browser to
receive web pages and data. The two separate network connections provide for a physical
barrier to prevent raw BACnet traffic being exposed on the IP network.
3. The Web -page host shall provide for complete isolation of the IP and BACnet networks
by not routing networking packets between the two networks.
4. BAS BACnet Ethernet network shall be provided and installed by the BAS supplier.
Owner shall provide and incur any monthly charges of WAN/Intemet connection.
N. Display of Data
1. Web page graphics shown on brows:,;-,,,,'fall be replicas of the BAS displays. User shall
need no additional training to understand information presented on Web pages when
compared to what is shown on BAS displays. Web page displays shall include animation
just as BAS displays. Fans shall turn, pilot lights shall blink, coils shall change colors,
and so on.
2. Real -time data shall be shown on all browser Web pages. This data must be directly
gathered via the BACnet network and automatically updated on browser Web page
displays without any user action. Data on the browser shall automatically refresh as
changes are detected without re- drawing the complete display.
3. It shall be possible for user from browser Web page to change data if the user is logged
on with the appropriate password. Clicking on a button or typing in a new value shall
change digital data. Using pull -down menus or typing in a new value shall change analog
data.
4. Data displays shall be navigated using pushbuttons on the displays that are simply clicked
on with the mouse to select a new display. Alternatively, the standard back and forward
buttons of the browser can be used for display navigation.
O. Web Page Generation
1. Web pages shall be generated automatically from the BAS displays that reside on the
BAS server. User shall access Web -page host via the network and shall initiate a web
page generation utility that automatically takes the BAS displays and turns them into
Web pages. The Web pages generated are automatically installed on the Web page host
for access via any computer's standard browser. If the system requires use of an HTML
editor for generation of Web pages, the owner shall be provided with a minimum of (40)
hours HTML training for two operators as part of the bid. Provide all factory and third -
party software required for the owner to generate or modify 2 and 3 dimensional displays.
2. Password Security and Activity Log
3. Access via Web browser shall utilize the same hierarchical security scheme as BAS
system. User shall be asked to log in once the browser makes connection to Web -page
host. Once the user logs in, any and all changes that are made shall be tracked by the
BAS system. The user shall be able to change only those items that the user has authority
to change. A user activity report shall show any and all activity of the users that have
logged in to the system regardless of whether those changes were made using a browser
or via the BAS workstation.
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
230900-11
BACnet Communication
1. Web -page host shall communicate using the ASHRAE BACnet protocol standard to all
devices on the HAS network.
2. Back -up Capability
3. The web browser shall not inhibit the use of a dial -up modem as a back -up to the Intranet
or Internet access in the event that a network disruption occurs.
2.2 GLOBAL CONTROLLER (GC)
A. General
I. Global controller shall provide battery- backed real -time (hardware) clock functions. It
shall also provide communications via BACnet standard protocols to all field controllers.
Global controller shall interface with operator terminal(s) via BACnet protocols for
information display-,,, _
2. Global controller shall incorporate as a minimum, the functions of a 3 -way BACnet
router. Controller shall route BACnet messages between the high -speed LAN (Ethernet
10 /100MHz), at least 4 master slave token passing (MS /TP) LANs, a point -to -point (PTP
— RS -232) connection and an on -board modem.
a. Each MS /TP LAN must be configurable from 9.6 to 76.8Kbps.
b. The RJ -45 Ethernet connection must accept either l0Base -T or 100Base -TX
BACnet over twisted pair cable (UTP).
C. The direct access port must be a female DB -9 connector supporting BACnet
temporary PTP connection of a portable BACnet operator terminal at 9.6 to 115.2
Kbps over RS -232 null modem cable. Must also support an external modem.
3. Global controller shall be capable of deciding global strategies for the system based on
information from any objects in the system regardless if the object is directly monitored
by the controller or by another controller. The program that implements these strategies
shall be completely flexible and user definable. Any systems utilizing factory pre-
programmed global strategies that cannot be modified by field personnel on -site or
downloaded via remote communications are not acceptable. Changing global strategies
via firmware changes is also unacceptable. Program execution at global controller shall
be a minimum of once per second.
4. Programming shall be object- oriented using control program blocks, supporting DDC
functions, 1000 Analog Values and 1000 Binary Values. Documentation in flowchart
form for all programming shall be provided as part of the final system as -built
documentation. Samples of flowchart documentation shall be included in submittals. All
flowcharts shall be generated and automatically downloaded to controller. No re -entry of
database information shall be necessary.
5. Provide means to graphically view inputs and outputs to each program block in real -time
as program is executing. This function may be performed via the operator's terminal,
field computer, or modem.
6. Controller shall have a minimum of 128K SRAM and 32 MB dynamic RAM for program
execution, along with 16 MB CompactFlash and 64K FLASH ROM to ensure high
performance and data reliability. Battery shall retain static RAM memory and real -time
clock functions for a minimum of 1.5 years (cumulative). Battery shall be a field-
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
230900-12
replaceable (non - rechargeable) lithium type. Unused battery life shall be 10 years. Coin -
cell type BR1225 or equivalent
7. The onboard, battery- backed real time clock must support schedule operations, trend logs
and timed DDC functions.
8. Global control algorithms and automated control functions should execute via 32 -bit / 50
MHz processor with minimum 32 MB SDRAM.
9. Controller shall have an onboard power source with memory-free gell cell battery
providing ongoing power conditioning and noise filtering for operation data integrity. It
shall provide up to 5 minutes of powerless operation for orderly shutdown and data
backup.
10. Controller shall have a six -layer circuit design with separate ground plane and shock -
resistant, flame - retardant case to ensure the highest level of reliability.
B. BACnet Conformance
I. Global Controller shall as a minimum support Point -to -Point (PTP), MS/TP and Ethernet
BA,0: t LAN types. It shall communicate directly via these BACnet LANs as a native
BACnet device and shall support simultaneous routing functions between all supported
LAN types. Global controller shall be a BACnet conformance class 3 device and support
all BACnet services necessary to provide the following BACnet functional groups:
a. Clock Functional Group
b. Files Functional Group
C. Reinitialize Functional Group
d. Device Communications Functional Group
e. Event Initiation Functional Group
2. Please refer to section 22.2, BACnet Functional Groups in the BACnet standard for a
complete list of the services that must be directly supported to provide each of the
functional groups listed above. All proprietary services, if used in the system, shall be
thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary tools
shall be supplied for working with proprietary information.
3. Standard BACnet object types supported shall include as a minimum: Analog Value,
Binary Value, Calendar, Device, File, Group, Notification Class, Program and Schedule
object types. All proprietary object types, if used in the system, shall be thoroughly
documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary tools shall be
supplied for working with proprietary information.
4. The Global Controller shall comply with Annex J of the BACnet specification for IP
connections. This device shall use Ethernet to connect to the IP internetwork, while
using the same Ethernet LAN for non -IP communications to other BACnet devices on the
LAN. Must support interoperability on wide area networks (WANs) and campus area
networks (CANS) and function as a BACnet Broadcast Management Device (BBMD).
C. Remote Communications
1. Provide all functions that will allow remote communications via modem to off -site
locations. Include modem along with all cabling necessary for installation. It shall be
possible to use the onboard modem or a separate modem connected via the PTP / RS -232
connection.
2. Provide Windows NT/XP software for off -site computer that allows operator to view
and change all information associated with system on color graphic displays. Operator
UVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
23 09 00 - 13
shall be able to change all parameters in this section from off -site location including all
programming of global controllers and all programmable logic controllers including all
terminal unit controllers.
3. Global controller shall have capability to call out alarm conditions automatically. Alarm
message and site description shall be sent to off -site computer or serial printer. If desired,
controller may also send encoded message to digital pager. If an alphanumeric pager is in
use by the operator, global controller shall be capable of sending a text or numeric string
of alarm description. All global controllers connected to the local LAN shall be capable
of calling out alarm messages through one or more shared modems connected to one or
more of the global controllers on the local LAN.
4. Global controller shall have capability to call a minimum of 20 different phone numbers.
Numbers called may be controlled by type of alarm or time schedule.
5. Owner shall provide standard voice -grade phone line for remote communication function.
6. Global controller and internal modem shall be capable of modem -to -modem baud rates of
33.6 Kbps minimum over standard voice -grade phone lines. Lower baud rates shall be
selectable for areas where local phone company conditions require them.
D. Schedules
1. Each global controller shall support a minimum of 250 BACnet Schedule Objects and
250 BACnet Calendar Objects.
E. Logging Capabilities
1. Each global controller shall log as minimum 1000 trendlogs. Any object in the system
(real or calculated) may be logged. Sample time interval shall be adjustable at the
operator's terminal.
2. Logs may be viewed both on -site or off -site via remote communication.
3. Global controller shall periodically upload trended data to operator's terminal for long
term archiving if desired.
4. Archived data stored in database format shall be available for use in third -party
spreadsheet or database programs.
F. Alarm Generation
1. Object change of values and change of states may be identified as alarm conditions.
When such conditions exist, the global controller identifies each alarm through BACnet
Get Alarm Summary Service. This summary of active alarms (Event State property value
not equal to NORMAL) is presented to and displayed at the operator's terminal for
system user action.
2. Alarms may be generated within the system for any object change of value or state -tither
real or calculated. This includes things such as analog object value changes, binary object
state changes, and various controller communication failure.
3. Each alarm may be dialed out as noted in paragraph 2 above.
4. Alarm log shall be provided for alarm viewing. Log may be viewed on -site at the
operator's terminal or off -site via remote communications.
5. Controller must be able to handle up to 1500 alarm setups stored as BACnet event
enrollment objects — system destination and actions individually configurable.
G. Demand Limiting
FIVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
230900-14
1. System shall monitor energy demand. Energy demand may be from any type of energy
source such as electrical or gas. Provide a demand - limiting routine which shall shed
appropriate system objects to prevent the demand from exceeding preset limits. Demand -
limiting routine shall be a priority shed type allowing automatic override of specified
object type sheds when assigned analog object (temperature sensor) exceeds limits as set
by system user at operator's terminal. Routine shall be able to change between sets of
demand limit and restore setpoints based on BACnet Schedule Objects or system user
manual commands at operator's terminal.
2. Zone shed method shall be by either preventing zone heating and cooling operations, or
by shifting zone heating and cooling setpoints.
3. All parameters of the demand limiting routine shall be modifiable from the operator's
terminal or via remote communications.
2.3 ROUTER, CONVERTER, REPEATER
A. Routing functions shall be performed using only BACnet standard protocols as defined by-, -
ANSFASHRAE Standard 135 -1995. The converter interconnects a standard computer serial
port with an MS /TP LAN. Repeater functions shall be handled by a device designed to
selectively interconnect 4 (four) portions of MS/TP LAN as a minimum.
B. ROUTERS: The router shall perform the BACnet definition functions of interconnecting two or
more BACnet LANs together, forming a BACnet intemetwork. The router shall have optional
plug -on boards permitting the following BACnet communication methods:
1. The router shall have the routing functionality of interconnecting BACnet Ethernet and/or
ARCNET high -speed LAN to BACnet MS /TP LAN and one or more PTP LANs.
2. The router shall have capability of interconnecting BACnet Ethernet high -speed LAN to
BACnet ARCNET high -speed LAN.
3. BACnet PTP (RS -232 point -to- point) communication shall be available on the global
controller by including an (optional) modem. The PTP /modem option shall operate under
the BACnet half router communication protocol.
4. BACnet messages may be routed to all LANs installed on the router at the same time
with no operator intervention.
C. CONVERTER: A converter shall (optionally) be provided to interface an (optional) portable
field service computer from its serial port (RS -232) to the BACnet MS /TP LAN (RS -485).
D. REPEATERS: BACnet repeaters shall provide selective interconnection to 4 segments of
MS /TP LAN as a minimum. The repeater shall be an active device, containing logic capable of
detecting and repeating signals from one MS /TP LAN segment to all other segments. Repeaters
shall permit additional nodes to be added to the MS /TP LAN, up to a maximum of 128 nodes.
2.4 CENTRAL PLANT AND AIR HANDLER LOGIC CONTROLLERS
A. General
Central Plant / AHU controller shall provide battery- backed real -time (hardware) clock
functions. It shall also provide communications via BACnet standard protocols to all field
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
230900-15
controllers. Controller shall interface with operator terminal(s) via BACnet protocols for
information display.
2. Central Plant / AHU controller shall incorporate as a minimum, the functions of a 3 -way
BACnet router. Controller shall route BACnet messages between the high -speed LAN
(Ethernet 10 /100M11z), at least 4 master slave token passing (MS/TP) LANs, a point -to-
point (PTP — RS -232) connection and an optional on -board modem.
3. Each MS/TP LAN must be configurable from 9.6 to 76.8Kbps.
4. The RJ -45 Ethernet connection must accept either IOBase -T or 100Base -TX BACnet
over twisted pair cable (UTP).
5. The direct access port must be a female DB -9 connector supporting BACnet temporary
PTP connection of a portable BACnet operator terminal at 9.6 to 115.2 Kbps over RS-
232 null modem cable. Must also support an external modem.
6. Global controller shall be capable of deciding global strategies for the system based on
information from any objects in the system regardless if the object is directly monitored
by the controller or by another controller. The program that implements these strategies
shall be completely flexible and user definable. Any systems utilizing factory pre-
programmed global strategies that cannot be modified by field person i ° on -site or
downloaded via remote communications are not acceptable. Changing global strategies
via firmware changes is also unacceptable. Program execution at global controller shall
be a minimum of once per second.
7. Programming shall be object- oriented using control program, blocks, using up to 1000
DDC functions, 1000 Analog Values and 1000 Binary Values. Documentation in
flowchart form for all programming shall be provided as part of the final system as -built
documentation. Samples of flowchart documentation shall be included in submittals. All
flowcharts shall be generated and automatically downloaded to controller. No re -entry of
database information shall be necessary.
8. Provide means to graphically view inputs and outputs to each program block in real -time
as program is executing. This function may be performed via the operator's terminal,
field computer, or modem.
9. Controller shall have a minimum of 2M SRAM and 8 MB dynamic RAM for program
execution, 2K EEPROM for non - volatile, power - independent data storage, along with
2M FLASH RAM to ensure high performance and data reliability. Battery shall retain
static RAM memory and real -time clock functions for a minimum of 1.5 years
(cumulative). Battery shall be a field - replaceable (non - rechargeable) lithium type.
Unused battery life shall be 10 years, Duracell DL2450 or equivalent
10. The onboard, battery- backed real time clock must support schedule operations, trend logs
and timed DDC functions.
11. Global control algorithms and automated control functions should execute via 32 -bit / 50
MHz processor.
12. Controller shall have an onboard power source with memory-free gell cell battery
providing ongoing power conditioning and noise filtering for operation data integrity. It
shall provide up to 5 minutes of powerless operation for orderly shutdown and data
backup.
13. Controller shall have a six -layer circuit design with separate ground plane and shock -
resistant, flame - retardant case to ensure the highest level of reliability.
14. The base unit of the controller must host up to 8 expansion modules with various 1/0
combinations. These inputs and outputs shall include universal 12 -bit inputs, binary triac
outputs, and 8 -bit analog outputs (0 -10V or 0 -20 mA).
15. All outputs must have onboard Hand - Off -Auto switches and a status indicator light. All
HOA switches must have position monitoring on the DDC system. All analog outputs
shall have potentiometers for field override.
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
230900-16
16. Each expansion module must provide up to 221/0 for a total of up to 176 1 /O per Central
Plant / AHU controller.
B. BACnet Conformance
1. Central Plant / A14U Controller shall as a minimum support Point -to -Point (PTP), MS /TP
and Ethernet BACnet LAN types. It shall communicate directly via these BACnet LANs
as a native BACnet device and shall support simultaneous routing functions between all
supported LAN types. Global controller shall be a BACnet conformance class 3 device
and support all BACnet services necessary to provide the following BACnet functional
groups:
2. Clock Functional Group
3. Files Functional Group
4. Reinitialize Functional Group
5. Device Communications Functional Group
6. Event Initiation Functional Group
7. Please refer to section 22.2, BACnet Functional )raps, in the BACnet standard for a
complete list of the services that must be directly supported to provide each of the
functional groups listed above. All proprietary services, if used in the system, shall be
thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary tools
shall be supplied for working with proprietary information.
8. Standard BACnet object types supported shall include as a minimum: Analog Value,
Binary Value, Calendar, Device, File, Group, Notification Class, Program and Schedule
object types. All proprietary object types, if used in the system, shall be thoroughly
documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary tools shall be
supplied for working with proprietary information.
9. The Controller shall comply with Annex J of the BACnet specification for IP
connections. This device shall use Ethernet to connect to the IP internetwork, while
using the same Ethernet LAN for non -IP communications to other BACnet devices on the
LAN. Must support interoperability on wide area networks (WANs) and campus area
networks (CANS) and function as a BACnet Broadcast Management Device (BBMD).
C. Remote Communications
1. Provide all functions that will allow remote communications via modem to off -site
locations. Include modem along with all cabling necessary for installation. It shall be
possible to use an optional onboard modem or a separate modem connected via the PTP /
RS -232 connection.
2. Provide Windows[] 2000/NT/XP software for off -site computer that allows operator to
view and change all information associated with system on color graphic displays.
Operator shall be able to change all parameters in this section from off -site location
including all programming of global controllers and all programmable logic controllers
including all terminal unit controllers.
3. Controller shall have capability to call out alarm conditions automatically. Alarm
message and site description shall be sent to off -site computer or serial printer. If desired,
controller may also send encoded message to digital pager. If an alphanumeric pager is in
use by the operator, global controller shall be capable of sending a text or numeric string
of alarm description. All global controllers connected to the local LAN shall be capable
of calling out alarm messages through one or more shared modems connected to one or
more of the global controllers on the local LAN.
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
230900-17
4. Controller shall have capability to call a minimum of 20 different phone numbers.
Numbers called may be controlled by type of alarm or time schedule.
5. Owner shall provide standard voice -grade phone line for remote communication function.
6. Controller and internal modem shall be capable of modem -to -modem baud rates of 33.6
Kbps minimum over standard voice -grade phone lines. Lower baud rates shall be
selectable for areas where local phone company conditions require them.
D. Schedules
1. Each Central Plant / AHU controller shall support a minimum of 50 BACnet Schedule
Objects and 50 BACnet Calendar Objects.
2. Logging Capabilities
3. Each controller shall log as minimum 200 trendlogs. Any object in the system (real or
calculated) may be logged. Sample time interval shall be adjustable at the operator's
terminal.
4. Logs may be viewed both on -site or off -site via remote communication.
5. Controller shall periodically upload treuz•oata to operator's terminal for long term
archiving if desired.
6. Archived data stored in database format shall be available for use in third -parry
spreadsheet or database programs.
E. Alarm Generation
1. Object change of values and change of states may be identified as alarm conditions.
When such conditions exist, the global controller identifies each alarm through BACnet
Get Alarm Summary Service. This summary of active alarms (Event State property value
not equal to NORMAL) is presented to and displayed at the operator's terminal for
system user action.
2. Alarms may be generated within the system for any object change of value or state either
real or calculated. This includes things such as analog object value changes, binary object
state changes, and various controller communication failure.
3. Each alarm may be dialed out as noted in paragraph 2 above.
4. Alarm log shall be provided for alarm viewing. Log may be viewed on -site at the
operator's terminal or off -site via remote communications.
5. Controller must be able to handle up to 200 alarm setups stored as BACnet event
enrollment objects — system destination and actions individually configurable.
F. Demand Limiting
1. System shall monitor energy demand. Energy demand may be from any type of energy
source such as electrical or gas. Provide a demand - limiting routine which shall shed
appropriate system objects to prevent the demand from exceeding preset limits. Demand -
limiting routine shall be a priority shed type allowing automatic override of specified
object type sheds when assigned analog object (temperature sensor) exceeds limits as set
by system user at operator's terminal. Routine shall be able to change between sets of
demand limit and restore setpoints based on BACnet Schedule Objects or system user
manual commands at operator's terminal.
2. Zone shed method shall be by either preventing zone heating and cooling operations, or
by shifting zone heating and cooling setpoints.
3. All parameters of the demand limiting routine shall be modifiable from the operator's
terminal or via remote communications.
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
230900-18
2.5 TERMINAL UNIT CONTROLLERS (Heat Pumps, AC Units, Fan Coilsy—Class 3
A. Provide one native BACnet logic controller for each piece of unitary mechanical equipment that
adequately covers all objects listed in object list for unit. All controllers shall interface to global
controller via MS /TP LAN using BACnet protocol. No gateways shall be used. Controllers shall
include input, output and self - contained logic program as needed for complete control of unit.
B. BACnet Conformance
1. Logic controllers shall as a minimum support MS /TP BACnet LAN types. They shall
communicate directly via this BACnet LAN at 9.6, 19.2, 38.4 and 76.8 Kbps, as a native
BACnet device. Logic controllers shall be of BACnet conformance class 3 and support
all BACnet services necessary to provide the following BACnet functional groups:
2. Files Functional Group
3. Reinitialize Functional Group
4. Device Communications Functional Group
5. Please refer to section 22.2, BAS, Functional Groups in the BACnet standard for a
complete list of the services that must be directly supported to provide each of the
functional groups listed above. All proprietary services, if used in the system, shall be
thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary tools
shall be supplied for working with proprietary information.
6. Standard BACnet object types supported shall include as a minimum — Analog Input,
Analog Output, Analog Value, Binary Input, Binary Output, Binary Value, Device, File
and Program Object Types. All proprietary object types, if used in the system, shall be
thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary tools
shall be supplied for working with proprietary information.
C. Logic controllers shall include universal inputs with 10 -bit resolution and that can accept 3K
and IOK thermistors, 0 -5 VDC, 4-20 mA and dry contact signals. Any input on controller may
be either analog or digital. Controller shall also include support and modifiable programming
for interface to intelligent room sensor. Controller shall include binary outputs on board.
D. All program sequences shall be stored on board logic controller in EEPROM. No batteries shall
be needed to retain logic program. All program sequences shall be executed by controller 10
times per second and shall be capable of multiple PID loops for control of multiple devices.
E. Programming of logic controller shall be completely modifiable in the field over installed
BACnet LANs or remotely via modem interface. Operator shall program logic sequences by
graphically moving function blocks on screen and tying blocks together on screen. Logic
controller shall be programmed using programming tools as described in operator terminal
section.
F. All programming tools shall be provided as part of system. Provide documentation in flowchart
form of all programming as part of the final system as -built documentation. Include samples of
flowchart documentation in submittals.
G. Logic controller shall include software scheduling functions on board without depending on any
external device. Scheduling shall be via a BACnet schedule object for seven -day of -the -week
scheduling. Controller shall include interface capability for optional plug -in hardware clock
with battery back up. Provide optional hardware clock as shown on object list given in drawing
set.
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
230900-19
H. Logic controller shall include support for intelligent field sensor (see Section 2.9.13.) Display
on field sensor shall be programmable at logic controller and include an operating mode and a
field service mode. All button functions and display data shall be programmable to show
specific controller data in each mode based on which button is pressed on the sensor. See
sequence of operation for specific display requirements at intelligent field sensor.
2.6 SENSORS
A. TEMPERATURESENSORS
1. All temperature sensors to be solid state electronic, factory- calibrated to within 0.5 °F,
totally interchangeable. Wall sensors to be housed in tamperproof enclosures. Duct
sensors to be electronically identical, housing suitable for the application. Metal guards
shall be provided as shown on drawings.
B. DIGITAL DISPLAY WALT �V _WROLLER (DWC) / TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1. Sensor shall contain a backlit LCD digital display and user function keys along with
temperature sensor. Controller shall function as room control unit, and shall allow
occupant to raise and lower setpoint, and activate terminal unit for override use —all
within limits as programmed by building operator. Controller shall also allow service
technician access to hidden functions as described in sequence of operation.
2. The DWC shall simultaneously display room setpoint, room temperature, outside
temperature, and fan status (if applicable) at each controller. This unit shall be
programmable, allowing site developers the flexibility to configure the display to match
their application. The site developer should be able to program the unit to display time -
of -day, room humidity and outdoor humidity. Unit must have the capability to show
temperatures in Fahrenheit or Centigrade.
3. Override time may be set and viewed in half -hour increments. Override time count down
shall be automatic, but may be reset to zero by occupant from the DWC. Time remaining
shall be displayed. Display shall show the word "OFF" in unoccupied mode unless a
function button is pressed.
4. See sequence of operation for specific operation of DWC displays and function keys in
field service mode and in normal occupant mode. Provide digital display wall controllers
as specified in point list.
5. Field service mode shall be customizable to fit different applications. If DWC is
connected to VAV controller, VAV box shall be balanced and all air flow parameters
shall be viewed and set from the DWC.
C. WALL SENSOR
1. Standard wall sensor shall use solid state sensor identical to DWC and shall be packaged
in aesthetically pleasing enclosure. Sensor shall provide override function, warmer /cooler
lever for setpoint adjustment and jack for plug -in of DWC for field adjustments. Override
time shall be stored in controller and be adjustable on a zone -by -zone basis. Adjustment
range for warmer /cooler lever shall also be stored in EEPROM on controller. All
functions of DWC shall be available through wall sensor port.
2. Miscellaneous Devices
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
230900-20
a. Temperature and relative humidity transmitters shall be Hycal, Model HT2 and
designed for accurate, reliable HVAC control. Transmitters shall be supplied for
duct and wall mounted applications. Transmitters shall be two -wire, 4 -20ma with
0 to 100% RH and the selected temperature range; temperature compensated; 10-
35 VDC input power; single point calibration.
3. Averaging duct and central plant immersion temperature sensors shall be Hycal, Model
CT -809; 2 -wire; 4 -20ma output with the ranges selected to provide the most accurate,
consistent temperature control.
4. Water flow transmitters shall be ONICON series 1200, dual turbine type; 4 -20ma at
24VDC. Transmitters shall be selected based on pipe size and material (schedule).
Transmitters to be installed for proper reading by following manufacturers instructions.
S. Current switches shall be Veris, Model H908, or approved equal.
6. Differential pressure transducer for shall be Setra, Model 264 for air and Model 230 for
water, or approved equal.
7. Filter differential pressure switches shall be Dwyer, Model 1910, or approved equal.
8. Water differez *— 'pressure switches shall be Delta Pro, Model 24 -014, or approved equal.
9. High/low static pressure air sensing switch shall be a Model AFS -460, or approved equal.
2.7 VALVES AND ACTUATORS (Manufactured by Belimo Air Controls)
A. VALVE SPECIFICATIONS
BALL VALVES (two -way 3" and smaller screwed and three way 2 -1/2" and smaller
screwed).
a. Valves shall be of industrial quality with bronze bodies and female NPT threads.
Valve bodies may also be stainless steel.
b. All valves shall have blowout proof stem design, reinforced Teflon thrust seal
washer and stuffing box. Packing gland screw shall be adjustable for wear.
C. Use chromium- plated bronze ball or where specified, stainless steel ball and stem.
All valves shall be provided with reinforced Teflon seats.
2. BALL VALVES (two -way 3" through 6" flanged)
a. Valves bodies shall be of industrial quality with carbon steel bodies with flange
dimensions in accordance with ANSI B16.5 150. Valve bodies may also be
specified stainless steel.
b. All valves shall have blowout proof stem design and reinforced thrust seal washer.
C. All valves shall be provided with standard stainless steel ball and stem, and
reinforced seats, packing and o -ring.
BALL VALVES (three way 2 -1/2" through 6" flanged)
a. Valves shall be of industrial quality with flanged ends in accordance with ANSI
B16.5 150. Valve bodies may be specified stainless steel.
4. GLOBE VALVES (two- & three -way 0.5 -2" screwed)
a. Valves bodies shall be bronze.
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
230900-21
b. Valve stems shall be stainless steel and highly polished to decrease friction and
improve response. Valve plugs shall be brass with guides to insure a perfect
seating.
C. Stem packing shall be spring loaded EP rings for water application, and Teflon
rings for steam applications.
5. GLOBE VALVES (two- & three -way 0.5-6" flanged)
a. Valves shall be cast iron flanged.
b. Valve stems shall be stainless steel and highly polished to decrease friction and
improve response. Valve plugs shall be brass with guides to ensure a perfect
seating. Stem packing shall be Teflon, spring loaded EP rings.
6. BUTTERFLY VALVE
a. Valve shall full lug -wafer style, drilled and tapped for isolation and removal of
m ,, dpwnstream piping. Flanges shall meet ANSI Standards 125 and 150. The body
shall have an extended neck to allow for sufficient flange and piping insulation
clearance.
b. Valves shall feature a single, through -shaft design for high strength and positive
disc control.
C. The disc seat shall be heavy duty with molded -in O- rings, creating a positive seal
between flange face and valve body. Gaskets between the valve and flange faces
shall not be permitted. The resilient shall provide a tight flow shutoff in either
direction with the disc closed. Seat isolates body and stem from flowing liquid.
The seat shall be easily replaceable in the field.
d. Stem bearings shall be isolated from flowing liquid.
2.8 PRESSURE INDEPENDENT CONTROL VALVES
A. The modulating control valves for all VAV reheat coils shall be pressure independent.
B. The control valves shall accurately control the flow from 0 to 100% full rated flow with an
equal percentage flow characteristic. The flow shall not vary more than +/- 5% due to system
pressure fluctuations across the valve with a minimum of 5 PSID across the valve.
C. Forged brass body rated at no less than 400 PSI, chrome plated brass ball and stem, female NPT
union ends, dual EPDM lubricated O -rings and TEFZEL characterizing disc.
D. Combination of actuator and valve shall provide a minimum close -off pressure rating of 200
PSID.
E. The control valve shall require no maintenance and shall not include replaceable cartridges.
2.9 ELECTRONIC ACTUATOR SPECIFICATION
A. Electronic Valve Actuators
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
230900-22
1. Actuator shall be fully modulating, floating (tri- state), two position, and/or spring return
as indicated in the control sequences. Specified fail safe actuators shall require
mechanical spring return.
2. Modulating valves shall be positive positioning, responding to a 2 -IOVDC or 4 -20mA
signal. There shall be a visual valve position indicator.
3. The actuator shall have the capability of adding auxiliary switches or feedback
potentiometer if specified.
4. Actuator shall provide minimum torque required for proper valve close -off. The actuator
shall be designed with a current limiting motor protection. A release button — clutch or
handle on the actuator —shall be provided to allow for manual override (except when
actuator is spring return type).
5. Actuators shall be UL listed.
B. Electronic Damper Actuators
1. Actuator shall be direct coupled (over the shaft), enabling it to be mounted directly to the
damper shaft without the need for connecting linkage. The actuator -to -shaft clamp shall
use a "V" bolt and "V" shaped, toothed cradle to attach to the damper shaft for maximum
holding strength. Single bolt or set screw type fasteners are not acceptable.
2. Actuator shall have electronic overload or digital rotation sensing circuitry to prevent
damage to the actuator throughout the rotation of the actuator. End switches to deactivate
the actuator at the end of rotation or magnetic clutch are not acceptable.
3. For power- failure /safety applications, a mechanical, spring return mechanism shall be
used.
4. Actuators with spring return mechanisms shall be capable of either clockwise or
counterclockwise spring return operation by simply changing the mounting orientation.
5. Proportional actuators shall accept a 2 -1 OVDC, 4-20mA signal, or be of the 2 -point
floating type and provide a 2 -10VDC actuator position feedback signal.
6. All actuators shall have an external manual gear release (clutch) or manual crank to aid in
installation and for allowing manual positioning when the actuator is not powered.
7. All actuators shall have an external direction of rotation switch to aid in installation and
to allow proper control response.
8. Actuators shall be provided with a factory- mounted 3 -foot electrical cable and conduit
fitting to provide easy hook -up to an electrical junction box.
9. Actuators shall be listed under Underwriters Laboratories Standard 873 and Canadian
Standards Association.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work
is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence.
B. Notify the owner's representative in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion of the work.
C. Do not begin work until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved.
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
230900-23
3.2 INSTALLATION (GENERAL)
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide all miscellaneous devices, hardware, software, interconnections installation and
programming required to ensure a complete operating system in accordance with the sequences
of operation and point schedules.
3.3 LOCATION AND INSTALLATION OF COMPONENTS
A. Locate and install components for easy accessibility; in general, mount 60 inches above floor
with minimum 3' -0" clear access space in front of units. Obtain approval on locations from
owner's representative prior to installation.
B. All instruments, switches, transmitters, etc., shall be suitably wired and mounted to protect them
from vibration, moisture and high or low temperatures.
C. Identify all equipment and panels. Provide permanently mounted tags for all panels.
D. Provide stainless steel or brass thermowells suitable for respective application and for
installation under other sections —sized to suit pipe diameter without restricting flow.
' L __ • . 1► : ►I• • ► C • III: h : ►11 • �1•
A. Provide all interlock and control wiring. All wiring shall be installed neatly and professionally,
in accordance with Specification Division 16 and all national, state and local electrical codes.
B. Provide wiring as required by functions as specified and as recommended by equipment
manufacturers, to serve specified control functions. Provide shielded low capacitance wire for
all communications trunks.
C. Control wiring shall not be installed in power circuit raceways. Magnetic starters and disconnect
switches shall not be used as junction boxes. Provide auxiliary junction boxes as required.
Coordinate location and arrangement of all control equipment with the owner's representative
prior to rough -in.
D. Provide auxiliary pilot duty relays on motor starters as required for control function.
E. Conduit for low voltage control wiring shall be by controls contractor.
F. Provide power for all control components from nearest electrical control panel or as indicated
on the electrical drawings —coordinate with electrical contractor.
G. All control wiring in the mechanical, electrical, telephone and boiler rooms to be installed in
raceways. All other wiring to be installed neatly and inconspicuously per local code
requirements. If local code allows, control wiring above accessible ceiling spaces may be run
with plenum rated cable (without conduit).
3.5 DDC OBJECT TYPE SUMMARY
RVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
230900-24
A. Provide all database generation.
B. Displays:
System displays shall show all analog and binary object types within the system. They
shall be logically laid out for easy use by the owner. Provide outside air temperature
indication on all system displays associated with economizer cycles.
C. Run Time Totalization:
1. At a minimum, run time totalization shall be incorporated for each monitored supply fan,
return fan, exhaust fan, hot water and chilled water pumps. Warning limits for each point
shall be entered for alarm and or maintenance purposes.
D. Trendlog:
1. All binary and analog object types (including zones) shall have the capability to be
automatically trended.
E. Alarm:
All analog inputs (High/Low Limits) and selected binary input alarm points shall be
prioritized and routed (locally or remotely) with alarm message per owner's requirements.
F. Database Save:
Provide back -up database for all stand -alone logic controllers on disk.
3.6 FIELD SERVICES
A. Prepare and start logic control system under provisions of this section.
B. Start-up and commission systems. Allow sufficient time for start-up and commissioning prior to
placing control systems in permanent operation.
C. Provide the capability for off -site monitoring at control contractor's local or main office. At a
minimum, off -site facility shall be capable of system diagnostics and software download.
Owner shall provide phone line for this service for 1 year or as specified.
D. Provide Owner's Representative with spare parts list. Identify equipment critical to maintaining
the integrity of the operating system.
3.7 TRAINING
A. Provide application engineer to instruct owner in operation of systems and equipment.
B. Provide system operator's training to include (but not limited to) such items as the following:
modification of data displays, alarm and status descriptors, requesting data, execution of
commands and request of logs. Provide this training to a minimum of 3 persons.
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
230900-25
C. Provide on -site training above as required, up to 16 hours as part of this contract.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Provide systems demonstration under provisions of the mechanical sections.
B. Demonstrate complete operating system to owner's representative.
- END OF SECTION -
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
230900-26
SECTION 23 1123 - FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings.
2. Piping specialties.
3. Piping and tubing joining materials.
4. Valves.
5. Pressure regulators.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,
pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, hrterior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Operating- Pressure Ratings:
1. Piping and Valves: 100 prig minimum unless otherwise indicated.
2. Service Regulators: 65 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.
3. Minimum Operating Pressure of Service Meter: 5 psig.
B. Natural -Gas System Pressure within Buildings: 0.5 psig or less.
C. Natural -Gas System Pressures within Buildings: Two pressure ranges. Primary pressure is
more than 0.5 prig but not more than 2 psig, and is reduced to secondary pressure of 0.5 psig or
less.
FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING
231123 -1
D. Natural -Gas System Pressures within Buildings: Two pressure ranges. Primary pressure is
more than 2 psig but not more than 5 psig, and is reduced to secondary pressure of more than
0.5 psig but not more than 2 psig.
E. Natural -Gas System Pressures within Buildings: Three pressure ranges. Primary pressure is
more than 2 psig but not more than 5 prig, and is reduced to secondary pressures of more than
0.5 psig but not more than 2 psig, and is reduced again to pressures of 0.5 psig or less.
F. Delegated Design: Design restraints and anchors for natural -gas piping and equipment,
including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using
performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of the following:
1. Piping specialties.
2. Corrugated, stainless -steel tubing with associated components.
3. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of
selected models.
4. Pressure regulators. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities.
5. Service meters. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities. Include bypass fittings and
meter bars supports.
6. Dielectric fittings.
B. Shop Drawings: For facility natural -gas piping layout. Include plans, piping layout and
elevations, sections, and details for fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple
pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to building
structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.
1. Shop Drawing Scale: See plumbing Plan.
2. Detail mounting, supports, and valve arrangements for service meter assembly and
pressure regulator assembly.
C. Delegated - Design Submittal: For natural -gas piping and equipment indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Detail fabrication and assembly of seismic restraints.
2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints.
D. Coordination Drawings: Plans and details, drawn to scale, on which natural -gas piping is
shown and coordinated with other installations, using input from installers of the items
involved.
E. Site Survey: Plans, drawn to scale, on which natural -gas piping is shown and coordinated with
other services and utilities.
F. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.
FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING
231123 -2
G. Welding certificates.
H. Field quality - control reports.
I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For motorized gas valves pressure regulators and service
meters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to
AWS Dl.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: _',. =1 and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing natural -gas piping
according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory- applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
C. Store and handle pipes and tubes having factory- applied protective coatings to avoid damaging
coating, and protect from direct sunlight.
D. Protect stored PE pipes and valves from direct sunlight.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact
utility- locating service for area where Project is located.
B. Interruption of Existing Natural -Gas Service: Do not interrupt natural -gas service to facilities
occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only
after arranging to provide purging and startup of natural -gas supply according to requirements
indicated:
I. Notify Owner no fewer than 5 days in advance of proposed interruption of natural -gas
service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of natural -gas service without Owner's written
permission.
FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING
231123 -3
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
B. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for valves installed concealed behind
finished surfaces. Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and
Frames."
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.
1. Malleable -Iron Threaded Fittjimmy ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern.
2. Wrought -Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket
welding.
3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass -to -iron seat, ground joint,
and threaded ends.
4. Forged -Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150,
including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and
facings:
a. Material Group: 1.1.
b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe.
C. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground.
d. Gasket Materials: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o- rings,
and spiral -wound metal gaskets.
C. Bolts and Nuts: ASMEB18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground and stainless steel
underground.
5. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory- applied, three -layer coating of
epoxy, adhesive, and PE.
a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat - shrink PE sleeves.
6. Mechanical Couplings:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) Dresser Piping Specialties; Division of Dresser, hie.
2) Smith - Blair, Inc.
b. Stainless -steel flanges and tube with epoxy finish.
C. Buna - nitrile seals.
d. Stainless -steel bolts, washers, and nuts.
FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING
231123 -4
e. Coupling shall be capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe to PE pipe, or
steel pipe to steel pipe.
f. Steel body couplings installed underground on plastic pipe shall be factory
equipped with anode.
B. Corrugated, Stainless -Steel Tubing: Comply with ANSVIAS LC 1.
1, Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. OmegaFlex, Inc.
b. Parker Hannifin Corporation; Parflex Division.
C. Titeflex.
d. Tru -Flex Metal Hose Corp.
2. Tubing: AST°il+.. x 240 /A 240M, corrugated, Series 300 stainless steel.
3. Coating: PE with flame retardant.
a. Surface - Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products
according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with
appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1) Flame - Spread Index: 25 or less.
2) Smoke - Developed Index: 50 or less.
4. Fittings: Copper -alloy mechanical fittings with ends made to fit and listed for use with
corrugated stainless -steel tubing and capable of metal -to -metal seal without gaskets.
Include brazing socket or threaded ends complying with ASME B 1.20.1.
5. Striker Plates: Steel, designed to protect tubing from penetrations.
6. Manifolds: Malleable iron or steel with factory- applied protective coating. Threaded
connections shall comply with ASME B1.20.1 for pipe inlet and corrugated tubing
outlets.
7. Operating - Pressure Rating: 5 psig.
C. Aluminum Tubing: Comply with ASTM B 210 and ASTM B 241113 241M.
1. Aluminum Alloy: Alloy 5456 is prohibited.
2. Protective Coating: Factory- applied coating capable of resisting corrosion on tubing in
contact with masonry, plaster, insulation, water, detergents, and sewerage.
3. Flare Fittings: Comply with ASME B 16.26 and SAE J513.
a. Copper -alloy fittings.
b. Metal -to -metal compression seal without gasket.
C. Dryseal threads shall comply with ASME B1.20.3.
D. Drawn- Temper Copper Tube: Comply with ASTM B 88, Type K.
1. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought copper, and streamlined pattern.
2. Bronze Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B 16.24, Class 150.
FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING
231123 -5
a. Gasket Material: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o- rings,
and spiral -wound metal gaskets.
b. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel or stainless steel.
3. Protective Coating for Underground Tubing: Factory- applied, extruded PE a minimum
of 0.022 inch thick.
E. Annealed - Temper Copper Tube: Comply with ASTM B 88, Type K.
1. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought copper, and streamlined pattern.
2. Flare Fittings: Comply with ASME B16.26 and SAE J513.
a. Copper fittings with long nuts.
b. Metal -to -metal compression seal without gasket.
C. Dryseal threads complying with ASME B 1.20.3.
3. _ ._1?eotcctive Coating for Underground Tubing: Factory- applied, extruded PE a minimum
of 0.022 inch thick.
F. Tin -Lined Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, seamless, annealed, with interior tin- plated lining.
Flare Fittings: Comply with ASME B16.26 and SAE J513.
a. Copper fittings with long nuts.
b. Metal -to -metal compression seal without gasket.
C. Dryseal threads complying with ASME B 1.20.3.
G. PE Pipe: ASTM D 2513, SDR 11.
1. PE Fittings: ASTM D 2683, socket - fusion type or ASTM D 3261, butt- fusion type with
dimensions matching PE pipe.
2. PE Transition Fittings: Factory- fabricated fittings with PE pipe complying with
ASTM D 2513, SDR 11; and steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel,
Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.
3. Anodeless Service -Line Risers: Factory fabricated and leak tested.
a. Underground Portion: PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11 inlet.
b. Casing: Steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, black steel,
Type E or S, Grade B, with corrosion- protective coating covering. Vent casing
aboveground.
C. Aboveground Portion: PE transition fitting.
d. Outlet shall be threaded or flanged or suitable for welded connection.
C. Tracer wire connection.
f. Ultraviolet shield.
g. Stake supports with factory finish to match steel pipe casing or carrier pipe.
4. Transition Service -Line Risers: Factory fabricated and leak tested.
a. Underground Portion: PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11 inlet
connected to steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, Type E
or S, Grade B, with corrosion- protective coating for aboveground outlet.
FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING
231123 -6
b. Outlet shall be threaded or flanged or suitable for welded connection.
C. Bridging sleeve over mechanical coupling.
d. Factory- connected anode.
e. Tracer wire connection.
f. Ultraviolet shield.
g. Stake supports with factory finish to match steel pipe casing or carrier pipe.
Plastic Mechanical Couplings, NPS 1 -1/2 and Smaller: Capable of joining PE pipe to PE
pipe.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc.
2) Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div.
3) Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.
b. PE body with molded -in, stainless -steel support ring.
C. Buna - nitrile seals.
d. Acetal collets.
C. Electro- zinc - plated steel stiffener.
6. Plastic Mechanical Couplings, NPS 2 and Larger: Capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe,
steel pipe to PE pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc.
2) Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div.
3) Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.
b. Fiber- reinforced plastic body.
C. PE body tube.
d. Buna - nitrile seals.
e. Acetal collets.
f Stainless -steel bolts, nuts, and washers.
7. Steel Mechanical Couplings: Capable of joining plain -end PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe
to PE pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) Dresser Piping Specialties; Division of Dresser, Inc.
2) Smith - Blair, Inc.
b. Stainless -steel flanges and tube with epoxy finish.
FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING
231123 -7
C. Buna - nitrile seals.
d. Stainless -steel bolts, washers, and nuts.
e. Factory- installed anode for steel -body couplings installed underground.
2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Appliance Flexible Connectors:
1. Indoor, Fixed - Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24.
2. Indoor, Movable- Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69,
3. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75.
4. Corrugated stainless -steel tubing with polymer coating.
5. Operating - Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig.
6. End Fittings: Zinc - coated steel.
7. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B 1.20.1.
8. Maximum Length: 72 inches.
B. Quick - Disconnect Devices: Comply with ANSI Z21.41.
1. Copper -alloy convenience outlet and matching plug connector.
2. Nitrite seals.
3. Hand operated with automatic shutoff when disconnected.
4. For indoor or outdoor applications.
5. Adjustable, retractable restraining cable.
C. Y -Pattern Strainers:
1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.
2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2 -1/2 and
larger.
3. Strainer Screen: 40 -mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless -steel basket with 50
percent free area.
4. CWP Rating: 125 psig.
D. Basket Strainers:
1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, high - tensile cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain
connection.
2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2 -1/2 and
larger.
3. Strainer Screen: 40 -mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless -steel basket with 50
percent free area.
4. CWP Rating: 125 psig.
E. T- Pattern Strainers:
1. Body: Ductile or malleable iron with removable access coupling and end cap for strainer
maintenance.
2. End Connections: Grooved ends.
FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING
231123 -8
3. Strainer Screen: 40 -mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless -steel basket with 57
percent free area.
4. CWP Rating: 750 psig.
F. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable -iron increaser fitting with corrosion - resistant wire
screen, with free area at least equal to cross - sectional area of connecting pipe and threaded -end
connection.
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.
B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 /1310.12M for welding materials appropriate
for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
C. Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 -&- F complying with
AWS A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing more than 0.05 percent phosphorus are
prohibited.
2.4 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES
A. See "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas
Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services.
B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33.
1. CWP Rating: 125 psig.
2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.
3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B 1.20.3.
4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas
Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"
Articles.
5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for
valves 1 inch and smaller.
6. Service Mark: Valves 1 -1/4 inches to NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG" permanently
marked on valve body.
C. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 -1/2 and Larger: Comply with
ASME B16.38.
1. CWP Rating: 125 psig.
2. Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME B16.5 for steel flanges.
3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas
Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"
Articles.
4. Service Mark: Initials "WOG" shall be permanently marked on valve body.
D. One - Piece, Bronze Ball Valve with Bronze Trim: MSS SP -110.
FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING
231123 -9
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company.
b. Conbraco Industries, hie.; Apollo Div.
C. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc.
d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.
2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.
3. Ball: Chrome- plated brass.
4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof.
5. Seats: Reinforced TEE; blowout proof.
6. Packing: Separate packnut with adjustable -stem packing threaded ends.
7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff
Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas S s..ofTValve Schedule" Articles.
8. CWP Rating: 600 psig.
9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
10. Service: Suitable for natural -gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.
E. Two- Piece, Full -Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP -I 10.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company.
b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.
C. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc.
d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
C. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.
2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.
3. Ball: Chrome - plated bronze.
4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof.
5. Seats: Reinforced TEE; blowout proof.
6. Packing: Threaded -body packnut design with adjustable -stem packing.
7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff
Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.
8. CWP Rating: 600 psig.
9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
10. Service: Suitable for natural -gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.
F. Two - Piece, Regular -Port Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP -110.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING
23 1123-10
a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company.
b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.
C. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc.
d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.
2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.
3. Ball: Chrome - plated bronze.
4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof.
5. Seats: Reinforced TFE.
6. Packing: Threaded -body packnut design with adjustable -stem packing.
7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff
Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.
8. CWP Rating: 600 prig.
9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
10. Service: Suitable for natural -gas serV"u,° with "WOG" indicated on valve body.
G. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP -78.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Lee Brass Company.
b. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.
3. Plug: Bronze.
4. Ends: Threaded, socket, or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff
Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.
5. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated.
6. Pressure Class: 125 psig.
7. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
8. Service: Suitable for natural -gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.
H. Cast -Iron, Nonlubricated Plug Valves: MSS SP -78.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
b. Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div.
C. Xomox Corporation; a Crane company.
2. Body: Cast iron, complying with ASTM A 126, Class B.
3. Plug: Bronze or nickel - plated cast iron.
4. Seat: Coated with thermoplastic.
5. Stem Seal: Compatible with natural gas.
FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING
23 1123-11
6. Ends: Threaded or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve
Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.
7. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated.
8. Pressure Class: 125 psig.
9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
10. Service: Suitable for natural -gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.
I.
Cast -Iron, Lubricated Plug Valves: MSS SP -78
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Flowserve.
b. Homestead Valve; a division of Olson Technologies, hie.
C. McDonald; 1z S Mfg. Co.
d. Milliken Valve Company.
C. Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div.
f. R &M Energy Systems, A Unit of Robbins & Myers, Inc.
J.
2. Body: Cast iron, complying with ASTM A 126, Class B.
3. Plug: Bronze or nickel- plated cast iron.
4. Seat: Coated with thermoplastic.
5. Stem Seal: Compatible with natural gas.
6. Ends: Threaded or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve
Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.
7. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated.
8. Pressure Class: 125 psig.
9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
10. Service: Suitable for natural -gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.
PE Ball Valves: Comply with ASME B 16.40
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Kerotest Manufacturing Corp.
b. Lyall, R. W. & Company, hie.
C. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.
2. Body: PE.
3. Ball: PE.
4. Stem: Acetal.
5. Seats and Seals: Nitrile.
6. Ends: Plain or fusible to match piping.
7. CWP Rating: 80 prig.
8. Operating Temperature: Minus 20 to plus 140 deg F.
9. Operator: Nut or flat head for key operation.
FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING
23 1123-12
10. Include plastic valve extension.
11. Include tamperproof locking feature for valves where indicated on Drawings.
K. Valve Boxes:
1. Cast -iron, two- section box.
2. Top section with cover with "GAS" lettering.
3. Bottom section with base to fit over valve and barrel a minimum of 5 inches in diameter.
4. Adjustable cast -iron extensions of length required for depth of bury.
5. Include tee - handle, steel operating wrench with socket end fitting valve nut or flat head,
and with stem of length required to operate valve.
2.5 EARTHQUAKE VALVES
A. Earthquake Valves: Comply with ASCE 25.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Vanguard Valves, Inc.
b. California Earthquake Valve Co.
C. Pacific Seismic Products
3. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Maximum Operating Pressure: 5 prig.
5. Cast - aluminum body with nickel - plated chrome steel internal parts.
6. Nitrite- rubber valve washer.
7. Sight windows for visual indication of valve position.
8. Threaded end connections complying with ASME B1.20.1.
9. Wall mounting bracket with bubble level indicator.
B. Earthquake Valves: Comply with ASCE 25.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Pacific Seismic Products, Inc.
3. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Maximum Operating Pressure: 0.5 psig.
5. Cast - aluminum body with stainless -steel internal parts.
6. Nitrile - rubber, reset -stem o -ring seal.
7. Valve position, open or closed, indicator.
8. Composition valve seat with clapper held by spring or magnet locking mechanism.
FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING
23 11 23 - 13
9. Level indicator.
10. End Connections: Threaded for valves NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for valves NPS 2 -1/2
and larger.
2.6 PRESSURE REGULATORS
A. General Requirements:
1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas.
2. Steel jacket and corrosion- resistant components.
3. Elevation compensator.
4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for regulators
NPS 2 -1/2 and larger.
B. Service Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Actaris.
b. American Meter Company.
C. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management.
d. Invensys.
e. Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div.
3. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die -cast aluminum.
4. Springs: Zinc - plated steel; interchangeable.
5. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc - plated steel.
6. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the
valve port.
7. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable.
8. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet - stabilized, mineral - tilled nylon.
9. Single -port, self - contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum
pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator.
10. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed
150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff.
11. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator.
12. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field - installed, stainless -steel screen in opening if not
connected to vent piping.
13. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 100 psig.
C. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING
23 1123-14
2. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Actaris.
b. American Meter Company.
C. Eclipse Combustion, Inc.
d. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management.
C. Invensys.
f. Maxitrol Company.
g. Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div.
3. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die -cast aluminum.
4. Springs: Zinc - plated steel; interchangeable.
5. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc - plated steel.
6. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the
valve port.
7. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable.
8. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet- stabilized, mineral - filled nylon.
9. Single -port, self - contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum
pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator.
10. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed
150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff.
11. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator.
12. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field- installed, stainless -steel screen in opening if not
connected to vent piping.
13. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig.
D. Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Canadian Meter Company Inc.
b. Eaton Corporation; Controls Div.
C. Harper Wyman Co.
d. Maxitrol Company.
C. SCP, Inc.
3. Body and Diaphragm Case: Die -cast aluminum.
4. Springs: Zinc - plated steel; interchangeable.
5. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc - plated steel.
6. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber.
7. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet- stabilized, mineral - filled nylon.
8. Factory- Applied Finish: Minimum three -layer polyester and polyurethane paint finish.
9. Regulator may include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
10. Maximum Inlet Pressure: I psig.
FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING
23 11 23 - 15
2.7 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Dielectric Unions:
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Company.
b. Central Plastics Company.
C. Hart Industries International, Inc.
d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
e. Watts Regulator Co.; Division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
I. Wilkins; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.
g. Insert manufacturer's name.
2. Minimum Operating - Pressure 1 := 150 psig.
3. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials.
4. Insulating materials suitable for natural gas.
5. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed joint,
plain, or welded end connections that match piping system materials.
B. Dielectric Flanges:
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Company.
b. Central Plastics Company.
C. Watts Regulator Co.; Division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
d. Wilkins; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.
2. Minimum Operating - Pressure Rating: 150 psig.
3. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials.
4. Insulating materials suitable for natural gas.
5. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed joint,
plain, or welded end connections that match piping system materials.
C. Dielectric- Flange Kits:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Advance Products & Systems, hie.
b. Calpico Inc.
C. Central Plastics Company.
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
2. Minimum Operating - Pressure Rating: 150 psig.
FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING
23 1123 - 16
3. Companion -flange assembly for field assembly.
4. Include flanges, full -face- or ring -type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or PE bolt
sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.
5. Insulating materials suitable for natural gas.
6. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed joint,
plain, or welded end connections that match piping system materials.
2.8 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali - resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for
marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick,
continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective
jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches
deep; colored yellow.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing -in for natural -gas piping system to verify actual locations of piping
connections before equipment installation.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural gas to premises or piping section.
B. Inspect natural -gas piping according to NFPA 54 to determine that natural -gas utilization
devices are turned off in piping section affected.
C. Comply with NFPA 54 requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.
3.3 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NFPA 54 for installation and purging of natural -gas piping.
B. Install underground, natural -gas piping buried at least 36 inches below finished grade. Comply
with requirements in Division 31 Section 'Barth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and
backfilling.
I. If natural -gas piping is installed less than 36 inches below finished grade, install it in
containment conduit.
C. Install underground, PE, natural -gas piping according to ASTM D 2774.
D. Steel Piping with Protective Coating:
FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING
23 1123-17
1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints.
2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating
manufacturer.
3. Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe.
E. Copper Tubing with Protective Coating:
1. Apply joint cover kits over tubing to cover, seal, and protect joints.
2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating
manufacturer.
F. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
G. Install pressure gage downstream from each service regulator. Pressure gages are specified in
Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."
3.4 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NFPA 54 for installation and purging of natural -gas piping.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,
expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to
layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during
progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
G. Locate valves for easy access.
H. Install natural -gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
K. Verify final equipment locations for roughing -in.
L. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas -fired appliances and equipment for
roughing -in requirements.
FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING
23 1123-18
M. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including
service -meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install
where condensate is subject to freezing.
1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped.
Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and
same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or
cap.
N. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure
protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.
O. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or
floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view.
Concealed Location Installations: Except as specified below, install concealed natural -gas
piping and piping installed under the building in containment conduit constructed of steel
with welded joints as described in Part 2. Install a vent pipe from containment conduit to
outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.
1. Above Accessible Ceilings: Natural -gas piping, fittings, valves, and regulators may be
installed in accessible spaces without containment conduit.
2. In Floors: Install natural -gas piping with welded or brazed joints and protective coating
in cast -in -place concrete floors. Cover piping to be cast in concrete slabs with minimum
of 1 -1/2 inches of concrete. Piping may not be in physical contact with other metallic
structures such as reinforcing rods or electrically neutral conductors. Do not embed
piping in concrete slabs containing quick -set additives or cinder aggregate.
3. In Floor Channels: Install natural -gas piping in floor channels. Channels must have
cover and be open to space above cover for ventilation.
4. In Walls or Partitions: Protect tubing installed inside partitions or hollow walls from
physical damage using steel striker barriers at rigid supports.
a. Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls does not require striker
barriers.
5. Prohibited Locations:
a. Do not install natural -gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash
chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator
shafts.
b. Do not install natural -gas piping in solid walls or partitions.
Q. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side
down.
R. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.
S. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each
piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections.
T. Do not use natural -gas piping as grounding electrode.
FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING
23 1123-19
U. Install strainer on inlet of each line- pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated
valve.
V. Install pressure gage downstream from each line regulator. Pressure gages are specified in
Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."
W. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements
for sleeves specified in Division 23 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."
X. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with
requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 23 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for
HVAC Piping."
Y. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 23 Section "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping."
3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless -steel
tubing, aluminum, or copper connector.
B. Install underground valves with valve boxes.
C. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate
for servicing and testing.
D. Install earthquake valves aboveground outside buildings according to listing.
E. Install anode for metallic valves in underground PE piping.
3.6 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
C. Threaded Joints:
1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B 1.20.1.
2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies.
3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove buns and restore full inside diameter of pipe.
4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal
threading is specified.
5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
D. Welded Joints:
FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING
23 1123-20
1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and
welding operators.
2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
3. Patch factory- applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds
and where damage to coating occurs during construction.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter.
F. Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness appropriate for natural -gas
service. Install gasket concentrically positioned.
G. Flared Joints: Cut tubing with roll cutting tool. Flare tube end with tool to result in flare
dimensions complying with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench. Do not
overtighten.
H. PE Piping Heat - Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean c1ca
paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1. Plain -End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.
2. Plain -End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic - restraint devices
specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and
Equipment."
B. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Division 23 Section
"Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
C. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum
rod sizes:
1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
2. NPS 1 -1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
3. NPS 1 -1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
4. NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 3 -1/2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.
5. NPS 4 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch.
D. Install hangers for horizontal drawn- temper copper tubing with the following maximum spacing
and minimum rod sizes:
NPS 3/8: Maximum span, 48 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
2. NPS 1/2 and NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING
23 1123-21
3. NPS 3/4 and NPS 7/8: Maximum span, 84 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
4. NPS 1: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
E. Install hangers for horizontal, corrugated stainless -steel tubing with the following maximum
spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 3/8: Maximum span, 48 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
2. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
3. NPS 3/4 and Larger: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
3.8 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect to utility's gas main according.to utility's procedures and req., • ts.
B. Install natural -gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment
grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.
C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.
D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within
72 inches of each gas -fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and
appliances or equipment.
E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as
practical to inlet of each appliance.
3.9 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and
Equipment" for piping and valve identification.
B. Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches below finished grade,
except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
3.10 PAINTING
A. Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for painting interior and exterior
natural -gas piping.
B. Paint exposed, exterior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars,
earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except components, with factory- applied paint or
protective coating.
1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D.
a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.
FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING
23 1123-22
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.
C. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel (semigloss).
d. Color: Gray.
C. Paint exposed, interior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars,
earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except components, with factory- applied paint or
protective coating.
1. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 5.1Q.
a. Prime Coat: Quick -drying alkyd metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
C. Topcoat: Interior latex (semigloss).
d. Color: Gray.
2. Alkyd System: MPI INT 5.1E.
a. Prime Coat: Quick -drying alkyd metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat.
C. Topcoat: Interior alkyd (semigloss).
d. Color: Gray.
D. Damage and Touchup: Repair maned and damaged factory- applied finishes with materials and
by procedures to match original factory finish.
3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to NFPA 54 and authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Natural -gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.12 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain earthquake valves.
3.13 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Underground natural -gas pipingshall be one of the following:
1. PE pipe and fittings joined by heat fusion, or mechanical couplings; service -line risers
with tracer wire terminated in an accessible location.
FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING
23 1123-23
2. Steel pipe with wrought -steel fittings and welded joints, or mechanical couplings. Coat
pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.
3. Annealed - temper copper tube with wrought- copper fittings and brazed joints. Coat pipe
and fittings with protective coating for copper tubing.
B. Aboveground natural -gas pipingshall be one of the following:
1. Steel pipe with malleable -iron fittings and threaded joints.
2. Steel pipe with wrought -steel fittings and welded joints.
3. Annealed- temper copper tube with wrought - copper fittings and brazed joints.
C. Branch Piping in Cast -in -Place Concrete to Single Appliance: Annealed- temper copper tube
with wrought- copper fittings and brazed joints. Install piping embedded in concrete with no
joints in concrete.
D. Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought -steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and
fittings with protective coating for steel piping.
3.14 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES LESS THAN 0.5 PSIG
A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 and smaller shall be one of the following:
1. Corrugated stainless -steel tubing with mechanical fittings having socket or threaded ends
to match adjacent piping.
2. Annealed- temper, tin -lined copper tube with flared joints and fittings.
3. Annealed- temper, copper tube with wrought - copper fittings and brazed joints.
4. Aluminum tube with flared fittings and joints.
5. Steel pipe with malleable -iron fittings and threaded joints.
B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be one of the following:
1. Steel pipe with malleable -iron fittings and threaded joints.
2. Steel pipe with wrought -steel fittings and welded joints.
3. Drawn - temper copper tube with wrought- copper fittings and brazed joints.
C. Underground, below building, piping shall be one of the following:
1. Steel pipe with malleable -iron fittings and threaded joints.
2. Steel pipe with wrought -steel fittings and welded joints.
D. Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought -steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and
fittings with protective coating for steel piping.
E. Containment Conduit Vent Piping: Steel pipe with malleable -iron fittings and threaded or
wrought -steel fittings with welded joints. Coat underground pipe and fittings with protective
coating for steel piping.
FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING
23 1123-24
3.15
0
n
C.
INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES MORE THAN 0.5 PSIG AND
LESS THAN 5 PSIG
Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 and smaller shall be one of the following:
1. Corrugated stainless -steel tubing with mechanical fittings having socket or threaded ends
to match adjacent piping.
2. Annealed- temper, tin -lined copper tube with flared joints and fittings.
3. Annealed- temper, copper tube with wrought- copper fittings and brazed joints.
4. Aluminum tube with flared fittings and joints.
5. Steel pipe with malleable -iron fittings and threaded joints.
Aboveground, distribution piping shall be one of the following
1. Steel pipe with malleable -iron fittings and threaded joints.
2. Steel pipe with steel welding fittings and welded joints.
3. Drawn- temper copper tube , v �:L wrought- copper fittings and brazed joints.
Underground, below building, piping shall be one of the following:
1. Steel pipe with malleable -iron fittings and threaded joints.
2. Steel pipe with wrought -steel fittings and welded joints.
D. Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought -steel fittings and welded joints. Coat
underground pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.
E. Containment Conduit Vent Piping: Steel pipe with malleable -iron fittings and threaded or
wrought -steel fittings with welded joints. Coat underground pipe and fittings with protective
coating for steel piping.
3.16 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES MORE THAN 5 PSIG
A. Aboveground Piping: Maximum operating pressure more than 5 psig.
B. Aboveground, Branch Piping: Steel pipe with steel welding fittings and welded joints.
C. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be one of the following:
1. Steel pipe with steel welding fittings and welded joints.
2. Drawn - temper copper tube with wrought - copper fittings and brazed joints.
D. Underground, below building, piping shall be one of the following:
1. Steel pipe with malleable -iron fittings and threaded joints.
2. Steel pipe with wrought -steel fittings and welded joints.
E. Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought -steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and
fittings with protective coating for steel piping.
FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING
23 11 23 -25
F. Containment Conduit Vent Piping: Steel pipe with malleable -iron fittings and threaded or
wrought -steel fittings with welded joints. Coat underground pipe and fittings with protective
coating for steel piping.
3.17 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller at service meter shall be one of the following:
1. One - piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim.
2. Two - piece, full -port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.
3. Bronze plug valve.
B. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 -1/2 and larger at service meter shall be one of the following:
1. Two - piece, full -port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.
2. Bronze plug v :!T
3. Cast -iron, nonlubricated plug valve.
C. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller shall be one of the following:
1. One - piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim.
2. Two - piece, full -port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.
3. Bronze plug valve.
D. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 -1/2 and larger shall be one of the following:
1. . Two - piece, full -port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.
2. Bronze plug valve.
3. Cast -iron, nonlubricated plug valve.
E. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be one of the following:
1. One - piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim.
2. Two - piece, full -port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.
3. Bronze plug valve.
- END OF SECTION -
FACILITY NATURAL -GAS PIPING
23 1123-26
SECTION 23 21 13 - HYDRONIC PIPING
PART1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special -duty valves, and
specialties for tt�-following:
1. Hot -water heating piping.
2. Chilled -water piping.
3. Makeup -water piping.
4. Condensate -drain piping.
5. Blowdown -drain piping.
6. Air -vent piping.
7. Safety- valve -inlet and - outlet piping.
B. Related Sections include the following:
Division 23 Section " Hydronic Pumps" for pumps, motors, and accessories for hydronic
piping-
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
B. RTRF: Reinforced thermosetting resin (fiberglass) fittings.
C. RTRP: Reinforced thermosetting resin (fiberglass) pipe.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following
minimum working pressure and temperature:
I. Hot -Water Heating Piping: 125 psig at 200 deg F.
2. Chilled -Water Piping: 125 psig at 200 deg F.
3. Makeup -Water Piping: 80 psig at 150 deg F.
4. Condensate -Drain Piping: 150 deg F.
5. Blowdown -Drain Piping: 200 deg F.
6. Air -Vent Piping: 200 deg F.
HYDRONIC PIPING
2321 13-1
7. Safety- Valve -inlet and - Outlet Piping: Equal to the pressure of the piping system to
which it is attached.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of the following:
1. Air control devices.
2. Hydronic specialties.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail, at 1/4 scale, the piping layout, fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers,
supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of
the same to the building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion
joints and loops.
C. W ag certificates.
D. Qualification Data: For Installer.
E. Field quality- control test reports.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air control devices, hydronic specialties, and special -duty
valves to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
B. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWSDLI/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
C. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section DC.
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
D. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, 'Building Services Piping," for materials,
products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME
label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 01,
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Drawn - Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L.
HYDRONIC PIPING
232113 -2
B. Wrought- Copper Fittings: ASME B 16.22.
2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; type, grade, and wall thickness as
indicated in Part 3 'Piping Applications" Article.
B. Cast -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B 16.4; Classes 125 and 250 as indicated in Part 3 'Piping
Applications" Article.
C. Malleable -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in Part 3
"Piping Applications" Article.
D. Malleable -Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in Part 3
"Piping Applications" Article.
E. Wrought -Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.
F. Wrought Cast- and Forged -Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts,
nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:
1. Material Group: 1.1.
2. End Connections: Butt welding.
3. Facings: Raised face.
G. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of same materials and wall thicknesses as pipe in
which they are installed.
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Pipe - Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
ASMEB16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8 -inch maximum thickness unless
thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full -Face Type: For flat -face, Class 125, cast -iron and cast - bronze flanges.
b. Narrow -Face Type: For raised -face, Class 250, cast -iron and steel flanges.
B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead -free alloys. Include water- flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
D. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate
for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
E. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working
temperatures and pressures.
HYDRONIC PIPING
2321 13-3
2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper -alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder -
joint, plain, or weld -neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C. Dielectric Unions:
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Company.
b. Central Plastics Company.
C. Hart Industries International, Inc.
d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; AquaSpec Commercial Products Division.
2. Factory- fabricated union assembly, for 250 -psig minimum working pressure at 180
deg F.
D. Dielectric Flanges:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Company.
b. Central Plastics Company.
C. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2. Factory- fabricated companion -flange assembly, for 150- or 300 -psig minimum working
pressure as required to suit system pressures.
E. Dielectric -Flange Kits:
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Calpico, Inc.
C. Central Plastics Company.
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, hic.
2. Companion -flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full -face- or ring -type
neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and
steel backing washers.
3. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300 -psig
minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.
HYDRONIC PIPING
232113 -4
F. Dielectric Couplings:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Calpico, Inc.
b. Lochinvar Corporation.
3. Galvanized -steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining; threaded
ends; and 300 -psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
G. Dielectric Nipples:
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requiremen - ilanufa-�turers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.
b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
C. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
d. Victaulic Company of America.
2. Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain,
threaded, or grooved ends; and 300 -psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
2.5 VALVES
A. Gate, Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirements specified in
Division 23 Section "General -Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."
B. Automatic Temperature - Control Valves, Actuators, and Sensors: Comply with requirements
specified in Division 23 Section 'Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."
2.6 AIR CONTROL DEVICES
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Amtrol, Inc.
2. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
3. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.
4. Taco.
B. Manual Air Vents:
1. Body: Bronze.
2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous.
HYDRONIC PIPING
232113 -5
3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew.
4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2.
5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8.
6. CWP Rating: 150 psig.
7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F.
C. Automatic Air Vents:
1. Body: Bronze or cast iron.
2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous.
3. Operator: Noncorrosive metal float.
4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2.
5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/4.
6. CWP Rating: 150 psig.
7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.
D. Bladder -Type Expansion Tanks:
1. Tank: Welded steel, rated for 125 -psig working pressure and 375 deg F maximum
operating temperature. Factory test with taps fabricated and supports installed and
labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
2. Bladder: Securely sealed into tank to separate air charge from system water to maintain
required expansion capacity.
3. Air - Charge Fittings: Schrader valve, stainless steel with EPDM seats.
2.7 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Y -Pattern Strainers:
1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.
2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2 -1/2 and
larger.
3. Strainer Screen: 40 -mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless -steel basket with 50
percent free area.
4. CWP Rating: 125 psig.
B. Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors:
1. Body: Fiber - reinforced rubber body.
2. End Connections: Steel flanges drilled to align with Classes 150 and 300 steel flanges.
3. Performance: Capable of misalignment.
4. CWP Rating: 150 prig.
5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
HYDRONIC PIPING
232113 -6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Hot -water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be any of the following:
1. Type L, drawn- temper copper tubing, wrought - copper fittings, and Soldered Joints.
2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; Class 150, malleable -iron fittings; cast -iron flanges and flange
fittings; and threaded joints.
B. Hot -water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 -1/2 and larger, shall be any of the following:
1. Type L, drawn - temper copper tubing, wrought- copper fittings, and Soldered Joints.
2. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought -steel fittings and wrought -cast or forged -steel flanges
and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints.
C. Chilled -water piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be any of the following:
1. Type L, drawn- temper copper tubing, wrought- copper fittings, and Soldered joints.
2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; Class 150, malleable -iron fittings; cast -iron flanges and flange
fittings; and threaded joints.
D. Chilled -water piping, aboveground, NPS 2 -1/2 and larger, shall be any of the following:
1. Type L, drawn - temper copper tubing, wrought- copper fittings, and Soldered joints.
2. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought -steel fittings and wrought -cast or forged -steel flanges
and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints.
E. Makeup -water piping installed aboveground shall be the following:
Type L, drawn- temper copper tubing, wrought - copper fittings, and Soldered joints.
F. Condensate -Drain Piping: Type M, drawn- temper copper tubing, wrought- copper fittings, and
soldered joints.
G. Blowdown -Drain Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for the
service in which blowdown drain is installed.
H. Air -Vent Piping:
1. Inlet: Same as service where installed with metal -to- plastic transition fittings for plastic
piping systems according to the piping manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Outlet: Type K, annealed- temper copper tubing with soldered or flared joints.
I. Safety - Valve -Inlet and - Outlet Piping for Hot -Water Piping: Same materials and joining
methods as for piping specified for the service in which safety valve is installed.
HYDRONIC PIPING
232113 -7
3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Install shutoff -duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, and at supply connection
to each piece of equipment.
B. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction.
C. Install safety valves at hot -water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code and pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings.
Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation
requirements.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicate piping locations and:. - .ar-=arsgements if such were used to size pipa- and
calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping
as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
B. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically in&i ,Jed
otherwise.
D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
F. Install piping at indicated slopes.
G. Install piping free of sags and bends.
H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing
of valves.
L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple
with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.
M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.
N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.
HYDRONIC PIPING
232113 -8
O. Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to
the bottom of the main pipe. For up -feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe.
P. Install valves according to Division 23 Section "General -Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."
Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of
equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
R. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2 -1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere
as indicated.
S. Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve, pressure - reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-
line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blowdown
connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for
strainers smaller than NPS 2.
T. Identify piping as specified 'Nvision 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and
Equipment."
3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and
Supports for IIVAC Piping and Equipment." Comply with the following requirements for
maximum spacing of supports.
B. Install the following pipe attachments:
1. Provide copper -clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with
copper pipe.
C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
I. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
3. NPS 1 -1/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
4. NPS 1 -1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
5. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
6. NPS 2 -1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.
7. NPS 3: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.
D. Install hangers for drawn- temper copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and
minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
HYDRONIC PIPING
232113 -9
2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
3. NPS 1 -1/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
4. NPS 1 -1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
5. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
6. NPS 2 -1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.
7. NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.
E. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10 -foot intervals between floors.
3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water - flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using
lead -free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASMEB1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
F. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12 /D10.12M, using qualified processes
and welding operators according to Part I "Quality Assurance" Article.
G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat - transfer coils, and elsewhere as required
for system air venting.
B. Install automatic air vents at high points of system piping in mechanical equipment rooms only.
Manual vents at heat - transfer coils and elsewhere as required for air venting.
IIYDRONIC PIPING
2321 13 -10
C. Install bypass chemical feeders in each hydronic system where indicated, in upright position
with top of funnel not more than 48 inches above the floor. Install feeder in minimum NPS 3/4
bypass line, from main with full -size, full -port, ball valve in the main between bypass
connections. Install NPS 3/4 pipe from chemical feeder drain, to nearest equipment drain and
include a full -size, full -port, ball valve.
D. Install expansion tanks on the floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure tank
is properly charged with air to suit system Project requirements.
3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment
connections.
B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.
C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are
installed, only one bypass is required.
D. Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections according
to Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for RVAC Piping."
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:
1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.
2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test
pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.
3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace
strainer screens.
4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be
capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged
joints to isolate equipment.
5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one -third higher than test pressure,. to
protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.
B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:
1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to
freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be
used.
2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use
drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.
3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water.
4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the
system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any
vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to
pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum
IIYDRONIC PIPING
2321 13-11
yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix in ASME B31.9, 'Building
Services Piping."
5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping,
joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing
components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
6. Prepare written report of testing.
C. Perform the following before operating the system:
1. Open manual valves fully.
2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation.
3. Set makeup pressure- reducing valves for required system pressure.
4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating
freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type).
5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.
6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers,
cooling towers, to specified values.
7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.
- END OF SECTION -
IIYDRONIC PIPING
2321 13-12
SECTION 23 21 23- HYDRONIC PUMPS
PART1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Close- coupled, in -line centrifugal pumps.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, opcaaiing
characteristics, furnished specialties, final impeller dimensions, and accessories for each type of
product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves.
B. Shop Drawings: Show pump layout and connections. Include setting drawings with templates
for installing foundation and anchor bolts and other anchorages.
C. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and.marhev `t r
intended use.
B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor - operated water pumps.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 CLOSE - COUPLED, IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Armstrong Pumps Inc.
ITYDRONIC PUMPS
232123 -1
2. Bell & Gossett; Div. of ITT Industries.
3. PACO Pumps.
4. Taco, Inc.
B. Description: Factory- assembled and - tested, centrifugal, overhung- impeller, close- coupled, in-
line pump as defined in 1111.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for installation with pump and motor
shafts mounted horizontally or vertically. Rate pump for 125 -prig minimum working pressure
and a continuous water temperature of 200 deg F.
C. Pump Construction:
1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with replaceable bronze wear rings, threaded gage
tappings at inlet and outlet, and threaded or companion -flange connections.
2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft,
and secured with a locking cap screw. Trim impeller to match specified performance.
3. Pump Shaft: Steel, with copper -alloy shaft sleeve.
4. Mechanical Seal: Carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a stainless - .r i
spring, and Buna -N bellows and gasket. Include water slinger on shaft between motor
and seal.
5. Pump Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings.
D. Motor: Single speed, with permanently lubricated ball bearings, unless otherwise indicated; and
rigidly mounted to pump casing. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common
Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PUMP INSTALLATION
A. Comply with HI 1.4.
B. Install pumps with access for periodic maintenance including removal of motors, impellers,
couplings, and accessories.
C. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and
weight of pumps is not supported by piping.
D. Install continuous - thread hanger rods and of sufficient size to support pump weight. Fabricate
brackets or supports as required. Hanger and support materials are specified in Division 23
Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps.
HYDRONIC PUMPS
232123 -2
D. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.
E. Install check valve and throttling valve on discharge side of pumps.
F. Install Y -type strainer and shutoff valve on suction side of pumps.
G. Install single gage with multiple input selector valve at integral pressure — gage tapping.
H. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
I. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low - Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables."
- END OF SECTION -
HYDRONIC PUMPS
232123 -3
SECTION 23 25 00 -IIVAC WATER TREATMENT
PART1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following HVAC water - treatment systems:
1. Bypass chemical -feed equipment and controls.
2. HVAC water - treatment chemicals.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EEPROM: Electrically erasable, programmable read -only memory.
B. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or
for remote - control, signaling power - limited circuits.
C. TDS: Total dissolved solids.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Water quality for HVAC systems shall minimize corrosion, scale buildup, and biological
growth for optimum efficiency of HVAC equipment without creating a hazard to operating
personnel or the environment.
B. Base HVAC water treatment on quality of water available at Project site, HVAC system
equipment material characteristics and functional performance characteristics, operating
personnel capabilities, and requirements and guidelines of authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Closed hydronic systems, including hot -water heating, shall have the following water qualities:
1. pH: Maintain a value within 9.0 to 10.5.
2. "P" Alkalinity: Maintain a value within 100 to 500 ppm.
3. Boron: Maintain a value within 100 to 200 ppm.
4. Soluble Copper: Maintain a maximum value of 0.20 ppm.
5. TDS: Maintain a maximum value of 10 ppm.
6. Ammonia: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm.
7. Free Caustic Alkalinity: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm.
8. Microbiological Limits:
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
232500-1
a. Total Aerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 1000 organisms /ml.
b. Total Anaerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms /ml.
C. Nitrate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms /ml.
d. Sulfate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 0 organisms /ml.
e. Iron Bacteria: Maintain a maximum value of 0 organisms /ml.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and
accessories for the following products:
1. Bypass feeders.
2. Chemical test equipment.
3. Chemical material safety data sheets.
B. Shop Drawings: Pretreatment and chemical treatm °:nr Asa 1uipment showing tanks, maintenance
space required, and piping connections to HVAC systems. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
C. Field quality- control test reports.
D. Other Informational Submittals:
Water Analysis: Illustrate water quality available at Project site.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. HVAC Water - Treatment Service Provider Qualifications: An experienced 14VAC water -
treatment service provider capable of analyzing water qualities, installing water - treatment
equipment, and applying water treatment as specified in this Section.
1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Scope of Maintenance Service: Provide chemicals and service program to maintain water
conditions required above to inhibit corrosion, scale formation, and biological growth for
heating, hot -water piping and equipment. Services and chemicals shall be provided for a period
of one year from date of Substantial Completion, and shall include the following:
1. Initial water analysis and HVAC water - treatment recommendations.
2. Startup assistance for Contractor to flush the systems, clean with detergents, and initially
fill systems with required chemical treatment prior to operation.
3. Periodic field service and consultation.
4. Customer report charts and log sheets.
5. Laboratory technical analysis.
6. Analyses and reports of all chemical items concerning safety and compliance with
government regulations.
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
232500-2
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Anderson Chemical Co, Inc.
2. Aqua -Chem, Inc.; Cleaver - Brooks Div.
3. Barclay Chemical Co.; Water Management, Inc.
4. GE Betz.
5. ONDEO Nalco Company.
6. Watcon, Inc.
2.2 MANUAL CHEMICAL -FEED EQUIPI +.
A. Bypass Feeders: Steel, with corrosion- resistant exterior coating, minimum 3 -1/2 -inch fill
opening in the top, and NPS 3/4 bottom inlet and top side outlet. Quarter turn or threaded fill
cap with gasket seal and diaphragm to lock the top on the feeder when exposed to system
pressure in the vessel.
1. Capacity: 5 gal..
2. Minimum Working Pressure: 125 psig.
2.3 CHEMICALS
A. Chemicals shall be as recommended by water - treatment system manufacturer that are
compatible with piping system components and connected equipment, and that can attain water
quality specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 WATER ANALYSIS
A. Perform an analysis of supply water to determine quality of water available at Project site.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install chemical application equipment on concrete slab, level and plumb. Maintain
manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices that require
servicing are accessible.
B. Install floor - mounting accessories and anchor to building structure.
C. Bypass Feeders: Install in closed hydronic systems, including hot -water heating, and equipped
with the following:
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
232500-3
1. Install bypass feeder in a bypass circuit around circulating pumps, unless otherwise
indicated on Drawings.
2. Install test - coupon assembly in bypass circuit around circulating pumps, unless otherwise
indicated on Drawings.
3. Install a gate or full -port ball isolation valves on inlet, outlet, and drain below feeder
inlet.
3.3
4. Install a swing check on inlet after the isolation valve.
CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. Make piping connection 'y -aeert HVAC water - treatment equipment and dissimilar -metal
piping with dielectric fittings. Dielectric fittings are specified in Division 23 Section "Common
Work Results for HVAC."
D. Install shutoff valves on HVAC water - treatment equipment inlet and outlet. Metal general -duty
valves are specified in Division 23 Section "General -Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."
3.4
CLEANING AND FLUSING PROCEDURE
A. Drain system after hydro- testing.
B. Refill system; close off any 1" or smaller lines (such as coils), and isolate heat exchangers,
chillers and boilers. Fill the rest of the system with water. Circulate for one hour. Ensure that all
values (expect those supplying smaller legs) are open and that no dead legs are present.
C. Add the cleaning solution (liquid alkaline cleaner).
D. Circulate for at least 8 hours, preferably overnight at full flow run number of pumps, temporary
if necessary expected during peak load operation. If possible, heat system to 120 °F during
circulation.
E. Bleed and feed the entire system immediately after the circulation pumps have been stopped.
Add water at the normal feed water location; bleed from the farthest point in the system. For
example, makeup water in the basement and bleed in the penthouse. Continue the bleed and
feed process until the bleed water parameters match the feed water parameters.
F
G.
Remove, inspect and clean all strainers located in the distribution piping.
Fill the entire system with water and bleed out any entrained air. Re- circulate for one hour.
H. Test the system to ensure cleanliness and stability. Required water quality is as follows:
1. Total Dissolved Soilds: <500 uS /cm
2. pH: <8.0
3. Soluble Iron: <0.5 ppm as Fe (optional)
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
232500 -4
4. Color: No visible color or suspended soils
1. Open all valves once water quality is acceptable in the above steps.
Fill entire system, including heat exchangers, boiler(s) and coils.
K. Repeat steps D -H for the entire closed loop system(s) if water quality parameters are not met.
- END OF SECTION -
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
232500 -5
SECTION 23 33 00 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers.
2. Manual volume dampers.
3. Control dampers.
4. Combination fire /smoke dampers.
5. Flange connectors.
6. Turning vanes.
7. Duct - mounted access doors.
8. Flexible connectors.
9. Duct accessory hardware.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and
attachments to other work.
1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction.
Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field
assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following:
a. Special fittings.
b. Manual volume damper installations.
C. Control damper installations.
d. Combination fire /smoke damper installations, including sleeves; and duct - mounted
access doors.
e. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
1.3
A.
B.
Operation and maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with
NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
Comply with AMCA 500 -D testing for damper rating.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 -1
PART2- PRODUCTS
u:
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise
indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, and other imperfections.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60 concealed in building; G90 exposed to weather.
2. Exposed- Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.
C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized -steel reinforcement where installed on
galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless -steel ducts.
D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4 -inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8 -inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.2 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS
A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
C. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
d. McGill AirFlow LLC.
C. METALAIRE, Inc.
f. Nailor Industries Inc.
g. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.
h. Ruskin Company.
i. Trox USA Inca
j. Vent Products Company, Inc.
2. Standard leakage rating.
3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
4. Frames:
a. Hat - shaped, galvanized -steel channels, 0.064 -inch minimum thickness.
b. Mitered and welded corners.
C. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
5. Blades:
a. Multiple or single blade.
b. Parallel- or opposed -blade design.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
2333 00-2
C. Stiffen damper blades for stability.
d. Galvanized - steel, 0.064 inch thick.
6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
7. Bearings:
a. Oil - impregnated bronze.
b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3 -inch wg or less shall have axles full
length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
B. Jackshaft:
1. Size: 1 -inch diameter.
2. Material: Galvanized -steel pipe rotating within pipe - bearing assembly mounted on
supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple- damper assemblies.
3. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in
multiple- damper assembly.
C. Damper Hardware:
1. Zinc - plated, die -cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32 -inch- thick zinc - puled r *'1 0,
and a 3/4 -inch hexagon locking nut.
2. Include center hole to suit damper operating -rod size.
3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
2.3 CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
2. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc,
3. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.
4. Duro Dyne Inc.
5. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
6. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
7. Lloyd Industries, Inc.
8. M &I Air Systems Engineering; Division of M &I Heat Transfer Products Ltd.
9. McGill AirFlow LLC.
10. METALAIRE, Inc.
11. Metal Form Manufacturing, Inc.
12. Nailor Industries Inc.
13. NCA Manufacturing, Inc.
14. Ruskin Company.
15. Vent Products Company, Inc.
16. Young Regulator Company.
B. Frames:
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 -3
1. Hat shaped.
2. Galvanized -steel channels, 0.064 inch thick.
3. Mitered and welded corners.
C. Blades:
1. Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 8 inches.
2. Parallel- and opposed -blade design.
3. Galvanized steel.
4. 0.064 inch thick.
5. Blade Edging: Closed -cell neoprene edging.
6. Blade Edging: Inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals.
D. Blade Axles: 1/2 -inch- diameter; galvanized steel; blade - linkage hardware of zinc - plated steel
and brass; ends sealed against blade bearings.
1. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
E. Bearings:
1. Oil - impregnated bronze.
2. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3 -inch wg or less shall have axles full length of
damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
3. Thrust bearings at each end of every blade.
2.4 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
2. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.
3. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
4. Nailer Industries Inc.
5. Ruskin Company.
6. Pottoroff.
B. Type: Static and dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 and UL 5555 by an NRTL.
C. Closing rating in ducts up to 4 -inch wg static pressure class and minimum 4000 -fpm velocity.
D. Fire Rating: 1 -1/2 hours.
E. Frame: Multiple -blade type; fabricated with roll- formed, 0.034 - inch - thick galvanized steel;
with mitered and interlocking corners.
F. Heat- Responsive Device: Electric resettable link and switch package, factory installed, rated.
G. Smoke Detector: Integral, factory wired for single -point connection.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 -4
H. Blades: Roll- formed, horizontal, interlocking, 0.034 -inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel. In
place of interlocking blades, use full- length, 0.034 -inch- thick, galvanized -steel blade
connectors.
I. Leakage: Class H.
J. Rated pressure and velocity to exceed design airflow conditions.
K. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- installed, 0.052 -inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel; length to suit
wall or floor application.
L. Damper Motors: two- position action.
M. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor
Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load
will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical
devices and connections specified in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control
for HVAC."
3. Permanent - Split- Capacitor or Shaded -Pole Motors: With oil- immersed and sealed gear
trains.
4. Spring -Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral- spring mechanism where indicated.
Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or
adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating
of 150 in. x lbf.
5. Electrical Connection: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz.
N. Accessories:
1. Auxiliary switches for signaling position indication.
2. Test and reset switches, damper mounted.
2.5 FLANGE CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2. Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings hic.
3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B. Description: Add -on or roll - formed, factory- fabricated, slide -on transverse flange connectors,
gaskets, and components.
C. Material: Galvanized steel.
D. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 -5
2.6 TURNING VANES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2. Duro Dyne Inc.
3. METALAIRE, Inc.
4. SEMCO Incorporated.
5. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B. Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars
perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
C. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible "; Figures 2 -3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 2 -4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
D. Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches wide and double wall for larger
dimensions.
2.7 DUCT - MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
2. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.
3. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
4. FlexmasterU.S.A., Inc.
5. Greenheck Fan Corporation.
6. McGill AirFlow LLC.
7. Nailor Industries Inc.
8. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.
9. Ventfabrics, Inc.
10. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B. Duct - Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible'; Figures 2 -10, "Duct Access Doors and Panels,"
and 2 -11, "Access Panels - Round Duct."
1. Door:
a. Double wall, rectangular.
b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct
pressure class.
C. Vision panel.
d. Hinges and Latches: 1 -by -1 -inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.
C. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend -over tabs and foam gaskets.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 -6
3. Number of Hinges and Locks:
a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks.
b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.
C. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 hiches: Three hinges and two compression latches.
d. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches: Four hinges and two compression
latches with outside and inside handles.
2.8 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Ductmate Industries, hie.
2. Duro Dyne Inc.
3. Ventfabrics, Inc.
4. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B. Materials: Flame- retardant or noncombustible fabrics.
C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.
D. Metal -Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 5 -3/4 inches wide attached to 2
strips of 2 -3/4 -inch- wide, 0.028 -inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032 - inch - thick
aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.
E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
I. Minimum Weight: 26 oz. /sq. yd..
2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.
3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
2.9 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap
and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to
suit duct - insulation thickness.
B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline
and grease.
2.10 DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS
A. Air duct smoke detectors shall be Firex®, item number 2650 -660 ionization type or approved
equal. The detectors shall be listed by Underwriters laboratories to verify operational
characteristics in accordance with U.L. 268A standard and local code requirements. The
detectors shall operate at and ambient temperature up to 155 °F and air velocities from 500 feet
per minute to 3,000 feet per minute. A custom fitted NEMA 3R rated Firex, Weatherproof
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 -7
Enclosure item number 590 shall be used for indoor or outdoor location that require protection
from environmental elements.
B. The detector housing shall be of 18 gauge steel construction with a special ABS -94VO high
strength plastic cover for maximum durability. Complete mechanical installation of the unit
must be performed without removal of detector cover to prevent dirt and debris from entering
unit. The plastic cover shall be clear to allow full visibility of the internal components for future
visual inspections.
C. Detector heads contained within the unit shall not require separate filters or screens with must
be maintained or replaced to insure that unit is fully operational. The housing shall accept either
ionization or photoelectric type detector heads as required.
D. Terminal connections shall be of screw type and be a minimum of 46 screw for easy wiring
during installation. Terminals shall be provided for remote pilot and alarm indication.
E. Visual indicators shall be mounted att �-mgle on the front housing for pilot and alarm status to
allow easy viewing from lower elevations during routine inspections. A manual test/reset switch
shall also be provided on the front of the detector for unit testing during standby conditions or
routine inspections.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts.
B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized -steel accessories in
galvanized - steel.
C. Install backdraft dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust
fan unless otherwise indicated.
D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend
from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with
hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.
1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.
E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
G. Install combination fire and smoke dampers according to UL listing.
H. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining
accessories and equipment at the following locations:
1. On both sides of duct coils.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 -8
2. Downstream from, control dampers and equipment.
3. Adjacent to and close enough to combination fire and smoke, to reset or reinstall fusible
links.
4. Elsewhere as indicated.
I. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.
J. Access Door Sizes:
1. One -Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches.
2. Two -Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.
3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches.
K. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.
L. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections:
1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.
2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be
performed.
3. Operate fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper
heat - response device is installed.
4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.
- END OF SECTION -
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 -9
SECTION 23 34 15 — MIXED FLOW FAN
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Belt Drive Mixed Flow hiline Fans
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. All sections, drawing plans, specifications and contract documents.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. AMCA 99, "Standards Handbook"
B. ANSI/AMCA Standard 204 -96, "Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans"
C. ANSI/AMCA Standard 210 -99, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic
Performance Rating"
D. AMCA Publication 211 -05, "Certified Ratings Programme — Product Rating Manual for
Fan Air Performance"
E. AMCA Standard 300 -96, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans"
F. AMCA Publication 311 -05, "Certified Ratings Programme — Product Rating Manual For
Fan Sound Performance"
G. AMBA - Method of Evaluating Load Ratings of Bearings ANSI -11 (r 1999).
H. OSHA guideline 1910.212 — General requirements for Machine Guarding. (www.osha.gov)
I. OSHA guideline 1926.300 — General requirements for safe operation and maintenance of
hand and power tools. (www.osha.gov)
J. OSHA guideline 1910.219 — General requirements for guarding safe use of mechanical
power transmission apparatus. (www.osha.gov)
K. UL Standard 705, "Power Ventilators"
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide dimensional drawings and product data on each mixed flow inlihe fan.
B. Provide fan curves for each fan at the specified operation point, with the flow, static
pressure and horsepower clearly plotted.
MDCED FLOW FAN
2334 15- 1
C. Provide outlet velocity of axial fans and both inlet and outlet sound power readings for the
eight octave bands.
D. Strictly adhere to QUALITY ASSURANCE requirements as stated in section 1.5 of this
specification
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Performance ratings: Conform to AMCA standard 211 and 311. Fans must be tested in
accordance with ANSI/AMCA Standard 210 -99 and AMCA Standard 300 -96 in an AMCA
accredited laboratory. Fans shall be certified to bear the AMCA seal for air and sound
performance.
B. Classification for Spark Resistant Construction Conform to AMCA 99.
C. Each fan shall be given an electronic vibration analysis in accordance with ANSI/AMCA
Standard 204 -96, while operating at the specified fan RPM. The vibration signatures shall
ba taken on each bearing in the horizontal, vertical and axial direction. The maximum
allowable fan vibration shall be 0.15 in /sec peak velocity, filter -in as measured at the fan
RPM. Report shall be provided at no charge to the customer upon request.
1.6 DELIVERY, SOTRAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and
packaging, with labels clearly indicating manufacturer, material, products included, and
location of installation.
B. Storage: Store materials in a dry area indoor, protected from damage, and in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Handling: Handle and lift fans in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Protect
materials and finishes during handling and installation to prevent damage. Follow all safety
warnings posted by the manufacturer.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Base fan performance at standard conditions (density 0.075 Lb /W).
B. Each fan shall be belt drive in AMCA arrangement 9.
C. Fans are to be equipped with lifting lugs.
D. After fabrication all carbon steel components shall be cleaned and chemically treated by a
phosphatizing process to insure proper removal of grease, oil, scale, etc. Fan shall then be
coated with a minimum of 2 -4 mils of Permatector (Polyester Urethane), electrostatically
applied and baked. Finish color shall be industrial gray. Coating must exceed 1,000 -hour
salt spray under ASTM B 117 test method.
MIXED FLOW FAN
233415 -2
2.2 FAN HOUSING AND OUTLET
A. Fan housing to be aerodynamically designed with high - efficiency inlet, engineered to
reduce incoming air turbulence.
B. Tubular fan housing shall be completely welded and coated with a minimum of 2 -4 mils of
Permatector (Polyester Urethane), electrostatically applied and baked. Finish color shall be
gray. No uncoated metal fan parts will be allowed.
C. Housing and bearing support shall be constructed of welded structural steel members to
prevent vibration and rigidly support the shaft and bearings.
D. All mixed flow housings shall include welded steel vanes to straighten airflow prior to
exiting the fan discharge.
E. Unit shall incorporate a universal mounting system that allows the fan to be mounted in
either vertical or horizontal configurations and field rotation of the motor position in 90
degree increments. Bearing life shall not be reduced below specified level in different
configurations. Units shall accommodate base mount or ceiling hung mounting without
structural modifications to the fan.
F. An access door shall be supplied for impeller inspection and service.
G. OSHA compliant belt guard or motor cover to be included to completely cover the motor
pulley and belt(s).
2.3 FAN IMPELLER
A. Fan impeller shall be mixed flow design. The impeller shall be electronically balanced both
statically and dynamically to balance grade G6.3 per ANSI S2.19.
B. Fan impeller shall be manufactured with continuously welded steel airfoils and coated with
a minimum of 2 -4 mils of Permatector (Polyester Urethane), electrostatically applied and
baked. Finish color shall be industrial gray
C. The wheel and fan inlet shall be carefully matched and shall have precise running tolerances
for maximum performance and operating efficiency.
2.4 FAN MOTORS AND DRIVE
A. Motors shall meet or exceed EPACT (Energy Policy ACT) efficiencies. Motors to be
NEMA T- frame, 1800 or 3600 RPM, Open Drip Proof (ODP) with a 1.15 service factor.
B. Drive belts and sheaves shall be sized for 150% of the fan operating brake horsepower, and
shall be readily and easily accessible for service, if required.
C. Fan shaft to be turned and polished steel that is sized so the first critical speed is at least
25% over the maximum operating speed for each pressure class.
D. Fan shaft bearings shall be Air Handling Quality, bearings shall be heavy -duty grease
lubricated, self - aligning or roller pillow block type.
MIXED FLOW FAN
233415 -3
E. Air Handling Quality bearings to be designed with low swivel torque to allow the outer race
of the bearing to pivot or swivel within the cast pillow block. Bearings shall be 100% tested
for noise and vibration by the manufacturer. Bearings shall be 100% tested to insure the
inner race diameter is within tolerance to prevent vibration.
F. Bearings shall be selected for a basic rating fatigue life (L-10) of 80,000 hours at maximum
operating speed for each pressure class (Average Life or (L -50) of 400,000 hours).
G. Bearings shall be fixed to the fan shaft using concentric mounting locking collars, which
reduce vibration, increase service life, and improve serviceability. Bearings that use set
screws shall not be allowed.
H. Bearings shall have extended lube lines with Zerk fittings to allow for lubrication.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive fans. Notify the Engineer of conditions that would adversely
affect installation or subsequent utilization and maintenance of fans. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fans systems as indicated on the contract drawings.
B. Install fans in accordance with manufacturer instructions.
- END OF SECTION -
MDXED FLOW FAN
233415 -4
SECTION 23 52 33 - FINNED WATER -TUBE BOILERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes gas - fired, copper finned -tube hydronic heating boilers
B. Related Sections
1. Building Services Piping —Division 23 2100
2. HVAC Instrumentation and Controls — Division 23 09 00
3. Electrical —Division 23 09 33
1.2 REFERENCES ,
A. ANSI Z21.13 /CSA 4.9
B. ASME, BPV Section IV
C. 2006 UMC, Section 11 07 .6
D. ANSI/ASHRAE 15 -1994, Section 8.13.6
E. National Fuel Gas Code, ANSI Z223.1/ NFPA 54
F. I =B =R
G. National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70
H. ASME CSD -1, 2009 (when required)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data sheet (including dimensions, rated capacities, shipping weights, accessories)
B. Wiring diagram
C. Warranty information
D. Installation and operating instructions
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements
1. ANSI Z21.13 /CSA 4.9
2. Local and national air quality regulations for low NOx (< 20 PPM NOx emissions) boilers
FINNED WATER -TUBE BOILERS
23 5233- 1
B. Certifications
1. CSA
2. ASME H Stamp and National Board Listed
I9. 1 1y/ INMIXIr•/
A. Limited one -year warranty from date of installation
B. Limited twenty-year thermal shock warranty
C. Limited ten -year closed- system heat exchanger warranty
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Raypak,Inc.
1. Contact: 2151 Eastman Ave., Oxnard, CA 93030; Telephone: (805) 278 -5300;
Fax: (800) 872 -9725; Web site: www.raypak.com
2. Product: Hi Delta copper finned -tube hydronic boiler(s)
2.2 BOILERS
A. General
1. The boiler(s) shall be fired with natural gas at a rated input of 650,000 BTU/hr.
2. The boiler(s) shall be CSA tested and certified with a minimum thermal efficiency of 84
percent at full fire.
3. The boiler(s) shall be ASME inspected and stamped and National Board registered for 16(
PSIG working pressure, complete with a Manufacturer's Data Report.
4. The boiler(s) shall have a floor loading of 65 lbs. /square foot or less.
B. Heat Exchanger
1. The heat exchanger shall be of a single -bank, horizontal -grid design with eight integral
copper- finned tubes, each end of which is rolled into an ASME boiler - quality steel tube sheet.
2. The heat exchanger shall be sealed to 160 PSIG rated cast -iron, glass -lined headers with high
temperature silicone "O" rings.
3. The low water volume heat exchanger shall be explosion -proof on the water side and shall
carry a twenty-year warranty against thermal shock.
4. The headers shall be secured to the tube sheet by stud bolts with flange nuts to permit
inspection and maintenance without removal of external piping connections.
5. The boiler(s) shall be capable of operating at inlet water temperatures as low as 105 °F without
condensation.
6. The boiler(s) shall be designed to accommodate field changes of either left or right hand
plumbing and electrical while leaving the tube bundle in place.
C. Burners
FINNED WATER -TUBE BOILERS
23 5233-2
1. The tubular burners shall have multiport radial gas orifices, punched ports and slots, be
capable of quiet ignition and extinction without flashback at the orifice, and be manufactured
from corrosion- resistant, titanium- stabilized stainless steel with low expansion coefficient.
2. The burners will be supplied with a fan - assisted, clean burning, and highly efficient fuel -air
mixture.
D. Ignition Control System
1. The boiler(s) shall be equipped with a 100 percent safety shutdown system.
2. The ignition shall be Hot Surface Ignition type with full flame rectification by remote sensing
separate from the ignition source, with a three -try- for - ignition sequence, to ensure consistent
operation.
3. The igniter will be located away from the water inlet to protect the device from condensation
during startup.
4. The ignition control module shall include an LED that indicates six (6) individual diagnostic
flash codes.
5. Two external viewing ports shall be provided, permitting vi of observation of burner
operation.
E. Gas Train
1. The boiler(s) shall have a firing/leak test valve and pressure test valve as required by CSD -1.
2. The boiler(s) shall have dual- seated main gas valve(s).
3. Gas control trains shall have a redundant safety shut -off feature, main gas regulator, shut -off
cock and plugged pressure tapping to meet the requirements of ANSI Z21.13 /CSA 4.9.
F. Boiler Control
1. The following safety controls shall be provided:
a. High limit control
b. Flow switch, mounted and wired
c. 125 PSIG ASME pressure relief valve, piped by the installer to an approved drain
d. Temperature and pressure gauge
2. The boiler(s) shall be equipped with an energy- saving pump relay, mounted and wired, which
automatically shuts off the boiler pump at a set period after boiler shut -down (adjustable for
five or ten minutes) to avoid standby losses associated with constant pump operation.
G. Firing Mode
1. Provide staged firing control of the gas input to the boiler.
H. Boiler Diagnostics
1. Provide external LED panel displaying the following boiler status /faults:
a. Power on — Blue
b. Call for heat — Amber
c. Flow — Green
d. Stages 1 and 2 — Green
e. Fan 1 proven — Green
f. Ignition fault — Red
FINNED WATER -TUBE BOILERS
23 5233-3
g. Safety fault — Red
2. Provide internal circuit board indicating the following safety faults by a 2 -line, 20- character
LCD display:
a. System status
b. Manual reset high limit
c. Blocked vent
d. Flow switch
e. Air pressure
f. Factory option
g. External interlock
h. Ignition lock -out
i. Controller alarm (optional)
3. A Central Point Wiring board with diagnostic LED's indicating the status of each relay.
4. Provide ignition module indicating the following flash codes by LED signal and displayed on
LCD display:
a. 1 flash —
low air pressure
b. 2 flashes
— flame in the combustion chamber w/o CFH
c. 3 flashes
— ignition lock -out (flame failure)
d. 4 flashes
— low hot surface igniter current
e. 5 flashes
— low 24VAC
f 6 flashes
— internal fault (replace module)
I. Combustion Chamber: The lightweight, high - temperature, multi - piece, interlocking ceramic fiber
combustion chamber liner shall be sealed to reduce standby radiation losses, reducing jacket losses
and increasing unit efficiency.
J. Venting
1. When routed vertically, the boiler's flue material and size shall be in accordance with the
National Fuel Gas Code, ANSI Z223.1/NFPA54 latest edition (Category I).
K. Cabinet
1. The corrosion - resistant galvanized steel jackets shall be finished with a baked -on epoxy
powder coat which is suitable for outdoor installation, applied prior to assembly for complete
coverage, and shall incorporate louvers in the outer panels to divert air past heated surfaces.
2. The boiler(s), if located on a combustible floor, shall not require a separate combustible floor
base.
3. The boiler(s) shall have the option of venting the flue products either through the top or the
back of the unit.
4. Combustion air intake shall be on the left side of the cabinet, right side optional.
L. Operating Controls
1. The boiler(s) shall feature an optional two -stage digital controller with adjustable outdoor
reset, mounted and wired.
2. Water and air temperature sensors shall be shipped loose for field installation by installing
contractor.
FINNED WATER -TUBE BOILERS
23 5233-4
M. Boiler Pump - Refer to Equipment Schedule
N. TruSealTM Direct Vent
1. The boiler(s) shall meet safety standards for direct vent equipment as noted by: the 2006 UMC
section 1107.6; ASHRAE 15 -1994, section 8.13.6; and ANSI Z21.13.
O. Cold Water Start System
1. The boiler(s) shall be configured with a cold water start automatic proportional bypass system
that ensures the boiler will experience inlet temperatures in excess of 105 °F in less than 7
minutes to avoid damaging condensation. The unit will automatically shut down if the inlet
temperature is not achieved within the 7 minute time frame.
2. The cold water start system shall be configured with a modulating three -way valve that is
controlled by a system- matched PID controller. The PID controller temperature sensor shall be
located in the inlet header of the boiler.
3. The control shall have a temperature setting dial located on the face of the board. The
temperature range of the dial shall he-1 45 °F to 120 °F. The PID Logic shall be capable of
limiting system overshoot to a maximum of 10 °F on initial start-up or call- for -heat.
4. The cold water start system shall be completely wired and mounted at the factory.
5. The control shall have the following diagnostic LED's:
a. Call for heat
b. Start-up mode
c. Inlet temperature error
d. Sensor out of range
6. The controller shall have alarm contacts.
P. Low Gas Supply Pressure Manifold
1. The boiler(s) shall be CSA certified for full -input operation down to 4.0" WC dynamic nnict
gas supply pressure.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. The boiler(s) shall be completely assembled, wired, and fire- tested prior to shipment from the
factory.
B. The boiler(s) shall be furnished with the sales order, ASME Manufacturer's Data Report,
inspection sheet, wiring diagram, rating plate and Installation and Operating Manual.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Must comply with:
1. Local, state, provincial, and national codes, laws, regulations and ordinances
2. National Fuel Gas Code, ANSI Z223.1/NFPA 54 —latest edition
3. National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70 — latest edition
4. Standard for Controls and Safety Devices for Automatically Fired Boilers, ANSUASME CSD-
FINNED WATER -TUBE BOILERS
235233 -5
1, when required
5. Canada only: CAN /CSA B149 Installation Code and CSA C22.1 CEC Part I
6. Manufacturer's installation instructions, including required service clearances and venting
guidelines
B. Manufacturer's representative to verify proper and complete installation.
3.2 START -UP
A. Shall be performed by Raypak factory- trained personnel.
B. Test during operation and adjust if necessary:
1. Safeties (2.2 - F)
2. Operating Controls (2.3)
3. Static and full load gas supply pressure
4. Gas manifold and blower air pressure
C. Submit copy of start-up report to Architect and Engineer.
3.3 TRAINING
A. Provide factory- authorized service representative to train maintenance personnel on procedures
and schedules related to start -up, shut -down, trouble shooting, servicing, and preventive
maintenance.
B. Schedule training at least seven days in advance.
- END OF SECTION -
FINNED WATER -TUBE BOILERS
23 5233-6
SECTION 23 64 23 - SCROLL CHILLER
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Microprocessor controlled, air - cooled liquid chiller utilizing scroll compressors, low sound
fans, electronic expansion valve, optional hydronic pump system, and fluid storage tank.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Unit shall be rated in accordance with AMU Standard 550/590, latest edition (U.S.A.) and all
units shall be ASLIRAE 90.1 compliant.
B. Unit construction shall comply with ASHRAE 15 Safety Code, UL latest edition, and ASME
applicable codes (U.S.A. codes).
C. Unit shall be manufactured in a facility registered to ISO 9001:2000 Manufacturing Quality
Standard.
D. Unit shall be full load run tested at the factory.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Unit controls shall be capable of withstanding 150 F (66 C) storage temperatures in the control
compartment.
B. Unit shall be stored and handled per unit manufacturer's recommendations.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT
A. General:
Factory assembled, single -piece chassis, air - cooled liquid chiller. Contained within the
unit cabinet shall be all factory wiring, piping, controls, refrigerant charge (R- 410A), and
special features required prior to field start-up.
B. Unit Cabinet:
1. Frame shall be of heavy -gage, galvanized steel.
2. Exterior panels shall be galvanized steel with a baked enamel powder or pre - painted
finish.
SCROLL CHILLER
236423 -1
3. Cabinet shall be capable of withstanding 500 -hour salt spray test in accordance with the
ASTM (U.S.A.) 13- 117 standard.
C. Fans:
1. Condenser fans shall be direct - driven, 9 -blade airfoil cross- section, reinforced polymer
construction, shrouded -axial type, and shall be statically and dynamically balanced with
inherent corrosion resistance.
2. Fan operation shall allow reduced sound levels during scheduled unoccupied operating
periods. Manufacturers without unoccupied reduced sound capability shall submit 1/3
octave band data and sound power data as measured according to AMU 370 as
confirmation of unit sound characteristics.
3. Air shall be discharged vertically upward.
4. Fans shall be protected by coated steel wire safety guards.
D. Compressor /Compressor Assembly:
1. Fully hermetic, direct - drive, scroll type compressors.
2. Compressor motors shall be cooled by refrigerant gas passing through motor windings
and shall have either internal line break thermal and current overload protection or
external current overload modules with compressor temperature sensors.
3. Compressors shall be mounted on rubber in shear vibration isolators.
4. Staging of compressors shall provide unloading capability. Digital compressor unloading
control shall be available as an option.
E. Cooler:
1. Cooler shall be rated for a refrigerant working -side pressure of 505 psig (3482 kPa) on
sizes 010 -025 and 565 psig (3896 kPa) on sizes 030 -060 and shall be tested for a
maximum water -side pressure of 300 psig (2068 kPa) or 150 psig (1034 kPa) when
optional hydronic package is installed.
2. Shall be single -pass, ANSI type 316 stainless steel, brazed plate construction.
3. Shell shall be insulated with 3 /4 -in. (19 mm) closed -cell, polyvinyl- chloride foam with a
maximum K factor of 0.28.
4. Shall incorporate 2 independent refrigerant circuits on sizes 035 to 060; sizes 010 to 030
shall have one independent refrigerant circuit.
5. Cooler shall have an optional factory- installed heater, to protect cooler from ambient
temperature freeze down to —20 F ( -29 C).
6. Unit shall be provided with a factory- installed flow switch.
7. All connections shall use standard Victaulic -type fittings.
F. Condenser:
1. Coil shall be air - cooled Novation® heat exchanger technology with microchannel
(MCHX) coils and shall have a series of flat tubes containing a series of multiple, parallel
flow microchannels layered between the refrigerant manifolds. Coils shall consist of a
two -pass arrangement. Coil construction shall consist of aluminum alloys for fins, tubes,
and manifolds in combination with a corrosion - resistant coating.
2. Tubes shall be cleaned, dehydrated, and sealed.
3. Assembled condenser coils shall be leak tested and pressure tested at 656 psig (4522
kPa).
SCROLL CHILLER
236423-2
G. Refrigeration Components:
Refrigerant circuit components shall include filter drier, moisture indicating sight glass,
electronic expansion device, and complete operating charge of both refrigerant R -410A
and compressor oil.
H. Controls, Safeties, and Diagnostics:
Unit controls shall include the following minimum components:
a. Microprocessor with non - volatile memory. Battery backup system shall not be
accepted.
b. Single terminal block for power and controls.
C. Control transformer to serve all controllers, relays, and control components.
d. ON /OFF control switch.
e. Replaceable solid -state controllers.
f Pressure sensors shall be installed to measure suction and discharge pressure for
each circuit. Thermistors shall be installed to measure cooler entering and leaving
fluid temperatures, outdoor ambient temperature, and suction temperature.
Provision for field installation of accessory sensor to measure compressor return
gas temperature.
2. Unit controls shall include the following functions:
a. Automatic circuit lead/lag for dual circuit chillers.
b. Hermetic scroll compressors are maintenance free and protected by an auto -
adaptive control that minimizes compressor wear.
C. Capacity control based on leaving chilled fluid temperature and compensated by
rate of change of return-fluid temperature with temperature set point accuracy to
0.1° F (0.06° Q.
d. Limiting the chilled fluid temperature pulldown rate at start-up to an adjustable
range of 0.2° F to 2° F (0.11° C to 1.1° C) per minute to prevent excessive demand
spikes at start-up.
C. Seven -day time schedule.
f Leaving chilled fluid temperature reset from return fluid and outside air
temperature.
g. Chilled water pump startistop control and primary/standby sequencing to ensure
equal pump run time.
h. Dual chiller control for parallel chiller applications without addition of hardware
modules and control panels (additional thermistors and wells are required).
i. Timed maintenance scheduling to signal maintenance activities for pumps,
condenser coil cleanings, strainer maintenance and user - defined maintenance
activities.
j. Boiler enable signal to initiate system heating mode.
k. Low ambient protection to energize cooler and hydronic system heaters.
1. Periodic pump start to ensure pump seals are properly maintained during off-
season periods.
m. Single step demand limit control activated by remote contact closure.
n. Nighttime sound mode to reduce the sound of the machine by a user - defined
schedule.
SCROLL CHILLER
23 6423-3
Diagnostics
a. The control panel shall include, as standard, a scrolling marquee display capable of
indicating the safety lockout condition by displaying a code for which an
explanation may be scrolled at the display.
b. Information included for display shall be:
1) Compressor lockout.
2) Loss of charge.
3) Low fluid flow.
4) Cooler freeze protection.
5) Cooler set point.
6) Chilled water reset parameters.
7) Thermistor and transducer malfunction.
8) Entering and leaving -fluid temperature.
9) Compressor suction temperature.
10) Evaporator and condenser pressure.
11) System refrigerant temperatures.
12) Chiller run hours.
13) Compressor run hours.
14) Compressor number of starts.
15) Low superheat.
16) Time of day:
a) Display module, in conjunction with the microprocessor, must also be
capable of displaying the output (results) of a service test. Service test
shall verify operation of every switch, thermistor, fan, and
compressor before chiller is started.
b) Diagnostics shall include the ability to review a list of the 20 most
recent alarms with clear language descriptions of the alarm event.
Display of alarm codes without the ability for clear language
descriptions shall be prohibited.
c) An alarm history buffer shall allow the user to store no less than 20
alarm events with clear language descriptions, time and date stamp
event entry.
d) The chiller controller shall include multiple connection ports for
communicating with the local equipment network, the Carrier
Comfort Network® (CCN) system and access to chiller control
functions from any point on the chiller.
e) The control system shall allow software upgrade without the need for
new hardware modules.
4. Safeties:
a. Unit shall be equipped with thermistors and all necessary components in
conjunction with the control system to provide the unit with the following
protections:
1) Loss of refrigerant charge.
2) Reverse rotation.
3) Low chilled fluid temperature.
SCROLL CHILLER
236423-4
4) Thermal overload.
5) High pressure.
6) Electrical overload.
7) Loss of phase.
8) Factory pump motors shall have external overcurrent protection.
I. Operating Characteristics:
1. Unit shall be capable of operating down to —20 F ( -29 C) on size 010 and 015 units, 45 F
(7 C) on size 018 -030 units, and 32 F (0° C) on size 035 -060 units as standard.
2. Unit shall be capable of starting and running at outdoor ambient temperatures up to 120 F
(50 C) for all sizes. Unit shall additionally be able to stay online when running with a 125
F (52 C) ambient temperature.
3. Unit shall be capable of starting up with 95 F (35 C) entering fluid temperature to the
cooler.
J. Motors:
Condenser -fan motors shall be totally enclosed single- speed, 3 -phase type with
permanently lubricated bearings and Class F insulation (except MotormasterO V control
motors which shall be open type and shall have Class B insulation).
K. Electrical Requirements:
1. Unit/module primary electrical power supply shall enter the unit at a single location.
2. Unit shall operate on 3 -phase power at the voltage shown in the equipment schedule.
3. Control points shall be accessed through terminal block.
4. Unit shall be shipped with factory control and power wiring installed.
L. Chilled Water Circuit:
1. Chilled water circuit shall be rated for 300 psig (2068 kPa). Units with optional pump
package are rated for 150 psig (1034 kPa) working pressure.
2. Solid -state flow monitor with integral relay shall be factory installed and wired.
3. Brass body strainer with 40 mesh screen and ball type blow down.
4. Optional hydronic package:
a. Field pipe connections shall be copper Victualic type.
b. Optional single or primary/stand -by operation pump systems. Dual pump systems
shall have a pump discharge check valve.
C. Pumps shall be single stage design, capable of being serviced without disturbing
piping connections.
1) Pump casing shall be of class 30 cast iron.
2) The impeller shall be of cast bronze, closed type, dynamically balanced,
keyed to the shaft and secured by locking cap screw.
3) The hydronic kit will be provided with a flush line connection to ensure
lubrication at the seal face and allow for positive venting of the seal
chamber.
4) Pump shall be rated for 150 psig (1034 kPa) working pressure.
SCROLL CHILLER
236423-5
5) The pump case shall have gage tappings at the suction and discharge nozzles
and include drain ports.
6) Motors shall totally enclosed 3 -phase type with grease lubricated ball
bearings.
7) Each pump shall be factory tested per Hydraulic Institute Standards.
8) Pump motors shall be VFD (variable frequency drive) compatible.
d. Fluid expansion tank shall be factory installed within the chiller cabinet insulates,
pre - charged and rated for a maximum working pressure of 150 psig (1034 kPa).
e. Water pressure taps (2) shall be factory installed across the cooler and rated for
150 psig (1034 kPa).
f. Balancing valve shall be factory installed to set flow gage ports shall be factory
installed and rated for 300 prig (2068 kPa).
g. Hydronic assembly shall have factory supplied electric freeze protection to —20 F
( -29 C) when optional heaters are used.
h. Piping shall be type -L seamless copper tubing.
M. Special Features
Security Grilles/Hail Guards:
a. Unit shall be supplied with factory or field - installed, louvered, sheet metal panels
which securely fasten to the chiller and provide condenser coil protection against
hail and other physical damage.
2. Vibration Isolation:
a. Vibration isolation pads shall be supplied for field installation at unit mounting .
points. Pads shall help to reduce vibration transmission into the occupied space.
- END OF SECTION -
SCROLL CHILLER
236423-6
SECTION 23 73 13 - INDOOR CENTRAL- STATION AIR - HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
Variable- air - volume, multizone air - handling units.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Air - handling units shall withstand the. effects of earthquake motions
determined according to ASCE /SEI 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each air- handling unit indicated.
1. Unit dimensions and weight.
2. Cabinet material, metal thickness, finishes, insulation, and accessories.
3. Fans:
a. Certified fan - performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
b. Certified fan-sound power ratings.
C. Fan construction and accessories.
d. Motor ratings, electrical characteristics, and motor accessories.
4. Certified coil - performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated.
5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
6. Filters with performance characteristics.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Source quality - control reports.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL- STATION AIR - HANDLING UNITS
2373 13- 1
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation of air -
handling units and components.
C. ARI Certification: Air - handling units and their components shall be factory tested according to
ARI 430, "Central- Station Air - Handling Units," and shall be listed and labeled by ARI.
D. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and
Equipment' and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
E. ASHRAE /IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90. 1,
Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air - Conditioning."
F. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis -of- Design Product Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Cascade
2. Alliance
3. Energy Labs.
2.2 UNIT CONSTRUCTION
A. The following sections describe in detail construction requirements for the unit base, cabinet,
access doors, insulation and paint finish. Unit shall be built for indoor installation. !00%
knockdown construction as follow:
1. Fully knock down
a. W/o caulking; include caulking for field assembly
b. Split base
C. Fan to be removed from the base
1) Knock down fan construction
d. Unit to:
1) Disassemble as required
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL- STATION AIR - HANDLING UNITS
23 73 13-2
2)
Field assemble the unit
3)
Pull wires
4)
Rebalance the fan
2. Individual coils to be removable from the side door
2.3 UNIT CASINGS
A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings:
I. The unit housing side and roof panels shall be constructed of 0.063" thk aluminum and
shall utilize a standing seam modular panel type construction.
2. The panels shall be caulked and attached to each other, to the roof, and the floor using
nuts and bolts. Drive screw attachment is not acceptable.
3. All panels shall be removable.
4. All seams shall be sealed with a"�zlic latex sealant prior to assembling the panels and
after completion of the assembly.
5. All floor openings shall have a steel -frame and 16 gauge flange around the entire
perimeter of opening for duct connection.
B. Casing Insulation and Adhesive:
1. Insulation shall be 2" thick, 3 lbs per cubic foot density, neoprence coasted fiberglass to
cover all walls, ceilings and under floors. Insulation shall meet NFPA -90A smoke and
flame spread requirements.
2. There shall be no raw edges of insulation exposed to the airstream.
C. Access Doors:
Door Fabrication: Formed and reinforced, single- or double -wall and insulated panels of
same materials and thicknesses as casing.
2. Access Doors:
a. Door hinges and latches shall be easily adjustable, without the use of the shims or
special tools, to allow for a tight seal between the door and the doorframe as the
gasketing material compresses over time.
b. The door hinge design shall allow for field modification of door swing and doors
shall be easily removable.
C. Provide door detail drawing with submittal package.
D. Condensate Drain Pans:
1. Drain pans shall be constructed from 16- gauge, 304 stainless steel. Galvanized stell drain
pans are not acceptable.
2. The drain pan shall be insulated with 2.0 ", 3 # density insulation to prevent condensation
under the drain pan. Insulation shall be protected with a 20 -gaige galvanized steel liner.
3. Drain pans must be sized such that the entire coil, including headers and return bends, are
inside the drain pan.
4. Drain pans must slope in two directions so there is no standing water in drain pan.
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL- STATION AIR - HANDLING UNITS
237313 -3
5. Stainless steel condensate connection shall be provided on one side of the unit.
6. The coil drain pan is designed to prevent immersion of the coil in condensate and allow
for complete cleaning of drain pan beneath the coils.
E. Unit Base each unit shall be constructed on a base fabricated with formed metal channel.
1. The unit floor shall be fabricated of 0.063" thk aluminum. The floor shall be supported
by structural steel members. Max spacing of floor support shall be 24" centers.
2. These supporting members shall be welded to other members for maximum strength.
3. Floor skin shall be supplied with standing seams and drive cleats to maintain water and
airtight seal.
4. The flooring shall be spot welded to the members below —no penetrations thm the floor
skin.
5. Welds shall be below the floor and spaced no greater than 6" on center.
6. Fans coils and major components shall be supported with structured steel members.
2.4 INTERNAL COMPONENTS
A. Fan Assembly
1. Plenum fan assemblies be arrangement one or four. Arrangement three plenum fans are
not acceptable because they are less efficient and generate more noise.
2. The air handling unit manufacturer, for the purpose of sole source responsibility, shall
manufacture all fan assemblies.
3. Fan Wheels supplied shall be in accordance with AMCA stand 210.
4. Fan performance shall be based on tests run in an AMCA certified laboratory and
administered in accordance with AMCA Standard 210.
5. Fan performance tests shall be taken with fans running inside the cabinet to include any
affects from the unit cabinet and other internal components.
6. Fans shall bear AMCA seal for air and sound.
B. Fan Base, Spring Isolation, and Support Framing
1. Mount fan and motor on an internal, fully welded, rigid structural steel base.
2. Base shall be free- floating at all four corners on spring type isolators with seismic
earthquake restraints
3. The fan assembly shall be isolated from the cabinet by steel springs with minimum
deflection of 2.0" or as indicated on the schedule. The spring isolators shall be mounted
to structural steel members.
4. All isolators shall be rated for zone 4 seismic requirements.
5. The spring isolators shall be mounted on a waffle pad for vibration isolation.
C. Balancing
The fan shaft shall be sized not to exceed 75% of the first critical speed for the maximum
RPM of the fan Class specified. The critical speed will refer to the top of the speed range
of the fans' AMCA class. The lateral static deflection shall bot exceed 0.003" per foot of
the length of the shaft. Fans shall be balanced to ISO standard G6.3.
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL- STATION AIR - HANDLING UNITS
237313 -4
2. A copy of the above balance test data for this project showing calculations for deflection
and critical speed of the shaft and wheel assembly shall be submitted to the engineer and
a copy forwarded to the Owner.
D. Motors and Drive
1. Furnish premium - efficiency open drip proof, NEMA frame, ball bearing type motors,
with grease lubricated bearings and alamite fittings.
2. Horsepower's as shown on schedule are minimum allowable.
3. The motor shall be mounted on an adjustable slide rail motor base.
4. The fan motors shall be factory wired to and external junction box with flexible conduit
of adequate length so that it will not have any affect on the vibration isolation.
E. Coils
1. Chilled water coils shall be of the plate fin extended surface type.
2. Tubes shall be 5/8" outside diameter seamless copper with a 0.02" minimum wall
thickness.
3. Each coil shall have individually replaceable return bends of 0.025 wall thickness of both
sides of the coil. Coils incorporating a "hairpin" type design are not acceptable.
4. Tubes shall be expanded into the fin collars to provide a permanent mechanical bond.
5. The secondary surface shall be formed of 0.006" aluminum fins and shall be spaced not
closer than 12 fins per inch with integral spacing collars that cover the tube surface.
6. Headers shall be non - ferrous seamless copper, outside the air stream and provided with
brazd copper mail pin connections. Drain and vent tubes shall be extended to the exterior
of the air handling unit.
7. Cooling coil casings shall be of minimum 16- gauge, 304 stainless steel with double
formed 1 -1/4" stacking flanges and 1 /4" flanges on the side plates. All other coil casing
shall be of 16 -gauge galvanized steel.
8. Tube holes raw sheet metal edges are not acceptable.
9. Reinforcing shall be furnished so that the unsupported length is not over 60 ".
10. All coil assemblies shall be tested under water at 300 -psi and rated for 150 -psi working
pressure.
11. Headers are to be located inside the cabinet casing with only the pipe connections
extending through the casing.
12. All sides of coils shall be carefully blanked off to ensure all air passes through the coil.
13. Intermediate condensate pans are to be furnished on multiple coil units and single coils
greater than 48" high.
14. The pans shall be 16Ga. 304 stainless steel and drain to the main drain pan through
copper downspouts.
15. All water coils shall be rated in accordance with ARI Standard 410.
F. Filters
1. Filter sections shall be fabricated as part of the air - handling unit.
2. Filters shall be arranged for upstream, downstream, or side loading as shown on the
drawings.
3. Provide filter- holding frames to accommodate scheduled filters.
4. Filters frames shall be 16 Ga.304 stainless steel and shall be welded to reduce leakage of
air through corners.
5. Factory install at each filter bank Dwyer Magnehelic "Series 2000" pressure gauge
complete with static pressure tips, hardware and fittings.
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL- STATION AIR - HANDLING UNITS
23 73 13-5
G. Air Flow Measuring Stations
1. Fans shall be supplied with a flow measuring system that is proportional to airflow.
2. The flow measuring station and a flow transmitter shall be factory mounted.
3. The flow measuring station shall consist of pressure taps located in the inlet cone of each
fan.
4. Provide a gauge with CFM scale on external site of the fan sections, which indicates the
fan volume.
H. Paint Finish
1. After final assembly the unit exterior shall be coated with an industrial grade, high solids,
and polyurethane paint.
2. In addition, all fan bases, springs and structural steel supports shall be coated with the
same finish.
3. The paint system shall meeting ASTM B 117 Salt spray test for a minimum of 2000 hours
in a 5% solution.
I. Variable Frequency Controllers:
1. Description: NEMA ICS 2, IGBT, PWM, VFC; listed and labeled as a complete unit and
arranged to provide variable speed of an NEMA MG 1, Design B, 3 -phase induction
motor by adjusting output voltage and frequency.
2. Output Rating: 3- phase; 6 to 60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency throughout
voltage range.
3. Unit Operating Requirements:
a. Input ac voltage tolerance of 208 V, plus or minus 5 percent.
b. Input frequency tolerance of 50/60 Hz, plus or minus 6 percent.
C. Minimum Efficiency: 96 percent at 60 Hz, full load.
d. Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 96 percent.
e. Overload Capability: 1.1 times the base load current for 60 seconds; 2.0 times the
base load current for 3 seconds.
f. Starting Torque: 100 percent of rated torque or as indicated.
g. Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 1 percent.
4. Isolated control interface to allow controller to follow control signal over an 11:1 speed
range.
5. Internal Adjustability Capabilities:
a. Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm.
b. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm.
C. Acceleration: 2 to a minimum of 22 seconds.
d. Deceleration: 2 to a minimum of 22 seconds.
e. Current Limit: 50 to a minimum of 110 percent of maximum rating.
6. Self - Protection and Reliability Features:
a. Input transient protection by means of surge suppressors.
b. Undervoltage and overvoltage trips; inverter overtemperature, overload, and
overcurrent trips.
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL- STATION AIR - HANDLING UNITS
23 73 13-6
C. Adjustable motor overload relays capable of NEMA ICS 2, Class 20 performance.
d. Notch filter to prevent operation of the controller- motor -load combination at
natural frequency of the combination.
C. Instantaneous line -to -line and line -to- ground overcurrent trips.
f. Loss -of -phase protection.
g. Reverse -phase protection.
h. Short- circuit protection.
i. Motor overtemperature fault.
7. Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempts three restarts after controller fault or on return of
power after an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction.
Bidirectional autospeed search shall be capable of starting into rotating loads spinning in
either direction and returning motor to set speed in proper direction, without damage to
controller, motor, or load.
8. Power - Interruption Protection: To prevent motor from re- energizing after a power
interruption until motor has stopped.
9. Torque Boost: Automatically varies starting and continuous torque to at least 1.5 times
the minimum torque to ensure high - starting torque and increased torque at slow speeds.
10. Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fall -back based
on output frequency for temperature protection of self - cooled, fan- ventilated motors at
slow speeds.
11. Door - mounted LED status lights shall indicate the following conditions:
a. Power on.
b. Run.
C. Overvoltage.
d. Line fault.
e. Overcurrent.
f. External fault.
12. Panel - Mounted Operator Station: Start-stop and auto -manual selector switches with
manual - speed - control potentiometer and elapsed time meter.
13. Meters or digital readout devices and selector switch, mounted flush in controller door
and connected to indicate the following controller parameters:
a. Output frequency (Hertz).
b. Motor speed (rpm).
C. Motor status (running, stop, fault).
d. Motor current (amperes).
e. Motor torque (percent).
f. Fault or alarming status (code).
g. Proportional - integral- derivative (PID) feedback signal (percent).
h. DC -link voltage (volts direct current).
i. Set -point frequency (Hertz).
j. Motor output voltage (volts).
14. Control Signal Interface:
a. Electric Input Signal Interface: A minimum of 2 analog inputs (0 to 10 V or 0/4-
20 mA) and 6 programmable digital inputs.
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL- STATION AIR - HANDLING UNITS
23 73 13-7
b. Remote signal inputs capable of accepting any of the following speed - setting input
signals from the control system:
1) 0 to 10 -V dc.
2) 0 -20 or 4 -20 mA.
3) Potentiometer using up /down digital inputs.
4) Fixed frequencies using digital inputs.
5) RS485.
6) Keypad display for local hand operation.
C. Output signal interface with a minimum of 1 analog output signal (0/4 -20 utA),
which can be programmed to any of the following:
1) Output frequency (Hertz).
2) Output current (load).
3) DC -link voltage (volts direct current).
4) Motor torque (percent).
5) Motor speed (rpm).
6) Set -point frequency (Hertz).
d. Remote indication interface with a minimum of 2 dry circuit relay outputs (120 -V
ac, 1 A) for remote indication of the following:
1) Motor running.
2) Set -point speed reached.
3) Fault and warning indication (overtemperature or overcurrent).
4) High- or low -speed limits reached.
15. Communications: RS485 interface allows VFC to be used with an external system wi ill io
a multidrop LAN configuration. Interface shall allow all parameter settings of VFC to he
programmed via BMS control. Provide capability for VFC to retain these settings within
the nonvolatile memory.
16. Integral Disconnecting Means: NEMA AB 1, instantaneous -trip circuit breaker with
lockable handle.
17. Accessories:
a. Devices shall be factory installed in controller enclosure unless otherwise
indicated.
b. Push -Button Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2, heavy -
duty type.
C. Standard Displays:
1) Output frequency (Hertz).
2) Set -point frequency (Hertz).
3) Motor current (amperes).
4) DC -link voltage (volts direct current).
5) Motor torque (percent).
6) Motor speed (rpm).
7) Motor output voltage (volts).
UV LIGHT
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL- STATION AIR- 14ANDLING UNITS
23 73 13-8
1. Sanuvox Coil Mounted Object Purifier or approved equal to effectively irradiate the coil
surface and drain pan, the UVC source shall be mounted to a geometrically adequate,
parabolic shape, black- reflector to redirect at least 90% of the total emitted UVC onto the
coil that will continuously clean the coil and kill odor causing mold and fungus that may
develop in an 14VAC unit.
2. The reflector will be built from a heavy single piece aluminum extrusion aerodynamically
shaped to be capable of withstanding fast air velocities up to 2000 fpm without wobble,
vibrations or noisy whistle.
3. The power source will be an electronic type, rapid start with a power factor greater than
0.95 and an energy conversion of at least 75% and have an output of 1250 ma.
4. The power source will be protected from the air stream impurities by an adequate
aluminum enclosure that will enable it to be mounted either on the conduit tubing (see
3.2.) by way of clamps or on a rigid surface by way of screws.
5. The power source shall be available in 120V or 208/230V AC and be able to operate
reliably in environment ranging from 45 °F (8 °C) to 170 °F (86 °) temperature, with
relative humidity up to 100% and air velocities up to 2000 fpm.
6. The High Intensity UVC lamp will be of the low- pressure (3.0 Torr) "i;arcury laden
argon -neon type internally coast to reduce solarization. The getter assembly absorbs inner
lamp contaminants, which would typically reduce output and have a bearing on overall
lamp performance and life.
7. The UVC lamp is a pure fused quartz type 219 shell, properly doped with Titanium
Oxide in order to filter out 99.99% of the 185 nm wavelength to avoid the production of
ozone.
8. The UVC source net output will be at least 350 microwatts /cm at 1 meter in the 245 am
to 266 nm band while operating at nominal temperature in an air stream moving at 400
fpm.
9. The UVC lamp design will be based on a 4 -pin type connection, hot cathode, T -6
diameter (19mm).
10. Adequate performance is defined as the irradiation intensity required so that bacteria
requiring a lethal UV dose of 100,000 microwatts /cm will not survive more than 10
minutes anywhere on the surface of the coil. In order to validate the performance of the
proposed arrangement, the vendor shall submit a manufacturer approved computer
simulation showing the resulting bacteria kill — time map of the coil.
11. UVC lamp and reflective fixture will be factory assembled and tested. The power source
for the lamps is housed in an aluminum enclosure that can be wall mounted.
12. The power source will carry a 5 year corrosion warranty.
13. The high intensity UVC lamp will be guaranteed for 12,000 hours.
2.5
DAMPERS
A. General Requirements for Dampers: Leakage rate, according to AMCA 500, "Laboratory
Methods for Testing Dampers for Rating," shall not exceed 2 percent of air quantity at 2000 -
fpm face velocity through damper and 4 -inch wg pressure differential.
B. Damper Operators: Comply with requirements in Section 23 09 00 "Instrumentation and
Control for HVAC."
C. Zone Dampers: Two single - blade, galvanized -steel dampers offset 90 degrees from each other
on cadmium - plated steel operating rod rotating in sintered bronze or nylon bearings mounted in
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL- STATION AIR- HANDLING UNITS
237313 -9
a single galvanized -steel frame. Provide blade gaskets and edge seals, and mechanically fasten
blades to operating rod.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Mounting: Install air - handling units on concrete bases using elastomeric pads.
Secure units to anchor bolts installed in concrete floor.
1. Minimum Deflection: 1/2 inch.
2. Install galvanized -steel plate to equally distribute weight over elastomeric pad.
3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air - handling units for service and
maintenance.
C. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place. Replace
temporary filters used during construction and testing, with new, clean filters.
D. Install filter -gage, static - pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters. Mount filter gages
on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in accessible position. Provide filter gages on filter
banks, installed with separate static - pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters.
E. Comply with requirements for piping specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
F. Install piping adjacent to air- handling unit to allow service and maintenance.
G. Connect piping to air - handling units mounted on vibration isolators with flexible connectors.
H. Connect condensate drain pans using NPS 1 -1/4, ASTM B 88, Type M copper tubing. Extend
to nearest equipment or floor drain. Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan and install
cleanouts at changes in direction.
I. Hot- and Chilled -Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 23 21 13
"Hydronic Piping." Install shutoff valve and union or flange at each coil supply connection.
Install balancing valve and union or flange at each coil return connection.
J.
K. Connect duct to air- handling units with flexible connections. Comply with requirements in
Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories."
- END OF SECTION -
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL- STATION AIR - HANDLING UNITS
23 73 13- 10
SECTION 26 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Scope of Specification
This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for the
electrical installations of the project's buildings and grounds, and covers
furnishing and installing of basic electrical materials used for the associated
power distribution and lighting systems, as described herein. The following
building power distribution systems shall be used in this Project:
a. 480/277V: 3 phase, 4 wire, 60111z, solidly grounded.
b. 120/208V: 3 phase, 4 wire, 60Hz, solidly grounded.
2. The basic materials covered in this specification section include the following:
a. Wiring devices
b. Terminal lugs
C. Safety switches
d. Branch Panelboards
e. Grounding
f. Nameplates
g. Tape Labels
h. Fuses
B. Related Specifications
1. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions apply to this and the other sections of Division 26.
2. Related Specifications:
a. 260533 - "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems"
b. 260519 - "Low- Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables"
1.2 APPLICABLE STANDARDS
A. ANSI - American National Standards Institute
B. ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association
C. IEEE - Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers
D. NEC — National Electric Code
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
260500-1
E. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association
F. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association
G. NIST - National Institute of Standards & technology
H. OSHA — Occupational Safety and Health Administration
I. UL - Underwriters Laboratories
IEC — International Electro - technical Commission
K. City of Rosemead Governing Codes and Ordinances as Applicable Standards
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to the purchase or ordering of any Contractor furnished materials or equipment
described herein, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer /Owner for approval
complete listings of items intended for use in the work.
1. The lists shall include the items, manufacturer, identifying number or
nomenclature and such other information as necessary to properly describe the
item.
2. The submittal shall also include the manufacturers published data as to size,
capacity, power requirements, wiring diagrams, etc. Catalog cuts fulfilling these
requirements will be considered appropriate for this application.
3. In addition, Contractor shall follow submittal requirements specified in the
individual equipment and material specifications.
B. Owner - furnished materials or equipment shall satisfy the submittal requirements of the
applicable specification section.
C. Each listing of material and equipment item proposed by the Contractor for the work of
this Project shall meet the requirements of the applicable specification section.
1.4 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. The Contractor shall furnish as -built red -lined documents showing modifications,
deviations or exceptions to Contract drawings. Changes shall include but not be limited
to the following:
1. Raceway systems, size and location, for both exterior and interior.
2. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent
building lines.
3. Panel schedules with connected loads.
1.5 MAINTENANCE MANUALS
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
260500-2
A. 5 copies of maintenance manuals shall be furnished by the Contractor for all equipment
provided under this contract.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. General: Contractor and Seller shall follow the procedures required by the individual
sections of these Specifications.
B. Seller shall deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model
numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for
identification, and shall coordinate delivery with the Contractor and the Owner.
C. Contractor shall store equipment in original packaging and protect from weather and
construction traffic.
D. Seller and Contras hall handle the electrical equipment carefully to prevent physical
damage. Damaged equipment shall not be acceptable.
PART 2— PRODUCTS
2.1 WIRING DEVICES
A. All devices shall conform to UL and/or NEMA standards, including in part:
1. Outlet boxes: UL 514.
2. Wiring devices: UL 20 & UL 498.
3. Receptacles: NEMA WD and UL 498.
4. General purpose wiring: NEMA WD 1.
5. Special purpose wiring devices: NEMA WD 5.
B. Manufacturers
I. Crouse -Hinds Co.
2. Hubbell Inc.
3. Pass and Seymour Inc.
4. Allen Bradley
C. All devices shall be new. Devices for similar application shall be of the same
manufacturer.
D. Receptacles
1. Duplex convenient receptacle shall be 20 ampere, 125 volt, 3 pole grounding
type NEMA 5 - 20R with screw -type terminals, duplex or single white, ivory, or
gray unit "Hubbell 53621,." or approved equal.
2. Where indicated on the Drawings furnish two duplex receptacles, type as
indicated above, and install in a common double gang box.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
260500-3
3. Ground -fault interrupter outlets to be 'feed -thru' type with duplex receptacles
noted above with pilot light and test reset buttons to be Hubbell GF- 5362I.
4. Special purpose receptacles to be twist lock design with NEMA configuration
and amperage rating as noted on the Drawings, and are to be supplied with
matching plug and cord grip feature.
S. Surge suppression duplex receptacles shall be Hubbell 5362 IS.
6. Emergency /Standby generator connected receptacle for standard duplex
receptacle noted above to have red face and be NEMA 5 -20R rated.
E. Switches
1. 20 amp, 277 volt, heavy duty, white, ivory, grey screw -type terminals, single
pole, unless noted otherwise on the drawings. Single pole shall be Hubbell
#1221I, double pole #12221 and 3 -way #1223I.
2. Where pilot lights are indicated on switches they shall be the neon type 1/25 watt
mounted under the same plate as the switch. Lighted toggles are not acceptable.
3. ;i.'Nen multiple switches are installed and voltage potential is above 150 volts,
install approved isolation barriers between switches.
F. Wall Plates
1. Provide plates for all switches, receptacles, and other outlets.
2. Provide "Pass & Seymour" 302 stainless steel plates which mate and match with
wiring device to be installed. Provide ethylene propylene rubber gaskets behind
wall plates for devices installed in clean rooms. Provide stainless steel screws
for securing stainless steel plates to devices. Weatherproof plates shall be as
follows; Hubbell 1795 Single switch, P &S WPD -8 Single Duplex, P &S WP -2
Double Switch, P &S WP -26 GFI Receptacle.
3. Provide engraved or etched plates for all lock switches, pilot switches, switches
from which the equipment or circuit controlled cannot be readily seen, three or
more switches under the common plate and for switches as indicated.
4. Where outlets are indicated to be waterproof, provide a type 302 stainless steel
plate with single hinged cover and ribbed gasket. Approved manufacturer is
Pass & Seymour #WP -8.
5. Galvanized steel plates shall be square or rectangular, and hot dipped galvanized
with beveled edges and 0.040" thickness, to be used in non - exposed locations.
6. Provide plates equipped with close fitting openings for the exact device to be
used. Provide plates for telephone equipped with bused openings.
2.2 TERMINAL LUGS
A. All cable lugs and splices shall be of the compression - indent type requiring the use of a
special tool. All lugs and splices for No. 8 AWG conductors and larger shall be crimped
with a tested/calibrated crimping tool.
B. Cable lugs shall be UL labeled (UL 486A).
C. Reference Section 26 05 19 "Low- Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables ".
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
260500-4
2.3 SAFETY SWITCHES
A. Safety switches shall be fusible or non -fused as required, quick -make, quick - break,
heavy -duty with provision for lock -out in the open position, unless otherwise indicated.
B. The enclosures shall be of the same NEMA type as noted for control station enclosures,
or as indicated on the drawings.
C. Safety switches for motor circuits rated less than 1/2 horsepower shall be a manual
switch with pilot light, thermal overloads and lock -off hasp.
D. Safety switches shall be UL- listed and shall be in accordance with UL 98.
E. Disconnect switches for motor circuits shall be horsepower rated in compliance with
NFPA 70, Article 430.
2.4 BRANCH PANEL BOARDS
A. Branch Panel Boards
Branch panelboards shall be of the bolt -on circuit breaker type, flush or surface
mounted as shown on the Drawings, with lugs on mains only unless noted, and
with branch circuit breakers of the size, number of poles, and minimum
interrupting rating as indicated.
a. Panelboard fronts shall not contain any visible screws or fastenings.
b. A circuit directory frame and card having a transparent cover shall be
provided on the interior of panel doors.
2. Doors shall be equipped with a combination latch and lock; all locks shall be
keyed alike. Panelboards shall be NEMA Type 1 and furnished in the standard
factory finish. Panel boards shall be furnished without preformed conduit knock-
outs.
3. Branch panel board bussing shall be copper. Phase bussing shall be full height;
neutral buses shall be full size and shall have a suitable lug for each outgoing
circuit requiring a neutral connection. Neutral bus shall be electrically insulated
from the equipment enclosure. All panel boards shall contain a ground bus bar
kit.
4. Protective devices feeding exterior receptacle circuits shall be ground fault
circuit breakers.
2.5 GROUNDING
A. General
The building service equipment, motors, conduit, supports, building steel,
cabinets, equipment and neutral conductors shall be grounded in accordance with
the National Electrical Code requirements, Drawings and this Section.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
260500 -5
B. Grounding Conductors:
1. Provide bare stranded soft-drawn copper grounding conductors of the size and
connected as shown on the Drawings.
2. Connections to building steel or buried concealed joints shall be exothermic
weld and applied in accordance with manufacturers instructions and
requirements.
3. Equipment connections shall be bolted with compression type connectors
including bolts, nuts and washers as required.
C. System grounding conductors shall be a minimum of #4/0 AWG unless otherwise
indicated, and shall be continuous without joints or splices.
1. Furnish and install all grounding wires, conduits and clamps.
2. The size of the grounding conductors to be as set forth in the latest edition of the
National Electrical Code for the applicable sizes of circuit wire.
3. The grounding conductor to be green colored unless it is bare copper.
D. Bonding conductors shall be in accordance with the National Electric Code.
E. Ground rod electrodes to be 3/4" diameter, 10 feet long, copper weld, copper -clad or
equal.
F. Concrete cover boxes at ground connections in exterior locations shall be the "meter
box" type to fit over the connection. Cover shall be concrete and shall be removable.
Cover shall be engraved "Electrical Ground" or "Signal Ground" as applicable.
G. Connections to ground rods shall be exothermic, "Cadweld" type.
2.6 NAMEPLATES
A. Engraving and plates for equipment and devices shall match existing for similar
installations. See specification 260553, "Identification."
2.7 FUSES
A. General: Provide fuses of types, classes, and current ratings as indicated herein or on the
Drawings. Voltage ratings shall be consistent with the circuits on which used.
B. Fuses shall be as follows:
1. 0 to 600 amps, 600V or less - dual element, time delay, current limiting, class
RKI, with 100,000 AIC rating.
2. Greater than 600 amps, 600V or less - time delay, current- limiting, Class L, with
100,000 AIC rating.
C. Acceptable Manufacturers:
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
260500 -6
For a list of manufacturers, see specification 262816, "Enclosed Switches and
Circuit Breakers."
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Contractor shall verify final locations for rough -ins with field measurements and with the
requirements of the actual equipment to be connected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Contractor shall sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of
electrical systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following
requirements:
2. Coordinate electrical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other
building systems and components.
3. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.
4. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during
progress of construction, to allow for electrical installations.
5. Sleeves: Install in concrete slabs and walls and all other fire -rated floors and
walls for raceways and cable installations. For sleeves through fire rated -wall or
floor construction, apply UL- listed and labeled fire stopping sealant in gaps
between sleeves and enclosed conduits and cables.
6. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in
poured -in -place concrete and other structural components, as they are
constructed. All strut channel used for support shall be solid construction having
no holes or slots.
7. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and
equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large
equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building.
8. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems,
materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.
9. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal
data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible.
a. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents,
recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic
form.
b. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system
requirements, refer conflict to the Engineer /Owner.
10. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and
perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed
exposed in finished spaces.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
260500 -7
11. Install electrical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or
replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect
equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other
installations.
12. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces.
13. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right -of -way priority to systems
required to be installed at a specified slope.
14. Design all equipment supports and restraints to withstand seismic forces in
accordance with IBC Seismic Zone 4 and Importance Factors per local
conditions and requirements.
15. Wiring in all areas with finished ceilings and walls shall be installed concealed
in the ceiling and wall spaces. Wiring in all other areas shall be installed
exposed, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings.
B. Wiring Devices
Mounting heights of devices and equipment shown on the drawings will govern,
but in the absence of such indications, the following centerline heights, unless
otherwise noted, above the finished floor must be maintained:
a. Wall Switches: 4'0"
b. Convenience Receptacles: 18"
C. Telephone: 18"
d. Wall Phone: 4'0"
2. Mount switches, convenience and telephone outlets vertically in all locations
unless indicated otherwise.
3. Where convenience outlets are mounted vertically, locate ground prong at
bottom. Install neutral plug on horizontal mounted receptacles on bottom for
safety reasons.
4. Install wiring devices and accessories as indicated, in accordance with
manufacturers written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and in
accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements.
5. Coordinate with other work, including painting, electrical boxes and wiring
installations, as necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with other
work.
6. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean; free from building
materials, dirt, and debris.
7. Install galvanized steel wallplates in unfinished spaces, unless otherwise
indicated.
8. Install wiring devices after wiring work is completed.
9. Install wall plates after painting work is completed.
10. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance
with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for wiring
devices.
C. Lighting fixtures.
1. All lighting fixtures installed in interior spaces shall be mounted, wired and
positioned per the design drawings and the manufacturer's instructions.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
260500 -8
2. Fixtures mounted directly on the building structure shall be supported (fastened)
with the same number of supports (fastenings) as specified for fixtures in
suspended ceilings.
a. On other surfaces threaded studs, expansion bolts or machine screws, as
determined by the surface from which the fixture is supported, shall be
used.
b. Fixtures weighing more than 50 pounds will be required to have special
supports as approved by the Engineers.
D. Branch panelboards
1. General: Contractor shall install panelboards and accessory items in accordance
with NEMA PB 1. 1, "General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and
Maintenance of Panel boards Rated 600 Volts or Less" and manufacturers'
written installation instructions.
2. Fronts shall be flush type unless otherwise indicated ant, shall be fastened to the
cabinets with 1/4 " -20 nickel plated oval headed machine screws and cup
washers.
a. Sufficient screws shall be installed to prevent buckling or warping of the
panel front.
b. Flush type fronts shall be aligned plumb and square and cabinet shall be
drilled and tapped for cover screws at the site to accomplish this if
necessary.
C. Install nameplates at the front of each panelboard.
3. All surfaces of surface mounting cabinets and front shall be given one coat of
metal primer and a finish coat of baked on gray enamel per ANSI 255.1 No. 61.
4. Panelboard cabinets shall be rigidly supported in place independent of the
conduit with (2) row unistrut.
5. Panel boards located in mechanical areas shall have weatherproof gaskets on
trims and doors.
6. Obtain building room numbering system and include these room numbers in
final typewritten panel board directories.
E. Grounding
1. Installation
a. Grounded circuit conductors, running with feeder circuits and branch
circuits shall not be used for equipment grounding unless otherwise
shown.
b. Provide a complete equipment grounding system in accordance with
National Electric Code requirements and as further indicated on the
Drawings or specified.
1.) The equipment ground (green insulated conductor) consists of
metallic connections to ground of noncurrent - carrying metal
parts of the wiring system or apparatus connected to the system.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
260500 -9
C. The uninsulated equipment ground bar in all switchgear, switchboards,
motor control centers, panelboards, starters, disconnect switches,
cabinets shall be used for grounding the enclosure and for connecting
other equipment ground conductors.
1.) The ground bar shall be an integrally mounted and braced bus
bar in switchgear, switchboards, motor control centers, busway,
or a separately mounted bar adequately braced or bolted to the
enclosure of other types of equipment.
2.) The ground bar shall be adequately braced or bolted to the
enclosure after thoroughly cleaning both surfaces to assure good
contact.
3.) Provide solderless pressure connectors for all conductor
termination.
d. Provide an uninsulated ground bar at building steel columns only as
identified on the Drawings. Th ground bar shall be grounded to the
building ground grid using a # 4/0 bare copper conductor with
exothermic welds at both ends. This will be used by the Contractor as a
grounding point for local electrical equipment grounding as required by
the Specifications and Drawings.
C. Where metallic conduits terminate without mechanical connection to a
metallic housing of electrical equipment by means of grounding type
lock nut and bushings, provide ground bushing connected with a bare
copper conductor to the ground bar or the enclosure of the equipment.
Conduits containing ground wiring shall be bonded to the ground wire or
bonded by an approved mechanical ground device at both conduit
entrances or exits.
f. Provide a separate green insulated grounding conductor for each single
or three -phase feeder and each branch circuit. A common equipment
grounding conductor shall be provided for two or three alternate single
phase circuits routed together.
1.) Install the required equipment grounding conductor in the
common raceway or cable tray with the related phase and/or
neutral conductors and connect to the box or cabinet grounding
terminal.
2.) In addition, connect equipment to the structural steel by a
separate grounding conductor, as shown on drawings.
g. Install a minimum No. 12 green insulated equipment bonding conductor
from a grounding terminal in the respective outlet or junction box to the
green ground terminal of all receptacles and through flexible conduit to
all light fixture housings.
h. Install a separate green insulated equipment grounding conductor from
the equipment ground bar in the motor control center or separate starter
through the conduit and flexible conduit to the ground terminal in the
connection box mounted on the motor except as noted.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
260500-10
l.) Install the equipment grounding conductor in the common cable
tray or raceway with the related motor circuit conductors.
2.) Motors shall also have a bare copper ground wire, connected
from motor skid to structural steel, if so directed on layout
drawings.
3.). Provide grounding of variable frequency drive units and
associated motor circuits in accordance with drive manufacturers
recommendations.
4.) Structural steel for building shall be effectively connected to
system grounding grid.
Transformers creating separately derived distribution systems shall
utilize the equipment ground bars in the transformer enclosure for both
secondary equipment ground and secondary neutral ground with
separate grounding conductor extended to the cold water pipe.
1.) 136nu electrostatic shields as required by the transformer
manufacturer.
Electrically grounded cable tray fittings shall be identified by the
manufacturer for grounding purposes.
1.) Use tray as an equipment ground conductor for itself only, not
for connected equipment.
k. Clean surfaces thoroughly before applying ground lugs or clamps.
1.) If surface is coated, the coating must be removed down to the
bare metal. After the coating has been removed, apply a
noncorrosive approved compound to cleaned surface and install
lugs or clamps.
2.) Where galvanizing is removed from metal it shall be painted or
touched up with "Galvanoz ".
Connect equipment grounding conductors to motors in accordance with
NEC 430.12 (E).
1.) Connect to motors or equipment by fastening the grounding
conductor terminal to a connection box ground. Connect
junction boxes to the equipment grounding system with 3/8 -inch
machine screws.
2.) Completely remove all paint, dirt, or other surface coverings at
grounding conductor connection points so that good metal -to-
metal contact is made.
m. When making exothermic welds, wire brush or file the point of contact
to a bare metal surface.
1.) Use exothermic welding cartridges and molds in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
26 05 00 -11
2.) After welds have been made and cooled, brush slag from the
weld area and thoroughly clean the joint.
3.) For compression connectors, use homogeneous copper,
anticorrosion, surface treatment compound at connectors in
accordance with connector manufacturer's recommendations.
4.) Use connectors of proper size for conductors and ground rods
specified. Use connector manufacturer's compression tool.
n. For isolated grounding systems use insulated grounding conductor and
connect only to service grounding electrode.
l.) Do not connect to metal enclosures or raceways at any other
location.
2.) Provide an additional equipment grounding conductor where
shown.
o. Ground shields of any shielded power cable at each splice or termination
as recommended by the manufacturer. Ground shields of any control
cables in accordance with the Drawings.
p. Ground metal fences enclosing electrical equipment.
q. Bond any metal equipment platforms, metal frames and railings which
support electrical equipment to the equipment ground.
r. Ground wire penetrations through concrete slab or walls shall be
encased in rigid Schedule 80 PVC conduit sleeve and sealed.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and
proper installation.
B. Test all ground fault interrupter (GFI) receptacles, alarm systems, and circuit breakers
for proper connection and operation with methods and instruments prescribed by the
manufacturer.
C. All test results shall be presented to the Owner and Engineer upon completion of testing.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide phenolic nameplates for all equipment and devices including but not limited to,
individual wall switches, receptacles, junction boxes, and control device stations.
1. Nameplates shall have; Equipment Designation, Circuit, Voltage, Amperes, and
Panel or Motor Control Center number.
2. Nameplates for emergency powered devices shall be white with red letters.
3. Where labels are used with existing labels, match existing labels.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
260500-12
B. Provide nameplates to identify all electrical distribution and control equipment by
designation, voltage, current and no of phases, and source, except as otherwise indicated.
Refer to drawings for nameplate sizes and colors.
C. Engraved nameplates 3/4" high by 1" wide, with tag numbers, shall be permanently
attached to the rear of control panels for each instrument. Nameplate shall also be
provided near each instrument but not attached to the device.
D. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using screws or rivets.
E. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates.
F. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations
used in electrical identification work with the Owner.
G. Identify high - voltage feeder raceways and cable tray systems (over 600 V) by words
"DANGER -HIGH VOLTAGE" in black letters 2 inches high, stenciled at 10 -foot
intervals over continuous painted orange background, unless otherwise indicated on
Drawings.
H. Identify Raceways of Certain Systems with Color Banding:
1. Bands shall be pretensioned, snap - around colored plastic sleeves, colored
adhesive marking tape, or a combination of the two.
2. Make each color band 2 inches wide, completely encircling conduit, and place
adjacent bands of two -color markings in contact, side by side.
3. Install bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, and at
40 -foot maximum intervals in straight runs.
4. Band exposed or accessible raceways of the following systems for identification.
Apply the following colors:
a. Fire Alarm System: Red
b. Security System: Blue and Yellow
G. Telecommunications: Green
I. Conduit Markers
To be the stainless steal embossed type, permitting embossing on the job. Attach
with stainless steel tie wire.
Multiple Circuits:
1. Where multiple branch circuits or control wiring or communications signal
conductors are present in the same box or enclosure, label each conductor or
cable by means of a slip -on sleeve.
2. Provide legend indicating source, voltage, circuit number, and phase for branch
circuit wiring. Phase and voltage of branch circuit wiring may be indicated by
mean of coded color of conductor insulation. For control and
communications /signal wiring, use color coding or wire /cable marking tape at
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
26 05 00 -13
termination's and at intermediate locations where conductors appear in wiring
boxes, troughs, and control cabinets.
3. Use consistent letter number conductor designations throughout on wire cable
marking tapes. Markings on power and control wire terminations shall be in
accordance with cable and connection diagrams. Use Brady - Sleeve Type Wire
Markers, WMS series. Labels to be typed.
K. Match identification markings with designations used in panel boards shop drawings,
Contract Documents, and similar previously established identification schemes for the
facility's electrical installations.
3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. General: Perform cutting and patching in accordance with Division 1 requirements
including but not limited to the following:
1. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of electrical equipment and materials
required to:
a. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill -timed Work.
b. Remove and replace defective Work.
C. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the
Contract Documents.
d. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing.
e. Install equipment and materials in existing structures.
f. Upon written instructions from the Engineer and the Owner, uncover and
restore Work to provide for Engineer and Owner observation of
concealed Work.
2. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated
or scheduled to be removed.
3. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent
the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.
4. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect
adjacent installations.
5. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials specified
for the original installation and experienced installers.
- END OF SECTION -
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
26 05 00 -14
SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW- VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Scope of Specification
1. Provide all labor, materials, appliances, tools, equipment, facilities,
transportation and services necessary for and incidental to performing all
operations in connection with furnishing, delivery and installation of the work of
this section, complete as shown on the drawings and specified herein. Work
includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:
a. Insulated wire conductors.
b. Wire connectors.
C. Examine all other sections for work related to those other sections and
required to be included as work under this section.
d. Coordinate all work in this section with related trades.
e. Verify all dimensions in the field.
B. Related Specifications
1. 260500 - "Common Work Results for Electrical"
2. 260533 - "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems"
3. 260553 - "Identification for Electrical Systems"
1.2 APPLICABLE STANDARDS
A. All wire and cable shall conform to the sizes and types as specified on the drawings.
Conductors shall meet or exceed requirements of ASTM standards. Insulation shall meet
or exceed applicable standards of ICEA, ASTM, NEMA, ANSI and the requirements of
the National Electrical Code. Cable assembly shall be listed by UL as type designated,
and bear the UL label.
1. All wire and cable shall be installed according to the standard practices
established by the National Electric Code - latest edition and the manufacturer's
recommendations.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. In addition to the requirements of Section 26 05 00, the following are required:
Conductor material, electrical characteristics and U.L. approval for intended use.
LOW- VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 -1
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The contractor shall provide a "Megger" insulation tester which applies a minimum of
500 volts direct current for the tests when requested by the Owner at no additional cost.
1.5 SHIPPING, STORAGE AND DELIVERY
A. All conductors shall be new and shall have been manufactured within 12 months of the
date of delivery to the site and continuously stored where protected from the sun, heat
and weather.
B. Deliver all conductors to the site on their original cable reels or in their original
unbroken packages.
PART 2— PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Unless specified otherwise, power conductors shall be as a minimum Type THWN -2,
rated 600 V, 90 -C dry for damp locations.
B. Conductors for equipment wiring shall be THHN (dry locations) or THWN -2 (wet
locations).
C. Conductors must be plainly marked with the manufacturer's name, date of manufacture,
voltage and classification letters and will be inspected and approved before being used.
Insulated wire conductors, 600 volts or less, must be made of copper, and wire gauge,
insulation type and temperature rating, and manufacturer must be clearly printed on
insulation.
D. Conductors shall have UL. labeled 600 volt insulation of type specified below or
elsewhere in the specifications.
E. Minimum size shall be No. 12 AWG for power and lighting and No. 14 for control.
F. All wire and cable shall be Class B stranded copper conductor.
G. Provide all conductor packages and cable reels plainly marked or tagged with UL. labels,
AWG size, voltage rating, insulation type, type of stranding, manufacturer's name, trade
name, and month and year when manufactured.
2.2 APPLICATION SPECIFICATIONS
A. Conductors for lighting, 120 VAC receptacles, communications, building 120 VAC
controls, and other general requirements shall be UL type THW -2, THHN or THWN -2
rated 600 volts.
LOW- VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
2605 19-2
B. Feeders for lighting and power shall be type THWN -2.
C. Instrumentation cable shall be a minimum of 18 AWG as indicated on drawings, twisted,
stranded copper, 18 AWG minimum or as specified. Each conductor shall have
polyethylene insulation. An aluminum- polyester shield shall cover all conductors
providing 100% shield coverage. Each cable shall have a stranded tinned copper drain
wire and an overall PVC jacket.
D. Multiconductor Control Cable shall be a minimum of #14 AWG, 2, 3, 5, 7, 9, 12 or 19
conductor Type TC, 600V.
E. Multiconductor power cable shall be UL Type TC 600V and shall have an interwoven
stranded grounding conductor sized per the NEC.
F. Single conductor control wire shall be a minimum size of #14 AWG UL Type THHN,
90 -C or approved equal.
G. All ground wires shall be insulated type THHN or THWN -2, copper, green unless noted
otherwise.
H. From junction boxes to recessed fixtures, Type THHN, 90- degrees C general purpose
wire shall be used. Through stems for suspended mounted fixtures, the wire to be Type
AF, 150 degrees C., fixture wire.
Wiring through fluorescent fixtures in continuous rows to be Type THHN, 90 degrees C.
general purpose wire.
J. For conductors installed in areas subjected to temperatures exceeding 140 degrees F.,
including terminating in incandescent lighting fixtures and installed through or into
housing containing ballasts, Provide type RHW -2.
K. For conductors installed in exposed conduit outside of buildings and conduit within or
just under roofing material, provide type THW -2 or THWN -2.
L. Control Circuits for Mechanical Equipment: Use 600 volt Underwriters' type THWN
conductors except where subject to abnormally high temperatures such as on or near
boilers. Under these conditions, use type RHW -2.
M. Connectors for #10 conductor and smaller UL listed for 600 volts, approved for use with
copper and cone shaped, expandable coil spring insert, insulated with a nylon shell and
two wings placed opposite to each other to service as a "built -in" wrench. Shell shall be
molded one -piece as manufactured by Ideal Industries "Wing Nut" connectors.
N. MC cable may be used in limited areas only. All Home Runs shall be run in conduit to
the general areas of termination. MC cable may be used as single circuit drops from
above ceiling junction boxes to termination points /outlets, (No Daisy Chains). MC
cable shall not be used in non -lab, non - mechanical associated rooms, such as storage
rooms, conference rooms and office areas. MC cable may be used for lighting; fixture
whips not to exceed 6 feet and branch wiring cable lengths not to exceed 30 feet. All
MC cable shall have a full size insulated grounding conductor.
LOW- VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 -3
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. The Subcontractor shall install all wire and cable such that no physical damage
is done to the insulation or conductor during and after the installation. This
specification and the drawings shall not limit the care to be taken by the
Subcontractor.
2. Installation shall be made in raceways, ducts, or wireways per the drawings.
Each circuit must correspond to the branch circuit number indicated on the panel
schedule shown on the drawings except where departures are approved by the
Engineer. Wiring within all equipment enclosures shall be neatly grouped and
"ty- wrapped" together and separated by voltage. All power and light feedea s to
be Labe: a at each point of access in the conduit run, and shall be neatly dressed
in bundles when run in switchboards, MCC's, panelboards, etc.
3. Where conductors are installed in riser feeders, they shall be supported at
junction or pull boxes by double wedge type cable supports or cable fu
properly sized for the involved conduit and cable. Supports for vertu 11 , kce, i<a
be installed where required, and must be similar and equal to O.Z. Condtlli T/n
"M ", Adalet "SVM" series, or equal.
4. For control wiring, conform to the wiring diagrams shown on the mechanic0,0
drawings and the manufacturer's wiring diagrams to control the equipn1%_ J1,
manner specified under the "Mechanical" Section of the specifications. C +idol
code all control wiring.
5. Where conductors are terminated at equipment connectors, the metal cc)W act
surfaces shall be polished before installing the conductor. Conductors
terminating at outlets will not have less than eight (8) inches of free ends for
connections.
6. Cable bending radii and tension limitations shall not exceed allowable values
permitted by the manufacturer and the National Electrical Code. Cable h e11 ing
shall be accomplished by basket -weave grips, or by cable eyes, depending upon
the tensions. Cables installed in tray, where distances are greater than 100 feet
shall be pulled in over rollers. Wire or cable bends injunction and pull boxes to
be made with a long radius. Bends for 600 volt cable shall have a radius ot' not
less than five (5) times the diameter of the cable.
7. No grease, oil or compound other than "Wire- Ease" or "Ideal yellow 77" shall be
used to facilitate conductor pulling.
8. Wire and cable shall not be installed in any conduit, tray, or raceway system
until raceway installation is complete.
9. Spare conductors in each control cable shall not be terminated to any point but
shall be cut to a total length of height times width of enclosure above the conduit
end, taped, identified and coiled back in a neat manner.
10. Where conductors in conduit pass through exterior walls a sealing compound of
moisture - resistant material shall be applied in the ends of the conduits to seal
around the conductors.
11. Do not run conductors from different panelboards in same conduit.
12. Do not run conductors with different voltages in same conduit.
LOW- VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 -4
13. Except where insulation of a connection is provided by the connector,
connections must be properly insulated with 3M Co. "Scotch" #33 electrical
tape, John's Manville "Bulldog" 4166, or equal.
14. All conductors, in panelboard cabinets, MCC's, pull boxes and switchboard
gutters to be neatly grouped, tied with Thomas & Betts "Ty- Rap ", Panduit "Pan -
Rap", or equal, plastic ties and fanned out to terminations.
B. Cables
1. Feeder cables shall be continuous from origin to panel or equipment terminals.
Branch circuit lighting and receptacle conductors shall be continuous from outlet
to outlet; and no splices shall be made except in outlet or junction boxes, or as
detailed on the drawings. No splices shall be made in condulets or conduits,
cable installed in tray shall be installed without splices. Identify all feeders as to
phase or leg in each panelboard with printed identifying tape.
2. Instrument cables
a. Instrument cables shall be continuous from termination to termination.
No splices will be permitted in any instrument cable.
b. Instrument cables shall be run only in raceways with other instrument
cables of the same voltage level and signal type.
1.) No power or 120 volt control cables shall be permitted in the
same raceway with instrument cables.
2.) Instrument signal wire, thermocouple extension wire, control
wiring, and other low- voltage wiring (i.e., any circuit less than
120 VAC) shall be run in a separate conduit or raceway from all
power wiring or contact closure wiring.
3.) Instrument signal wire, thermocouple extension wire, and other
low - voltage control wiring (less than 120 VAC) shall not be run
in the same wire bundle or be part of the same multi -wire cable
as power wiring.
C. The drain wire of the instrument cable shall be grounded at the control
panel only on a separate isolated terminal. The field ends shall be cut
and taped to prevent contact to any grounded surface.
C. Joints and Terminations (600V and Less)
1. Joints for wires # 10 AWG and smaller shall be made with UL approved
connectors, listed for 600 volts, 3M Company insulated "Scotch Locks,"
Buchanan B -2, Ideal Industries "Wire Nut" connectors.
2. Joints for wires # 8 AWG and larger shall be made with UL approved
connectors, listed for 600 volts. Two conductors or more may be connected by
installing solderless compression lugs on each conductor and connecting them
with silicon bronze washers, bolts and nuts. Two conductors may be connected
with one solderless compression type splice.
3. Terminations of wire to screw type terminal boards shall be by Thomas & Betts
ring type insulated lugs. Termination to a compression terminal block shall be
LOW- VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 -5
by stripping the wires back the proper distance, inserting the stripped wire into
the compression terminal point and tightening.
4. Wire termination to motors 480 volts and less, shall be by ring type compression
lugs.
a. Refer to Table 1 below for the type lug to use with relationship to wire
or cable size.
b. When terminal posts are provided on the motor, the applicable ring type
lugs shall be applied to the power wire and wire shall then be boht ,'c �_r
the terminal posts per the motor wiring diagram. The ring hole size shall
be determined by the terminal post diameter for a close fit. When motor
lead wires are provided, ring lugs for 1/4" bolts or larger shall be
attached to both the motor leads and the power wires.
C. Per the motor wiring diagram, the power wires shall be securely bolted
to the motor lead wires using silicon bronze lock washers, flat washers,
bolts and nuts sized for the rings. After bolting the wires together, i he
nut, bolt and compression lugs shall be wrapped with Scotch 1300 tape
and then an outer coat of Scotch 33+ to provide a 600 volt insulating
protection.
5. Tape all connections made with non - insulated type connectors with half - lapped,
rubber -type, to 1 -1/2 times the thickness of the conductor insulation, then cover
with Scotch #33 tape.
6. Make terminal connections, joints and splices for #8 conductors and larger with
suitable solderless connectors Thomas & Betts "Lock- Tite ", Bumdy "QIk- Lug ",
or equal. For #8 conductors and smaller, connectors to be as specified above or
Thomas & Betts "Sta -kon ", or equal, and T & B "Stakon" under terminal screws
at wiring devices, and other screw terminals.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. All terminations of wires and cables shall be labeled with permanent wire markers as
indicated on Specification 16195 (Identification). Markings shall be in accordance with
circuit schedules and drawings. No more than two control wires shall be terminated on
the same terminal.
B. Color Coding
LOW- VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 -6
TABLE 1
Wire /Cable Size
Compression L
#12 - #10
Sta -Kon ring tongue —
Nylon, self insulated
Insulated
#8 — 250 MCM
Sta -Kon ring tongue —
Uninsulated
300 MCM & Larger
T & B cast copper
compression single hole
connector
b. When terminal posts are provided on the motor, the applicable ring type
lugs shall be applied to the power wire and wire shall then be boht ,'c �_r
the terminal posts per the motor wiring diagram. The ring hole size shall
be determined by the terminal post diameter for a close fit. When motor
lead wires are provided, ring lugs for 1/4" bolts or larger shall be
attached to both the motor leads and the power wires.
C. Per the motor wiring diagram, the power wires shall be securely bolted
to the motor lead wires using silicon bronze lock washers, flat washers,
bolts and nuts sized for the rings. After bolting the wires together, i he
nut, bolt and compression lugs shall be wrapped with Scotch 1300 tape
and then an outer coat of Scotch 33+ to provide a 600 volt insulating
protection.
5. Tape all connections made with non - insulated type connectors with half - lapped,
rubber -type, to 1 -1/2 times the thickness of the conductor insulation, then cover
with Scotch #33 tape.
6. Make terminal connections, joints and splices for #8 conductors and larger with
suitable solderless connectors Thomas & Betts "Lock- Tite ", Bumdy "QIk- Lug ",
or equal. For #8 conductors and smaller, connectors to be as specified above or
Thomas & Betts "Sta -kon ", or equal, and T & B "Stakon" under terminal screws
at wiring devices, and other screw terminals.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. All terminations of wires and cables shall be labeled with permanent wire markers as
indicated on Specification 16195 (Identification). Markings shall be in accordance with
circuit schedules and drawings. No more than two control wires shall be terminated on
the same terminal.
B. Color Coding
LOW- VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 -6
Mark each phase or leg in each panelboard with identifying tape. As applicable
the insulation of all conductors to be color coded throughout the length of the
circuit as follows:
a. 480/277V, 3 phase, 4 wire;
Switch leg 277V
Phase A - Brown
Black
Phase B - Orange
Red
Phase C - Yellow
Blue
Neutral - White
White
Ground - Green
Green
b. 208/120V. 3 phase, 4 wire
Switch le lg 20V
Phase A - Black
Brown
Phase B - Red
Orange
Phase C - Blue
Yellow
Neutral - White
Ground - Green
C. Fire alarm conductors.
Control Power
Black
Alarm Initiating
Red and Blue
Alarm Device
Yellow and Brown
Annunciators
Orange
2. 3 Way Switches: Travelers - Purple
3. Pole Switches: Switch legs to be different color than phases wire. See section
3.2.2.A.
4. Where color coded wire or cable is not available, tape color banding (minimum
2" wide) will be required where conductors are visible. This color coding is
acceptable only in AWG #8 and larger.
5. 120 Volt Control Wiring shall be red.
6. D.C. Wiring shall be blue. Positive and negative conductors to be tagged.
7. Tagging of all conductors and power circuits shall be as per Section 26 05 53
"Identification for Electrical Systems ". They shall be: Brady, WMS series,
"Brady Sleeve ".
- END OF SECTION -
LOW- VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 -7
SECTION 26 05 20 - CONDUITS
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Scope of Specifications
1. Provide all labor, materials, appliances, tools, equipment, facilities,
transportation and services necessary for and incidental to performing all
operations in connection with furnishings, delivery and installation of the work
of this section, complete, as shown on the drawings and specified herein. Work
includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following:
a. Examine all other sections for work related to those other sections and
required to be included as work under this section.
b. Coordinate all work in this section with related trades.
C. Verify all dimensions at the job site.
d. Conduit raceways.
B. Related Specifications
1. 260500 - "Common Work Results for Electrical"
2. 260533 - "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems"
3. 260519 - "Low- Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables"
1.2 APPLICABLE STANDARDS
A: NFPA 70 —'National Electrical Code"
B. Local Codes, as applicable.
C. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL)
1. UL 6 — "Rigid Metal Conduit"
2. UL 360 — "Liquid — Tight Flexible Steel Conduit"
3. UL 651— "Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit"
4. UL 1242 — "Intermediate Metal Conduit"
5. UL 1990 — "Nonmetallic Underground Conduit and Conductors"
6. UL 514B - "Fittings for Conduit"
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's catalog sheets.
CONDUITS
260520 -1
B. Size and finish.
C. Fittings (2 samples of each type).
D. List of conduit types indicating where each type will be used.
PART 2— PRODUCTS
2.1 RIGID METALLIC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS:
A. Standard weight steel that is hot dipped galvanized or sherardized both inside and out,
with threaded connectors and couplings. Electrogalvanizing is not permitted. All rigid
conduit must be steel. Fittings shall be zinc coated, Ferrous metal and threaded type.
2.2 ELECTRIC METALLIC TUBING (EMT) AND FITTINGS:
A. Tubing of high grade steel with exterior protective coating of zinc, applied by the
electrogalvanized process. Interior of surface coated with aluminum lacquer or enamel.
EMT shall be dipped in a chromic acid bath to chemically form a corrosion- resistant
protective coating of zinc chromate over galvanized surface. Fittings shall be watertight
compression type, wrench tightened connectors and couplings. Fittings shall be steel.
Connectors shall have insulated throat.
2.3 FLEXIBLE LIQUID-TIGHT STEEL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS:
A. Manufactured from single strip steel galvanized on all four sides prior to conduit
fabrication with an extruded polyvinyl chloride cover and liquid -tight fittings that
provide positive ground continuity. Include ground conductor.
B. Acceptable manufacturers of liquid -tight conduit are Sealtite, Type VA and ElectriFlex,
Type LA.
C. Acceptable manufacturers of liquid tight fittings are Thomas & Betts, 5300 Series, and
Appleton, STB Series. Flexible conduit to be cut at right angles for installation.
D. Minimize exposed flexible conduit. Exposed flexible conduit shall be "liquid- tight" steel
design and of the same nominal diameter as the connecting conduit and no more than 6
feet in length.
E. All flexible conduit shall be secured within 12 inches of each junction box and at
intervals not exceeding 4.5 feet.
F. Flexible conduit shall not be used as a grounding conductor.
2.4 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC) AND FITTINGS:
CONDUITS
260520 -2
A. Light weight ferrous /steel, with threaded connectors and couplings.
B. Fittings shall be ferrous metal, threaded type, same type as used for rigid conduit.
C. Intermediate metal conduit shall not be used:
1. In concrete, indirect contact with earth, or in corrosive areas.
2. In or under cinder fill subject to moisture, unless protected by two (2) inches of
non - cinder concrete.
3. Conduits larger than 4 ".
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. The size of the conduits for the various circuits shall be as indicated on the Drawings and
as required by NEC and local codes for the size and number of conductors to be pulled
therein. NEC and local codes requirements shall prevail where fill is not shown on
drawings. Open ends shall be capped with approved manufactured conduit seals as soon
as installed and kept capped until ready to pull in conductors. Where running thread
connections are necessary, only approved manufactured conduit unions shall be used.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Provide a nylon or polyethylene rope rated 250 pounds tensile strength in all -
conduits more than 5 feet in length left empty for future use.
2. Conduit will be installed as a complete system, continuous from outlet to outlet,
cabinet, junction and pull box or fittings and will be so mechanically and
electrically connected that adequate electrical continuity from one conduit to
another and from conduit to equipment is obtained.
3. No conduit shall contain more than nine current carrying conductors, or exceed
40 percent of the cross sectional area of the conduit.
B. Applications
1. Connection to vibrating equipment (including transformers and hydraulic,
pneumatic, electric solenoid or motor driven equipment): Use liquidtight
flexible steel conduit in all locations at equipment termination.
2. Rigid PVC (schedule 40) conduit shall be used with 90 degree rigid steel PVC
coated elbows for all conduit installed underground..
3. Rigid or intermediate conduit shall be used in all outdoor applications and
interior areas, up to 8 feet above the finished floor, where exposed to damage or
physical abuse.
4. Conduit serving as designated homeruns shall be a minimum size of 3/4" or as
noted.
CONDUITS
260520 -3
5. No exposed conduit shall be smaller than 3/4 ". No embedded conduit shall be
smaller than 1 ".
6. Conduit bends shall not be permitted around the external corners of beams, walls
or equipment. All condulet covers must be accessible. Condulets 2" or larger
shall be Crouse -Hinds Type "LBD ".
7. Condulets smaller than 2" to be Crouse -Hinds type. Form 8 cast iron condulets
or Crouse -Hinds FS or FD bodies. No Bell type boxes shall to be used.
C. Location
1. Conduit and raceway shall not be run in foundation, column concrete slab, nor in
the plane of the concrete shear wall without written approval of Structural
Engineer for each conduit run.
2. Do not embed electrical metallic tubing in slabs on grade.
3. All exposed conduits shall be installed parallel to and perpendicular to the
building structure. No conduits are to be run horizontally thru walls, except as
directed by owner.
4. Conduit to be run concealed, or exposed, as noted on the Drawings. Exposed
conduit run shall be parallel with supporting walls, beams, or ceilings and with
each other. Right angle turns to consist of condulets or symmetrical bends. All
runs of conduit will be installed in such a manner as to avoid trapped
condensation. Breather and drains shall be installed where condensate may
collect.
S. Conduit will not be run closer than 12" to any hot water pipe, steam pipe, heater
flue or vent.
D. Fabrication
1. Rigid or intermediate metal conduit to be used for all exposed power
applications.
a. For all bends in conduit 1 -1/4" and larger, use large radius factory made
bends or field fabricate with a power bender.
b. Cut threads on conduit to standard taper and to a length such that all bare
metal exposed by the threading operation will be completely covered by
the couplings or fittings used. Securely tighten all threaded connections.
C. Where union fitting is required, use only approved conduit unions.
Running thread joints are not acceptable.
2. Use insulated throat fittings on all conduits where entering pullboxes, junction
boxes, outlet boxes, cabinets and similar enclosures, and for all signal and
telephone conduits terminated in cabinets or backboards.
3. Provide expansion and deflection fittings where two rigidly supported conduits
may move in relation to each other at expansion joint crossings. Fittings shall be
equal to O.Z. /Gedney type "AZ" or "TV.
4. From each panel which is flush mounted in a wall, stub from top of the panel a
minimum of (4) -3/4" conduits to the nearest ceiling space or other accessible
location and cap for future use.
CONDUITS
260520 -4
5. Keep bends and offsets in conduit runs to an absolute minimum. For the serving
utilities, make large radius bends to meet their requirements. Replace all
deformed, flattened or kinked conduit.
6. The ends of all conduit to be cut square and shall be carefully reamed out to full
size with a tapered deburring reamer. Conduit will be shouldered in all conduit
fittings.
7. Ceiling, wall, and floor penetrations shall be sized for conduit penetration and
shall be sealed with an airtight sealer such as silicone or equal to prevent the
passage of air from one area to another around the conduits. Oversized
penetrations shall not be acceptable.
8. Seal all conduit with silicone entering from exterior outlets at first interior
junction to prevent moisture from entering the building through the conduit.
Outside runs - rigid conduit only and water tight.
9. Encase all PVC conduit installed underground or underslab in a concrete
envelope. Extend concrete envelopes a minimum of 3" beyond each external side
of all outermost conduits_._
a. Space the external surfaces of all conduit within a bank a minimum of 2"
apart except that all sound, telephone and intercommunication circuits
contained within conduit must have a minimum separation of 12" from
any lighting or power circuits that parallel them within a bank.
b. Use appropriate manufactured concrete or plastic spacers to insure the
minimum required concrete coverage. Concrete shall be 2500 PSI
(minimum). All concrete duct banks shall contain a red pigment in the
concrete mix.
10. Duct lines shall have a continuous slope downward toward slab box or manholes
and away from buildings with a pitch of not less than 4" in 100 feet.
a. Changes in direction of runs exceeding a total of 100 degrees, either
vertical or horizontal, shall be accomplished by long sweep bends having
a minimum radius of curvature of 25 feet, except that manufactured
bends may be used at ends of short runs of 100 feet or less, and then only
at or close to the end of run.
11. All conduit joints will be threaded using standard taper thread. All rigid steel or
aluminum conduit terminations must be provided with lockouts. Install plastic
bushings on all conduits, except where insulated grounding bushings are
required by Code or Specification.
12. Running threads will not be permitted; Threadless connectors and couplings are
not permitted. The open ends of all conduit shall be kept closed with approved
conduit seals during the construction work.
13. Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings, bends in conduit 2" or larger will
have a radius of curvature of the inner edge, equal to not less than ten (10) times
the internal diameter of the conduit. Any deviations from this radius must be
approved by the Owner Representative.
a. Wire or cable bends injunction or pull boxes shall be made with a long
radius.
CONDUITS
260520 -5
b. Bends for 600 volt cable shall have a radius of not less than five (5)
times the diameter of the cable.
C. Nesting of conduits shall be made when two or more conduits are run in
parallel.
d. All conduit runs (below 600v.), will not have more than three 90- degree
long radius bends between pull boxes, junction boxes or terminal
cabinets.
14. Holes for conduits through existing concrete walls or floors shall be made by the
'bore - drill' method.
E. Supports and Anchors
1. Support conduits 1" and larger with pipe clamps either suspended from structural
slabs with a rod at least 3/8" diameter with adjustable and pipe ring, or mounted
on wall from channel supports. Attach to concrete by inserts or "red head
shields ". Shooting into concrete will not be acceptable. Where two or more
conduits 1 -1/2" and larger are suspended from ceiling, use trapeze type hanger
from rods.
2. Firmly support and fasten conduit in place. Support rigid metal conduit and
electrical metallic tubing at maximum intervals of 8 feet and within 18 inches of
every outlet box, cabinet and fitting. Support flexible metal conduit at maximum
intervals of 4 feet and within 12" of every outlet box and fitting except for
lengths of not over 2 feet at connections where flexibility is required.
3. In indoor areas exposed to water or stream, all hangers, rods, clamps, u- bolts,
bolts, nuts, washers and screws shall be stainless steel. Rods shall be threaded
only on ends.
4. Secure exposed conduit runs on concrete, plaster or other construction in place
with cast conduit clamps affixed with metallic expansion anchors or toggle bolts
and cadmium plated machine or lag screws.
5. Do not strap or fasten rigid, intermediate or electrical metallic tubing to
mechanical equipment or to equipment subject to vibrating or mounted on shock
absorbing bases.
6. Provide independent support for all conduit rising from floor for motor
connection if over 18" above floor. Do not support conduit to motor, ductwork,
piping or mechanical equipment.
7. Conduits shall not be secured to ceiling support wires. Support conduit
independent of ceiling suspension systems.
8. Where rigid conduits are supported from building members, supports shall be
installed as follows:
a. Conduit sizes: 3/4" to 1 -1/4" inclusive: Within 18" of each outlet and at
a spacing not to exceed 8 feet.
b. 1 -1/2" and larger: Within 3 feet of each junction and pull box and
terminal cabinet and at a spacing not to exceed 8 feet.
C. When rigid conduits are supported from trapezes, the supports shall be
spaced not more than 8 feet apart.
d. Where EMT is supported from building members, supports or trapezes
shall be installed within 18" of each outlet box and on each side of each
coupling or connector at a spacing not to exceed 8 feet.
CONDUITS
260520 -6
e. Conduit trapezes shall consist of suitable Unistrut or Powerstrut fittings,
or equal.
f. Nails, perforated strap, or plumber's tape must not be used for the
support of conduit. Wooden or fiber plugs inserted into concrete or
masonry must not be used to fasten supports.
9. Exposed conduits 1" and smaller shall be supported to the building construction
with 1 or 2 -hole pipe straps as required, spaced at junction or pull box terminal
cabinet. Use only medium or heavy duty strap.
10. Exposed conduit larger than 1" shall be suspended with pipe hangers or on uni-
strut. Pipe hangers for individual conduits shall be Grinnell # 108 and # 110R,
Super Strut #M- 718 -SR, or equal, malleable iron split pipe rings, suspended
from hanger rods. Rods to be three - eights (3/8) inch for two (2) inch and larger
conduits, and one half (1/2) inch for two and one -half (2 -1/2) inch and larger
conduits. Hangers and racks to be attached to concrete with insets and to steel
members with beam clamps or machine bolts, as approved.
11. " c-onduit clamps and hanger rods attached to concrete structures shall be secured
by suitable machine bolts or rods screwed into suitable anchors. Anchors not cast
into the concrete shall be of the expansion shield type, Phillips "Red Head ",
Hilti, or equal.
12. A 3/32" O.D., 250 lb. strength polyethylene line to be installed in all wiring
raceways which shall not have conductors installed by the Contractor.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Tag all empty conduits at each accessible end with a permanent tag identifying the
purpose of the conduit and the location of the other end. In wet, corrosive outdoor or
underground locations, use stainless steel tags secured to conduit ends with #16 or
larger galvanized wire. Inscribe on the tags with steel punch dies clear and complete
identifying information.
B. Tag fire alarm conduits with a 1" band of red paint every 5 feet of run..
- END OF SECTION -
CONDUITS
260520 -7
SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 — GENERAL
u_u:: 1
A. Scope of Specification
1. All labor, materials, appliances, tools, equipment, facilities, transportation and
services necessary for and incidental to performing all operations in connection
with furnishing, delivery and installation of the work of this section, complete, as
shown on the drawings and specified herein. Work includes, but is not
necessarily limited to the following:
a. Examine all other sections for work related to those other sections and
required to be included as work under this section.
b. Coordinate all work in this section with related trades.
C. Grounding system.
B. Related Specifications
1. 260500 - "Common Work Results for Electrical"
2. 260553 - "Identification for Electrical Systems"
1.2 APPLICABLE STANDARDS
A. The electrical systems described in this specification shall be grounded in accordance
with standard practices as established by the National Electrical Code, ANSI and IEEE.
1. NFPA 70 — "National Electric Code"
2. ANSI C114.1 — "Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems"
3. IEEE 142 — "Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and
Commercial Power Systems"
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Grounding and bonding conductors shall be soft -drawn stranded copper conductor.
B. Buried or concealed joints shall be made by exothermic welding. All such joints shall be
inspected and approved by the local Building Department before concealment.
C. System grounding conductors shall be a minimum of #4/0 AWG unless otherwise
indicated, and shall be continuous without joints of splices. Furnish and install all
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526-1
grounding wires, conduits and clamps. The size of the grounding conductors to be as set
forth in the latest edition of the National Electrical Code for the applicable sizes of
circuit wire. The grounding conductor shall be green colored unless it is bare copper.
D. Bonding conductors shall be in accordance with the National Electric Code.
E. Ground rod electrodes shall be 3/4" diameter, 10 feet long, Copperweld, Copper -Clad, or
equal.
F. Concrete cover boxes at ground test well connections in exterior locations shall be the
"meter box" type to fit over the connection. Cover shall be concrete and shall be
removable. Cover shall be engraved "Electrical Ground" or "Signal Ground" as
applicable.
G. Ground connection plates to be 4 -hole type.
I?. Ground rod clamps shall be cast bronze body providing high pressure contact between
rod and ground wire.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with all requirements of NEC and other
applicable codes. Codes shall be complied with as a minimum requirement with
specifications prevailing when they are more stringent.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. Low resistance contacts, with high mechanical strength, will be made between metallic
conduits and boxes and at all panels, wireways, metal enclosures of busway, electrical
equipment housing panelboards, terminal cabinets, outlet boxes, junction and pull boxes
and wherever the conduit run is broken. All non - current carrying metallic parts shall be
grounded. Permanently and effectively ground all conduits, fixtures, and other apparatus
and equipment installed and connected. The metallic conduit system shall be used for
equipment and enclosures grounding but not as a system ground conductor.
B. Flexible conduit shall not be used as a ground path. Include Code sized green ground
conductor in all flex conduit.
C. All feeder runs and branch circuit wiring in metallic or non - metallic conduit shall carry
a green insulated, Code sized ground conductor per circuit properly connected for
electrical ground continuity. A ground conductor shall be installed in raceways with
branch circuit wiring where indicated on the drawings.
3.3 INSTALLATION
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 -2
A. Transformers, generator and other isolated neutrals shall be grounded from the neutral
bushing or connector to main ground electrode and building steel in each building.
B. Install grounding and bonding conductors with sufficient slack to avoid breaking due to
settlement and movement of conductors at attached points.
C. All conduit stub -ups shall be grounded and where multiple stub -ups are made within as
equipment enclosure such as a switchboard, they shall be equipped with grounding
bushings and bonded together and to the enclosure and the enclosure ground bus with
code size copper conductors.
D. Provide bonding devices, fittings or jumpers at expansion fitting, isolation sections or
wherever continuity of ground is broken. Flexible conduit bonding conductor shall not be
coiled around conduit.
E. The electrical ground electrode shall consist of ground rods in locations shown on
drawings. The building steel columns shall be bonded to the ground electrodes with #4/0
AWG bare copper conductors in non - metallic conduit.
F. Exothermic welding (i.e. CAD WELD) shall be used for all buried ground system
connections and splices.
3.4 TESTING
A. Resistance to ground for electrical systems shall not exceed 5 ohms measurement and
additional grounding shall be provided to attain this value or less.
B. The resistance to ground for all systems shall be measured by the "direct" method or
"fall -of- potential method ". The "direct' method, or two terminal test, includes a Megger
Earth Tester with terminals connected to the electrode under test and to an all metallic
water pipe system.
- END OF SECTION -
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 -3
grounding wires, conduits and clamps. The size of the grounding conductors to be as set
forth in the latest edition of the National Electrical Code for the applicable sizes of
circuit wire. The grounding conductor shall be green colored unless it is bare copper.
D. Bonding conductors shall be in accordance with the National Electric Code.
E. Ground rod electrodes shall be 3/4" diameter, 10 feet long, Copperweld, Copper -Clad, or
equal.
F. Concrete cover boxes at ground test well connections in exterior locations shall be the
"meter box" type to fit over the connection. Cover shall be concrete and shall be
removable. Cover shall be engraved "Electrical Ground" or "Signal Ground" as
applicable.
G. Ground connection plates to be 4 -hole type.
I?. Ground rod clamps shall be cast bronze body providing high pressure contact between
rod and ground wire.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with all requirements of NEC and other
applicable codes. Codes shall be complied with as a minimum requirement with
specifications prevailing when they are more stringent.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. Low resistance contacts, with high mechanical strength, will be made between metallic
conduits and boxes and at all panels, wireways, metal enclosures of busway, electrical
equipment housing panelboards, terminal cabinets, outlet boxes, junction and pull boxes
and wherever the conduit run is broken. All non - current carrying metallic parts shall be
grounded. Permanently and effectively ground all conduits, fixtures, and other apparatus
and equipment installed and connected. The metallic conduit system shall be used for
equipment and enclosures grounding but not as a system ground conductor.
B. Flexible conduit shall not be used as a ground path. Include Code sized green ground
conductor in all flex conduit.
C. All feeder runs and branch circuit wiring in metallic or non - metallic conduit shall carry
a green insulated, Code sized ground conductor per circuit properly connected for
electrical ground continuity. A ground conductor shall be installed in raceways with
branch circuit wiring where indicated on the drawings.
3.3 INSTALLATION
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526-2
A. Transformers, generator and other isolated neutrals shall be grounded from the neutral
bushing or connector to main ground electrode and building steel in each building.
B. Install grounding and bonding conductors with sufficient slack to avoid breaking due to
settlement and movement of conductors at attached points.
C. All conduit stub -ups shall be grounded and where multiple stub -ups are made within as
equipment enclosure such as a switchboard, they shall be equipped with grounding
bushings and bonded together and to the enclosure and the enclosure ground bus with
code size copper conductors.
D. Provide bonding devices, fittings or jumpers at expansion fitting, isolation sections or
wherever continuity of ground is broken. Flexible conduit bonding conductor shall not be
coiled around conduit.
E. The electrical ground electrode shall consist of ground rods in locations shown on
drawings. The building steel columns shall be bonded to the ground electrodes with 44/0
AWG bare copper conductors in non - metallic conduit.
F. Exothermic welding (i.e. CAD WELD) shall be used for all buried ground system
connections and splices.
3.4 TESTING
A. Resistance to ground for electrical systems shall not exceed 5 ohms measurement and
additional grounding shall be provided to attain this value or less.
B. The resistance to ground for all systems shall be measured by the "direct' method or
"fall -of- potential method ". The "direct' method, or two terminal test, includes a Megger
Earth Tester with terminals connected to the electrode under test and to an all metallic
water pipe system.
- END OF SECTION -
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526-3
SECTION 26 05 29- IIANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. _
2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and
design criteria indicated.
B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported
systems and its contents.
C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported
equipment and connected systems and components.
D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads
calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the
applied force.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Steel slotted support systems.
2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529-1
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and
installation details and include calculations for the following:
1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components.
2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.
3. Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.
4. Equipment supports.
C. Welding certificates.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS Dl.1/D1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code - Steel,"
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items
are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA -4, factory- fabricated components for field
assembly.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Allied Tube & Conduit.
b. Cooper B -Line, hic.; a division of Cooper Industries.
C. ERICO International Corporation.
d. GS Metals Corp.
e. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
g. Wesanco, Inc.
3. Metallic Coatings: Hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to
MFMA -4.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 -2
4. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating
applied according to MFMA -4.
5. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-
4
6. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
B. Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural - grade, factory- formed, glass - fiber -resin
channels and angles with 9/16 -inch- diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c., in at least I
surface.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Allied Tube & Conduit.
b. Cooper B -Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
C. Fabco Plastics Wholesale Limited.
d. Seasafe, Inc.
3. Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and designed for
use with those items.
4. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles, except metal items may
be stainless steel.
Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria.
C. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
D. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed
for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
E. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory- fabricated assembly consisting of
threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non - armored electrical conductors or
cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces
as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.
F. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates,
shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
G. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or
their supports to building surfaces include the following:
1. Powder- Actuated Fasteners: Threaded -steel stud, for use in hardened Portland cement
concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 -3
1) Hilti Inc.
2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
3) MKT Fastening, LLC.
4) Simpson Strong -Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.
2. Mechanical - Expansion Anchors: Insert- wedge -type, zinc - coated steel, for use in
hardened Portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate
for supported loads and building materials in which used.
a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1) Cooper B -Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries,
2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.
3) Hilti hic.
4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
5) MKT Fastening, LLC.
3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable -iron, slotted support system units similar to IMSS
Type 18; complying with MFMA -4 or MSS SP -58.
4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP -58, type suitable for
attached structural element.
5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with
ASTM A 325.
6. Toggle Bolts: All -steel springhead type.
7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
2.2
FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural -steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions
of supported equipment.
B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel
shapes and plates.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with UBC seismic requirements and NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of
hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section
are stricter.
B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for
EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in
diameter.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 -4
C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze -type supports fabricated with steel slotted support
system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding
specified design load limits.
Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single -bolt conduit clamps.
D. Spring -steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for I-
1/2 -inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above
suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.
3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this
Article.
B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and
RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.
C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength
will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.
Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported
components plus 200 lb.
D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface - Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten
electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods
unless otherwise indicated by code:
1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
3. To Masonry: Approved toggle -type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor
fasteners on solid masonry units.
4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder- actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock
washers and nuts may be used in existing standard- weight concrete 4 inches thick or
greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight - aggregate concrete or for slabs less than
4 inches thick.
6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP -69.
7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,
panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,
transformers, and other devices on slotted- channel racks attached to substrate by means
that meet seismic- restraint strength and anchorage requirements.
E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing
bars.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site -
fabricated metal supports.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 -5
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS DLI/DI.IM.
3.4 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both
directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from
edge of the base.
B. Use 3000 -psi, 28 -day compressive - strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and
placement requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete."
C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.
1. Place and secure anchorage devi��s. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor -bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply
with SSPC -PA 1 requirements for touching up Feld - painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup
painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous
metal.
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing- repair paint to comply with ASTMA 780.
- END OF SECTION -
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 -6
SECTION 26 05 33 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Scope of Specification
1. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for
electrical wiring. Raceways include the following
a. Wireway.
b. Surface raceways.
2. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets include the following:
a. Device boxes.
b. Floor boxes.
C. Outlet boxes.
d. Pull and junction boxes.
C. Cabinets and hinged cover enclosures.
B. Related Specifications
1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to 1911's
Section.
2. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
a. 260500 - "Common Work Results for Electrical"
b. 260520 — "Conduits"
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division
26 Specification Sections.
1. Product data for surface raceway, wireway and fittings, floor boxes, hinged
cover enclosures, and cabinets.
2. Shop drawings for nonstandard boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. Include layout
drawings showing components and wiring.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA70 "National Electrical Code" for components and installation.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 -1
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and
labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed and Labeled ": As defined in the "National Electrical Code ",
Article 100.
2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
C. Comply with NECA "Standard of Installation ".
D. Coordinate layout and installation of raceway and boxes with other construction
elements to ensure adequate headroom, working clearance, and access.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering Products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1. Wireway:
a. Hoffman Engineering Co.
b. Keystone/Rees, Inc.
C. Square D Co.
2. Surface Metal Raceway:
a. Airey- Thompson Co., Inc., A -T Power Systems.
b. American Electric, Construction Materials Group.
C. Butler Manufacturing Co., Walker Division.
d. The Wiremold Co., Electrical Sales Division.
3. Surface Nonmetallic Raceway:
a. Anixter Brothers, hie.
b. Butler Manufacturing Co., Walker Division.
C. Hubbell, Inc., Wiring Device Division.
d. JBC Enterprises, hie., Enduro Fiberglass Systems.
C. Panduit Corp.
f United Telecom, Premier Telecom Products, Inc.
g. Thermotools Co.
h. The Wiremold Co., Electrical Sales Division.
4. Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets:
a. Scott Fetzer Company, Adalet -PLM.
b. Butler Manufacturing Co., Walker Division.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 -2
C. Cooper Industries, Midwest Electric.
d. Electric Panelboard Co., Inc.
e. Erickson Electrical Equipment Co.
f. American Electric, FL Industries.
g. Hoffman Engineering Co., Federal - Hoffman, Inc.
h. Hubbell Inc., Killark Electric Manufacturing Co.
i. General Signal, O- Z /Gedney.
j. Parker Electrical Manufacturing Co.
k. Raco, Inc., Hubbell Inc.
1. Robroy Industries, Inc., Electrical Division.
m. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co.
n. Square D Co.
o. Thomas & Betts Corp.
P. Woodhead Industries, Inc., Daniel Woodhead Co.
q. Crouse Hinds.
r. Appleton Electric Co.
2.2 WIREWAYS
A. Material: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated.
B. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters,
hold -down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireway as
required for complete system.
C. Select features where not otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and
to comply with NEC.
D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type.
E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
F. Wireways shall be provided without knockouts.
2.3 SURFACE RACEWAY
A. Types, sizes, and channels as indicated and required for each application, with fittings
that match and mate with raceway.
B. Surface Metal Raceway: Galvanized steel with snap -on covers. Finish with
manufacturer's standard prime coating suitable for painting.
C. Surface Nonmetallic Raceway: 2 -piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVC
compound with matte texture and manufacturer's standard color.
D. Surface raceways shall be provided without knockouts.
2.4 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 -3
A. Cast Metal Boxes: NEMA FBI, type FD, cast ferroalloy box with gasketed cover.
2.5 FLOOR BOXES
A. Floor boxes shall be Hubbell "Dualevel" Series or approved equal and pedestal type
floor boxes shall be Hubbel Cat # 5A — 6687 or #5A - 6688
2.6 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Small Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA 4, NEMA 4X outdoors.
B. Cast Metal Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast Malleable Iron with gasketed cover.
2.7 CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
A. Cabinets: NEMA 4, galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and removable
front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged door in front
cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panelboards. Include
metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage, and include accessory
feet where required for freestanding equipment.
B. Provide NEMA 4X stainless steel enclosures outdoors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to receive raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for compliance
with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the raceway
system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets as indicated, according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Keep raceways at least 12 inches (305 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or
hot water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
C. Install raceways level and square and at proper elevations. Provide adequate headroom.
D. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
3.3 PROTECTION
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 -4
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer
and Installer, to ensure that coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or
deterioration at Substantial Completion.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc -rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touch -up coating
recommended by the manufacturer.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of installation of system, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect
exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish,
including chips, scratches, and abrasions.
- END OF SECTION -
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 -5
SECTION 26 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1— GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Scope of Specification
1. Electrical subcontractor shall furnish and install equipment, conduit, and
conductor marking as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. Major
equipment shall be furnished with nameplates in accordance with their
individual specifications.
a. Power receptacles (208V) S41L11ie marked with voltage, amps, phase,
panel and circuit number and with pertinent "data" or "use" if for special
purpose.
b. All 120 volt receptacles shall be marked with panel and circuit number
from which they are fed.
PART 2— PRODUCTS
2.1 WIRE TERMINATIONS
A. Shall be labeled with wire markers to correspond to electrical diagrams. Use -W HI _Briuly
Co. WMS series " Brady sleeve" permanent sleeve type labels.
2.2 CONDUIT MARKERS
A. To be stainless steel tags to permit embossing on the job.
2.3 NAMEPLATES
A. Nameplates shall be white "Gravel -Ply" 11, reverse engraved with the following letter ing
colors:
1. Normal Power - Black lettering
2. Generator Power - Orange lettering
2.4 PLATES
A. Provide plates for all switches, receptacles, junction boxes, and other outlets.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 -1
B. Provide engraved or etched plates for all lock switches, pilot switches, switches from
which equipment or circuit controlled cannot be readily seen, three or more switches
under a common plate and for switches as indicated.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUIT MARKERS
A. Conduit markers shall be furnished at the point of origin, the point of termination, upon
crossing wall on each side and at 100 foot intervals for all exposed, and accessible
conduits. Markers shall be installed lengthwise and wrapped with stainless steel tie wire.
3.2 CONDUCTORS
A. Conductors shall be tagged at their origin and termination.
3.3 NAMEPLATES
A. Nameplates for all panelboards, individual starters, disconnect switches, dry type
transformers and remote control stations. Nameplates shall have the equipment
designation, e.g., 'Pump PI starter ", reverse engraved in 1/4 inch black letters on white
background of "Gravel -Ply 11" nameplate. Nameplates shall be securely fastened using
stainless steel sheet metal screws or rivets and include circuit, no voltage, amperage and
panel number.
1. Receptacles shall be labeled as to Volts /Amps /Phase and then, underneath, the
panel/circuit, and shall be mounted above the receptacles with screws or rivets.
2. Label as "208 volts /20 amps /1 phase" or "208 -20 -1" (Note: 120V receptacles to
have Panel/ Circuit # only.)
3. Machinery shall be labeled same as outlets with the addition of the labeled
disconnect if applicable.
4. Disconnect switches will have a label as to line and load.
- END OF SECTION -
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553-2
SECTION 26 28 16 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Scope of Specification
1. This Section includes overcurrent protective devices (OCPDs) rated 600V and
below and switching devices commonly used with them.
2. Motor Control Centers: Application, installation, and other related requirements
for overcurrent protective device installations in distribution equipment are
specified in other Division 16 sections.
B. Related Specifications
1. 260500 - "Common Work Results for Electrical"
2. 260553 - "Identification for Electrical Systems"
1.2 APPLICABLE STANDARDS
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
1. ANSI C33.120 — "Circuit Breaker and Circuit Breaker Enclosures"
2. ANSI C37.13 — "Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers"
3. ANSI C37.28 — "Low Voltage AC Integrally Fused Power Circuits Breakers"
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
I. NFPA 70 — "National Electrical Code"
C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
1. UL 1066
— "AC Low — Voltage Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures"
2. UL 489 —
"Molded Case Circuit Breakers"
3. UL 877 -
"Circuit Breakers for Use in Hazardous Locations"
4. UL 198C
— "High Interrupting Capacity Fuses, Current Limiting Types"
5. UL 198E
— "Class R Fuses"
6. UL 977 —
" Fused Power Circuit Devices"
7. UL 943 —
"Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters"
D. National Electrical Manufacturer Association (NEMA)
1. NEMA AB 1 — "Molded Case Circuit Breakers"
2. NEMA SG3 — "Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers — Power Switching
Equipment"
3. NEMA FU 1 — "Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses"
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
2628 16-1
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Overcurrent Protective Device (OCPD): A device operative on excessive current that
causes and maintains the interruption of power in the circuit it protects.
B. Ampere- Squared- Seconds: An expression of available thermal energy resulting from
current flow. With regard to current - limiting fuses and circuit breakers, the ampere -
squared- seconds during fault current interruption represents the energy allowed to flow
before the fuse or breaker interrupts the fault current within its current limiting range.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for fuses, fusible switches, circuit breakers, and OCPD accessories
specified in this Section, including descriptive data and time - current curves for all
protective devices and let- through current curves for those with current limiting
characteristics. Include coordination charts and tables and related data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA
70 "National Electrical Code."
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and
labeled.
1. The terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be defined as they are in the National
Electrical Code, Article 100.
2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
3. Single- Source Responsibility: Obtain similar OCPDs from a single
manufacturer.
PART 2— PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
Cartridge Fuses:
a. Brush Fuses Inc.
b. Bussmann Div., Cooper Industries, Inc.
C. Eagle Electric Mfg. Co., Inc.
d. Ferraz Corp.
e. General Electric Co.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
262816 -2
f. Gould Inc.
g. Littlefuse Inc.
2. Fusible Switches:
a. Allen - Bradley Co.
b. General Electric Co.
C. Square D Co.
d. Cutler Hammer Co.
3. Fused Power Circuit Devices:
a. General Electric Co.
b. Square D Co.
4. Molded -Case Circuit Breakers:
a. ABB Power Distribution, Inc.
b. General Electric Co.
C. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
d. Square D Co.
e. Cutler Hammer Co.
5. Combination Circuit Breaker and Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters:
a. General Electric Co.
b. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
C. Square D Co.
d. Cutler Hammer Co.
6. Molded -Case Current - Limiting Circuit Breakers:
a. General Electric Co.
b. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
C. Square D Co.
d. Cutler hammer Co.
7. Molded -Case Circuit Breakers With Solid -State Trip Devices:
a. General Electric Co.
b. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
C. Square D Co.
d. CutlerHammer Co.
8. Integrally Fused Molded -Case Circuit Breakers:
a. General Electric Co.
b. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
C. Cutler Hammer Co.
9. Insulated -Case Circuit Breakers:
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
262816 -3
a. General Electric Co.
b. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
C. Square D Co.
d. Cutler Hammer Co.
2.2 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES (OCPDS), GENERAL
A. General: Provide OCPDs in indicated types, as integral components of panelboards,
switchboards, and motor control centers; and also as individually enclosed and mounted
single units.
B. Enclosures: NEMA 250 "Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum)."
2.3 CARTRIDGE FUSES
A. General: NEMA Standard FUl, "Low- Voltage Cartridge Fuses." Unless indicated
otherwise, provide nonrenewable cartridge fuses of indicated types, classes, and current
ratings that have voltage ratings consistent with the circuits on which used.
B. Class J Fuses: UL 198C, "High- Interrupting Capacity Fuses, Current- Limiting Type."
C. Class L Fuses: UL 198C, "High- hnterrupting Capacity Fuses, Current- Limiting Type."
D. Class RKl and RK5 Dual Element Time -Delay Fuses: UL 198E, "Class R Fuses."
E. Class RKl Fast - Acting Fuses: UL 198E, "Class R Fuses."
2.4 FUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. General: UL 98 "Enclosed and Dead Front Switches" and NEMA KS I 'Enclosed
Switches," quick -make, quick -break heavy -duty units.
B. Rating: Load - breaking capacity in excess of the normal horsepower rating for the
switch.
C. Withstand Capability: hi excess of the let- through current permitted by its fuse when
subject to faults up to 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes.
D. Operation: By means of external handle.
E. Interlock: Prevents access to switch interior except when in 'off' position.
F. Fuse Clips: Rejection type.
G. Padlocking Provisions: For 2 padlocks, whether open or closed.
H. Enclosure for Switchboard or Panelboard Mounting: Suitable for panel mounting where
indicated.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
262816 -4
I. Enclosure for Switchboard Mounting: Provide individual mounting where indicated.
J. Enclosure for Independent Mounting: NEMA Type 1 enclosure except as otherwise
indicated or required to suit environment where located.
2.5 FUSED POWER CIRCUIT DEVICES
A. General: UL 977, "Fused Power Circuit Devices," with either bolted - pressure -type or
high- pressure contact -type switch.
B. Operation: Manually opened and closed.
C. Operation: Manually closed, electrically tripped.
D. Operation: Electrically closed and tripped.
E. Operation: As indicated.
F. Ground Fault Protection: Integral, self - powered type with mechanical ground fault
indicator, test function, adjustable pick -up current and delay time with inverse and
constant time characteristics, internal memory arranged to integrate intermittent arcing
ground faults, and ground fault current sensor located as indicated.
G. Open Fuse Trip Device: Arranged to trip switch open if a phase fuse opens.
H. Enclosure for Switchboard Mounting: Suitable for individual mounting.
I. Enclosure for Independent Mounting: NEMA Type I enclosure, except as indicated or
except as required to suit environment where located.
J. Minimum Fault Current Rating: As indicated on single line diagrams.
2.6 MOLDED -CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. General: UL 489, "Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures," and
NEMA AB 1, "Molded Case Circuit Breakers."
B. Construction: Bolt -on type, except breakers in load - center -type panelboards and
breakers 225- ampere frame size and larger may be plug -in type if held in place by
positive locking device requiring mechanical release for removal.
C. Characteristics: Indicated frame size, trip rating, number of poles, and a short- circuit
interrupting capacity rating of 10,000 amperes symmetrical, unless a greater rating is
indicated.
D. Tripping Device: Quick -make, quick -break toggle mechanism with inverse -time delay
and instantaneous overcurrent trip protection for each pole.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
262816 -5
E. Adjustable Instantaneous Trip Devices: Factory adjusted to low -trip- setting current
values.
F. Enclosure for Switchboard or Panelboard Mounting: Circuit breaker case suitable for
panel mounting in switchboard or panelboards where indicated.
G. Enclosure for Switchboard or Motor Control Center Mounting: Provide individual
mounting where indicated.
H. Enclosure for Independent Mounting: NEMA Type 1 enclosure, except as otherwise
indicated or required to suit environment where located.
Combination Circuit Breakers and Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters: UL 943 "Ground
Fault Circuit Interrupters," arranged for sensing and tripping for ground fault current in
addition to overcurrent and short- circuit current. Provide features as follows:
1. Match features and module s.ae of panelboard breakers and provide clear
identification of ground fault trip function.
2. Trip Setting for Ground Fault: 4 to 6 milliamperes, listed and labeled as a class
A, type 1 device.
3. Trip Setting for Ground Fault: 30 milliamperes.
4. Trip setting for ground fault as indicated.
Current- Limiting Circuit Breakers: Arranged to limit let- through ampere- squared-
seconds during fault conditions to a value less than the ampere- squared- seconds of one-
half -cycle wave of the prospective symmetrical fault current. The circuit breaker shall
use no fusible devices in its operation. The current- limiting characteristic shall be in
addition to normal time -delay and instantaneous -trip characteristics and other features as
indicated.
K. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Arranged to limit let- through ampere- squared-
seconds during fault conditions to a value less than the ampere - squared- seconds of one-
half -cycle wave of the prospective symmetrical fault current. The current - limiting
characteristic shall be achieved through the use of replaceable current - limiting fuses
internally mounted within the circuit - breaker case. The opening of any one fuse shall trip
all poles of the circuit breaker. For each trip rating the time - current characteristic of the
fuses shall be coordinated with that of the normal inverse -time and instantaneous -trip
devices of the circuit breaker so current - limiting fuse melting does not occur for faults
within the interrupting rating of the basic breaker.
L. Circuit Breakers With Solid -State Trip Devices: Provide indicated circuit breakers with
solid -state trip devices having the following features:
1. Ambient Compensation: Trip device insensitive to temperature changes between
minus 20 deg C and plus 55 deg C.
2. Adjustability: Breaker ratings and trip settings shall be changeable by operation
of controls on front panel of breaker, by change of plug -in element without
removing breaker from mounting, or by a combination of the two methods.
3. Ground -Fault Tripping: Adjustable for pick -up and time -delay values. Provide
for indicated units.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
262816 -6
2.7 INSULATED -CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Ratings: Continuous- current, interrupting, and short- time- current ratings, and voltage
and frequency ratings as indicated.
B. Operating Mechanism: Mechanically and electrically trip -free, stored - energy operating
mechanism with the following features:
1. Moving Contacts Closing Speed: Independent of both control and operator.
2. Stored - Energy Mechanism: Manually charged.
3. Stored - Energy Mechanism: Electrically charged, with provision for optional
manual charging.
4. Operation Counter: Include except as otherwise indicated.
C. Circuit - Breaker Trip Devices: Solid -state overcurrent trip device system that includes
one integrally mounted current transformer or sensor per phase, a release mechanism,
and the following features:
1. Functions: Long- time - delay, short- time - delay, and instantaneous -trip functions,
which are independent of each other in both action and adjustment.
2. Temperature compensation to assure accuracy and calibration stability from
minus 20 deg C to plus 55 deg C.
3. Field- adjustable, time - current characteristics.
4. Current Adjustability: Effected by operating controls on front panel or by
changing plug -in elements or current transformers or sensors.
5. Three bands for long -time- and short- time -delay functions marked "minimum,"
"intermediate," and "maximum."
6. Five pickup points, minimum, for long -time- and short- time -trip functions.
7. Six pickup points, minimum, for instantaneous -trip functions.
8. Ground fault protection with at least three short- time -delay settings and three
trip -time -delay bands. Adjustable current pickup.
9. Trip Indication: Labeled lights LCD targets or mechanical indicators on trip
device shall indicate type of fault causing breaker trip. If lights are used, integral
power source shall maintain indication for 60 hours, minimum.
10. Auxiliary Contacts for Remote Indication: Where remote indication of breaker
position is indicated, provide a spare auxiliary switch in addition to other
auxiliary switches required for normal breaker operation. The spare auxiliary
switch shall consist of two Type "a" and two Type "b" stages (contacts), wired to
a terminal block in the breaker housing.
11. Drawout Features: Circuit - breaker mounting assembly equipped with a racking
mechanism that properly positions the power circuit breaker and holds it rigidly
in connected, test, and fully disconnected positions and includes the following
features:
a. Interlock arrangement, preventing movement of the circuit breaker to or
from the connected position when it is in the closed position and closure
of the circuit breaker unless it is in the connected, test, or disconnected
position.
b. Construction, permitting racking an open circuit breaker to or from the
connected, test, and disconnected positions with the associated
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
262816 -7
compartment door closed or equivalent dead -front barrier protection, and
manual withdrawal to a position for removal from the structure with the
door open.
C. Primary disconnecting devices disengaged and secondary disconnecting
devices engaged when breaker is in test position.
d. Primary and secondary devices disengaged when circuit breaker is in the
disconnected position.
e. Ground contact engaged when the circuit- breaker element is in the
connected and test positions.
12. Circuit - Breaker Features and Accessories: Include the following:
a. Padlocking Provisions: For installing at least three padlocks on each
breaker to secure its enclosure and prevent movement of the drawout
mechanism.
b. Operating Handle: Provide one for each manually operated breaker.
C. Electric Close Button: Provide one for each electrically operated
breaker.
d. Indicating Lights: Contacts for "Breaker Open" and "Breaker Closed,"
for main and bus tie circuit breakers, and for other indicated breakers.
2.8 OCPD ACCESSORIES
A. Key Interlocks: Arrange interlocking so keys are held captive at devices indicated.
Where future key interlocking provisions are indicated, provide necessary mountings and
hardware as required for the future installation.
B. Instantaneous Undervoltage Trip Device: For indicated OCPDs.
C. Adjustable- Time -Delay Undervoltage Trip Devices: For indicated OCPDs.
D. Shunt -Trip Devices for Circuit Breakers: Where indicated, arrange to trip breaker from
an external source of power through a control switch or relay contacts.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Independently Mounted OCPDs: Locate as indicated and install in accordance with
manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. OCPDs in distribution equipment shall be factory installed.
C. Check connectors, terminals, bus joints, and mountings for tightness. Tighten field -
connected connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with
equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer's
torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with
tightening torques specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
262816 -8
D. Install wiring between OCPDs and controllindication devices as specified in Division 16
Section "Wires and Cables" for hard wired connections.
E. Provide equipment grounding connections for individually mounted OCPD units as
indicated and as required by NEC. Tighten connectors to comply with tightening torques
specified in UL Standard 486A to assure permanent and effective grounding.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify components in accordance with Division 16 Section 16195 "Electrical
Identification."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Reports: Prepare written reports certified by testing organization on tests and
observations. Report defective materials and workmanship and unsatisfactory test
results. Include complete records of repairs and adjustments made.
B. Labeling: Upon satisfactory completion of tests and related effort, apply a label to tested
components indicating test results, date, and responsible organization and person.
C. Schedule visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests with at least one week's
advance notification.
D. Pretesting: Upon completing installation of the system, perform the following
preparations for independent tests:
1. Make insulation resistance tests of OCPD buses, components, and connecting
supply, feeder, and control circuits.
2. Make continuity tests of circuits.
3. Provide set of Contract Documents to test personnel. Include full updating on
final system configuration and parameters where they supplement or differ from
those indicated in original Contract Documents.
4. Provide manufacturer's instructions for installation and testing of OCPDs to test
personnel.
E. Visual and mechanical inspection: Include the following inspections and related work.
1. Overcurrent- Protective- Device Ratings and Settings: Verify indicated ratings and
settings to be appropriate for final system arrangement and parameters. Where
discrepancies are found, test organization shall recommend final protective
device ratings and settings. Use accepted revised ratings or settings to make the
final system adjustments.
2. Inspect for defects and physical damage, NRTL labeling, and nameplate
compliance with current single line diagram.
3. Exercise and perform operational tests of all mechanical components and other
operable devices in accordance with manufacturer's instruction manual.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
262816 -9
4. Check tightness of electrical connections of OCPDs with calibrated torque
wrench. Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper torque values.
5. Clean OCPDs using manufacturer's approved methods and materials.
6. Verify installation of proper fuse types and ratings in fusible OCPDs.
F. Electrical Tests: Include the following items performed in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions:
1. Insulation resistance test of OCPD conducting parts. Insulation resistance less
than 100 megohms is not acceptable.
2. Contact resistance test or measurement of millivolt drop across contacts of
drawout circuit breakers and fused power circuit devices at rated current.
Compare contact resistance or millivolt drop values of adjacent poles and of
similar breakers. Deviations of more than 50 percent are not acceptable.
3. Insulation resistance test of fused power circuit devices and insulated -case and
molded -case circuit breakers over 600- amoeraframe size at 1000V d.c. for one
minute from pole to pole and from each pole to ground with breaker closed and
across open contacts of each phase. Insulation resistance less than 100 megohms
is not acceptable.
E. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and provide retesting of
OCPDs by testing organization. Verify by the system tests that specified requirements
are met.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of installation, inspect OCPDs. Remove paint splatters and other
spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish.
3.5 COMMISSIONING
A. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, perform an infrared scan of OCPDs
including their line and load connections, fuses, and fuse clips. Also scan OCPD contact
structures where accessible to a portable scanner. Include individual OCPDs and those
installed in switchboards, panelboards, and motor control centers.
B. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect
significant deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.
C. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report identifying all OCPDs checked
and describing results of scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial
action taken, and rescanning observations after remedial action.
- END OF SECTION -
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
2628 16-10